BANK OF INDIA

STAR HOUSE-2, 3RD FLOOR, PREMISES DEPARTMENT, C-4, G- BLOCK, BANDRA KURLA COMPLEX, BANDRA (E), MUMBAI-400051

TENDER DOCUMENT FOR

Interior And Allied Services work of 3rd Corporate Office (Ground & Four Upper Floors mainly) Building at C-29, G-Block,

Bandra-Kurla Complex, Mumbai.

Event No: BOI/Mumbai/Premises/1/21-22/ET/2

VOLUME-II Technical Specifications

CLIENT GENERAL MANAGER,

PREMISES DEPARTMENT 3rd FLOOR, STAR HOUSE 2, BKC

BANK OF INDIA Ph: 022-61317528

ARCHITECT & PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS M/S ARK DESIGNS PVT LIMITED.

ARCHITECTS, DESIGNERS AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS 101, Anish Tower CHS LTD., Senapati Bapat Marg, Matunga West, Mumbai

Detailed Technical

Specifications

DISMANTLING AND DEMOLISHING

TERMINOLOGY

(i) Dismantling: The term ‘Dismantling’ implies carefully separating the parts without damage and removing. This may consist of dismantling one or more parts of the building as specified or shown on the drawings.

(ii) Demolition: The term ‘Demolition’ implies breaking up. This shall consist of demolishing whole or part of work including all relevant items as specified or shown on the drawings.

1 GENERAL this chapter relates to buildings only.

1.1 Precautions

1.1.1 All materials obtained from dismantling or demolition shall be the property of the Government unless otherwise specified and shall be kept in safe custody until they are handed over to the Engineering-Charge/ authorized representative.

1.1.2 The demolition shall always be well planned before hand and shall generally be done in reverse order of the one in which the structure was constructed. The operations shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge before starting the work. Due care shall be taken to maintain the safety measures prescribed in IS 4130.

1.1.3 Necessary propping, shoring and or under pinning shall be provided to ensure the safety of the adjoining work or property before dismantling and demolishing is taken up and the work shall be carried out in such a way that no damage is caused to the adjoining work or property. Wherever specified, temporary enclosures or partitions and necessary scaffolding with suitable double scaffolding and proper cloth covering shall also be provided, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.1.4 Necessary precautions shall be taken to keep noise and dust nuisance to the minimum. All work needs to be done under the direction of Engineer-in-Charge. Helmets, goggle, safety belts etc. should be used whenever required and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The demolition work shall be proceeded with in such a way that it causes the least damage and nuisance to the adjoining building and the public.

1.1.5 Dismantling shall be done in a systematic manner. All materials which are likely to be damaged by dropping from a height or by demolishing roofs, masonry etc. shall be carefully removed first. Chisels and cuters may be used carefully as directed. The dismantled articles shall be removed manually or otherwise, lowered to the ground (and not thrown) and then properly stacked as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.1.6 Where existing fixing is done by nails, screws, bolts, rivets, etc., dismantling shall be done by taking out the fixing with proper tools and not by tearing or ripping off.

1.1.7 Any serviceable material, obtained during dismantling or demolition, shall be separated out and stacked properly as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge within a lead of 50 metres. All unserviceable

materials, rubbish etc. shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.1.8 The contractor shall maintain/disconnect existing services, whether temporary or permanent, where required by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.1.9 No demolition work should be carried out at night especially when the building or structure to be demolished is in an inhabited area. 625 SUB HEAD 15.0 : DISMANTLING AND DEMOLISHING

1.1.10 Screens shall be placed where necessary to prevent injuries due to falling pieces.

1.1.11 Water may be used to reduce dust while tearing down plaster from brick work.

1.1.12 Safety belts shall be used by labourers while working at higher level to prevent falling from the structure.

1.1.13 First-aid equipment shall be got available at all demolition works of any magnitude.

EXCAVATION

1.0 INDIAN STANDARDS

All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.

Indian Standards to be followed are:

1) IS 1498 Classification and identification of soils for general engineering

purpose.

2) IS 3764 Safety code for excavation Work

3) IS 4081 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operation.

4) IS 6313 Part –1Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings: constructional measures. Part –2Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings: Pre constructional chemical treatment measures.

5) SP 27 Handbook of method of measurement of buildings works.

6) Explosive Rules 1940.

2.0 SITE CLEARANCE

2.1 Prior to the start of any activity of earth work the area under construction shall be cleared of

shrubs, vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth up to 30cm measured at a height

of 1 meter above ground level. All rubbish must be removed and stacked at distance of 50 cm

outside the periphery of the area clearance or location as decided by the EIC.

2.2 The rate of such clearance is to be included in the rate of other earthwork items.

3.0 SITE CONDITIONS AND CONSTRAINTS

3.1 Prior to the submission of the tender, the Contractor is required and deemed to have visited the

Site to fully acquaint himself as to the nature, extent and practicability of the excavation,

earthworks or associated temporary works. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the nature,

extent and practicability of the excavation, earthworks or associated temporary works.

The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the existing ground and/or formation levels as shown

on the drawings are correct.

3.2 The award of the Contract shall be based on the understanding that the Contractor is familiar with

the geology of the Site. He shall include in his tender for all costs arising from the nature of the

ground (ground levels, water table level, subsoil conditions etc), climatic conditions, the

availability or lack of access, working space, storage, accommodation, the proximity of adjoining

structures and roads, the local Regulations regarding the obstruction of public highways and any

other limitation imposed by the Site and its surroundings, for the satisfactory completion of the

excavation and earthworks. He shall make due allowance for the effect of these constraints on his

construction operations to ensure on-time completion of the Works. No claim by the Contractor

on the grounds of lack of foresight or knowledge of the site conditions or for under- provision in

connection with the Works will be considered.

3.3 The Contractor shall ensure that his method of excavation is suitable and safe for use at the Site.

The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any expense, liability, loss, claim or

proceedings which the Employer may incur or sustain by reason of damage to any property real

or personal other than works, injury or accident to workmen or public, caused by collapse,

subsidence, vibration, weakening or removal of support or lowering of ground water, arising out

of or in the course of or by reason of the excavation of the Works.

4.0 SITE ACCESS

4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary statutory approvals on temporary

access into the Site for the currency of the contract period. He shall comply strictly and diligently

with all conditions attached with these approvals. The access as well as the portion of public road

and walkway connected with it shall be kept clean and safe at all times. Continuous and adequate

security arrangements at access points into the site shall be provided for the full duration of the

contract.

5.0 SUBSOIL DATA

5.1 A soil report for the Site is available to the Contractor for his information. The report is intended

solely as a preliminary and approximate guide to the nature of ground stratification as the

Engineer knows it. The completeness and the accuracy of the information provided is neither

guaranteed nor implied. No responsibility is assumed by the Employer or the Engineer for any

opinion or conclusion given in the soil report.

5.2 The soil report limits itself to identified subsurface conditions only at selected points where soil

samples were taken, when they were taken. The actual conditions in areas not sampled may differ

from the reported findings. Continuing adequacy of the report may be affected by time,

construction operations at or adjacent to the site and by natural events such as floods and

groundwater fluctuations.

5.3 Given the limitations attached to the soil report, the Contractor shall be obliged to place his own

interpretation on the information provided and include in his tender for the cost of providing all

things necessary to ensure the satisfactory completion and the safety of the excavation and

earthworks, such as supplemental soil investigation and adding, upgrading, strengthening,

adapting, modifying, taking down and refixing of temporary works, etc. He shall assess the

limitations of the soil report and make due allowance in his construction operations to ensure the

on-time completion of the Works. No extra time or payment will be considered at a later date on

the grounds of under-provision in the excavation, earthworks or associated temporary works,

incomplete or incorrect information contained in the soil report, or want of knowledge of

foresight.

5.4 The Contractor shall make his own verification of water table level at the Site. No claims will be

considered for any special pumping or baling required in connection with work below the water

table level. The Contractor shall allow in the tender for the cost for any extra supports required

to excavate below the water table level.

5.5 Details and results of all supplemental soil investigation, which the Contractor undertakes in the

course of the Works, shall be made available to the Engineer for his record.

6.0 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SERVICES

6.1 Contractor shall be responsible for detecting, protecting, upholding, up keeping and maintaining

all existing services such as roadside drains, mains, ducts, water supply pipes, sewers, gas

conduits, electrical and telephone cables and the like over and adjacent to the Site during the

currency of the contract, regardless whether or not these services are known to exist at the time

of tender. He shall take extra precautions to prevent undermining of foundations to service lines,

thereby resulting in damage and interruption of supply, and make good any damage due to any

cause within his control at his own expense and time, and/or pay all consequential costs and

charges in connection therewith.

6.2 In the event that damage has been done to services due to the Contractor’s work or any cause

within his control, and should these repairs be carried out by the local Authority, the Contractor

shall make a direct reimbursement to the local Authority for the cost and charges for carrying out

the repairs, failing which the Employer reserves the right to pay the local Authority direct and

deduct the same from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor.

6.3 Any information made available to the Contractor at the time of the tender is indicative and is

intended only as an approximate guide for the Contractor’s own verification on Site. Immediately

after taking possession of the Site and BEFORE commencing work, the Contractor shall establish

test holes to confirm the locations and levels of all existing underground utilities within and

surrounding the Site that are affected by his excavation works. If the Engineer is of the opinion

that the site verification survey of embedded services is incomplete or inadequate in any way, he

shall order additional confirmatory test holes to be carried out at the Contractor’s expense. The

Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and/or the local Authority if he should encounter

services not known to have existed at the time of tender.

6.4 If it becomes essential in the opinion of the Engineer and/or the local Authority to temporarily or

permanently divert any cable, pipe or other service, the Contractor shall give the necessary

notices to the local Authority and arrange for the diversion work to be carried out, regardless

whether or not the service to be diverted is known to exist at the time of tender. The cost of

the diversion will be paid for by the Employer but it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to

coordinate all service diversion works that are carried out within the currency of the contract

period and ensure that such works do not adversely affect the on-time completion of the Works,

falling which the Contractor shall bear all consequences for any delay incompletion of the Works

due to any cause within his control.

7.0 STABILITY AND SETTLEMENT OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES

7.1 Where foundations or related earthworks are proposed to be constructed or carried out adjacent

to any premises, an investigation of the site shall be undertaken by the Contractor’s Professional

Engineer to establish, to the satisfaction of the Building Authority, the type and character of the

ground on which the foundation or earthworks are to be constructed or carried out. The report

of any investigation carried out by the Contractor’s Professional Engineer shall contain

recommendations on the measures to be taken in connection with the construction of the

foundations or related earthworks so as to prevent any settlement or other movement which

may impair the stability of or cause damage to the whole or part of any adjoining premises or

building.

7.2 The contractor shall be solely responsible for the stability of all adjoining structures and facilities.

The method of construction adopted by the contractor for the execution of the excavation,

earthworks and associated temporary works shall be such that public roadways, private access

roads, undergrounds utilities, principal buildings and permanent facilities in adjoining properties

are adequately protected from the detrimental effects of instability and ground subsidence.

7.3.1 The contractor shall be required to assess the settlements and ground movements that he

anticipates will occur around the site boundaries due to the excavation work. His calculations and

assumptions on which these assessments will be made shall form a part of his submission to the

local Authority for the purpose of obtaining statutory clearance and securing the permit to

commence work. A copy of such calculations and assumptions shall be made available to the

Engineer for his record.

8.0 LIMITS ON GROUND MOVEMENT

8.1 The contractor shall be responsible for restricting the maximum settlement and lateral movement

of the ground adjacent to the site to the lesser of either the statutory limit imposed by the local

Authority or 50 mm, measured from the initial pre-construction reference level or line. The

contractor’s compliance to these limits shall not relieve him of his sole responsibility to make good

at his own cost and in the manner prescribed by the Engineer and/or the local Authority, all

consequential damages to adjoining structures roads and other properties arising from ground

movements caused by excavation work.

9.0 SETTING OUT

9.1 Bench Marks and Reference Lines shall be finalized by the EIC. The contractor shall prepare

detailed setting out drawings based on the layout of Employer architectural drawings and those

shall be submitted to the EIC prior to commencement of work.

9.2 The contractor shall do the setting out with the use of theodolite or like instruments at site, based

on details given to him. He shall erect timber profiles, masonry pillars, burjis etc. for his use. All

markings on these shall be painted with red colour and they shall be maintained for the entire

duration of the project. Setting out shall be approved by the EIC before the commencement of

any work.

9.3 The rate for the earthwork items shall include expenses for all such work including labour,

material and equipment / instruments etc.

10.0 EXCAVATION IN SOILS

10.1 Excavation over area

Excavation exceeding 1 m in width as well as 10 sq. in plan and 30 cm in depth shall be considered as

excavation over area.

10.2 Surface dressing

Trimming of natural ground, excavated surfaces and filled up areas to remove vegetation and / or small

inequality not exceeding 15 cm in depth shall be described as surface dressing.

10.3 Rough excavation

Excavation not requiring dressing of sides and bottom and reduction to exact levels, such as winning

earth from borrow pits, hill side cuttings, etc. shall be described as rough excavation.

10.4 Surface excavation

Excavation exceeding 1 m in width as well as 10 sqm on plan but not exceeding 30 cm in depth shall be

considered as surface excavation.

10.5 Trenches for pipes / cables

It shall be detailed with nominal dia of pipe / cable. Required bottom width, allowance for concrete

foundation for laying pipes, working area, grip required for socketed pipe, return fill, ramming and

removal of surplus soil shall be part of this item unless otherwise specified. It shall generally be

measured in running meter unless otherwise noted in the BOQ.

10.6 Post holes

Independent post holes (or similar holes) each exceeding 0.5 cu.m. shall generally be enumerated. Rate

shall include return fill, ramming and removal of surplus soil.

10.7 General

10.7.1 The excavated earth, shall be thrown or disposed off beyond 50 m periphery of the building.

Earth suitable for backfilling shall be stacked separately.

Subsequent disposal of the surplus and unsuitable material shall be as per the respective

items. Foundations, trenches shall be dug out to the exact dimensions as shown in the drawing

or as directed by the EIC.

10.7.2 In firm soil, the sides of the trench shall be kept vertical upto a depth of 2 m. If the trench

is to be deeper, if shall be in the form of steps of 50 cm, at every 2 m depth. This shall be

suitably increased or decreased as per site conditions and type of soil met with. This shall be

to the approval of the EIC. Sloping of sides also may be adopted.

10.7.3 The bed of trenches shall be firmly consolidated and leveled by watering and ramming of the

soft soil. Defective spots shall be dug out and filled with concrete of the same mix as of PCC

or as directed by the EIC. Cost of digging and filling with concrete shall be paid extra if

excavation and PCC is measured separately.

If excavation is done to a depth greater than that required, excess depth shall be back filled

with the same mix as of PCC or as directed. Cost of such concrete shall be to the contractor’s

account.

10.7.4 Excavated trenches shall have to be approved by the EIC prior to laying of PCC or any other

Permanent Work.

10.7.5 Excavation for drains shall be carried out with extra care to cut the sides and bottom exactly

to the required shape, slope and gradient. Filling for excess excavation shall be done at the

contractor’s cost in consultation with the EIC.

10.7.6 Excavated materials shall not be placed within 1 m of the edge of the trench or half the

depth of the trench, whichever is more.

10.7.7 Excavations for column footings shall be carried to depths indicated in the drawings. Safe

bearing capacity at such depth shall be verified to comply design requirements. If ordered by

the EIC, appropriate tests shall be carried out by the contractor.

10.8 Protection.

10.8.1 Fencing and / or other suitable measures for protection against risk of accidents due to open

excavation shall be provided by the contractor at his cost.

10.8.2 Where excavation is to be carried out below the foundation level of an adjacent structure, and

to avoid underpinning, precautions such as shoring and strutting, etc must be taken. No

excavation should start till such measures are taken to the satisfaction of the EIC. Payments

for such work shall not be made separately unless specified otherwise.

11.0 EXCAVATION SOFT ROCK

11.1 This shall be carried out by crowbars, pickaxes or pneumatic drills or any other suitable means.

Blasting may be permitted if the contractor so desires but no extra money shall be paid for blasting.

11.2 Other general details same as clause 10.7 and its sub clauses.

12.0 EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK

12.1 General

12.1.1 On meeting hard rock that requires blasting, the contractor shall inform the EIC. On approval

in writing, blasting operation shall start if the contractor feels it necessary and so desires.

12.1.1 The contractor shall obtain the necessary license from the District Authorities for undertaking

blasting work and explosive storing as per Explosive Rules 1940, and as updated. Explosive shall

only be procured from an authorized dealer. He shall be responsible for the safe custody and

proper accounting of explosives. The EIC shall have access to the store.

12.1.2 The contractor shall be responsible for any accident to those working on the site, to the public

or to property due to blasting operations.

12.2 Precautions

12.2.1 Safety measures to be adhered to shall be as detailed in IS 4081, Safety Code of Blasting (as

amended from time to time, and to related drilling operations). Also digest No. 37 of C.R.C. and

I.R.C.A. Road tariff No. 18 shall be adhered to.

12.2.2 Blasting operation shall be carried out under the supervision of a responsible authorized agent

of the contractor. Timings shall be as approved by the EIC in writing. Lunch break will be

preferred. The authorized agent of the contractor should be well conversant with the rules and

regulations of blasting operations. Further the contractor shall employ licensed blasters for

actual operation.

12.2.3 All proper precaution for safety shall be taken. All persons shall be moved away to a distance

not less than 200m. All entries shall be sealed and red flags displayed at prominent places.

12.2.4 Blasting shall be done only with gunpowder. Dynamite, gelignite, or any other high explosive

shall be used only with written permission of the EIC.

12.2.5 The number of charges to be fired and the actual number of shots heard shall be counted and

the contractor’s agent shall satisfy himself by examining that all charges have exploded. Only

then shall workmen be allowed to start work. Unexploded charges shall be flooded with water,

a new hole drilled and exploded again.

12.2.6 The EIC shall be informed about all misfires, their causes and the remedial steps taken.

13.0 CLASSIFICAITON

13.1 All soils comprising any of the following;

a) Vegetable or organic soil, turf, sand, silt, loam clay, mud, peat, black cotton soil, soft shale or loose

murrum.

b) Any mixture of soils (a)

c) Mud concrete below ground level.

d) Generally any material which yields to the ordinary application of a pickaxe and shovel or to

pharaoh, rake or other ordinary digging implement and not affording resistance to digging greater

than mentioned in (a) to (c )

e) Stiff heavy clay, hard shale, or compacted murrum requiring close application or a grafting tool or

pick or both and shovel.

f) Gravel and cobblestone (cobblestone is a rock fragment), usually rounded, having maximum dia

in one direction of 75-300mm.

13.2 Soft rock comprising any of the following.

a) Soling of roads, paths etc and hard core.

b) Macadam surfaces of any description, (water bound, grouted, tarmac, etc)

c) Lime concrete, stone masonry, in lime mortar and brick work in lime or cement mortar, below

ground level.

d) Soft conglomerate, where the stones may be detached from the metric with picks, crow which

may be quarried our split with a crowbar.

e) Limestone, sandstone, laterite, hard conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated rock which may

be quarried or split with a crowbar.

f) Unreinforced cement concrete, which may be broken up with crowbars or pickaxes and stone

masonry in cement mortar, below ground level.

g) Boulders nor requiring blasting, rock fragments usually rounded by weathering, disintegration and

exfoliation or abrasion water or ice, having maximum dia length in any direction of 500 mm, found

loose, embedded etc.

h) Other varieties of rock which would normally be removed with pick, crowbars, wedges and

hammer with only a little difficulty.

13.3 Hard rock comprising any of the following

Any rock or cement concrete in excavation for which the use of mechanical equipment or blasting is

required.

Reinforced cement concrete.

Boulders bigger than ½ cubic meter requiring blasting.

Hard rock as in (a) to (c ) requiring blasting but prohibited from doing so for any reason and

excavation has to be carried out by chiseling, wedging or any other agreed method.

14.0 FILLING

14.1 Filling shall be done where required with approved quality of earth. It may be from excavation

and where possible, cutting and filling shall be done simultaneously to avoid double handling.

14.2 Filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 20 cm in depth. Earth used shall be free from roots,

grass and rubbish and all lumps and clods exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall be broken down.

Each layer shall be watered with optimum moisture content to achieve 90% consolidation.

Consolidation shall be done by mechanical rammers or roller of minimum half- ton weight.

Where the roller cannot work, wooden or steel rammers of seven to ten kg weight with flat base

of 20 sq.cm or 20 cm dia should be used. Labour for ramming shall be atleast 1 for every 6

diggers. In embankment or banking, every third layer of earth shall be rolled and consolidated

with power roller of minimum eight ton weight.

15.0 PLANKING AND STRUTTING

In case of deep trenches where the soil is soft and not capable of being retained without the help of

support, planking / strutting as required shall be carried out. It shall be the responsibility of the

contractor to take steps to prevent slide / collapse. Method of planking / strutting will be largely

influenced by the type of soil encountered and as approved by the EIC.

16.0 SAND FILLING

The sand shall be free from any organic and deleterious materials as detailed in I.S. It should be suitable

for compaction. Filling shall be in layers of 15 to 20 cm. Watered with optimum moisture content and

mechanical rammers. Measurement shall be for compacted volume in cubic meters.

17.0 MEASURMENT

17.1 The following shall not be measured separately and allowance for the same shall be deemed

to have been made in description of the main item.

a) Setting out works, erecting profiles, etc.

b) Site clearance such as clearing of shrubs, brushwood, small trees not exceeding 30cm in girth

measured at one meter above ground.

c) Unauthorized battering or benching of excavation.

d) Forming (or leaving) DEAD MEN or TELL-TALES in borrow pits and their removal after

measurements.

e) Forming or leaving steps in the sides of deep excavation and their removal after measurements.

f) Excavations for insertion of planking and strutting.

g) Removing slips or falls in excavations.

h) Dewatering by bailing or pumping out of water in excavations from rains, sub-soil water, tides

undercurrents etc.

i) Slinging or supporting pipes electric, cables etc met during excavation or while carrying out any

other item of work.

j) Dressing, trimming of sides, leveling or grading and ramming of bottoms.

17.2 Soils, soft rocks, hard rocks shall be measured as per SP 27 Part I except for the followings:

a) Filling shall be in cubic meter for consolidated volume. The lift shall be considered from made up

ground level.

b) Planking and strutting required to be left in position shall be measured separately. The EIC’s

permission in writing shall have to be obtained for this. In no other case shall payment be made

for planning and strutting, if carried out.

c) Back filling of foundation is part of excavation and not paid separately.

Void percentage considered for computing net quantities shall be

- Loose Earth 20%

- Hard Rock 40%

These deductions shall be made from actual measurements. The EIC may at his discretion conform at

start of work other predetermined percentage for deduction for particular project.

18.0 RUBBLE SOLING:

Rubble:

The rubble shall be trap, granite or any other approved stone and shall be sound, hard, tough,

durable, dense, clean, and free from laminations, soft spots, cracks, decay, weathering and other

defects. The stones shall be broken rubble with water absorption as low as possible, but not more than

5%. The shape of the stones shall be regular as can be obtained by quarrying without attempt at shaping

or dressing, they shall be sufficiently flat-bedded. The stones shall be broken with the smallest

dimensions equal to the specified thickness of soling. The length and breadth shall not generally exceed

twice its thickness.

Preparation of Sub grade:

All the fillings shall be watered and compacted to get maximum consolidation. All the necessary

trimming or filling for the laying of the soling in line and required grade shall be done. Stakes and strings

for the required depth for lying of the soling shall mark the sub grade.

Laying Soling:

Unless otherwise specified the thickness of the rubble soling shall be 230mm. The stones shall be closely

hand packed on the prepared bed with the largest face downwards and in contact with each other. The

stones shall break joints as far as possible. The full thickness of soling shall generally be made with one

stone only. As the laying of rubble advances, the soling shall be hand packed by wedging and packing

with stones of smaller size in the joints of the soling and driving them by crowbars and hammers etc.

so as to fill the voids as completely as possible. Such filling of the interstices shall be carried out

simultaneously with the placing in position of the large stones and shall be carried out simultaneously

with the placing in position of the large stones and shall in no case be permitted to lag behind. The

soling shall be laid and hand packed true to grade and level. The soling thus laid shall be finished by

knocking out projecting stones and filling depressions by chips to come up to the required level.

Consolidating:

The soling shall be watered and rammed with wooden rams of approved weight. Hollows, which appear

during ramming, shall be made good with smalls. Ramming and making good shall continue till a closely-

knit compacted surface conforming to the required levels is obtained. Earth on no account shall be used

for making good or blinding purposes and if approved by the Architect, sand or gravel as directed shall

be used for blinding purposes. Water shall be lightly sprinkled if required and directed by the Architect.

Rate To Include:

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract the contractor’s rate quoted shall

include for the following.

(a) Preparing the sub grade.

(b) Providing and laying rubble soling including hand packing.

(c) Consolidating, watering, ramming and blinding with approved sand or gravel as directed.

(d) All labour, materials and use of equipment and tools for carrying out the work satisfactorily.

Mode Of Measurement:

The measurement for rubble soling shall be in cubic meter as provided of specified thickness.

19.0 ANTI TERMITE

19.1 Codes

Anti-termite treatment shall be carried out in accordance with the following standards

unless specified otherwise.

IS 6313 Code of practice for Anti-Termite Treatment

(Part-1) Constructional measures

(Part II) Code of practice for anti-termite measures in Building (pre constructional

chemical treatment)

19.2 Materials

Anti-termite chemicals in water emulsion shall be used as specified below.

Chemicals Concentration by percentage/weight Chemical/Water Ratio

Chloropyrifos 20 % EC – 1 % by weight or as per manufacturer’s instructions

1:20

Indosulfon 35 % EC – 1 % by weight or as per manufacturer’s instructions

1:35

19.3 Workmanship

19.3.1 Conditions of formation

The Anti-termite barrier shall be complete and continuous under the whole of the structure

to be protected. All foundations shall be fully surrounded by and in close contact with the

barrier of treated soil. Each part of the area treated shall receive the prescribed dosage of

chemical

19.3.2 Time of application

Soil treatment should be done immediately prior to placing concrete or sub-grade in

foundations, ground beams, floor slabs, etc. Concrete works should start when the chemical

emulsion has been absorbed by the soil.

Treatment must not be done when the soil is wet or saturated.

19.3.3 Disturbance Once formed, treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed. If treated soil barriers are disturbed,

immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and completeness of the barriers -

system.

19.3.4 Termite mound treatment

If termite mounds are found within the plinth area, these shall be destroyed by breaking open

the earthen structure and pouring into the mounds at several places, after, emulsion at the

rate of 4 litres per cubic meter of mound.

19.3.5 Soil Treatment

Treatment of pile caps, ground beams, columns, walls and basement excavations:

The bottom surface and the sides (to a height of 300 mm above concrete foundation level)

of the excavations for pile caps, ground beams, columns, walls and basements shall be treated

with the chemical at the rate of 5 litres per sq.m of surface area. After the concrete works are

above ground level, the back fill in immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be

treated at the rate of 7.5 litres per sq.m of the vertical surface of the sub- structure. If water

is used for ramming the earth fill the chemical treatment shall be carried out after ramming

operation is done by rodding the earth at 150 mm centres close to concrete surface and

spraying the chemical with the above dose. As earth is filled in layers the treatment shall be

carried out in similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be directed towards the concrete or

masonry surfaces so that earth in contact with these surfaces is well treated with the

chemicals.

19.3.5 Termite Proof Course or DPC (PCC) in Plinth

Where there is the provision of a damp proof course in the construction, it is located just

below the level of the filled earth. Although this acts as an effective barrier impervious to

termite entry the PCC surface should be treated at 5 litres per sqm immediately after the

course is laid and the concrete is green.

Where there is no provision for a DPC, the top surface of the masonry course just below the

level of plinth filling mentioned above should be soaked with the chemical emulsion at the

rate of 5 liters per sq. m. of the surface. The application should be carried out slowly to enable

the masonry surface to absorb the emulsion.

19.3.6 Treatment of Top surface of Plinth Filling

The top surface of the consolidated earth within plinth walls shall be treated with chemical

emulsion at the rate of 5 litres per sq. m of the surface before the sand bed or sub-grade is

laid. If the filled earth has been well rammed and the surface does not allow the emulsion

to seep through, 75mm deep holes at 150 mm centres shall be made with 12 mm diameter

rod to facilitate saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.

19.3.7 Treatment at junction of walls and floor

Rodding shall be carried out along the junction of walls and earth filling at 150mm centres at

a level slightly below the DPC or the chemical barrier described above. Emulsion shall be

sprayed along the wall junction at 7.5 litre per square meter of the vertical wall or column

surface so that it mixes with the soil and seeps to the DPC level or chemical barrier thus

establishing continuity of the anti-termite layer. The disturbed earth is then to be tamped back

into place.

19.3.8 Treatment of soil along external perimeter

The earth around the external perimeter of the building up to a depth of 300 cm shall be

treated at the rate of 7.5 litres per square meter of the vertical surfaces. To facilitate this

treatment the soil shall be rodded at 150mm centres to a depth of approximately 300 to break

up the soil.

In the event of filling being more than 300 mm, the external perimeter treatment shall extend

to full depth of filling.

19.3.9 Treatment of soil surrounding pipes, wastes and conduits

When pipes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundation, the soil surrounding

the points of entry and exit shall be loosened around each such pipe, waster or conduits for a

distance of 150 mm, and up to a depth of 75 mm before the treatment is commenced.

19.3.10 Spraying Equipment

A pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate uniform spraying

and penetration of chemical into the earth.

19.3.11 Free Service Guarantee

The Contractor shall note that termite proofing work, is subject to a free service guarantee

from the date of completion of the treatment. The Contractor shall give an undertaking in

writing that during the 10 (ten) year guarantee period any infestation of subterranean termites

will be eradicated and necessary treatment carried out to prevent re-infestation, free of cost

to the Employer.

Contractors must ensure that the work is done through a professional pest control operator

who is a member of the National Pest Control Association of USA, Indian Pest Control

Association or other recognized professional body. A list of termite control jobs successfully

undertaken for Government Departments, Statutory bodies or large private organizations

are to be provided to prove that they are capable of handling anti-termite work.

RCC WORKS

1.0 INDIAN STANDARDS

All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.

Indian Standards to be followed are:

(1) IS 269 Specification for Ordinary and low heat, Portland cement.

(2) IS 383 Specification for Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.

(3) IS 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

(4) IS 460 Specification for test sieves: (Part I, II & III)

i) Wire cloth test service ii) Perforated plate test sieve iii) Method of examination of test sieve

(5) IS 516 Method of test for strength of concrete

(6) IS 1199 Method of Sampling and analysis of concrete.

(7) IS 1489 Specification for Portland pozzolana cement

(8) IS 1542 Specification for Sand for plaster

(9) IS 2116 Specification for Sand for masonry mortars

(10) IS 2386 Method of test for aggregate concrete.

(Part I, II, & III) i) Particle size and shape ii) Estimation of deleterious materials

and organic impurities iii) Specific gravity, density, voids,

absorption and bulking

(11) IS 2646 Specification for Integral cement water proofing

compound.

(12) IS 3025 Methods of Sampling and test (Physical and Chemical for water used in Industry

(13) IS 3068 Specification for Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in lime concrete

(14) IS 4031 Method of Physical test for hydrulic cement (part i to xii)

(15) IS 4032 Method of chemical analysis for hydraulic cement.

(16) IS 6452 Specification for high Alumina cement for structure use.

(17) IS 6909 Specification for super sulphated weather

(18) IS 7861 Code of practice for extreme weather concreting

i) Recommended practice for hot weather concreting

ii) Recommended practice for cold weather concreting

(19) IS 8041 Specification for Rapid hardening Portland cement.

(20) IS 8112 & Specification for high strength ordinary port land cement. IS 12269

(21) IS 9103 Specification for admixture for concrete.

(22) IS 11433 Specification for one part gun grade

i) Poly sulphade based joint sealant :

general requirements.

(23) IS 12118 (part I) Specification for two parts poly sulphate based sealant :

general requirements.

(24) IS 1343 Specification for Prestressed Design

(24) SP 23 Handbook on concrete mix

(25) SP 24 Explanatory handbook on Indian Standards code for plain

and reinforced concrete (IS 456)

(26) SP 27 Handbook of method of measurement of building works.

2.0 MATERIALS

2.1 Cement

2.1.1 Cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS 269 for all purpose unless

specified differently. It shall be received in bags of 50 kg and each batch shall be accompanied

with a test certificate of the factory. Also it shall e tested before use to ascertain its strength,

setting time, etc. In no case cement has been stored over 4 weeks shall be used unless tested

as per the direction of the EIC prior to use in the works.

2.1.2 Cement shall be stored in such locations so as to prevent deterioration due to moisture

dampness. A dry and water proof shed shall be best suited for this. Bags shall be stacked on

rigid water-proof platforms about 15 to 20 cm clear above the floors and 25 to 35 cm clear or

away from the surrounding walls. A maximum high stack of 12 bags is permitted. Stacks shall

be so arranged that the first batches are used first, and (FIFO) that they permit easy access for

inspection and handling.

2.1.3 The following other types of cement may be used in works if specified or with prior approval of the EIC in writing purpose. Specialist literature shall be consulted for guidance regarding use of these types of cement.

a) 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112

b) 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 12269

c) Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455

d) Portland pozzolana cement (fly ash based ) conforming to IS 1489 (Part-I)

e) Portland pozzolana cement (calcined clay based ) conforming to IS 1489 (Pt –2)

f) Sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS 12330

2.2 Coarse aggregate

2.2.1 Coarse aggregate shall be obtained from natural sources such as stone, gravel etc. crushed

or uncrushed or a combination thereof from approved quarried. Aggregate shall be hard,

strong, dense, durable, and clean and free from veins and adherent coating. It shall be free

from soft, feeble, thin, elongated or laminated pieces and shall be roughly cubical in shape.

It shall consist of coarse material most of which is retained on 4.75 mm IS sieve.

2.2.2 Coarse aggregate shall not contain any harmful material such as iron, pyrites, coal, mica shale

or similar laminated material neither shall it contain clay, alkali, soft fragments, sea shells,

organic impurities etc. in such quantities that adversely affects the strength and durability of

the concrete. In addition to the above, in reinforced concrete the aggregate shall not contain

any material, which might attack the reinforcement. The maximum quantities of deleterious

materials in the coarse aggregate when determined in accordance with IS 2386 Part I and Part

II “Method of test for aggregates for concrete’’ shall not exceed the limits laid down in table 1

of Annexure.

2.2.3 Aggregate crushing value, impact value, abrasion value and soundness of aggregate shall

respectively be in accordance with para 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 and 3.6 of IS 383.

2.2.4 Grading of coarse aggregate shall be in conformity with the requirements laid down in IS

383. See Table 2 and Table 3 of Annexure.

2.2.5 Source of aggregate shall be from an approved Government location. It shall be tested prior

to the approval of the EIC from an approved testing laboratory. In case available aggregates

do not meet certain requirements of IS 383 or any other specification, required processing

shall be carried out by the contractor at his cost. No extra cost towards these processes,

treatment or combination of both shall be paid. It shall be the duty of the contractor to make

sure that aggregate material received by him is from Government approve quarries and with

fully paid royalties, taxes, duties etc. as may be in force from time to time for respective

locations.

2.2.6 Aggregates shall be stored in such a way that it does not get mixed with mud, grass vegetables

and other foreign matter. The best way is to have a hard surface platform made out of

concrete , bricks or planks. It should be to the approval of the EIC.

2.2.7 Coarse aggregate shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.6 (Saturated surface dry basis).

Aggregate below this specific gravity shall not be used without the special permission of the

EIC.

2.2.8 One a specific source of supply of coarse aggregate is approved, the source shall not be

changed without the prior approval of the EIC.

2.3 Fine Aggregate

2.3.1 Natural sand deposited by stream or glacial agencies as a result of disintegration of rock is the

best form of fine aggregate. The fine aggregate shall confirm to following standards.

(i) For plain and reinforced concrete: IS 383 Specification for

Coarse and fine aggregates

from natural sources for concrete.

(ii) Mortar and grout : Is 2116 Specification for sand for

masonry mortars.

(iii) For plastering : IS 1542 Specification for sand for

plaster ( Class A grading)

2.3.2 Some times it is obtained from crushed stone screening but often contains a high percentage

of dust and clay. It tends to be flaky and angular. This type produces harsh concrete and should

be avoided.

2.3.3 Sea sand should not be used unless approved by the EIC. If approved, the required

treatment shall be done at the contractor’s cost.

2.3.4 Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and

shall not contain any appreciable amount of clay,. Sand shall not contain harmful impurities

such as iron, pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica shale or similar laminated material, alkali, and

organic impurities in such form or quantities as to affect the strength of durability of concrete

or mortar. Also it should not contain any material liable to attack the steel reinforcement.

2.3.5 When tested as per IS 2386 Part I and Part II, fine aggregate shall not exceed permissible

quantities of deleterious materials as given in table 1 of Annexure.

2.3.6 Fine aggregate shall be thoroughly washed at site with clean fresh water such that the

percentage of all deleterious materials is within the permissible limits laid down.

2.3.7 Grading of fine aggregate shall conform to IS and shall fall within limits of one of the four zones

given in table 4 of IS 383 and of Annexure.

2.3.8 Damp and moist sand increases the volume and is called bulking. Due allowance is to be made

while preparing the mixes based on volume measurements. It shall be determined as per IS

2386 Part III Appendix A. For rough guidance table 5 of Annexure gives the relation between

moisture content and percentage of bulking.

2.3.9 Storing of aggregate shall be as given in clause 2.2.6.

2.4 Water

2.4.1 Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable

quantities of silt, oils, alkalies, acids, slats so as not to weaken mortar, or concrete or cause

efflorescence or attach the steel in RCC while curing. It shall be free of elements, which

significantly affects the hydration reaction or otherwise interferes with hardening of concrete

during curing or those elements, which produced objectionable stains or deposits. Potable

water is generally satisfactory but is shall be tested prior to use in the works.

2.4.2 Water tested shall be in accordance with IS 3025. Maximum permissible limits of deleterious

materials in water as given in IS 456 are reproduced for ready reference in table 6 of Annexure.

2.4.3 Suitability of water shall be ascertained by the compressive strength and initial setting time test as specified under:

a) Average 28 days compressive strength of atleast three 15 cm concrete cubes prepared

with water proposed to be used shall not be less than 90% of the average strength of

three similar concrete cubes prepared with distilled water. Preparation and testing in

accordance of IS 516.

b) The initial setting time of tests blocks made with proposed cement and water to be used

shall not be less than 30 minutes and shall not differ by ± 30 minutes from the initial

setting time o f control test block prepared with the same cement and distilled

water. Preparation and testing of block shall be in accordance with IS 4031

2.4.4 The PH value of water shall not be less than 6 and more than 9.

2.4.5 Water storage tanks shall be such as to prevent any deleterious materials getting mixed with

it.

2.4.6 Water shall be tested and approved in writing by the EIC prior to use in the works.

2.4.7 Sea Water

Seawater in concrete shall not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the EIC

for purpose stated. The EIC under unavoidable circumstances may allow mixing or curing of

seawater in concrete construction, which are permanently under seawater.

2.5 Admixtures

2.5.1 These are substances other than cement, aggregate and water and shall be permitted to be

used to modify the properties of concrete for single or a combination of purposes. This shall

be used only on the written approved for specific purpose and at the cost of the contractor.

Good concrete shall be achieved without the aid of any admixtures.

2.5.2 Admixtures should be free from chlorides and sulphate, which might affect concrete or any

other material which may cause problems to the concrete in the due course of time. Also it

should have no effect on the reinforcement in case of Reinforced Cement Concrete.

2.5.3 Admixtures generally in use are classified as under :

a) Accelerators

b) Retarders

c) Workability agents

d) Water -repelling agents

e) Air-entraining agents

f) Gas-forming agents. These are manufactured and sold by various companies under brand names. The contractor

proposing to use any of them shall submit to the EIC technical literature with its chemical

composition, purpose of use and method recommended by the manufacturer and what he

proposes to follow at site for strict control.

2.5.4 The contractor’s proposal shall accompany the following with his request to use admixture.

a) The trade name of the admixture, its source and the manufacturer’s recommended

method of use.

b) Typical dosage rates and the possible detrimental effects of under and over-dosage.

c) Whether the admixture contains chloride in any free form or any other chemical present

as an active ingredient, which is a likely cause of corrosion of reinforcement or

deterioration of concrete.

d) The average expected air content of freshly mixed concrete containing an admixture,

which causes air to be entrained when used at the manufacturer’s recommended rate

of dosage.

3.0 CONCRETE

Concrete is prepared by mixing graded aggregate stone or brick along with cement, in a

specified proportion. Mixing shall be done by a mechanical mixer. Manual hand mixing shall

be permitted in specific cases with the written permission of the EIC on account of small

quantity or location or any other reason acceptable to the EIC.

3.1 Cement concrete.

This shall be classified as plain cement concrete or reinforced cement concrete. Plain cement

concrete shall be in leveling course under foundations, floors, copings etc. and shall include

form work as part of the work. Reinforced cement concrete shall be at all locations and

comprises form work, reinforcement and concrete. Payment of reinforced cement concrete

may be composite or item wise as specified in the BOQ. In PCC payment for form work shall

not be made.

3.1.1 Concrete shall be classified its compressive strength at the 28th day. The concrete grades shall

be as designated in table 2 of IS 456 and are given as ready reference in table 7 of Annexure.

3.1.2 BOQ shall specify various types of concrete aimed to be used in works. It shall be the

responsibility of the contractor to carry out design mixes and approval of the same shall be

obtained from the EIC at least 35 days in advance from the actual pouring of concrete at site

in the permanent works. The basic aim of mix design shall be to find the most economic

proportion of cement, aggregates and water which will give the desired strength of concrete,

proper workability and durability. Also it is important that the mix should be easily worked

with the help of equipment available at site. The operations involved at site are, measurement

of materials, their mixing, placing, compacting, finishing required and curing. The design shall

be carried out strictly to IS specifications and IS code practice 456, SP 23 and SP 24.

Further the contractor should ensure that the minimum cement content per cubic meter of

reinforced concrete should not be less than that stipulated in table 23, 24, 25 and 26 of SP

23. For ready reference refer table 8 and 9of Annexure, but the BOQ shall specify minimum

cement content for each item.

3.1.3 For expected strength of cubes tested on the 28th day the design mix at preliminary test and

work site shall be as per table 10 of Annexure. The water cement ratio shall be between 0.5

to 0.52. Additional water may be permitted only at the discretion of the Structural Engineer.

The slump shall be 25 mm to 35 mm depending upon the location and type of work. Higher

slump with use of plasticizers shall be permitted.

3.2 Design mix and trial mixes

3.2.1 As stated above in clause 3.1.2 the contractor shall submit, at least 5 weeks in advance, to the

EIC the mix design that the proposes to use at site. The mix design shall also give basic details

(when tested according to Is 1199 and IS 2386 – Part III, 1963) such as.

a) Slump

b) Bleeding

c) Compacting factor

d) Vee-Bee time

e) Cement required for one cubic meter of concrete.

3.2.2 On receipt of this, the EIC may immediately order to carry out work site test before the final

approval. This shall be done with mixer and materials actually being used at site.

This shall give the contractor additional chance to check for himself actual workability and

make sure that the mix proposed by him will be fully satisfactory with regards to slump,

segregation, bleeding, water –cement ratio and workability.

5 cubes shall be taken from e ach of the 3 batches to test the mix. Cubes shall be cast, stored,

cured, transported and tested to IS 516. The test may be carried out at site or laboratory as

approved by the EIC.

Trial mixes shall be approved provided that average strength of 3 consecutive cubes is not less

than that specified and that one out of three may give a value less than specified but limited

to a maximum of 90% of the specified strength.

3.2.3 In case the trial mix falls below the above criteria, the EIC shall order fresh trial mixes to be

made as before, until the desired strength is arrived at.

3.2.4 This design mix and trial mix hold good so long as the materials continue to be of the same

quality and from the same sources. For any change, the EIC may order fresh design mix and

trial mixes to be carried out before the same is used at site.

3.2.5 It is the responsibility of the contractor to prepare and get the cubes tested and to provide all

the material, labour, moulds, equipment, casting and curing facility, charges for testing etc.

Further, the contractor shall have to provide and maintain all the equipment and staff at the

site throughout to carry out the following tests in a small laboratory or get these tests from

approved laboratories without extra cost to the contract.

a) Grading of coarse and fine aggregates.

b) Silt content of sand.

c) Moisture content of coarse and fine aggregates.

d) Slump test of concrete.

e) Concrete cube test.

The contractor shall maintain full records of all above tests in a register.

The format of records shall be prepared in consultation with the EIC and either he or his

representative shall have full access to the contractor’s laboratory.

The contractor shall include charges for the above work in his rates and no extra whatsoever

shall be admissible on this account of designing, testing maintaining laboratory etc.

3.3 Mixing of concrete

3.3.1 Weight batching shall be preferred at site but the EIC may permit designed mix to be converted

to volumetric if requested by the contractor on specific grounds. The contractor shall provide

required boxes to measure the ingredients of concrete.

3.3.2 The contractor shall provide concrete batch mixes, vibrators, weight batches conforming to

relevant IS specification. The capacity and number of mixers and vibrators required at site

from time to time shall be to the approval of the EIC. No equipment from site shall be removed

without the prior written approval of the EIC. The contractor shall also maintain a platform

weighing scale of capacity 300 kg with fraction upto 100 gms at the site.

As directed by the EIC, a weekly or periodic calibration of all machines shall be done and

records of these calibrations shall be maintained in a register. Regular maintenance of

machinery shall also be carried out on a weekly basis or as directed by the manufacturer of

machines.

3.3.3 The mixer shall be run for a minimum period of 2 minutes after all materials are loaded in

full quantity. The concrete produced shall be uniform in colour and consistency.

3.3.4 The placing temperature of concrete shall not be more than 34o C. If it is more, the EIC may

order addition of ice or chilled water to the concrete. Also the contractor shall take the

following precautions:

a) Mixers and weight batches shall be painted with white colour

b) Aggregate storing bins shall not be exposed to the Sun.

c) Water shall be sprinkled on aggregates well before concreting to keep the temperature low.

3.4 Shrinkage cracks Concreting shall avoided in very warm weather, if necessary, it shall be covered with

damped hessian within 2 hours of placing of concrete.

To achieve good results the concrete shall be immediately covered with a plastic sheet and

not allowed any direct wind contact. This shall eliminate shrinkage cracks.

3.5 Laying of Concrete Concreting shall commence only after form work is approved, reinforcement is recorded and

permission to proceed with concreting has been approved in writing from the EIC.

Formwork should be clean, free from sawdust, pieces of wood or any other foreign material.

It should have been treated by form releasing agent prior to the laying of reinforcement and

concrete.

Concrete shall be as gently deposited as is practically possible. In its final position to avoid

re-handling and shall be so deposited that segregation of aggregates does not occur. In case

of deep trenches and footing, if may be done with the help of a chute. Columns and walls

shall be so adjusted in form work so that maximum depth is 1.5 meter unless consented to

by the EIC. Concrete from wheelbarrows shall not be dumped away from the face concrete

already in place. It shall be dumped into the face of concrete already in place.

Concrete onto a sloping surface shall be discharged by providing a chute with a baffle and a

drop at its end so that the concrete remains on the slope.

Columns and walls shall be concreted in the operation to their full height to avoid any

horizontal construction joints as far as possible.

All slabs, beams, wooden planks and cat-walk shall be provided clear of reinforcement.

Concrete shall be placed in position within 30 minutes from the time it is produced.

Concrete shall be laid during normal working hours. Concreting at night or on holidays shall

be permitted only on the written approval of the EIC.

3.6 Compaction of Concrete Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted, as depositing shall proceed by means of suitable

vibrators. The vibrators shall maintain the entire concrete under treatment in an adequate

state of agitation and shall continue during the whole period occupied by placing of

concrete. Care shall be taken not to over- vibrate the concrete. While withdrawing needles

no holes should be visible in concreting. Compacting shall be completed before the initial

setting time. Concrete already set shall not be disturbed by successive vibrations.

It shall be ensured that the needle vibrators are not applied on reinforcement, which may

destroy the bond between concrete and reinforcement. When electric vibrators are in use,

the standby petrol vibrator must always be available at the concreting point.

3.7 Construction joints

In large pours, it is practically not possible to carry on concreting continuously. Hence

construction joints shall be provided. Location of construction joint shall be submitted by

the contractor for approval of the EIC. Such joints shall be kept to a minimum. The joints

shall be at places where shear force s nil or minimum and these shall be straight and a t right

angles to the direction of the main reinforcement.

Stop ends provided shall be with necessary slots for reinforcement bars to pas feely without

bending or any other obstruction. Also a trapezoidal fillet nailed on stop board shall be

provided to form a regular keyed joint. Joints shall be straight and truly vertical or

horizontal.

Before commencement of concrete, adjacent concrete stopper and surfaces shall be chipped

and roughened to expose aggregate, then wire brushed and cleaned. The concrete surface

shall be sprayed with water for 24 hours before casting and kept wet until casting.

True horizontal joints shall also be provided with a keyed joint by inserting planed greased

timber.

It shall be treated as above prior to the start of fresh concreting.

For vertical joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface just before concreting.

For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar about 10 to 15 mm

thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the cement and sand in the

concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry shall be freshly mixed and applied just before

concreting.

3.8 Expansion joints

Expansion joints shall be formed and located as detailed in the drawing.

3.9 Curing

Curing of concrete is most important. There shall be no comprise on this activity and it is for

the contractor to arrange for everything necessary to make sure that the concrete is cured

to the complete satisfaction of the EIC. As said above in clause 3.1.8, after concrete has begun

to harden i.e. about 1 to 2 hours after laying. It shall be protected from quick drying with moist

or damped hessian cloth or any other material approved by the EIC. After 24 hours of laying

of the concrete, the surface shall be cured by flooding with water or covering with damp

hessain cloth for a period of 7 days to keep it moist.

For the next 7 days the surface shall be kept wet all the time by sprinkling water

continuously.

For membrane curing, details as listed in 12.5 of SP 24 shall be followed.

3.10 Finishing

Concrete shall be finished keeping in mind the next operation to be carried out over the

surface. For guidance the following points shall be noted but the EIC shall be consulted prior

to start of concreting and his decision in this regard shall be final.

a) Roof slab shall be troweled even and smooth with a wooden float.

b) The surface that will receive plaster shall be roughened immediately.

c) Surfaces that will be in contract with any masonry work shall be roughened immediately.

d) The surface that will receive mosaic floor or IPS or any other type of tiled work shall be

roughened while it is green. Every care shall be taken not to disturb the freshly laid

concrete.

3.11 Inspection and corrective measures

3.11.1 On removal of form work, the surface shall be examined by the EIC. Till such time, the

contractor shall carry out no remedial measures. All patching, rectification or chipping shall

be done only on the EIC’s instructions. In case of any violation of this rule, the concrete poured

stands rejected. The decision of the EIC in this regard shall be final and binding on all parties.

Sagged, buldged, patched, honeycombed work shall stand to be rejected for surface that are

exposed, or required fairface finish or decorative textured finish. The EIC may permit any work

found structurally safe and areas of unexposed faces, for repairing. As directed by the EIC

these works shall be retained and the cost of repair shall be at the contractor’s account.

3.11.2 Cracks observed shall be brought to the notice of the EIC who shall examine them. It shall

be kept under observation and a record shall be maintained for a period of 45 days. It shall be

shown to the Structural Engineer and the following procedure shall be followed.

1. Cracks not developing further and in the opinion of Structural Engineer not detrimental

to the strength of the construction shall be grouted with non-shrinking cement slurry

or as directed by the EIC.

2. Cracks developing further and in the opinion of the Structural Engineer, detrimental to

the strength of construction, shall be tested as per the relevant Indian Standard.

3. Based on result of the test, the EIC in consultation with the structural engineer shall

order remedial measures or order the contractor to dismantle construction, cart away

the debris, replace the construction and carry out all the consequential works thereto.

4. Cost of the above shall be borne by the contractor if the failure was on his part. In case

it is due to design faults, it shall be borne by the employer.

5. The decision of the EIC in this matter shall be final and binding on all parties. This decision

shall not be open for arbitration.

3.12 Quantum of cubes and testing

The minimum frequency of cube casting shall be as follows. Each sample shall consist of 6

cubes.

Concrete quantity Number of Samples.

Upto 5 cu.m. in a day 1

5 cu.m. to 15 cu.m. 2

15 cu.m. to 30 cu.m. 3

30 cu.m. to 50 cu.m. 4

More than 50 cu.m. 4 + one additional per each 50 cu.m. or part thereof.

Three cubes shall be tested on the 7th day and other three cubes on the 28th day.

3.13 Acceptance of Work

It shall be as given in IS 456, SP 23 and SP 24. The guidance brief is as under;

Part or element of work shall be deemed to be accepted, provided the results of the 28th day

cube testing conform to the criteria stated as under

a) The average of the three consecutive cube’s strength shall not be less than the

specified strength.

b) No individual cube strength shall be less than 90% of the specified strength.

c) If the individual cube strength exhibits more than 33% of the specified strength, such a

cube shall be classified as freak and the criteria in (a) and (b) shall be applied to the

remaining two cubes and their acceptability determined.

d) If the concrete testes fail to meet the acceptance criteria of the minimum strength

required for respective grades of concrete, the EIC may take one of the following

decisions:

i) Instruct the contractor to carry out such additional tests (e.g. core tests, load

tests etc) and / or remedial measures to ensure the soundness of the structure

at the contractor’s expense.

ii) Any decision to accept the work shall be entirely at the discretion of the engineer

who may a reduction in the rate of the appropriate item.

iii) The work will be rejected and any consequential action as needed shall be taken

at the contractor’s expense including cutting out and replacing a part or whole

of the work..

3.14 Concreting under special conditions

3.14.1 Work in extreme weather conditions During hot or cold weather the concreting should be done as per the procedure set out in IS

7861 Part I or IS 7861 Part II or as directed by the EIC.

3.14.2 Underwater concreting The procedure set out under 13.2 of IS 456 shall be followed or as directed by the EIC.

3.14.3 Concreting in seawater

The procedure set out under 13.3 of IS 456 shall be followed or as directed by the EIC.

3.14.4 Concreting in aggressive soils and water Guidelines laid down in 13.4 of IS 456 shall be followed together with the instruction of the

EIC.

3.15 Measurements 1. All works shall be measured in the decimal system.

a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 metre except for thickness of slab which shall be measured to the nearest 0.005 metre.

b) Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sq.m.

c) Cubic contents shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 cu.m.

2. All measurements of cutting shall, unless otherwise stated, be held to include the

consequent waste.

3. Cement concrete work shall be classified as under:

a) Concrete cast-in-situ Plain and reinforced

b) Precast concrete Plain and reinforced

c) Prestressed concrete Cast-in-situ or pre-cast

4. All concrete, except as hereinafter provided, shall be measured in cubic meters.

5. The price of concrete shall include ingredient material, mixing, transporting, hoisting to

any height and lowering to any depth, pouring or laying, consolidating, leaving pockets,

holes and protecting them till the next operation or completion of work, hacking the

surface to provide key for further work including cleaning, wetting surface etc. and

preparing construction joints as described in clause 3.19 of this section.

6. Concrete processed in a special manner for any specific purpose, such as cooled, heated,

water-proofed, acid-proofed, heat-resistant shall be measured separately.

7. Admixtures shall be used if necessary at the request of the contractor for workability

and the price for that shall deemed to be included in the contractor’s quoted price of

concrete.

8. No reductions shall be made for :

a) Ends of dissimilar materials (for example beams, posts, girders, purlins, corbels and steps) upto 500 sq. cm in section.

b) Opening upto 0.1 sq.m.

c) Volume occupied by reinforcement.

d) Volume occupied by drainage, water pipes, conduits, etc. not exceeding 100 sq.cm in cross sectional area.

e) Small voids each not exceeding 40 sq.m. in section.

f) Small moulds, drip moulds, chamfers, splays, rounded or covered angles, beads, grooves and rebates upto 10 cm in depth and width.

9. Expansion joints shall be measured in running meter or sq.m. as the case may be. Price

shall include required shuttering, special treatment if any, filler and finishing material

as detailed in drawing or the BOQ.

10. Water proofing of concrete shall be measured separately as an extra over ordinary concrete stating the quantity of waterproofing material inliers or kilograms.

11. Surface treatment shall be measured in square meters stating number of coats and

proportioning of water proofing liquid to water.

12. Cement grouting shall be measured in square meters and the mix specified.

13. Grouting of holding-down bolts and providing temporary boxing or wedges to form holes

shall be enumerated. The mix shall be specified. The price shall include required shuttering, grouting etc.

14. To keep surface dry while concreting, dewatering due to rains and seepage shall be

included in the price of concrete.

4.0 READY MIX CONCRETE Ready Mix concrete is concrete supplied by an independent vendor having a ready – mixed plant

outside the site. All specifications for plain and reinforced concrete shall be equally applied to ready

mixed concrete.

READY MIX CONCRETE SUPPLIER

The Contractor shall identify a supplier in such a manner that concrete is available at site with hindrance

and quality is maintained during concreting. Due attention shall be paid to the quality of plant and

machinery, laboratory facilities available with the supplier, proper documentation procedures

maintained by the supplier and trained qualified staff employed by the supplier. Consideration shall

also be given to distance of plant from site, quality of transporting equipments and documentation

procedures maintained by the supplier related to transport. After identifying Ready – Mix Concrete

supplier the Contractor must submit these documents to PMC for their approval.

Documentations to be submitted and maintained by the Contractor during Construction:-

1. Mix design used for concrete should include type and quality of cement, admixtures,

aggregates, water etc. the documents shall also include laboratory tests carried out for

conformation of workability, strength, setting time etc.

2. A document stating the type and quantity of each component of concrete shall be maintained

for each batch of concrete. The document shall also state the date and time of concrete and use

before time.

3. Documentation for on site tests carried out during concreting.

4. Results of cube tests and other laboratory tests carried out by the supplier in the plant.

TRANSPORTING OF READY MIX CONCRETE

Before loading concrete in the transit mixer, the container shall be thoroughly cleaned, washed and

kept moist.

Method of transportation used shall ensure efficient delivery and no significant alterations of

properties of concrete such as water – cement ratio, slump , air content, homogeneity etc.

PLACING OF READY MIXED CONCRETE

The batching plant operator and the placing crew at site shall work in close co – ordination to avoid

any delay in dispatching the concrete as well as to stop dispatch if the work at site is not ready for

concrete work. Proper record of order, delivery and placement of concrete shall be maintained by

the Contractor on site and submitted to the PMC who shall have direct access to the batching

plant to control all the activities in the production and placement of concrete.

TEMPERATURE

Temperature of concrete at the time of delivery shall be in accordance with IS 4926 (1976) or any

other agreed standard.

DELIVERY TIME

The time period between the initial contact of mixing water with cement and delivery to the

Contractor shall not generally exceed two hours. This figure is a general one and can be reduced

or extended depending upon mix design, ambient temperature and the design criteria of the

structure.

ADDITION OF WATER

Unless otherwise agreed NO additional water shall be added to the concrete after the transit

mixer has left the production plant. The Contractor is responsible for the prevention of any

additional water added to the concrete on site. The only exception is where properly trained Ready

mixed concrete supplier personnel adjust the workability to comply with the specified slump

requirement without exceeding either the specified maximum free water: cement ratio or slump

tolerances. It is suggested that this is performed by using a calibrated water meter. The quantity of

additional water shall be recorded on the delivery ticket and signed by the Ready mixed concrete

supplier’s representatives performance of such concrete shall be ascertained through normal

testing practices.

5.0 MORTARS

5.1 Mortars shall be prepared by mixing fine graded aggregate with cement, in the proportion

specified for respective items of work as detailed in the BOQ. Mixing of mortars shall be done

by mechanical mixers only. Hand mixing may be permitted in specified cases on the written

permission of the EIC.

5.2 Mortars shall be specified by proportion only and not by strength, volumetric mixing shall be

based on dry volumes of each ingredient. For convenience, measurement shall correspond to

volume of one cement bag i.e 0.035 cu.m. Boxes shall be of size of 40 x 35 x 25 cm. These

shall be marked as mortar mixing boxes by red paint and shall be used throughout the

contract. Hand mixing or mechanical mixing proportions shall be done with the use of these

boxes.

5.3 Cement mortar

Cement mortar shall be prepared by mixing cement and sand in specified proportions.

Proportioning shall be carried out as detailed above. Sand shall be added suitably to allow for

bulkage, if required. Bulkage shall be determined as specified in IS 2386 Part III. Cement and

sand added to mixer shall be thoroughly mixed and water shall be added to it gradually. After

addition of water the mixer shall run for a minimum of 3 minutes. The mortar mixed shall be

consumed within 30 minutes of its mixing.

6.0 FORMWORK

The design and construction of the formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

However, if instructed by the Engineer, the drawings and calculations for the design of the

formwork shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Design of formwork shall take

account of safety and surface finish. The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to

prevent loss of grout or mortar from the fresh concrete.

Formwork shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self weight, reinforcement

weight, wet concrete weight, concrete pressure, construction and wind loads together with

dynamic effect caused by placing, vibrating and compacting the concrete. Forms shall be

designed and constructed to maintain rigidity throughout the placing, ramming, vibration and

setting of the concrete to the required shape, position and level and specified class of finish

within the allowable tolerances.

All joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout. If movement or deflection of the

formwork or loss of grout occurs, the damaged concrete supported by such formwork shall be

removed and the concrete re-cast so that the required finish is obtained. Formwork and its

supports should be designed to withstand the worst combinations of self-weight, reinforcement

and wet concrete weights, concrete pressure, construction and wind loads. Due regard shall be

taken to the type of mix when considering the design pressure on the formwork. The formwork

shall be pre-cambered by an amount equal to the expected maximum deflection shall be as

shown on the drawings.

If timber forms are used they shall be of sound, well-seasoned timber free from loose knots.

The forms shall be faced to give the specified class of finish for the structures. The formed

surfaces of exposed concrete shall be smooth, true and free from all irregularities.

For below ground concrete except against existing structures, rough formwork, steel pans etc.,

provided all joints prevent the loss of grout.

The formwork shall be designed and constructed to the shapes, lines and dimensions shown on

the drawings within the tolerances given below:

a) Deviation from specified dimensions of - 6 mm

cross section of columns and beams + 12 mm

b) Deviation from dimensions of footings (See Note)

Dimensions in plan - 12 mm + 50 mm

Eccentricity 0.02 times the width of the footing in the

direction of deviation but not more than

50 mm.

Thickness +0.05 x specified thickness

c) Elevation below ground + / - 15 mm

d) Elevation above ground + / - 6 mm

e) Plumb alignment for walls and columns +/-6mm in 3m or +/-12 mm in12 m f) Straightness or bow (in plan) for walls +/-6mm in 3m or +/-12 mm in12 m

NOTE:

The above tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical

reinforcing steel or dowels.

The formwork shall be capable of being dismantled and removed from the cast concrete

without shock, disturbance or damage. The arrangement shall be such that the soffit forms

properly supported on props, can be retained in position for such period as may be required

by maturing conditions or specifications.

6.1 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

All rubbish shall be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed. The

faces of the forms in contact with the concrete shall be clean and treated with a suitable

release agent, where applicable. Release agent shall be applied so as to provide a thin uniform

coating to the forms without contaminating the reinforcement.

6.2 Striking of Form work

In normal circumstances where Ordinary Portland Cement is used, forms shall generally be

removed after the expiry of the following periods:

a) Walls, columns and vertical faces

of all structural members

24 to 48 hours as may be decided

by the Engineer.

b) Slabs (props left under) 3 Days

c) Beam soffits (props left under) 7 Days

d) Removal of props under slabs :

1) Spanning up to 4.5 m

2) Spanning over 4.5 m

7 Days

14 Days

e) Removal of props under beams

and arches :

1) Spanning up to 6 m

2) Spanning over 6 m

14 Days

21 Days

For other cements, the stripping time recommended for Ordinary Portland Cement shall be

suitably modified. The number, size and position of props left under shall be such as to be able

to safely carry the dead load of the slab, beam or arch, together with any live load likely to

occur during curing or further construction.

Sleeves for through bolts shall not be provided in formwork for liquid retaining structures as

they are potential hazard for leakage. Special device shall be fabricated using two ordinary

M20 nuts separated by two numbers 10 mm rounds welded to opposite flat side of the nuts

or standard water stopper tie-rods (16 dia.) readily available in the market. Standard tie-rods

(16 dia.) with higher load carrying capacity, the required quantity/sqm for forming area will

reduce considerably ultimately reducing the no. of holes in walls.. The faces of the nuts will

have a compressible rubber bush-20 mm thick. The overall dimension of the assembly shall be

50 mm less than the designed thickness of the concrete. Adjusting bolt shall pass through

formwork and will lock into the nuts. While these bolts are tightened, the formwork will travel

inwards. Once the desired dimension is achieved, concrete will be poured. During

deshuttering, the bolts will be removed to loosen the shuttering plates. The depression will

be sealed using suitable concrete sealant.

6.3 Surface Finishes from Formwork

Generally formwork shall be specified as either wrought or unwrought depending on the

required surface finish.

6.4 Unwrought Formwork

Unwrought Formwork shall consist of sawn boards, brick or concrete block work, sheet metal

or other suitable material to give adequate support to the concrete.

Appearance is not of primary importance for this class of formwork.

Surfaces to which plaster, granolithic or other finish is to be applied shall be roughened while

the concrete is still green.

6.5 Wrought Formwork

Wrought formwork shall be provided for concrete surfaces that are required to be finished

smooth. Wrought formwork shall be lined with metal or plywood having smooth surfaces and

edges.

Formwork shall be furnished in largest practicable sizes to minimize the number of joints. Care

shall be taken that there are no irregularities or roughness between successive sections of

shuttering such that finished surfaces shall be free of board or shutter marks. Upon removal

of formwork, surfaces of finished concrete shall be rubbed down with carborundum stone

where necessary to obtain a uniform and smooth appearance.

The finish shall be such as to require no filling of surface pitting, butt fins, surface discoloration

and other minor defects shall be remedied by approved methods.

Rendering of defective concrete as a means of making good will not be permitted except that,

in case of minor porosity on the surface, approval may be given for the surface to be treated

by rubbing down with a cement mortar of the same fine aggregate/cement ratio as the

concrete. The treatment shall occur immediately after removing the formwork. Both cement

and aggregate shall be from the same source as the concrete materials.

Concrete containing honeycombing, major air holes or similar defects shall be cut out and

replaced as directed. No repair shall be executed without approval.

6.6 TIES

Where is required to use internal ties and spacers, their type, spacing and use shall be

approved. No part of any such tie or spacer remaining permanently embedded in the concrete

shall be nearer than the specified cover to the finished surface of the concrete. Wire ties

projecting through the concrete face shall not be permitted.

6.7 Permanent Formwork.

Permanent formwork for elevated concrete floors in steel structures shall be profiled steel

sheet. The sheet shall be of sufficient thickness to sustain all construction loads plus the

weight of fresh concrete between supporting beams without excessive deflection. The

underside of the sheet shall be coated with an approved corrosive resistant paint. The material

shall conform to IS513 (D) / IS 10748 gr.2. The deflection shall be limited to span / 150.The

sheet shall be fixed on the supporting beams at every alternate valley by 10 mm dia fusion

welding with 22 mm dia x 2.5 mm thick

Reinforcing washer. Minimum 100 mm overlap shall be provided. The deck sheet end resting

on wall shall have a seating of 150 mm minimum. Side laps shall be secured with tack welding

to ensure that the slurry does not leak down. End laps shall always be on the supporting walls

or on supporting beams. The overhang of the deck sheet shall be limited to 300 mm maximum.

Temporary supports, wherever advised by the construction manager, shall be firm, un

yielding and at the same level as the permanent supports and shall be in

place till the concrete attains its full strength. While removing the temporary supports, care

shall be taken that the slab is not disturbed.

6.8 Formwork for Vibrated Concrete

If external vibrators are to be used for compacting the concrete, the type of vibrator, design

of the formwork and the method of fixing the vibrators shall all be approved.

6.9 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

Before concreting is commencing the forms and previously cast concrete shall be thoroughly

cleaned and free from all sawdust, tie wire, shavings, dust, dirt and other debris. Temporary

openings shall be provided where necessary to drain away water and remove rubbish.

Release agents shall be applied and be compatible with the class of finish. Care shall be

taken not to contaminate the reinforcement.

7.0 REINFORCEMENT

INDIAN STANDARDS

All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.

Indian Standards to be followed are

1. IS 226 Specification for structural steel standard quality

2. IS 228 Methods for chemical analysis of steels

3. IS 280 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purpose

4. IS 303 Specification for plywood for general purpose.

5. IS 432

Part – 1

Part - 2

Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wires for concrete reinforcement.

Mild steel and Medium tensile steel bars.

Hard drawn steel wire.

6. IS 456 Code of practice for construction and design of reinforced concrete

7. IS 723 Specification for steel counter sunk head wire nails.

8. IS 808 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beams, channels and angle section

9. IS 814 Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel.

10 .

IS 961 Specification for structural steel : high tensile steel bars.

11 .

IS 1139 Hot rolled M.S. medium tensile steel and high field strength deformed bars for concrete reinforcement.

12 .

IS 1387 General requirements for supply of metallurgical materials.

13 .

IS 1599 Method for bend test for steel products other than sheets, strip, wire and tube.

14 .

IS 1608 Method of tensile testing: steel products

15 .

IS 1730

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Dimensions for steel plates, sheets and strip for structural and

general engineering purpose.

Plates

Sheets

Strips

16 .

IS 1786 Specification for cold worked steel high strength deformed

steel bars for concrete reinforcement (Superceding IS 1139)

17 .

IS 1977 Specifications for structural steel : ordinary quality.

18 .

IS 2062 Specification for structural steel : fusion welding quality.

19 .

IS 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete

reinforcement

20

IS 3696

Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders :

. Part 1

Part 2

Scaffolds

Ladders

21 .

IS 4014

(Part 1 & 2)

Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding.

22 .

IS 4082

Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction materials at site.

23 .

IS 8989 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures

24 .

IS 9417 Recommendations for welding cold worked steel bars for reinforced concrete construction.

Reinforcement bars used in construction shall be mild steel or medium tensile round bars and

high strength deformed bars.

7.1 M.S. Plain

7.1.1 Rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel plain round bars used in concrete shall conform

to IS 432 Part I. Steel received shall conform to the following IS with regards to

manufacturing and chemical composition.

1. M.S. bar Grade I Steel designation Fe 410-S of IS 226

2. M.S. bar Grade II Steel designation Fe 410-O of IS 1977

3. Medium Tensile Steel designation Fe 540 W-HT IS 961 Steel bars

7.1.2 National sizes and tolerances shall be as specified in IS 432 Part I. Physical requirements shall be

determined in accordance with IS 1608, read in conjunction with IS 226. For ready reference of

minimum requirements, properties are tabulated in table 11 of the Annexure.

7.2 Tor Steel

7.2.1 High strength deformed bars for use as reinforced in concrete shall be of grade Fe 415, Fe

500 and Fe 550 conforming to IS 1786.

7.2.2 Chemical composition shall conform to IS 1786 when made as a relevant part of IS 228.

Permissible limits shall be as shown in table 12 of the Annexure.

7.2.3 Welding of cold work steel bars in reinforcement shall be permitted as per IS 9417

(Recommendation for welding cold worked steel bars for RCC)

7.2.4 Nominal sizes, cross sectional areas and their mass shall be as specified in IS 1786, allowing

due consideration for tolerance specified therein.

7.3 Physical properties

a) It shall satisfy IS 1599 test for bend and re-bend test in conjunction with IS 226.

b) Bond requirements shall be deemed to have been satisfied if it meets clause 4.0 of IS

1786.

c) Tensile, proof stress and percent elongation shall be as per table 3 of IS 1786 and reproduced as table 13 of Annexure for ready reference.

7.3.1 Material received at site shall have ISI certification mark. Each bundle or coil containing the bars

shall be suitably marked with ISI certification mark. Also bars shall be marked to identify

categories. This shall be done as per IS 1387.

In case bars are without ISI certification mark, the manufacturer shall give a certificate

stating process of manufacturer, chemical composition and mechanical properties. Each

certificate shall indicate the number or identification mark of the batch production / cast to

which it applied. Corresponding number or identification mark should be found on the

material.

7.3.2 All reinforcement material shall be free from loose mill scale, excessive rust, loose rust, pitting,

oil, grease, paint, mud or any foreign deleterious material present on the surface. Cleaning

shall be done to the satisfaction of the EIC.

7.3.3 Each batch brought at site shall be tested prior to use for respective specification / Physical

properties. Cost of all such tests shall be borne by the contractor. Material acceptable as per

IS shall be allowed into the works. All rejected material shall be removed from site by the

contractor within 3 days of rejection. If the same is not done, the EIC shall impose a penalty

of Rest. 500/- per metric ton per day. This will be without any appeal and shall not be

subjected to arbitration.

7.3.4 Reinforcement bars received at site shall be stored on hard concrete platform and clear of the

ground with the use of timber sleeper, concrete sleeper or any other means. Reinforcement

material shall be kept covered by tarpaulins or plastic to avoid corrosion and other

contamination. It is advised to follow storage methods as described in IS 4082.

7.4 Miscellaneous

7.4.1 Cover blocks shall be of non-corrosive material such as plastic but not wooden or broken bricks

or stone. Specially PVC made cover spacers shall be used in the Works. Concrete cover spaces

may me permitted by the EIC. Such concrete spaces shall be cast from concrete and not

cement mortar. Strength of these blocks shall be equal to the strength of concrete in use.

These should be fully cured prior to use in works.

7.4.2 Binding wire shall be 16 or 18 gauge galvanized wire conforming to IS 280 . Binding shall be done

with double wire. It shall be free from rust, oil, paint, grease, loose mill scale or any other

deleterious material undesirable for the reinforcement and concrete or which may prevent

adhesion of concrete with reinforcement.

7.4.3 Deformed bars for concrete reinforcement and rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel

conforming to IS 1139 shall be allowed in construction provided they are approved by the EIC.

7.4.4 it weight payable per meter shall be as follows :

7.4.5

1 6 mm 0.222 kg/Rmt 2 8 mm 0.395 kg/Rmt

3 10 mm 0.617 kg/Rmt

4 12 mm 0.888 kg/Rmt

5 16 mm 1.580 kg/Rmt

6 20 mm 2.47 kg/Rmt

7 25 mm 3.85 kg/Rmt

8 28 mm 4.83 kg/Rmt

9 32 mm 6.63 kg/Rmt

10 36 mm 8.00 kg/Rmt

11 40 mm 9.877 kg/Rmt

7.5 Fabrication of reinforcement

7.5.1 Reinforcement shall be fabricated as per the drawing. Bending shall be done mechanically

with use of machine or if approved with hand but to the correct radius, with proper tools

and platform and shall conform to IS 2502. Bending of material shall be cold bending only.

Material shall be inspected for visible defects such as cracks, brittle, excessive rust, loose mill

scale etc. Cracked ends of bars shall not be used in Works. Also the bars should be free from

any deleterious material and hence the best practice shall be to hose down reinforcement just

prior to concreting.

It is important that bending, straightening, cutting etc. shall be carried out in a manner not

injurious to the material and the safety of the persons working should be ensured.

7.5.2 Anchoring of bars and stirrup shall be provided exactly as detailed in the structural drawing or

as directed by the EIC.

7.6 Lapping of bar

Laps shall be strictly as per the drawing or as directed by the EIC. For general guidance, the

following principles shall be followed as given in IS 456.

a) Splices shall be provided as far as possible away from sections of maximum stress and

be staggered.

b) Not more than half of the total bars shall be spliced at a section.

c) Where more than one half of the bars are spliced at a section or where splices are made

at points of maximum stress, special precautions shall be taken, such as increasing the

length of lap and / or using spirals or closely spaced stirrups around the length of the

splice.

d) Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than 36 mm diameter, for larger diameters,

bars may be welded. In cases where welding is not practical, lapping of bars larger than

36 mm diameter may be permitted and additional spirals should be provided around

the lapped bars.

e) Lap length including anchorage value of hooks in flexural tension shall be Ld (as defined

in 25.2.1 of IS 456) or 30 dia whichever is greater and for direct tension 2 Ld or 30 dia

whichever is greater. The straight length of lap shall not be less than 15 dia or 20 cm.

Where Ld is the development as described in 25.2.1 of IS 456.

f) When splicing of welded wire fabric is to be carried out, lap splices or wires shall be made

so that the overlap measured between the extreme cross wires shall be not less than the

spacing of cross wires plus 10 cm.

g) The lap length in compression shall be equal to the development length in compression,

calculated as described in 25.2.1 of IS 456 or as specified in drawing but not less than 24

dia.

7.7 Spacing of bars

Bars shall be placed in position as shown in the drawing. Following guidelines as given in IS 456

shall be followed in case of difficulties or shall be carried out as directed by the EIC.

a) Horizontal distance between two parallel main reinforcing bars shall usually not be less than

the greatest of the following.

1) The diameter of the bars, if the diameters are equal.

2) The diameter or larger bar, if the diameters are unequal, and

3) 5 mm more than the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate (by using reduced size of

aggregate in congested reinforced area, conditions given hereof should be overcome)

b) Greater horizontal distance should be provided. But when needle vibrators are used, distance

between bars of a group may be reduced to two-third of the nominal maximum size of the

coarse aggregate, provided sufficient space is left between groups of bars to enable the vibrator

to be immersed.

c) Where there are two or more rows, the bars shall be vertically in line and the minimum

vertical distance between the bars shall be 15 mm two third the nominal maximum size of the

aggregate or the maximum size of bar, whichever is more.

7.8 Cover to reinforcement

Reinforcement shall have concrete cover and the thickness of such cover (exclusive of plaster

or other decorative finish) shall be as specified in drawing or as directed by the EIC. The

following guidelines are to be observed in the absence of the above.

a) At each end of the reinforcing bar, not less than 25 mm, nor less than twice the diameter

of such bar.

b) For a longitudinal bar in a column, not less than 40 mm, nor less than the diameter of such bar. In case of columns of minimum dimension of 200mm or under, whose reinforcing bars do not exceed 12 mm, a cover of 25 mm.

c) For longitudinal reinforcing bar in beam, not less than 25 mm, nor less than the diameter of such bar.

d) For tensile, compressive, shear or other reinforcement, in slab not less than 15 mm,

nor less than the diameter of such bar and

e) For any other reinforcement, not less than 15 mm, nor less than the diameter of such bar.

f) Increased thickness shall be provided in case the concrete members are in the surrounding of harmful chemicals; saline atmosphere etc. and the cover shall be 50 mm or more as directed by the EIC.

g) For concrete members totally immersed in seawater, the cover shall be 40 mm more than specified above (a) to (f).

This shall be 50 mm more for periodical immersion in seawater.

h) Concrete cover should not exceed 75 mm in any case. Cover to reinforcement shall be

as specified in the drawing or as directed by the EIC.

Details given in sub para (a) to (h) are for guidance and shall be followed in absence of any specific

direction.

7.9 Fixing in position

Correctly cut and bent bars shall be accurately placed in position as detailed in the drawing.

Unless otherwise specified by the EIC, reinforcement shall be positioned within the tolerance

as under:

a) For effective depth 200 mm or less 10 mm

b) For effective depth more than 200 mm 15 mm

But in no case shall the cover be reduced by more than 5 mm of that specified. There shall

be no compromise on cover for foundation work.

Reinforcing bars shall be held in position during the placing of concrete by use of PVC or

concrete cover blocks (made of equal / of higher grade strength of well-cured concrete in use)

steel chair spacers, steel hangers, supporting wires, etc. and secured by tying with an annealed

binding wire of 16 to 18 gauge as approved by the EIC.

Layer of bars shall be separated by precast concrete spacer blocks or spacer bars.

Reinforcement shall be in correct position prior to start of concreting. No reinforcing bar shall

be placed on freshly laid concrete for adjusting bar spacing. Care shall be taken to maintain

reinforcement in position and keep it clean, throughout the period till it is embedded in the

concrete. For maintaining cover, pieces of broken stone or brick or wooden blocks shall not

be used at any stage.

Binding wire used shall conform to IS 280.

7.10 Welded joints or mechanical connections

7.10.1 Welded joints or mechanical connections in reinforcement may be used but in all cases or

important connections, tests shall be made to prove that the joints are of the full strength of

the connected bars. Welding of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with IS

recommendation.

7.10.2 Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent back into

their original position, care should be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius of the bend

less than 4 bar diameters in case of plain mild steel or 6 bar diameters for deformed

bars. Care shall be taken when bending back bars to ensure that the concrete around is not

damaged / disturbed.

7.10.3 Welding rods used shall conform to IS 814 : covered electrodes for metal arc welding of

structural steel. Work shall be carried out by a competent welder. Samples from Work site

shall be taken at regular. Intervals and tested. Frequency and number of samples shall be as

directed by the EIC.

7.11 Measurements

Reinforcement shall be measured as follows :

1. Lengths of different diameters of bars actually used included authorized overlaps shall

be measured nearest to a centimeter and their weight calculated as given in table 2.4.4

shall be used.

2. Chairs and spacer bars shall not be measured and paid. The contractor shall account for

all these in his quoted price.

3. In case of welded coupled joints, measurement for payment shall be equivalent to the

length of overlap, as per design

4. Price build-up shall include, in addition to cost of material.

a) Cover blocks of PVC or concrete. b) Spacer bars, chairs and unauthorized overlaps (Allowed for convenience) c) Cutting, bending, placing and fixing in position. d) Binding wire as approved. e) Wastage / Rolling margin. f) Cleaning of bars.

5. For purpose of reconciliation, maximum wastage permitted shall be 5% of the actual

material used. Balance shall be charged at 1.5 times the actual market rates as penalty.

7.12 OPENING / INSERTS

7.12.1 All required openings and pockets should be provided as detailed in the drawing. They may

be enumerated or paid on area basis as detailed in the BOQ. The contractor shall provide for

the required materials, labour, for fixing and supporting during concreting. In his quoted

price. It is imperative that all openings and pockets shall be de-shuttered with care and

all corners of openings shall be preserved. All openings/pocked shall be in a correct line

and level. After concreting, the openings shall be secured against any accident by proper

covering and guardrail and warning notice, if any.

The contractor shall clean and grout the pocket at a later date with a non-shrinking compound

added to the grout mix or non-shrinking cement shall be used. It shall be well- cured and

protected to correct line and level till handling over.

7.12.2 Inserts are material such as timber, steel, plastic, and dowels. Bolts, locks, brackets, pipes, etc.

left in concrete partly or fully embedded to receive connection with foreign member at a later

date. These may be fabricated by the contractor or provided by the owner as received from

specialist, manufacturer, etc. These shall be protected from weathering and damage in course

of the construction. The cleaning required after concreting and any treatment such as oiling,

greasing or covering with paint etc. shall be carried out by the contractor at his cost.

7.12.3 It is very important that the providing and fixing as contemplated in the BOQ shall be carried

out with the “utmost precision” and to the entire satisfaction of the EIC. Any deviation from

that as shown in the drawings or instructions shall be rectified by the contractor at his own

cost and responsibility.

7.13 GROUTING

7.13.1 EQUIPMENT:

Grout agitation:

The grout shall be continuously agitated in a suitable mixer with minimum speed of 1000 RPM

and travel of discharge not exceeding 15m per second. The grout shall be maintained on

homogenous state and of uniform consistency so that there is no separation of cement.

7.13.2 GROUT PUMP:

The grout pump shall be positive displacement type and shall be capable of injecting the grout

in a continuous operation and not by way of pulses. The grout pump shall be fitted

with pressure gauge to enable pressure of injection to be controlled. The minimum pressure

the grout to be pumped shall be 3kg/sq.cm and the grout pump shall have a relief

arrangement for by pass of the grout in case the built up pressure is beyond 10kg/sq.cm.

7.13.3 WATER PUMP:

A stand by direct feed high pressure water pump shall be made available at site for an

emergency. In case of any problem due to which the duct cannot be grouted successfully, such

water pump shall immediately by connected to the duct and all grout washed by use of high

pressure water flushing.

7.13.4 GROUT SCREEN

The grouting equipment shall contain a screen having a mesh size of IS 106. Prior to

introduction into the grouting pump. The grout shall be passed through such screen.

7.14 MATERIALS

Only neat cement grout shall be used and the ingredients shall conform to the following

7.14.1 CEMENT

Cement for grouting shall conform to specification laid down in clause of the special

specifications but rapid hardening. Portland cement may be used when grouting is to be done

at temperatures less than 72 degree centigrade. Cement for grouting shall be arranged by the

contractor at his own cost.

7.14.2 WATER

Only clean portable water free from impurities and confirming to clause of special

specifications shall be used for grouting and cleaning of ducts.

7.14.3 ADMIXTURE:

Admixtures may be used after taking prior approval of the consultant only if tests have shown

that their use improves the property of the grout i.e increasing fluidity, reducing

bleeding etc. They shall contain no chloride, nitrate, sulphate or any other ingredients which

may induce corrosion of steel. The admixture, if used shall be at the cost of the contractor.

7.15 GROUT OPENING OR VENTS:

Standard details of fixing outlets and air vents to the ducts anchorage shall be used as

recommended by the supplier of the system of prestressing.

All ducts shall have grout opening at both ends. For this purposes, special openings at both

the ends. For this purposes, special opening shall be provided where such openings are not

available anchorages. Vents shall be provided at all crests and valleys in the duct profile and

at intervals of not more than 15m straight reaches. All grout openings of vents shall include

provisions of preventing grout leakage.

7.16 PROPERTIES OF GROUT:

The water content of the mix shall be kept as low as practicable, consistent with the

workability and the water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45. In most cases, a water/cement

ratio of 0.4 will be preferable when using a neat cement grout.

Before grouting, the contractor shall prepare test specimen to check the properties of the

grout and shall obtain approval of the consultant. The compressive strength of the grout at

7days measured on 100cm cubes, shall be not less than 175kg/sq.cm. The test shall be cured

in moist atmosphere for 24 hours and subsequently in water.

7.17 MIXING OF GROUT

Water shall be added to the mixer first, followed by cement and admixture, if any shall be

added at the last in does as recommended by the manufacturer.

Mixing time shall depend upon the type of mixer but shall in no case be less than 2 minutes.

The grout shall be continuously agitated until it is injected. Once mixed, no water shall be

added to the grout to increase its fluidity. Hand mixing shall not be permitted.

After mixing and before introducing in the grouting pump the grout shall be passed through

grout screen as directed by the Consultant.

7.18 GROUTING OPERATION

The grouting shall be carried oyt as early as practicable after the tendon has been tensioned.

Grouting shall be avoided in very cold weather. In case of stage prestressing cable tension in

the first stage shall not remain ungrouted till all cable are tensioned. While grouting one duct

in stage prestressing the other ducts shall be kept filled with water or by running water in such

ducts till such time the grout sets in the ducts which is being grouted. Afterwards the water

from such ducts shall be drained out or removed with compressed air to prevent corrosion.

Any trace of oil if supplied to steel for preventing corrosion shall be removed before grouting.

The duct shall be removed before grouting. The duct shall be flushed with clean potable water

for cleaning as well as wetting the duct wall immediately before grouting. All the water should

be allowed to drain through lowest vent pipe or by passing compressed air through the duct.

All outlets points including the air vent opening shall be kept open before commencement of

grout injection.

The injection of grout shall be continuous sand shall not be interrupted. Grouting shall be done

from one end only through the opening in the anchorage system. Grout shall be allowed to

flow from vent openings until its consistency at exit is same as that of the grout injected. The

vent openings shall thereafter be firmly closed one after another in the direction of the flow.

Grouting shall be commenced initially with a low pressure of injection of upto 2 kg per sq.cm.

increasing it until the gout cones out of the openings. When all the openings have been closed

one after the other as described in the clause above, injection shall be

continued till the pressure for above one minute before closing the inlet pipe. Care shall be

taken not to rupture the closing the injection grout unnecessarily under high pressure. Under

no circumstances the pressure shall not be allowed to increase beyond 10kg /sq.cm.

Grout not used within 30 minutes of mixing shall be rejected.

All necessary precautions and procedure for grouting shall be followed as per recommended

practice for grouting of post tensioned cables in prestressed concrete works as given in

Appendix 2 of IRC 4S-1985.

8.0 PRESTRESSED / POST TENSION CONCRETE WORK

8.1 GENERAL

No separate specifications are needed for prestressed / Post tension concrete work so far as

concrete work so far as concrete and formwork are concerned. These have been already under.

However, special items like H.T. Steel tendons, anchors, stressing grouting etc. peculiar to pre-

stressing / Post tension are given hereinafter.

8.2 HIGH TENSILE STEEL

H.T. steel to be used in all pre-stressing work shall conform to relevant I.S. Specification listed in 1

of these specifications. Each consignment or batch of H.T. steel supplied at site shall be

accompanied by the manufacturer’s test certificate.

If so desired by the Design Engineer / PMC additional tests on sample of steel taken from the site

consignment shall be carried out by the Contractors at an approved laboratory and at contractors

own cost and the representatives of PMC shall be given necessary facilities to witness such tests.

The wire shall be stored in weather proof sheds on damp proof platforms at least 300mm above

ground level to avoid contamination with soil, ground water etc.

The H.T. steel before being incorporated in the works shall be free from loose rust, scales grease

and similar other deleterious matter liable to adversely affect its bond with concrete / grout. It

shall also be free of kinks, notches and other mechanical defects liable to adversely affect its

strength.

H.T. steel shall be supplied in straight length or in large diameter coil to lay out straight.

8.3 TOOLS AND TACKLES:

The contractor may be asked to procure his own stressing jacks, pumps, sheathing and such other

appurtenances as are necessary for the workmanlike execution of the work and as are prescribed

by the makers of the respective system. The Contractor is bound to supply the PMC all the pertinent

information for the pre-stressing system adopted by him. However the right to accept or reject

any system of pre-stressing, the sufficiency of other precautions, etc. lies with the PMC and his

decision shall be final and binding.

8.4 SHEATHING

In case of post – tensioned prestressed work all tendons shall be properly encased in galvanized

metal sheathing of proper diameter till the final stressing of the tendon is done. The sheathing shall

be strong enough to bear the cable weight or any other incidental loads and impacts applied during

construction. It should also be flexible enough to adopt smooth curvatures of the tendons.

The sheathing and the connection of the same with anchorages or other pieces of sheathing shall

be leakage – tight in order to avoid ingress of cement slurry inside the ducts during concreting and

leakage of grout during grouting. Suitable acceptance tests for achieving the same may be called for

by the Engineer. The thickness of metal strips forming sheathing shall not be less than 0.24 mm

for sheathing upto 48mm I.D. and 0.30mm for sheathing upto 60mm I.D. Higher thickness may be

specified for larger diameter. The density of galvanizing shall not be less than 35 gm / m2 on each

surface.

8.5 ANCHORAGES

The anchoring devices shall be such as to hold the pre-stressing tendons firmly and permanently

and be strong enough to resist in all respects, force equal to at least 92% of breaking strength of the

pre-stressing element in anchors. The minimum elongation of wires when tested for above should

not be less than 1.8%. The anchorages shall transfer effectively and distribute evenly the entire

force from the pre-stressing tendons to the concrete without inducing dangerous secondary

stresses. The anchorages shall be adequately protected against damage and corrosion by encasing

them in concrete.

The maximum permissible slip or take – up during the seating of anchorage shall be specified by the

manufacturer and this shall form part of performance specification for the anchorages accepted for

the works. This slip shall not be exceeded during the actual execution of work.

8.6 TENDONS

The steel wires shall be continuous over the entire length of tendon and joints shall not be

permitted. The tendons shall be carefully and accurately located in the exact position and profiles

and the method of fixing them shall be such that they are not displaced during or compaction of

concrete and during tensioning. Type of fixtures used for positioning of tendons shall be such as not

to give rise to friction greater than prescribed codal limits. The fixtures and the entire scheme of

positioning tendons will be duly approved by PMC>

8.7 STRESSING

After the concrete has reached the required strength as well as has achieved prescribed age,

stressing operation may be undertaken. The pre-stressing job shall be done under supervision of an

experienced supervisor approved by the PMC and in the presence of an authorized representative

of the PMC. The force in tendons shall be measured by means of calibrated and approved pressure

gauges attached to the tensioning apparatus as well as by measuring the extension of steel and

relating it to stress – strain curve as per IS : 1343. Variation upto a limit of 5% either for force or

elongation will be normally accepted. Variations beyond the above limits shall be reported to the

PMC.

The instructions entered on drawings shall be carefully followed. The Contractor shall forward 3

copies of the entire stressing and elongation data to the PMC in prescribed form. The data so

forwarded will bear signature, both pf representative of PMC and the Contractor’s supervisor

present during stressing. The data shall be true and faithful record of actual measurements at site.

All the equipment such as dial gauges etc. will be checked periodically and check certificates

obtained for record.

8.8 GROUTING

All the tendons will be fully grouted as early as practicable as and not later than 48 hours after they

are finally stressed unless otherwise permitted by the PMC.

The grouting holes shall be left in concrete at such places and in such manner as directed by PMC.

The cable ducts will be first cleaned by passing compressed air through them in order to see than

no obstructions to passage of grout exist. They will then be cleaned thoroughly by water after which

grouting will be started. The grout shall be made to the consistency of thick paste with water cement

ration not exceeding 0.60. After flushing the ducts thoroughly as indicated above, grout will be

injected under a pressure of 3.5 to 7 kg / cm2 from one end till it overflows at the other end of the

duct. Grouting shall be continued till all the water in the duct is expelled and the consistency of the

grout emerging at the exit and is the same as that of the grout being pumped in. The exit end will

then be plugged and grouting continued till pressure gauge consistently records the pressure of

grout being injected.

Necessary tests of consistency, blending and strength shall be carried out for finally deciding upon

the grout mix.

Regrouting will be done to fill up the space formed as a result of settlement of grout after minimum

24 hours.

TOLERANCE IN PRESTRESSING CABLES:

Prestressed concrete cables will be laid such that their profile is a smooth curve unless otherwise

specified.

The alignment tolerances shall be as under:-

Member with a depth of Tolerance in direction of depth‘d’ of

members

upto 210mm + or – d / 40

210 – 1000mm wide + or – 5mm

more than 1000mm + or – 10mm

Tolerance in direction of width

of member @

the level of tendon.

upto 210mm + or – 5mm

210 – 1000 m wide + or – 10mm

than 1000mm wide + or – 21mm

68

TABLE – 1 (Sec. II 2.2.2, 2.3.2.1)

LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS (AGGREGATES)

[IS 383 – Table 1]

SR. NO.

DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCE

METHOD OF TEST

FINE AGGREGATE PERCENTAGE BY

COARSE AGGREGATE PERCENTAGE BY

(1) (2) (3) (4) Weight,

Max Uncrushed

(5) Weight,

Max Crushed

(6)

Uncrushed

(7)

Crushed

i) Coal and lignite IS : 2386

(Part – II)

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

ii) Clay Lumps

- do -

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

iii) Material finer than 75 –

(MU) IS Sieve

IS : 2386

(Part – I)

3.00

15.00

3.00

3.00

iv) Soft fragments IS : 2386

(Part – II)

--

--

3.00

--

v) Shale IS : 2386

(Part – II)

1.00

--

--

--

vi) Total of percentage of

all deleterious materials

(except mica) including

Sl. No. (i) to (v) for Col.

4,6 and 7 and Sl. No. (i)

and (ii) for Col. 5 only

--

5.00

2.00

5.00

5.00

Note: - 1 The Presence of mica in the fine aggregate has been found to reduce

considerably the durability and compressive strength of concrete and further investigations are

underway to determine and extent of the deleterious effect of mica. It is advisable, therefore, to

investigate the mica content of fine aggregate and make suitable allowance for the possible

reduction in the strength of concrete mortar.

Note: - 2 The aggregate shall not contain harmful organic impurities (tested in accordance

with IS : 2386 [part – ii]) in sufficient quantities to affect adversely the strength or durability of

concrete. A fine aggregate which fails in the test for organic impurities may be used, provided

that, when tested for the effect of organic impurities on the strength of mortar, the relative

69

strength at 7 and 28 days, reported in accordance with 7 of IS : 2386 [ Part – VI] – 1963 is not

less than 95% percent.

70

TABLE – 2 (Sec. II 2.2.4)

GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATES

[IS 383 – Table 2]

IS Sieve

Designatio

n

Percentage passing for single – sized

Aggregate of Nominal Size

Percentage passing for Graded

Aggregate of Nominal Size

63 mm

40 mm

20 mm

16 mm

12.5 mm

10 mm

40 mm

20 mm

16 mm

12.5 mm

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

80 mm 100 -- -- -- -- -- 100 -- -- --

63 mm 85 to

100

100

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

40 mm

0 to 30

85 to 100

100

--

--

--

95 to 100

100

--

--

20 mm

0 to 5 0 to

20

85 to

100

100

--

-- 30 to

70

95 to

100

100

100

16 mm

--

--

-- 85 to

100

100

--

--

-- 90 to

100

--

12.5 mm

--

--

--

-- 85 to

100

100

--

--

--

90 to 100

10 mm

0 to 5 0 to

5

0 to

20

0 to

30

0 to

45

85 to

100

10 to

35

25 to

55

30 to

70

40 to 85

4.75 mm

--

-- 0 to

5

0 to 5

0 to 10

0 to 20

0 to 5 0 to

10

0 to 10

0 to 10

2.36 mm -- -- -- -- -- 0to 5 -- -- -- --

71

TABLE – 3 (Sec. II 2.2.4)

ALL-IN-AGGREGATE GRADING

[IS 383 – Table 5]

IS Sieve Designation

Percentage for ALL IN Aggregate of

40 mm Nominal Size

20 mm Nominal Size

(1) (2) (3)

80 mm 100 --

40 mm 95 to 100 100

20 mm 45 to 75 95 to 100

4.75 mm 25 to 45 30 to 50

600 micron 8 to 30 10 to 35

150 micron 0 to 6 0 to 6

72

TABLE – 4 (Sec. II 2.2.3) GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATES [IS 383 – Table 4]

IS Sieve Designation

Percentage Passing for

Grading Zone I Grading Zone II Grading Zone

III

Grading Zone

IV

10 mm 100 100 100 100

4.75 mm 90 to 100 90 to 100 90 to 100 95 to 100

2.36 mm 60 to 95 75 to 100 85 to 100 95 to 100

1.18 mm 30 to 70 55 to 90 75 to 100 90 to 100

600 micron 15 to 34 35 to 59 60 to 79 80 to 100

300 micron 5 to 20 8 to 30 12 to 40 15 to 50

150 micron 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 15

NOTE – 1 For crushed stone sands, the permissible Limit on 150 micron IS Sieve is

increased to 20 percent. This does not affect the 5 percent allowance permitted in 4.5 applying to other sieve sizes.

NOTE – 2 Fine Aggregate complying with the requirements of any grading zone in this table is suitable for concrete but the quality of concrete produced will depend upon a number of factors including proportions.

NOTE – 3 Where concrete of high strength and good durability is required, fine aggregate conforming to any one of the four grading zones may be used, but the concrete mix should be properly designed. As the fine aggregate grading becomes progressively finer, the is, from Grading Zones I to IV, the ratio of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate should be progressively reduced. The most suitable fine to coarse ratio to be used for any particular mix will, however, depend upon the actual grading, particle shape and surface texture of both fine and coarse aggregates.

NOTE – 4 It is recommended that fine aggregate conforming to Grading Zone IV should not be used in reinforced concrete unless tests have been made to ascertain the suitability of proposed mix proportions.

73

TABLE – 5 (Sec. II 2.3.4)

MOISTURE CONTENT & BULKING PERCENTAGE RELATION FOR SAND

Moisture - Content %

by weight

Bulking & (Volume)

2 15

3 20

4 25

5 30

74

TABLE – 6 (Sec. II 2.5.2)

PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR SOLIDS (in water)

Permissible Limit, Maximum

Organic 200 mg/l

Inorganic 3000 mg/l

Sulphates (as SO4) 400 mg/l

Chlorides (as C1) 2000 mg/l for plain concrete work and 500 mg/l for reinforced concrete work

Suspended matter 2000 mg/l

75

TABLE – 7 (Sec. II 3.1.1)

GRADE OF CONCRETE

[IS 456 – TABLE 2]

GRADE DESIGNATION SPECIFIED CHARACTERISTIC

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS

1 2 [N/Sqmm]

M 10 10

M 15 15

M 20 20

M 25 25

M 30 30

M 35 35

M 40 40

M 45 45

M 50 50

NOTE – 1 In the designation of a concrete of mix, letter M refers to the mix and the

number to the specified characteristic compressive strength of 15 cm cube at 28 days, expressed in N/Sqmm.

NOTE – 2 M 5 and M 7.5 grade of concrete may be used for lean concrete bases and simple foundations for masonry walls. These mixes need not be designed.

NOTE – 3 Grades of concrete lower than M 15 shall not be used in reinforced concrete.

76

TABLE – 8 (Sec. II 3.1.1)

MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT, MAXIMUM WATER – CEMENT RATIO AND MINIMUM GRADE

OF CONCRETE FOR DIFFERENT EXPOSURES WITH NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES OF 20 MM

NOMINAL MAXIMUM SIZE

[Clauses – 6.1.2, 8.2.4.1 and 9.1.2 Table 5]

EXPOSURE PLAIN CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

Minimum Cement Content

Maximum Free Water Cement Ratio

Minimum Grade of Concrete

Maximum Cement Content

Maximum Free Water – Cement Ratio

MAXIMUM Grade of Concrete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Kg/m3 Kg/m3

Mild 220 0.60 300 0.55 M – 20

Moderate 240 0.60 M – 15 300 0.50 M – 25

Severe 250 0.50 M – 20 320 0.45 M – 30 Very severe 260 0.45 M – 20 340 0.45 M – 35

Extreme 280 0.40 M - 25 360 0.40 M – 40

NOTE – 1 Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective of cement and it is

inclusive of additions mentioned in 5.2 The additions such as fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag may be taken into account in the concrete composition with respect to the cement content and water cement ratio if the suitability is established and as long as the maximum amounts taken into account do not exceed the limit of pozzolona and slag specified in IS: 1489 (part: 1) and IS: 455 respectively.

NOTE – 2 Minimum grade for plain concrete under mild exposure condition is not specified

77

TABLE – 9 (Sec. II 3.1.2)

REQUIREMENT FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE ATTACK

[Clauses 8.2.2.4 and 9.1.2 – Table 4]

CLASS CONCENTRATION OF SULPHATES

EXPRESSED AS SO3

TYPE OF CEMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR DENSE FULLY COMPACTED CONCRETE MADE WITH AGGREGATE COMPLYING WITH IS : 383- 1970*

IN SOIL IN GROUND

WATER

TOTAL

SO3

(PERCE

NT)

SO3 IN 2:1

WATER

EXTRACT g/l

(PARTS PER

100 000)

MINIMUM

CEMENT

CONTENT

MAXIMUM

FREE WATER /

CEMENT RATIO

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1) Traces

Less

than

0.2

Less then

1.0

Less than

0.3

Ordinary Portland

cement or Portland

slag cement or Portland

Pozzolana

cement

280 kg/m3 0.55

2) 0.2 to

0.5

1.0 to 1.9 0.3 to 1.2 Ordinary Portland

cement or Portland

slag cement or

Portland Pozzolana

cement

Supersulphated

cement or sulphate

resisting portland

cement

330 kg/m3

310 kg/m3

0.50

0.50

3) 0.5 to

1.0

1.9 to 3.1 1.2 to 2.5 Supersulphated

cement or sulphate

resisting portland

330 kg/m3 0.50

78

cement

Portland Pozzolana

cement or Portland

slag cement

350 kg/m3 0.45

4) 1.0 to

2.0

3.1 to 5.0 2.5 to 5.0 Supersulphated or

sulphate resisting

portland cement

370 kg/m3 0.45

5) More

then

2.0

More then

5.0

More then

5.0

Sulphate resisting

portland cement or

Supersulphated

cement with protective

coatings

400 kg/m3 0.40

Notes

1. Cement content given in this table is irrespective of grades of cement.

2. Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the prevailing temperature is

above 40 0C.

3. Supersulphated cement given an acceptable life provided that concrete is dense and

prepared with a water cement ratio of 0.4 or less, in mineral acids, down to pH 3.5.

4. The cement contents given in col 6 of this table are the minimum recommended. For SO3

contents near the upper limit of any class, cement content above this minimum are advised.

5. For server conditions, such as thin section under hydrostatic pressure on one side only and

sections partly immersed, considerations should be given to a further reduction of water cement

ratio.

6. Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455 with slag content more then 50 percent exhibits

better sulphate resisting properties.

7. Where chloride is encountered along with sulphates in soil or ground water, ordinary

Portland cement with C3A content from 5 to 8 percent shall be desirable to be used in

concrete, instead of sulphate resisting cement. Alternatively, Portland slag cement conforming

to IS 455 having more then 50 percent slag or a blend of ordinary Portland cement and slag

may be used provided sufficient information is available on performance of blended cements

in these conditions.

79

TABLE – 10 (Sec. II 3.1.3)

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CUBE EXPECTED FOR PRELIMINARY & WORK SITE

CONCRETE MIX

SPECIFIED STRENGTH

28TH DAY CUBES TEST 7TH DAY WORK

Kg/Sqcm. PRELIMINARY

TEST Kg/Sqcm.

WORKSITE TEST

Kg/Sqcm.

Kg/Sqcm.

M 10 100 135 100 70

M 15 150 200 150 100

M 20 200 260 200 135

M 25 250 320 250 170

M 30 300 380 300 200 M 40 400 510 400 265

NOTE – 1 This table applies only to concrete made with 20 mm aggregate complying with the requirement of IS : 383 – 1970* placed in near-neutral ground water of pH 6 to 9, containing naturally occurring sulphates but not contaminants, such as ammonium salts. For 40 mm aggregate the value may be reduced by about 15 percent and for 12.5 mm aggregate, the value may be increased by about 15 percent. Concrete prepared from ordinary Portland cement would not be recommended in acidic conditions (pH 6 or less). Super sulphated cement gives an acceptable life, in minerals acids, down to pH 3.5, provided that the concrete is dense and prepared with a water / cement ratio of 0.4 or less.

NOTE – 2 The cement contents given in class 2 are the minimum recommended. For SO3

contents near the upper limits of class 2, cement contents above these minimum are advised.

NOTE – 3 Where the total SO3 in Col. 2 exceeds 0.5 percent, then a 2:1 water extract may result in a lower site classification if much of the sulphate is present as low solubility calcium sulphate.

NOTE – 4 For severe conditions such as thin sections under hydrostatic pressure on one side only and sections partly immersed, considerations should be given to a further reduction of water-cement ratio, and if necessary an increase in the cement content to ensure the degree of workability needed for full compaction and thus minimum permeability.

NOTE – 5 Portland slag cement conforming to IS : 455 with slag content more than 50 percent exhibits better sulphate resisting properties.

NOTE – 6 Ordinary Portland cement with the additional requirement that C3 A content be not more than 5 percent and 2 C3 A + C4 AF (or its solid solution 4 Cao, Al2

O3, Fe2 O3 + 2CaO, Fe2 O3) be not more than 20 percent may be used in place of super sulphated cement.

* Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete (second revision)

80

TABLE – 11 (Sec. III 2.1.2)

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF BARS

MILD STEEL & MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS

[IS 432 Table – 1]

SR. NO.

TYPE AND NOMINAL SIZE OF BARS

ULTIMATE TENSILE STRESS

YIELD STRESS

ELONGATION* PERCENT

MIN. MIN. MIN.

1. Mild Steel Grade I

For bars up to and including 410 250 23

20 mm 410 240 23

For bars over 20 mm, upto

and including 50 mm

2. Mild Steel Grade II

For bars up to and including 370 225 23

20 mm 370 215 23

For bars over 20 mm, upto

and including 50 mm

3. Medium Tensile Steel

For bars up to and including 540 350 20

16 mm 540 340 20

For bars over 16 mm, upto 510 330 20

and including 32 mm

For bars over 32 mm, upto

and including 50 mm

* Elongation on a gauge length 5.65 √So where so is the cross sectional area of the test piece.

81

TABLE – 12 (Sec. III 2.2.2)

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS

[IS 1786]

Constituent For ladle analysis of steel

when made as per relevant parts of IS 228 Percent Maximum*

For product analysis Variation, Over Specified Maximum Limit, Percent, Max

Fe 415 Fe 500 Fe 550 Limit % Maximum

Carbon 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.02

Sulphur 0.060 0.055 0.055 0.005

Phosphorus 0.060 0.055 0.050 0.005

Sulphur & Phosphorus 0.11 0.105 0.10 0.010

* NOTE – 1

For guaranteed weld ability, the percentage of carbon shall be restricted to 0.25 percent maximum.

* NOTE – 2

Addition of micro alloying elements is not mandatory for any of the above grades. When strengthening elements like Nb, V, B and Ti are used individually or in combination, the total contents shall not exceed 0.30 percent; in such case manufacturer shall supply the purchaser or his authorised representative a certificate stating that the total contents of the strengthening elements in the steel do not exceed the specified limit.

82

TABLE – 13 (Sec. III 2.2.5)

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF HIGH STRENGTH

DEFORMED BARS AND WIRES

[IS 1786 Table – 3]

SR. NO.

PROPERTY GRADE

Fe 415 Fe 500 Fe 550

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) 0.2 percent proof stress/yield stress, Min, N/Sqmm.

415.0 500.0 550.0

ii) Elongation, percent, Min, on gauge length 5.65 VA, where A is the cross sectional area of the test piece.

14.5 12.0 8.0

iii) Tensile strength, Min 10 percent more than the actual 0.2 percent proof stress but not less than 485.0 N/Sqmm.

8 percent more than the actual 0.2 percent proof stress but not less than 545.0 N/Sqmm.

6 percent more than the actual 0.2 percent proof stress but not less than 585.0 N/Sqmm.

83

TABLE – 14 TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CLAUSE 55 OF GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRAC

LIST OF MANDATORY TESTS

Material Test Field / Laboratory Test

Test Procedure

Min quantity of material / work for carrying out the test

Frequency of testing

1 2 3 4 5 6

Lime Chemical and Physical Properties of lime

Laboratory IS:6932(Part I to X 1973)

5 tonnes of lime

As decided by the PMC

Sand (a) Silt contents Field As per relevant IS Code of Practice

20 cu m Every 20 cum or part there of or more frequently as decided by the PMC

(b) Particle size distribution

Field or laboratory as decided by the PMC Field

----DO--- 20 cum ----DO---

(c) Bulking of sand Field -----DO-- 20 cum ----DO---

Stone Aggregate

(a)Percentage of soft or deleterious material

Generally visual inspection Laboratory test where reqd by the PMC or so specified

IS:2386 (Part II) 1963

As reqd by the PMC

(b) Particle size distribution

Field or lab as reqd by the PMC

As per the relevant IS code of Practice

45 cum For every 45 cum or part thereof as decided by the PMC

(c) Ten percent Fine value

Laboratory ----DO--- 45 cum Initial test and subsequent test as and when reqd

84

by the PMC

Cement concrete or reinforced cement concrete not leaner than 1:3:6.

Slump test Field ----DO---- 15 cum 15 cum or part thereof or more frequently as reqd by the PMC

Reinforced cement concrete

Cube strength Laboratory As per the relevant IS Code of Practices

15 cum 15 cum or part thereof or more frequently as reqd by the PMC

Bricks Testing of Bricks for compressive strength ,water absorption , efflorescences and dimensions

Laboratory ----DO---- For every 50,000 bricks or part thereof subject to change of brand of bricks or as reqd by PMC

Marble (a) Moisture absorption

Cost of marble work

Rs.10,000/- or part there of or as reqd by the PMC

(b) Mhos scale hardness test

Laboratory IS : 1124- 1974

Rs.10,000/-

Timber Moisture contents Field, Laboratory test in case of dispute

As per the relevant IS code of Practice.

1 cum Every one cum or part thereof

Flush Door 1. End immersion test.

As per sampling and testing specified in col.2

2 Knife test Laboratory IS : 2202 Part I- 1973

1 shutters 3 Adhesion

Aluminium door or window fitting

Thickness of anodic coating

Laboratory

IS : 5523- 1969

If the cost of fitting exceed Rs.50,000/-

Rs.50,000/- or part there of if reqd by PMC

Mortice

Testing of spring

Laboratory

As per the

50 Nos

100 and

85

locks relevant IS Code of Practice

beyond one for each 100 lock.

Steel (if arranged by contractor)

(a) Tensile strength

(b) Bend test

Laboratory IS : 1599- 1974

20 Tonnes Every 20 tonnes or part thereof

Terrazo tiles

1. Transverse strength

2. Water absorption

3. Abrasion test

Laboratory IS : 1237- 1959

2,000 tile 2,000 tile or part thereof

White glazed tiles

1. Water absorption

2. Crazing test 3. Impact

strength test

Laboratory IS : 777- 1970

3,000 Nos 3,000 Nos or part thereof

STRUCTURAL STEEL

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

1.1 Scope of Specifications

This section shall apply to the fabrication and erection of steel structures for all general

purposes.

The work shall include the supply, delivery, off-loading and erection, and unless

otherwise stated, fastening and fittings of every type which are described in or implied

by this specification whether shown on the Drawings or not, and shall include every

detail required for the works complete in position and in perfect state including shop

drawings etc. The works shall be generally as shown on the Drawings as to overall

dimensions and sizes.

2.0 SHOP DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of detailed working and shop

drawings and schedules of all structural steelwork. Fabrication shall not commence until

(1) set of the shop drawings has been returned to the Contractor and stamped by the

Engineer as approved for fabrication.

86

Shop drawings shall be in metric units and shall clearly show all sizes, dimensions,

markings, connections, splices etc. and shall set out the positions, sizes and lengths of all

welds as are necessary for the complete fabrication, assembly and erection of the

steelwork. Marking plans and sufficient elevations shall be included in the shop drawings

to define the positions of all members detailed. Splices may be made only where shown

on the approved shop drawings.

The Contractors in advance of the actual fabrication shall prepare shop Drawings. These

drawings should clearly distinguish between the shop and field bolts and welds. A

marking diagram allotting distinct identification marks to each separate piece of steel

work shall be prepared on the shop drawing. The shop drawings shall be sufficient to

ensure convenient assembly and erection at site. They shall be submitted in triplicate to

the Consultant for their scrutiny. One copy will be returned within 14 days to the

Contractor with the Consultant’s comments for amendment of the drawings and re-

submission till final approval. The Contractor should provide for this period of

submission and re-submission as often as required, in determining the total contractual

time for completion of works. The Consultant will not scrutinize the shop drawings for

numbering off the components or for dimensional accuracy of fit. The shop drawings

shall have to be updated to incorporate changes and revisions during the progress of the

work and finally a triplicate set of As-Built drawings are to be submitted.

No other substitutions in sizes or shapes of members shall be made without prior

approval and no variation to the details shown on the shop drawings shall be made

unless authorised by the Consultant. Minor details not shown on the drawings shall

conform to the relevant Indian code and to the approval of the Consultant.

The Contractor shall note that the Consultant for general conformity with the contract

Drawings and Specification check shop drawings only. The responsibility of all aspects of

the fabrications remains with the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for checking closing dimensions and detail where

new work connects to existing. The Consultant for lack of fit will consider no payment

for extras.

87

3.0 MATERIALS

3.1 Rolled Sections and Plates

All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of any one of the following

Indian Standards as specified.

IS800 – 1984 Code of Practice for General Construction Steel

IS 2062 - 1992 (MTD) 4 Structural Steel (Standard quality/Fusion welding

quality) / Wieldable Structural Steel

IS 1975-1977 Structural Steel (Ordinary) Fe 410-0

ISP 6 (I) - 1964 Handbook for Engineers (Structural Steel Section)

IS 262 - 1975 Structural Steel (Standard Quality) 5th Revision

Structural steel not conforming to the requirements of any of the above standards may

be used only if permitted in writing by the Consultant. This permission may be granted

after the steel is tested for yield point stress, ultimate tensile stress, elongation,

ductility, weldibility or any other property as required by the Consultant.

The Contractor shall furnish a mill certified report, in triplicate, of the tests for each

grade of steel from which the material is to be fabricated. The certification shall contain

the results of chemical and physical tests required by the specification for the material.

In the event the results of any test are not in conformance with the requirements of

these specifications, the Consultant reserves the right to make additional mill and

laboratory tests. When additional tests are required, the Contractor shall furnish, cut

and machine additional test specimens in accordance with I.S. requirements. The

additional costs of furnishing, cutting and machining additional test specimens shall be

borne by the Contractor.

The Consultant at his discretion may require conducting radiographic and/or other non-

destructive tests on material, welds and workmanship to ensure that the requirements

as described in the codes, specifications and drawings are achieved. Any rectification

and/or replacement of faulty material or workmanship shall be at the Contractors

expense. Remedial work shall not be carried out without prior approval of the Engineer.

88

Costs of satisfactory testing shall be to the Employers expense. Costs of re-testing areas,

which are unsatisfactory, or of extensive testing to isolate unsatisfactory areas will be

charged to the Contractor.

3.2 Cold Formed Sections

Steel and strip used for making these sections shall conform to

IS 1079 - 1994 Specifications for light gauge structural quality hot rolled carbon

steel sheet and strip.

3.3 Bolts & Nuts

All bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of

IS: 1367 -1967 Technical supply conditions of threaded fasteners. (First Revision)

All mild steel for bolts and nuts in accordance with IS: 1680-1960 Method for Tensile

Testing of Steel Products Other than Sheet, Strip, Wire and Tube and IS: 1367-1960

Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners shall have a tensile strength of not

less than 44 kg/mm2, and a minimum elongation of 23 percent on a gauge length of

3.65A.

3.4 Washers

Plain washers shall be made of steel conforming to IS: 226-1962 Specification for

Structural Steel (Standard Quality) (Third Revision), or St 44-O of IS: 1977-1962

Specification for Structural Steel (Ordinary), or IS: 2062-1992 Specification for Structural

Steel Fusion Welding Quality).

3.5 Electrodes

They shall conform to the requirements of the following Indian Standards as specified.

IS: 814 - 1991 Specifications for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel.

Part 1 and 2.

IS: 816 - 1996 Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal arc welding of mild

steel and low alloy high-tensile steel.

89

IS: 822 - 1970 Code of procedure for inspection of welds.

The electrode to be used for all steel welding unless otherwise advised shall be E6013 60

KSE UTS.

3.6 Filler Wire & Flux

The filler wire & flux combination for submerged arc welding shall conform to the

requirements for the desired application as laid down in IS 3613 - 1974, Acceptance tests

for wire flux combination for submerged arc welding.

3.7 Dimensions and Tolerances

The dimensions, form, weight, and tolerances of all hot rolled shapes (and other

members) shall conform to the following Indian Standards and other relevant standards:

IS 1852-1985 Specifications for rolling and cutting tolerance for hot rolled steel products.

IS 808 - 1989 Dimensions for hot rolled steel Sections

IS: 1730-1989 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and general

engineering Purposes.

IS 1732-1989 Dimensions for round and square steel bars for structural & general

engineering purpose.

IS 7215-1974 Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures.

Cold Formed Sections

The dimensions and tolerances of all cold formed light gauge structural steel sections shall

conform to Clauses 5 & 6 of IS: 811-1987, specifications for cold formed light gauge

structural steel sections.

3.8 Bolts, Nuts & Washers

The dimensions and tolerances of all bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the

requirements of the following Indian Standards.

IS 6639-1970 Specifications for hexagon bolts for steel structures.

IS 5624-1993 Specifications for foundations bolts

90

IS 6761-1994 Specification for countersunk head screws with hexagon socket.

3.9 Welds and Welding

For requirements of welds and welding, reference shall be made as per IS: 816-1969

code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in Mild Steel.

Other materials used in association with steel work shall, wherever appropriate Indian

Standard specifications for the materials exist, conform to such specifications.

4.0 FABRICATION

4.1 Workmanship

Workmanship shall be of the highest quality for all phases of the work. Supervising

engineers, welding supervisors and welders shall be qualified in accordance with the

Standards and Codes designated. The Contractor shall not adopt any practice, which will

damage materials.

The whole of the structural steel fabrications shall be done in the Contractors workshop

unless specific approval has been obtained from the Engineer for the sub-contracting of

any part of the work prior to the placing of the sub-contract.

All steel shall be new and each member shall be free from any butt-welded or other form

of splice for the full length between joints shown in or indicated by the drawings unless

such splice shall have been shown in the approved shop drawings and/or approved in

writing.

Steel sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. Under no circumstances can any other

member size or type be made without the written approval of the Consultant who will

consider only written application showing specified size and dimensions and required

substitute size and dimensions.

Clamps, magnets, holding devices or other setting up fixtures shall be used in assembling

structural members in order to avoid tack welding whenever practicable.

Finished members shall be free from kinks or bends. Shearing shall be accurately done,

and all portions of the work neatly finished. Corners shall be square and true, unless

91

otherwise shown on the drawings. Where shearing cannot make re-entrant cuts, a

rectangular punch may be used. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted, unless otherwise

approved by the Consultant. Approved dies shall make bends, except for minor details, or

bending rolls. Where heating is required, precautions shall be taken to avoid overheating

the metal and it shall be allowed to cool in such a manner as not to destroy the original

properties of the metal. Hammer marks shall not be evident. Steel with welds will not be

accepted, except where welding is definitely specified, called for on the Drawings, or

otherwise approved. All bolts, nuts, and screws shall be tight. The ends of pipes, except

for hand railing, shall be reamed.

Fabrication in general shall conform to the requirements of IS 800-1984, Code of practice

for use of structural steel in general building construction

4.2 Strengthening

All materials before being laid off or worked shall be straight and free from twist. If

rectification is necessary, it shall be affected by cold working and applying pressure, but

not by hammering or any other method that will affect or injure the metal. Material with

kinks or bends shall be rejected.

4.3 Dimensional Tolerances for Structural Work

Dimensions shall be measured by means of an approved calibrated steel tape of the same

temperature as the structure at the time of measurement.

An allowable variation of 1 mm is permissible in the overall length of members with both ends

milled. Members without milled ends, which are to be assembled to other steel parts of the

structures, shall not deviate from the dimensions shown on the drawings by more than 1.8

mm for members 10 meters or less in length, and by not more than 3 mm for members over

10 meters in length.

The erection clearance for cleared ends of members connecting steel to steel should

preferably be not greater than 2.0 mm at each end. The erection clearance at ends of

beams without web cleats should be not more than 3 mm at each end, but where, for

92

b) Drilled or reamed holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the surface. They shall

practicable reasons, greater clearance is necessary, suitably designed seating should be

provided.

4.4 Cutting

Cutting shall be affected by shearing, cropping, sawing or gas cutting and shall be

reasonably square and free from distortion with all burrs removed. If directed by the

Consultant the edges shall be ground afterwards.

For gas cutting high tensile steel, sufficient metal shall be left beyond the required profile

so that all metal that has been flame hardened cube removed later by machining. Except

where the material is subsequently joined by welding, no load- transmitting surface shall

be gas cut.

Plates in built-up members shall be end and edge planed, except where flats with square

edges are used. Plates specified to be planed, milled or chipped, shall be cut in the first

instance to such size as to allow 3 mm to be planed, milled or chipped, from the sides

and ends. Edges of gussets up to and including 8 mm in thickness may be sheared in a

machine, which can take the full side in one cut. Planning, milling or grinding shall prepare

edges of gussets of greater thickness.

Edge preparation for surfaces to be welded shall be carried out by grinding planning but

not shearing or cropping.

4.5 Drilling and Punching

a) Holes through more than one thickness of material for members, such as compound

stanchion and girder flanges shall be drilled after the members are assembled and tightly

clamped or bolted together. Punching may be permitted before assembly, provided the

holes are punched 3 mm less in diameter than the required size and reamed, after

assembly, to the full diameter. The thickness of material punched shall be not greater

than 16 mm.

93

h) All holes shall be free of burrs, fins and other defects

not be more than 1.5 mm larger than the specified diameter of bolts up to and

including 25 mm in diameter.

c) When holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separable parts, these

parts, when so specified by the Consultant, shall be separated after drilling and the burrs

removed.

d) Holes in connecting angles and plates, other than splices, roof members and light framing,

may be punched full size though material not over 13 mm thick, except where required

for close tolerance or barrel bolts.

e) Matching holes for bolts shall register with each other so that a gauge of 1.5 mm or 2.0

mm (as the case may be, depending on whether the diameter of the bolt is less than or

more than 25 mm) less in diameter than the diameter of the hole will pass freely though

the assembled members in the direction at right angle to such members. Finished holes

shall be not more than 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) in diameter larger than

the diameter of the rivet or black bolt passing through them, unless otherwise specified

by the Consultant.

f) Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a diameter equal to the nominal

diameter of the shank or barrel subject to H8 tolerance specified in IS: 919-1959

Recommendations for Limits and Fits for Engineering. Preferably, parts to be connected

with close tolerance or barrel bolts shall be firmly held together by tacking bolts on

clamps and the holes drilled through all the thickness at one operation and subsequently

reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all thickness at one operation shall be drilled

to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not practicable, the parts

shall drilled and reamed separately through hard bushed steel jigs.

g) A gas cutting process shall not form holes for bolts.

94

Snug tightening shall be achieved by using a standard wrench to ensure intimate positive

i) No holes shall be drilled in structural members at locations other than those indicated on

the drawings unless approved in writing by the Consultant.

4.6 Assembly

The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted

nor otherwise damaged, and shall be prepared that the specified combers, if any, are

provided.

4.7 Bolts, Pins, Nuts and Washers

4.7.1 General

All bolts shall be of such a length that at least one full thread but not more than 12mm of

the threaded part of the bolt is exposed beyond the nut, after the nut has been tightened.

Bolts shall comply with IS: 281 and IS: 3757.

All bolts shall be fitted with one washer under the nut. Where a nut or bolt bears on an

inclined surface, a leveled washer of the correct shape shall be used between the surfaces.

Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the

heads and nuts of bolts a satisfactory bearing.

Bevelled washers shall not be allowed to move out of their correct positions during fabrication

and erection. No connection shall be made with less than two bolts and both shall be not less

than 16 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated on the drawing.

In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be

provided with a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid any threaded

portion of the bolt being within the thickness of the parts bolted together.

4.7.2 Bolt Tightening

Bolts shall be "snug tightened" as defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an

impact wrench or by the full effort of a man using a standard podgier spanner

95

Members to be welded shall be securely held in their relative position during welding,

contact between mating surfaces. Bolts, nuts and washers that are snug tightened shall

be hot dipped galvanized and centrifugally spun to remove excess spelter.

5.0 WELDING

5.1 Welding Steel

a) All welders to be employed on the works shall be qualified to an appropriate standard as

per the procedures outlined in the relevant Indian Standard. Testing of all welders shall be

carried out before any work is commenced. Only Welders who pass the test shall be

permitted to work only for those positions for which they were tested and passed.

b) Welding shall be in according with the following Indian Standards as applicable.

IS 816-1969 Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild

steel.

IS 822-1970 Code of practice for inspection of welds

IS 1024-1979 Code for practice for use of welding in bridges and structures subject to

dynamic loading.

IS 1323-1982 Code of practice for oxy-acetylene welding for structural work in mild steel.

IS 9595-1980 Recommendations for metal-arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese

steels.

c) For welding for any particular type of joint, welders shall submit evidence acceptable to

the Consultant of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as described in the

following relevant Indian Standards.

IS: 7307-1974 Approval tests for welding procedure.

IS 7310-1974 Approval tests for welders working to approved welding procedure.

Unless otherwise stated all welds shall be electric metal arc welds.

d) All welding procedures shall be arranged, to suit the details of joints indicated on the

drawings. Welding shall be carried out shall be such as to ensure that the weld metal is full

and satisfactorily deposited throughout the length and thickness of all joints.

96

either by jigs or tack welding.

Profile of fusion faces may be prepared by shearing, chipping, or gas cutting. In all cases

the faces should be dressed by chipping, filling or grinding and made regular.

For thickness of metal 16 mm and above, electrodes used shall be Supercito (E-7018) or

equivalent. For thicknesses of metal below 16 mm the root run shall be with Phillpe 31 (E

6010) electrodes, (or equivalent) and subsequent runs shall be with Overchord - SS (E-

6013) electrodes (or equivalent). The electrodes shall be dried in an electric oven as per

the recommendations of manufacturers. Only DC current shall be used for welding and

the Contractor shall make his own arrangements of all welding power and for equipment.

Vertical down welding shall not be permitted. All welds shall be back-gouged and welded

from the backside unless specifically approved otherwise.

All welds shall be carried out in such a sequence and manner as to cause minimum

distortion of the welded parts.

Multiple run welds shall be carried out with each run closely following the previous run,

but so that sufficient time is allowed for slag removal.

Welds shall on completion present an even, smooth and regular finish free from defects.

The weld metal shall be solid throughout with complete fusion between weld metal and

parent metal and between successive runs throughout the joints. Caulking shall not be

used to correct defects.

5.2 Surface Cleaning Prior to Welding

Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and other

foreign materials. Surfaces need not be cleaned of Zinc Silicate primer if present prior to

welding.

97

5.3 Cleaning

Upon completion of each welding pass, the weld shall be cleaned of spatter, slag and flux

deposits. The weld must show a good clean contour and on a cut specimen good fusion

with the parent metal. After welding is complete, adjacent surfaces shall be thoroughly

cleaned of all spatter and deposits.

5.4 Size of Welds

All structural welds shall be continuous around all mating faces and edges of the members

being connected. If not detailed on the drawings welds shall be sized to develop the full

strength of the smaller of the two members being joined and not less than 6mm.

5.5 Compatibility of Welds

All welds shall develop the strength and ductility specified for the steel being welded.

Welds forming connections between steel of different grades shall develop at least the

same unit strength as that specified for the higher strength steel.

5.6 Automatic Welding

Automatic and semi-automatic welding processes may be employed provided they are

approved by the Engineer and conform to the requirements of these specifications. All

equipment for automatic and semi-automatic welding shall be subject to approval by the

Consultant. Pre-heating will be required where any section thickness exceeds 30mm.

Requirements for, and method of, pre-heating shall be submitted to the Consultant for

approval.

5.7 Inspection

Upon completion of steel fabrication and before any surface treatment is applied, the

Contractor shall allow inspection of the steelwork by the Consultant who may reject the

steelwork if it fails to meet the requirements of this Specification.

5.8 Following welding tests shall be carried out as per Consultants directive.

Ultra Sonic test for fillet weld

Die testing on site

Radiography beam to beam joints 6” to 8” weld length

3 segments top & bottom 6” x 2” (twelve)

98

6.0 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

6.1 Fabrication

All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply

defined profiles, and smooth surfaces of uniform colour and texture and free from defects

impairing strength or durability.

Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand stresses and

strains to which they will be subjected. Accessories and connections to steel or cast iron

shall be steel, unless otherwise specified. Threaded connections shall be made so that

fitting conceals the threads.

Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded. The face of welds shall be dressed

flush and ground smooth. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and joined where least

conspicuous.

Pipe railing panels shall be straight and true to dimensions. Adjacent railing panels shall

align with a variation of not to exceed 1.5 mm. Joints shall be match marked.

6.2 Finishes

All steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust,

grease and foreign matter and shall be treated in the workshop prior to transportation. If

painted it shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and

well-worked into joints and open spaces. Abrasions in field erection shall be touched up

(including primer) immediately after erection.

Galvanised surfaces shall not be painted, unless noted otherwise. Refer to the surface

treatment section of the specification for details.

All aluminum exposed surfaces shall have satin finish, free from die markings, scratches,

welding discolourations, "leave-off-marks" or other surface blemishes. Unless otherwise

specified, aluminium shall be given an anodic oxide treatment. It shall have a finish equal

to IS 11857-1986 Anodised Coating Aluminum for External Employer ural Application. A

coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied to all aluminium before shipment from

the factory.

99

All exposed stainless steel surfaces shall be polished finish, free from die markings,

welding discolorations or other surface blemishes. Relevant codes for finishes above

areas follow:

IS 1868 - 1992 Anodic coatings on aluminium and its alloys.

IS 9844 - 1981 Method of testing corrosion resistance of electroplated and

anodized aluminum coatings by neutral salt spray test.

IS 11268 - 1985 Method for estimation of loss of absorptive power of anodic

oxide coatings after sealing dye spot test with prior acid treatment

for anodised aluminium and its alloys.

IS 7088 - 1973 Recommended practice for anodising of aluminium and

its alloys.

6.3 Installation

The Contractor shall install all items furnished including items to be embedded in concrete

or masonry. Items, to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed,

shall be installed in accordance with the details shown. Fastening with wood plugs in

concrete or masonry will not be permitted.

All aluminium surfaces to come in contact with concrete or masonry shall receive a heavy

protective coating of bitumastic applied in a neat manner. All aluminium surfaces to come

in contact with dissimilar metals shall receive a heavy brush coat of zinc - chromate primer

followed by two coats of aluminium paint and a fabric separator. The dissimilar metal

surface shall receive two coats of an approved paint. All procedures and applications shall

be to the approval of the Consultant.

6.4 Bolts and Nuts

Holding down bolts, with or without pipe sleeves, shall be in accordance with the details

shown and include washers and hexagonal nuts.

100

Screw and bolt anchors, that are not shown, shall be cinch anchors, rawl or of the slug-in

type. Anchors shall be minimum "two unit" type. Toggle bolts shall be of the size indicated

and shall be galvanised. Bolt and nut threads shall be galvanised and shall conform to the

aforementioned codes.

6.5 Miscellaneous Shapes

Miscellaneous shapes shall include but not be limited to sump cover plates, floor plates,

angles, beams, fabricated plates, channels, bars and metal anchors for embedment in

concrete or masonry.

Miscellaneous shapes shall be of galvanized mild steel, unless stated otherwise. All

material shall be in accordance with the details shown or specified and relevant I.S. codes

shall be conformed with.

6.6 Stainless Steel

Stainless steel used in the buildings shall be Grade 316 unless noted otherwise. The

sections to be used shall be as shown on the drawings. All welded joints shall be well

buffed to match the finish of the stainless steel.

6.7 Dovetail Anchors

Anchor slots and anchors for anchorage of exterior masonry walls to concrete shall be

fabricated of 16 gauges galvanized sheet to the details indicated on the drawings. Slots

shall run continuously the height of the masonry walls and anchors shall be installed

between every third concrete and hollow brick block course, unless noted otherwise.

Grooves shall be provided with filler material during concreting to prevent concrete from

entering the anchor slot.

6.8 Chemical Anchors

The Contractor shall supply and install all chemical anchors shown on the Drawings.

101

Chemical anchors shall be Hilti - Masonry Rawl Plug anchors or approved equivalent.

Substitution with Dynabolt or expansion bolts shall not be permitted. After completion of

the drilling of the hole for the chemical anchor the hole shall be cleaned of dust using

compressed air.

6.9 Fastenings

Fastenings including anchors, lugs, screws, rivets and the like shall be of approved type,

appropriate to the work, capable of transmitting the loads and stresses imposed, and

sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly. Fastenings to aluminium, including

aluminium alloys, shall be aluminium alloy or non-magnetic stainless steel unless

otherwise specified. Details are as follows:

Self tapping screws: Stainless steel

Nails: Aluminium

6.10 Steel Plate and Protection Angles

Steel plate and protection angles required for the protection of concrete work shall be

erected true to line and grade within the tolerances specified below. The edges of

exposed faces may have a vertical or horizontal distortion from a straight line not greater

than 3 mm per meter of length, provided, that distortion for any single piece shall not

exceed 1 mm and provided, that when the warp is greater than 1.6 mm an extra anchor

hole shall be drilled near the proper corner and the piece drawn into position thereby. All

bolt heads on the exposed face shall be countersunk and fitted or ground so that the

heads are flush with the finished surface. Joints between abutting sections shall be square

and flush and the butting ends shall be sawed or otherwise made smooth and regular.

6.11 Sealing

All tubular, square and rectangular hollow sections shall be welded so as to completely

seal the internal sections against air and moisture. All ends will be fully welded into

adjacent members or capped with 6mm end plates as applicable. To ensure this condition

is met, the Consultant may require the Contractor to carry out pressure tests on internal

sections of any part of the structures, at the Consultant’s discretion and Employers cost.

The Contractor at his cost will rectify any defective areas found by such test.

102

7.0 SURFACE TREATMENT

Following the completion of fabrication all steel shall be cleaned and protective coated in

accordance with the procedures specified in the Surface Treatments Section of this

specification.

Protective coatings damaged during the Contract shall be rectified as specified in the

Surface Treatments Section of this Specification and/ or to the approval of the Engineer at

the Contractor's expense.

All bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanised unless noted otherwise. These

and any other items as detailed on the Drawings and the Specification to be hot dipped

galvanised shall be in accordance with IS: 1239 (Part I and II) or an equivalent approved

standard.

8.0 MISCELLANEOUS

8.1 Marking

The steel work shall be temporarily shop erected complete or as arranged with the Project

Engineer so that accuracy of fit may be checked before dispatch. The parts shall be shop

assembled with a sufficient number of parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in place.

8.2 Packing

Prior to transportation of the steelwork all projecting plates or bars, and all ends of

members at joints shall be stiffened. All straight bars and plates shall be bundled, all

screwed ends and machined surfaces shall be suitably packed. All rivets, bolts, nuts,

washers and small loose parts shall be packed separately in cases so as to prevent

damage or distortion during transit.

8.3 Inspection and Testing

The Project Engineer shall have free access at all reasonable times to those parts of the

Contractors works which are concerned with the fabrication of the steel work. He shall

be afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being

103

undertaken in accordance with the provisions of the Specification. Unless specified

otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch and

shall be conducted so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the work.

The Contractor shall guarantee compliance with the provisions of the Specification, if

required to do so by the Engineer. Should any structure or part of a structure be found

not to comply with any of the provisions of the Specification, it shall be liable to rejection.

No structure or part of the structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted for test, except

in cases where the Consultant considers the defect as rectifiable. Defects, which may

appear during fabrication, shall be made good by the Contractor with the consent of, and

according to the procedure laid down, by the Consultant.

The Contractor shall supply all gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the Consultant.

The Consultant may, at his discretion, check the test results obtained at the Contractor’s

works by independent tests at the Government Test House or elsewhere. Should the

material tested be found to be unsatisfactory, the costs of such tests shall be borne by

the Contractor, and if satisfactory, the costs shall be borne by the Employer.

9.0 ERECTION

9.1 Plant and Equipment

The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment used for erection shall be to the

satisfaction of the Consultant. Details of the proposed equipment shall be submitted for

approval 6 weeks prior to erection commencing.

9.2 Storing and Handling

All structural steel should be so stored and handled at the site that the members are

not subject to excessive stresses and damage.

9.3 Setting out

The positioning and leveling of all steel work with accuracy shall be in accordance with

the approved Drawings, Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

9.4 Security During Erection

During erection, the steel work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and,

where necessary, temporarily bracing provided for all load to be carried by the

104

Where large portal frames are being used, the flexibility of the frames requires that care

structure during erection including those due to erection equipment and its operation.

No permanent bolting or welding should be done until proper alignment has been

obtained.

9.5 Field Connections

All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for

shop fabrication, excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions only. Where the

steel has been delivered painted, the paint shall be removed before field welding, for a

distance of at least 50 mm on either side of the joints.

9.6 Painting After Erection

Prior to the painting of steel, which is delivered unpainted, commences, all surfaces to be

painted shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned from all loose scale and rust. The specified

protective treatment shall be completed after erection. All bolt heads and site welds shall

be cleaned.

Where the steel has been surface treated in the workshop, the coating shall be

completed on site so as to be continuous over any welds and site rivets or bolts. Bolts,

which have been galvanized or similarly treated, are exempted from this requirement.

Surfaces, which will be inaccessible after site assembly, shall receive the full-specified

protective treatment before assembly.

10.0 TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE

Steel shall be handled and transported with care, and in such a manner that parts will not

suffer strain, distortion or abrasion. The Engineer shall reject distorted or damaged

steelwork. All steel shall be stored above the ground and supported in timber packers.

Lifting and handling of all steel, whether painted or not shall be done with synthetic

webbing flat slings or bagged chains. All slings shall comply with the local work place,

health and safety acts. Under no circumstances shall unprotected chains be used for

lifting steel. Paintwork damaged during transport and erection shall be rectified as

specified in the Surface Treatment Section of the Specification.

105

be taken when accepting delivery, stacking, lifting and erecting. It is expected that a

foreman competent and familiar with all aspects if lifting a large portal frame be

appointed to the site. Beams and trusses shall be lifted such that bending occurs about

the axis for which the member was designed.

11.0 GROUTING

Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings a space of not less than 25mm shall be provided

between undersides of column base plates and between all beam and roof truss bearings,

and concrete pads, footings etc.

After steel work has been wedged up to line and level fixed in position, the space between

steelwork and concrete shall be grouted with a mixture of Portland cement and approved

commercial grit or washed sand. The mix shall be of equal proportion by volume of

cement and sand (or grit) mixed with just sufficient water to form a mixture of "damp

earth" consistency, and shall be used within 20 minutes. The grouting mix shall be

rammed to approval into the space between steelwork and concrete and protected from

damage until it sets.

106

Providing 2nd class BB masonry with conventional type bricks 230 mm thick in foundation

CIVIL WORK

A) MASONRY/ BLOCK WORKS

A – 1) BRICK WORK 100 MM THICK: -

Providing 2nd class BB masonry in conventional type bricks in CM 1:4, (150mm thick) for all

leads and lifts including scaffolding, curing etc. complete. The RCC horizontal stiffeners of

100mm thk in 1:1.5:3 proportions (Cement: Fine aggregates: Coarse aggregates) at every 10th

coarse by using 4 nos. of 8mm dia tor steel reinforcement longitudinal bars and 6mm dia MS

reinforcement bars 300mm centre to centre at right angles to longitudinal steel including

shuttering, formwork etc. complete.

The contractor shall provide all necessary openings for doors and windows or such other

services, and shall be embedded electrical fittings like conduits, boxes for switches, distribution

boxes etc. and fixtures supplied by the other agency if required at no extra cost. Contractor shall

provide all necessary openings at all levels required for architectural features which are coming

in the masonry work without any extra cost. Also shaping of the bricks for the exhaust fan circular

openings shall be carried out at no extra cost.

A – 2) BRICK WORK 200 MM THICK:-

107

In brick arches and other circular work, the bricks shall be shaped to have joints radiating

plinth and super structures (All leads and lifts) including bailing out water, striking out exposed

joints, scaffolding, curing, raking out joints etc. complete in CM 1:4 etc. complete for all leads

and lifts. The item shall be carried out for all external walls or buildings, common walls between

two adjacent units; parapet walls at all terrace levels all as shown on drawings.

Bricks shall be of uniform size, shape and colour and must be well burnt so as to give a clear

ringing sound when struck. They shall be clean, whole and free from flaws, salt, cracks, stones or

lumps of any kind, especially lime. They shall have sharp edges and angles and even surfaces

and shall be sound and hard to resist compression. They shall be from a source to be approved

by the Engineer

All bricks shall be thoroughly saturated with water before use. Joints shall be broken vertically

and they shall not be less than 10mm in thickness. The work shall not be raised more than 1.00m

to 1.20m per day. Horizontal layers should be placed truly horizontally in all layers of work. It

shall be kept constantly wetted for at least 7 days.

Before starting the masonry, the concrete surfaces i.e. plinth beams, columns, slabs, chajjas etc.

shall be thoroughly hacked and washed to remove all mud, dirt, loose particles etc. concrete

faces touching to masonry will be applied with C.M. of same grade which is using the masonry.

When the fresh brick work is to be started on the old brick masonry, the surface should be

thoroughly cleared and washed to remove all moss deposit, loose mortar, mud and dirt etc.

Striking courses and mouldings shall be set straight and true by projecting brick work with

properly cut and shaped bricks wherever necessary with as fine joints as possible.

The walls shall be carried up regularly in all cases when the nature of work will admit of it, not

leaving any part 1 meter lower than another. When circumstances render it necessary to carry

on the same section of a building in uneven coarse, the bricks shall be raked back so as to

maintain a uniform and effectual bond.

108

Proportioning: The unit of measurement for cement shall be a bag of cement weighing 50 kgs

correctly to the center, from front to back of walls, with thickness not more than 10 mm. The

face bricks shall be of uniform colour and with sharp risers. Where pointing or plastering is

specified the joints in all brick work shall be raked out as the work proceed.

Materials for B.B. Masonry and partition walls

Bricks:

Shall be best locally available, having uniform colour, properly burnt and having a minimum

compressive strength of 35 kg/sqcm (as per relevant IS Codes).

The bricks shall conform to IS-1077:1976, sampling shall be as per IS-5454 : 1978 and to be

tested in accordance with IS-3495 (Part - I to IV) - 1976.

Sand: The sand or fine aggregate for mortar shall be natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed

gravel sand. The specifications shall conform to Section 4 (2.3). Test results of the grading of sand

shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. The decision in accepting the sand,

which has deviation from specification, is left to the Engineer-in-Charge.

Cement: Cement to be used shall conform to Specifications as per Section 4

Water: Water shall conform to Specifications as Section 4(2.4)

Construction Procedure:

Cement Mortar: Cement mortar shall meet the requirements of IS: 2250 and shall be prepared

by mixing cement and sand by volume. Proportion of cement and sand shall be as specified or as

directed by the Engineer-in-charge or as shown in drawings. The sand being used for mortar shall

be sieved. The mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun to

set and in any case within initial setting time of cement after water is added to the dry mixture.

Mortar unused for more than initial setting time of cement, shall be rejected and removed from

the site of work.

109

Staging/Scaffolding: Staging/scaffolding shall be properly planned and designed by the

and this shall be taken as 0.035 cubic metre. Sand shall be measured in boxes of suitable size

on the basis of its dry volume. In case of damp sand, its quantity shall be increased suitably to

allow for bulkage.

Mixing : The mixing of mortar shall be done in mechanical mixer operated manually or by power.

Cement and sand in specified proportions, by volume, shall be thoroughly mixed dry in a mixer.

Water shall then be added gradually and wet mixing continued for at least one minute. Care shall

be taken not to add more water than that which shall bring the mortar to the consistency of a

stiff paste. Wet mix from the mixer shall be unloaded on watertight masonry platform, made

adjacent to the mixer.

Soaking of Bricks : Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period that is sufficient for

the water to just penetrate the whole depth of bricks as well as to remove dirt, dust and sand.

Proper soaking of bricks shall prevent the suction of water from the wet mortar as otherwise

mortar will dry out soon and crumble before attaining any strength.

Bad Workmanship : If the workmanship of the brick work laid, or the strengths of mortar after

testing found to be not of acceptable standard, the Engineer-in-charge shall ask the contractor

to demolish the brickwork and redo the brickwork of good quality at the contractors cost.

Curing : Green work shall be protected from rain or any other running water or accumulated

water from any source, by suitable means. Masonry works, as it progresses, shall be kept

thoroughly wet by sprinkling water at regular intervals, on all faces. Curing shall be done after

24 hours of completion of day’s work and shall be done for atleast 7 days after completion.

Testing : The testing of Bricks for its crushing strength, water absorption test etc. shall be carried

out as per relevant IS codes. Tests for grading of sand / fine aggregate, bulkage etc shall be as

specified at Section 4. Tests for cement shall be as specified as under section 4. All the tests shall

have to be carried out as directed and the cost of contractor. The test records shall be maintained

and kept at site for inspection.

110

Contractor.

Item to Include: Item includes supply of accepted standard IInd class bricks, all other material

viz. cement, sand or fine aggregate, water; all labour; scaffolding; tools and equipment; bailing

out the water, mixing of mortar, laying of the brickwork as specified above etc.. The cost of

testing, the machinery hire/depreciation charges, charges for scaffolding, curing etc. are deemed

to be included in the item rate for the brick work. Item also includes providing openings, fixtures,

preparing soffits for beams or other elements, racking of joints on outer surface etc. upto a lift

of + 5 m.

A – 3) STONE MASONRY (RUBBLE MASONRY)

General:

Stones shall be of the kind specified in the item and shall be from an approved quarry. Stone

shall be well – wetted before laying in position. The mortar shall be a specified. Face stone shall

not be less in breadth than in height; it shall also tail in the work more than its height. Jambs of

doors, windows and openings shall be formed with quoins.

Through stones or headers shall be laid in every course at a distance not exceeding 2

meters apart and shall be staggered. They shall be in one piece for walls upto half metre width

and shall be lap jointed in case of walls having thickness more than half meter. The face area of

each header shall not be less than 0.05 sq.m. 1:2:4 cement concrete blocks may also be allowed

where good length headers are not available. Headers shall be marked with oil paint for ready

identification.

Height of quoins shall be same as that of the course. Length of quoins shall be 0.50m and

shall be laid a header and stretcher alternatively. Faces of quoins shall be fair dressed. No quoin

stones shall be less than 0.03 cu.m. in contents. Joints of masonry shall be marked out and unless

otherwise stated shall be raised pointed by using cement mortar 1:1 to all exposed surfaces. All

masonry work shall be well – watered for a period of seven days.

111

a) Coursed Rubble masonry – first Sort:

Height of course shall not be less than 15cm. And all courses shall be of same

height. All stones in the course shall be of same height. In no case height of a course shall

be more than any of the course below it. Bed and sides shall be hammer or chisel dressed

back from the face 75mm. And 3.5mm respectively.

Faces of stones shall be hammer dressed and bushing shall not be more than

35mm. In thickness and joints shall not be more than 10mm. Stones shall break joints by at

least half the height of the course. Work on interior face shall be precisely the same as on

exterior face. Quoins shall be at least 0.5mm. long, laid square on their beds and shall be fair

dressed to a depth of at least 10 cms.

b) Uncoursed Rubble Masonry:

Stones shall be hammer dressed. Nearly 50% of the stones shall be not less than

0.03 cu.m. in content each, and 25% of stone shall tail back in masonry by 40cms. Or more.

Stones shall be so arranged as to break joints as much as possible. Long vertical joints shall

be carefully avoided. Thickness of joints shall in no case exceed 12mm.

Pillar of sets shall be properly dressed with hammer or chisel to form proper

angle. Stones used for backing shall be of fairly large size.

c) Random Rubble Masonry – First Sort:

Stones shall be roughly chisel dressed. They shall be solidly bedded in mortar.

Height of stone shall not be more than width of face or length of tail. Stones shall be of equal

size and so arranged as to break joins s much as possible, avoiding long lines of horizontal or

vertical joints. Quions shall be as described in ‘Coursed Rubble Masonry’ – 1st sort. All stones

shall be carefully fitted. Thickness of face joint shall not exceed 25mm. Edges of stones shall

be chisel dressed for fitting in position properly.

112

d) Concrete Block Work:

All blocks shall be dried for at least one month. The edges of blocks shall be

sharp and surface shall be free of honeycombing. Block work shall not be raised more than

one metre per day. All miscellaneous inserts like structural lintels, anchors etc. shall be

inserted by the Contractor at no extra cost.

The mortar of masonry work shall be as specified in the drawing. The thickness

of the joints shall not be more than 10mm. The joist shall be racked by raking tools every day

for 12mm deep thickness. The excess cement mortar lying on the floor shall be reused within

30 minutes. The green block work shall be protected from rain. The block work shall be cured

for a minimum period of 8 days. All masonry adjacent to openings shall be with solid block

or void shall be filled in with suitable concrete 1:3:6. Block work shall be carried out in double

scaffolding only. Making holes of any kind for the purpose of supporting the scaffolding shall

not be allowed. The mixing of mortar shall be done by measuring boxes only.

B – READY MIX PLASTERING

Providing plaster in cement mortar in 1:4 with / without neeru finishing to concrete or masonry

surface in all position including scaffolding and curing complete.

B – 1) 6mm Thick Single Coat.

B – 2) 15mm Thick Single Coat

Material :

Cement : As per specification given in section 4

Sand : As per specification given in section 4(2.3)

Water : As per specification mentioned In section 4 (2.4)

113

Fly Ash:

Polypropylene Fibers

Plasticizers

Cement Mortar : Cement mortar shall meet the requirements of IS: 2250 and shall be prepared

by mixing cement and sand by volume. Proportion of cement and sand shall be as specified or

as directed by the Engineer-in-charge or as shown in drawings. The sand being used for mortar

shall be sieved. The mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun

to set and in any case within initial setting time of cement after water is added to the dry

mixture. Mortar unused for more than initial setting time of cement, shall be rejected and

removed from the site of work.

Cement mortar 1:4 shall be prepared as above.

Preparation of Surface : The joints in masonry shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar

shall be brushed out properly. Efflorescence if any, shall be removed by brushing and scrapping.

The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering

is commenced.

Scaffolding : The contractor shall provide scaffolding required for facility of construction. Quoted

rates are deemed to included the cost of scaffolding as required.

Scaffolding will be double or single as is warranted by the work. Scaffolding shall be erected with

steel sections or pipes, of adequate strength so as to be safe for all construction operations. The

contractor shall take all measures to ensure the safety of the work and working people. Proper

scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work.

Application of Plaster: Before commencing the plastering the surface to the plastered shall be

made wet sprinkling water. The patches of mortar, with thickness equivalent to thickness shall

be provided on the area to be plastered. It shall be ensured that the surface all such patches is

in true level/batter/plumb as the case may be; to achieve this the thickness of patches may vary

marginally, but average thickness shall not be less than that specified.

114

1. Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster.

2. Plastering shall be started from the top and worked down towards the floor. All putlog holes

shall be properly filled in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken

down. To ensure even thickness and a true surface, plaster about 15x15 cm shall be first applied,

horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2 m intervals over the entire surface

to serve as gauge. The surfaces of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished

plaster surface. The mortar shall then be laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel. The

mortar shall be applied in a uniform surface slightly more than the specified thickness and then

brought to a true surface by working a wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges, with

small upward and side ways movements at a time. Finally the surface shall be finished off true

with trowel or wooden float according as a smooth or a sandy granular texture is required.

Excessive trawling or over working the float shall be avoided. During this process a solution of

lime putty shall be applied on the surface to make the later workable.

3. All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be

and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, provision of grooves at

junction etc. where required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding,

chamfering or grooving shall be carried out using proper templates or battens to the sizes

required.

4. When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, cut clean to line both

horizontally and vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall

be scrapped cleaned and wetted with lime putty before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas,

to enable the two to properly joint together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the

day on the body of wall and not nearer than 15 cm to any corners or arises. It shall not be closed

on the body of the features such as plasters, bands and cornices, nor at the corners of arises.

Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops and coping as these

invariably lead to leakage. No portion of the surface should be left out initially to be patched up

later on.

5. The surface of the under coat on which the punning is to be done shall be left rough. The

115

punning shall be applied, when the under coat is still green. The mortar for punning shall be

applied in a uniform layer slightly more than 3 mm thick between gauged pads, with which to

ensure an even and uniformly thick surface by frequent checking with a wooden straight edge.

It shall be finished to an even and smooth surface with trowels.

Neeru : A watertight tank may be constructed in which lime powder be poured. It should be

noted that the water be added to time and not vice versa. After putting water into lime it should

be properly and continuously shared to form uniform mixture. Lime be allowed to slake for a

period of not less than 3 days. The slaked lime will settle down, and water above be removed.

The slaked lime be screened through rough cotton so that pebbles, lumps are removed and only

fine slaked lime will be separated. The slaked lime be into lime grinder in which hemp at the rate

of 1 Kg/cum and fine screened sand at 0.05 cum of slaked lime be added. The mixture be grinded

at least for 200 rounds of mixture adding adequate water to form slurry. The lime such grinded

be taken to separate tank allowed to slake further for the period of 3 days. Thus paste of neeru

shall form. The neeru shall not be allowed to dry but shall be maintained wet in paste form.

Finish : The plaster shall be finished to a true level and plumb surface and to the proper degree

of smoothness as required. The work shall be tested frequently as the work proceeds with a true

straight edge not less than 2.5 m long and with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and surfaces shall

be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the work proceeds.

Thickness : The thickness of the plaster specified shall be measured exclusive of the thickness

of key i.e. grooves or open joints in brick work. The average thickness of plaster shall not be

less than the specified thickness or 12mm. The minimum thickness over any portion of the

surface shall not be less than specified thickness by more than 3mm. The average thickness

should be regulated at the time of plastering by keeping suitable thickness of the gauges. Extra

thickness required in doubling behind rounding of corners at junction of wall or in plastering of

masonry cornices etc. shall not be paid for.

Curing: Curing shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster. The plaster shall be kept wet

for a period of seven days. During this period, it shall be suitably protected from all damages at

116

the contractor’s expenses by such means as the Engineer-in-charge may approve. The dates on

which the plastering is done shall be legibly marked on the various sections plastered so that

curing for the specified period thereafter can be watched.

Precautions: Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound hollow when

tapped, or are found to be soft or otherwise defective shall be cut out in rectangular shape and

re plastered as directed by Engineer-in-charge. When ceiling plaster is done, it shall be finished

to chamfered edge at an angle at its junction with a suitable tool when plaster is being done.

Similarly when the wall plaster is being done, it shall be kept separate from the ceiling plaster by

a thin straight groove not deeper than 6 mm drawn with any suitable method while the plaster

is green. To prevent surface cracks appearing between junction of column/beams and walls 150

mm wide chicken wire mesh should be fixed with U nails 150 mm c/c in one vertical plane should

be carried out in one go. For providing and fixing chicken wire mesh with U nails, payment shall

be made separately under relevant item.

Item to Include : The item includes providing all materials for plastering, including transportation,

royalty for material, all labour, tools and plants, machinery and equipments, staging, scaffolding,

bailing out water, testing, curing and construction as per above specifications etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The plaster area shall be measured in sqm and deduction

for openings will be as per IS: 1200

B – 4) External Sand Faced Plaster:-

Providing sand faced plaster (sponged external) 20 mm Thick Two Coats in cement mortar as

specified in all positions including base coat scaffolding, keeping the surface of base coat rough

to receive sand faced treatment, curing etc. complete.

Materials :-

Cement : As per specification given in section 4

117

Sand : As per specification given in section 4(2.3)

Water : As per specification mentioned In section 4 (2.4)

Cement Mortar : Cement mortar shall meet the requirements of IS: 2250 and shall be prepared

by mixing cement and sand by volume. Proportion of cement and sand shall be as specified or

as directed by the Engineer-in-charge or as shown in drawings. The sand being used for mortar

shall be sieved. The mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun

to set and in any case within initial setting time of cement after water is added to the dry

mixture. Mortar unused for more than initial setting time of cement, shall be rejected and

removed from the site of work.

Sand Faced Plaster: Before commencing the plastering the surface to the plastered shall be

made wet sprinkling water. The patches of mortar, with thickness equivalent to thickness shall

be provided on the area to be plastered. It shall be ensured that the surface all such patches is

in true level/batter/plumb as the case may be; to achieve this the thickness of patches may vary

marginally, but average thickness shall not be less than that specified.

1. Base Coat: The base coat plaster shall be of cement mortar 1:4. Water proofing compound

of approved shall be added according to the manufacturer’s instructions to make the mortar

waterproof. The plaster with this mortar shall be laid as specified with 12 mm thickness. Keys

shall be formed on the surface by thoroughly combing it with wavy horizontal lines about 12 mm

apart and about 3 mm deep when the mortar is still plastic. The base coat shall be cured for not

less than two days.

2. Sand Faced Plaster: The cement mortar for sand faced plaster shall have approved sand with

slightly larger proportion of coarse material. The proportion of cement to sand shall be 1:3. The

water is added gradually to make the mixture homogeneous. The thickness of finishing coat shall

not exceed 8 mm. After application, the surface should be finished with a wooden float lined

with sponge and trapped gently to retain a coarse surface texture. When the finishing coat has

hardened, the surface shall be kept moist continuously for 14 days.

118

8.3 Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurements for sand faced plaster (sponged

external) in C.M. (1:3) for finished area shall be measured in sq. meters and shall be paid at the

contract rate per sq. meter.

119

C - FLOORING / DADO

MATERIAL

MORTERS

1. For Fixing Glazed Vitrified

Tested As per – ISO 13007-1&2

2. Kota Flooring

Tested As Per: - IOS 13007-1&2

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55 g/cc

Pot Life 3 hours

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 180-240 minutes

b) Final Setting 320-380 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days

Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55g/cc

Pot Life 3 hours

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 180-240 minutes

b) Final Setting 320-380 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

120

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days

>7Mpa

3. White Statuario Italian Marble Flooring

Tested As per: - IOS 13007-1&2

4. Artificial Marble Flooring

Tested As Per: - ISO 13007-1&2

5. Granite Flooring

Tested As Per: - ISO 13007-1&2

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

121

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

6. Vitrified Flooring

Tested As per: - ISO 13007-1&2

7. China Chip Flooring

Tested As Per: - ISO 13007-1&2

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.50 - 1.60 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 200-300 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 5 minutes

Adjustment Time 5 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.50 - 1.60 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 200-300 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 5 minutes Adjustment Time 5 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days

Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

122

8. Tread Artificial Marble

Tested As Per: - ISO 13007-1&2

9. Riser Artificial Marble

Tested As Per: - ISO 13007-1&2

10. Tread Rough Finish Granite Stone 32 mm thk. At Entrance

Tested as per: - ISO 13007-1&2

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 150-210 minutes

b) Final Setting 280-340 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days

Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >9Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

123

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

11. Riser Rough Finish Granite Stone 18 mm thk. At Entrance

Tested As Per: - 13007-1&2

12.600 x 600 mm Vitrified Tiles Dado

Tested As Per: - 13007 – 1&2

13. Pavit Tiles Dado

Tested As Per: - 13007 – 1&2

Technical Parameters Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours 30 minutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-360 minutes

Open Time 20-30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days

Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >9Mpa

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours 30 minutes

124

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-360 minutes

Open Time 20-30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >9Mpa

14. Glazed Tiles Dado

Tested As Per: - 13007 – 1&2

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours 30 minutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-360 minutes

Open Time 20-30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >9Mpa

15. Granite 18 mm thk. Dado

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

16. White Statuario Italian Marble Dado

125

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

17. Artificial Marble Dado

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

18. Granite Skirting

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

126

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

19. 600 x 600 mm Vitrified Tiles Skirting

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.45 - 1.55 g/cc

Pot Life 2 hours 30 minutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-360 minutes

Open Time 20-30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days

Initial > 0.5 Mpa after Immersion>0.5 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >9Mpa

20. Skirting at Staircase in Artificial Marble

Technical Parameters

Bulk Density 1.30 - 1.40 g/cc

Pot Life 90 mimutes

Setting times

a) Initial Setting 160-220 minutes

b) Final Setting 300-400 minutes

Open Time 20 - 30 minutes

Adjustment Time 15 minutes

Slip Resistance @20 kg/sqm 0mm

Foot Traffiic/groutable 24 hours

Tensile Adhesion Strength @ 28 days

Initial > 1 Mpa after Immersion>1 Mpa

Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days >7Mpa

PLAIN / ANTI SKID CERAMIC FLOORING / DADO: -

Anti Skid Ceramic Flooring:

Providing and laying ceramic tiles of approved make conforming to IS: 13712-1993, of approved

colour and make including 20 mm thick cement mortar bedding in 1:3 including cement float,

filling the joints with matching colour, with pigments added to white cement slurry cleaning etc.

complete.

127

a) Any size with approved design

Material: Ceramic tiles shall be of approved make and quality and shall conform to IS:777-1988

in all respect. Samples of tiles shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, who shall keep

them in his office for verification and composition. White cement shall be of approved make.

The samples of the tiles shall be got tested from the approved laboratory as per provisions in

IS:777-1988 by the contractor at his cost. The test results be submitted to the EIC for record.

Mortar Bedding: The mortar shall be of 1:4 proportion and thickness shall be as specified

average, laid on prepared sub-base of appropriate level and grade. The amount of water added

while preparing mortar shall be the minimum necessary to give sufficient plasticity for laying.

Care shall be taken in the preparation of the mortar to ensure that there are no hard lumps

that would interfere with even bedding of the tiles. Before spreading the mortar bed, the base

shall be cleaned of all dirt, scum or laitance and loose materials and then well wetted without

forming any pools by the use of screed battens to proper level of slope. The thickness of the

bedding shall not be less than 20 mm any one place. The tiles shall be laid on the bedding mortar

when it is still plastic but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm cushion

for the tiles.

Fixing Tiles : The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours. Tiles, which, are

fixed in the floor adjoining the wall, shall be so arranged that the surface of the round edge tiles

shall correspond to the skirting or dado. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency

(4.4kg/sqm) shall be spread over the bedding mortar just to cover so much area as can be tiled

within half an hour. The edges of the tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry or

coloured cement slurry matching colour of the tiles and fixed in this grout one after the other,

each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded

and in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows in bed or joints. The joints shall be

4mm wide and in straight lines. The joints shall be grouted with Hygienic, hardwearing,

impervious, epoxide resin based ceramic tile grout of approved colour which has a high degree

of resistance to chemical attack, abrasion and impact.

Curing : After fixing the tiles finally in an even plane, the flooring shall be covered with wet saw

dust and allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days.

Cleaning : After the tiles have been laid in a room or at the day's fixing work is completed, the

surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be cleaned off before it sets.

128

Once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully washed clean and dried. When dry, the floor

shall be covered with oil free dry saw dust which shall be removed only after completion of the

construction work and just before the floor is occupied.

Item to Include : The item shall include all labour, materials, cement mortar 1:4 mortar bedding,

epoxy grout ofr filling joints, tools and equipment required for the operations to carry out the

for providing and fixing the white or coloured ceramic tiles as specified above.

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The area of the flooring shall be measured in sqm correct

up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm for the specified quality of ceramic tiles as

specified.

Ceramic Dado:

Providing and laying ceramic tiles of approved make conforming to IS:13712-1993, of approved

colour and make. Providing and laying ceramic tiles of approved make conforming to IS:13712-

1993, of approved colour and make.

Material : Ceramic tiles shall be of approved make and quality and shall conform to IS:777- 1988

in all respect. Samples of tiles shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, who shall keep

them in his office for verification and composition. White cement shall be of approved make.

The samples of the tiles shall be got tested from the approved laboratory as per provisions in

IS:777-1988 by the contractor at his cost. The test results be submitted to the EIC for record.

Fixing of Tiles : Dado or skirting work shall be done only after fixing tiles on the floor. The

white/coloured glazed tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours before being used for

skirting or dado work. The back of tiles shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste

and the tile shall then be pressed in the mortar and gently tapped against the wall with a

wooden mallet. The fixing shall be done from the bottom of wall upwards without any hollows

in the bed or joints. Each tile shall be fixed with a joint of 4mm in between two tiles which is to

be filled up by Epoxy grout in colour. The tiles hall be in true line and plumb and corner at right

nagles to each other. While fixing tiles in dado work care shall be taken, not to break joints

vertically if the pattern of fixing tiles have not been specified. After fixing the dado, skirting

etc., they shall be kept continuously wet for 7 days. If doors, windows or other openings are

located within the dado area, the sills, jambs, angles etc., shall be provided with ceramic tiles

and appropriate specials according to the foregoing specification and such tiled area shall be

129

measured net along with the dado.

Item to Include : The item includes all material, labour, tools and equipments, for providing

mortar cushioning, fixing of tiles, filling of joints with epoxy grout, curing cleaning etc, complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be the area of the dado or skirting

provided in sqm correct up to 2 decimal. The tile area provided for jambs, sills etc. shall be

measured, net along with the area of dado or skirting.

C 2, 4, 20 & 21,) VITRIFIED TILE FLOORING, DADO

Materials:

Tiles:

The tiles shall be of approved make as specified and shall generally conform to relevant

Standards. They shall be flat and true to shape, free from cracks, crazing spots, chipped

edges and corners. The glazing shall be of uniform shade.

The tiles shall be as specified in the schedule of quantity or drawings. The length of all four

sides shall be measured correct to 0.1 mm and average length breadth shall not vary more

than 0.8 mm from specified dimensions. The variation of individual dimensions from average

value of length / breadth shall not exceed 0.5 mm. Tolerance in thickness shall be () 0.4 mm.

The thickness of the tiles shall not be less than as specified in the items and shall conform to in

all respects. Samples of tiles shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-charge before use on the

work.

Preparation of Surface and laying of Vitrified Tiles :

130

Sub grade concrete or RCC slab or side brick wall / or plastered surfaces on which tiles are to

be laid shall be thoroughly hacked, cleaned of all mortar scales, concrete lumps etc. brushed,

washed with water to remove mud, dirt etc. from the surface, wetted and mopped.

20/12 mm thick plaster of CM 1.3 shall be applied and allowed to harden minimum for 48

hours. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal lines 1.5

mm deep at 7.5 mm centre both ways.

The back of tiles shall be buttered with a cot of grey cement slurry paste and edges with white

cement slurry and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tapped and corrected to proper

planes and lines. The tile shall be butt jointed in pattern and joints shall be as fine as possible.

The top of skirting / dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical. For vitrified tiles,

the joints shall be pointed with cementatious grout of matching colour of Bal/Roff make.

After a period of curing of 7 days minimum, the tiles shall be cleaned and shall not sound

hollow when tapped.

The surface during laying shall be checked with a straight edge 2m. long. The surface of

skirting shall be kept flush with plaster with chipping of brick work/concrete wherever

required.

After the tiles have been laid, surplus cement grout shall be cleaned off.

Mortar and Bedding:

Cement mortar for bedding shall be of proportion specified in items schedule and shall

conform to the specification for materials, preparation etc. as specified under cement mortar.

131

The amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be the minimum necessary to give

sufficient plasticity for laying. Care shall be taken in preparation of the mortar to ensure that

there are no hard lumps that would interfere with even bedding of the tiles. Before spreading

the mortar bed the base shall be cleaned of all dirt, scum or laitance and loose materials and

well wetted without forming any pools of water on the surface. The mortar of specified

proportion and thickness shall then be even and smoothly spread over the base by use of

screed battens to proper level or slope.

Cement mortar of thickness and proportion as specified in the schedule for dado shall be

applied to the wall after preparing the wall surface as specified under cement plaster 20 mm

thick and brought to correct line and plumb and the surface left rough to receive the tiles.

Fixing of tiles for flooring:

The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours. The tiles shall be laid on

the bedding mortar when it is still plastic but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm

cushion for the tiles. Tiles, which are fixed on the flooring adjoining the wall, shall be so

arranged that the surface on the round edge tiles shall correspond to the skirting or dado.

Neat cement mortar grout 1:2, using fine sand (table III, zone IV and as per IS 383) of honey like

consistency shall be spread over the bedding mortar just to cover as much area as can be tiled

within half an hour. The edges of the tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry and

fixed in this grout one after the other, each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a

wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no

hollows in bed or joints. The joints, shall be kept as close as possible and in straight line. The

joints between tiles shall not exceed 1.00 mm, in width. The joint shall be grouted with white

cement slurry. After fixing the tiles, finally in an even plane or slope, the flooring shall be

covered with wet sand and allowed undisturbed for 14 days.

Fixing tiles for Dado:

132

The dado work, shall be done only after fixing the tiles / slabs on the floor. The approved

glazed tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours. Tiles shall be fixed when

the cushioning mortar is still plastic and before it gets very stiff.

The back of the tile shall be covered with this layer of cement mortar 1:3 using fine sand (table

III, zone IV, IS383-1963), and the edge of the tile smeared with neat white cement slurry. The

tile shall then be pressed in the mortar and gently tapped against the wall with a wooden

mallet. The fixing shall be done from bottom of wall upwards without any hollows in the bed

of joints. Each tile shall be as close as possible to one adjoining. The tiles shall be jointed with

white cement slurry. Any thickness difference in the thickness of the tiles shall be arranged out

in cushioning mortar so that all tiles faces are in one vertical plane. The joints between the tile

shall not exceed 1.00 mm in width and they shall be uniform.

While fixing tiles in dado work, care shall be taken to break the joints vertically. The top of the

dado, shall be touched up neatly with the rest of the plaster above.

After fixing the dado / skirting etc. they shall be kept continuously wet for 7 days.

If doors, windows or other openings are located within the dado area, the corners, sills, jambs

etc. shall be provided with true right angles without any specials. The contractor will not be

entitled to any extra claims on this account for cutting of tiles if required.

Cleaning :

After the tiles have been laid in a room or the day fixing work is completed, the surplus cement

grout that may have come out of the joints shall be cleaned off before it sets. After the

133

complete curing, the dado or skirting over shall be washed thoroughly clean. In the case of

flooring, once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully washed clean and dried. When dry,

the floor shall be covered with oil free dry saw dust. It shall be removed only after completion

of the construction work and just before the floor is used.

Pointing and Finishing :

The joints shall be cleaned off with wire brush to a depth of 3 mm and all dust and loose

mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement and floor kept wet for 7

days and then cleaned. Finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden

mallet.

Mode of measurement:

Dado / flooring / skirting shall be measured in sq.m. correct to two places of decimal. Length

and breadth shall be measured correct to 1 cm. between the exposed surfaces of skirting or

dado. No deductions shall be made nor extra paid for any opening of area up to 0.1 sq.m.

The rate shall include all the cost of labour and materials involved.

C – 3, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 & 19) MARBLE FLOORING / DADO / SKIRTING / CLADDING /

TREADS & RISERS:

Marble Flooring:

Marble shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture in accordance to the sample

and of the required size and thickness approved by Engineer. It shall be reasonably uniform in

colour, texture, pattern and shape and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering and of

specified quality. The marble slabs shall be pre-polished in the factory before delivery. Before

placing order a sample shall be installed at the site and got approved.

134

Dressing of Slabs:

Every stone shall be pre polished and accurately machine cut to the required size and shape so

that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone is fully in contact with it. For patterned

flooring actual dimensions shall be taken at the site and shop drawings in suitable scale prepared

to identify correctly the sizes and shapes of all stones. Each stone shall be marked with a suitable

identification number. All angles and edges of the Marble slab shall be true, square or angular as

required and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane.

The thickness of the slabs shall be shown in the drawing with allowable tolerance of + - 2 mm. in

respect of length and breadth of slabs a tolerance of + - 5 mm will be allowed.

Laying:

Sub-grade concrete or the RCC slab on which the slab are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and

mopped. For patterned work the stone shall be laid in position loose to ensure achievement of

the required pattern and any adjustments required shall be made and all stone shall be wetted

and washed just before placing and bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1

cement: 4 coarse sand) or as described in the item.

The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be to suite the overall thickness

of flooring specified and the thickness at any place under the slab shall not be less than 12 mm.

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average

thickness specified in the item. The pre-polished slabs shall first be laid on top of the mortar in

accordance with the approved drawing and pressed tapped with wooden mallet and brought

to proper level in continuity with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top

surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar shall

be allowed to stiffen slightly and uniformly and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be

spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already

paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with or without admixture of pigment to

match the shade of the slabs as given in the description of the item. The slab to paved shall then

be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in

level and line with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid

135

in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the slabs

shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days.

The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to falls and, slopes as required. The slabs shall

be matched as shown in drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.

Slabs, which are fixed in the door adjoining the wall, shall enter not less than 12 mm under the

plaster skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly

and without waviness. Wherever required the flooring shall be laid in patterns and / or with brass

divider strips are required.

Curing and Finishing:

The day after the slabs are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the cement grout with a brush and

all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with white cement

mixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the topping of the wearing layer of the

slabs in a thin coat to protect the surface from abrasive damage.

Before handing over the protective coat shall be removed carefully and the surfaces cleaned and

carefully rubbed with a ‘namdah” block to leave a clean and shining floor without any defects to

the satisfaction of the Engineer. If any slab is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or

replaced and properly jointed. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a

wooden mallet.

Item to Include: Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, tools and

equipment for cutting, dressing laying and polishing of the slabs for flooring etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm of stone slab laid.

Marble Dado / Skirting / Cladding:

Every tile shall be pre-polished and accurately machine cut. The stone shall be reasonably

uniform in colour, texture, pattern and shape and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering

and of specified quality, size and thickness, before placing order, a sample of the marble slab

shall be installed at the site and got approved. The surfaces shall be hacked and

136

roughened with wire brushes. The surfaces on which the tiles will be fixed shall be cleaned

thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before skirting / riser / dado is commenced. The

marble shall be set in grey or white cement 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) admixed with or

without pigment to match the shade of stone.

The joints shall be as fine as possible and the joints shall be set in white cement.

Curing, Polishing and Finishing:

Curing, polishing and finishing shall be carried out in the same manner as specified for the

flooring work.

Item to Include: Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, tools and

equipment for cutting, dressing laying and polishing of the slabs for dado / cladding etc.

complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2

decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm of stone slab laid.

Marble Tread and Risers:

General:

Providing and fixing Polished Marble Treads and Risers using Marble stone slabs of approved

size, laying on 20 mm cement mortar bed 1:4, filling the joints with a mixture of cement slurry

and pigments as required, curing, polishing, all labour & materials complete.

Stones shall be 25mm thick in Treads and Risers single piece including provision of 2 grooves for

treads with rounded nosing over 20 mm thick bedding of cement mortar 1:4 including polishing,

moulding etc. complete as shown in drawing.

Material:

Marble Stone Slab:

a) 25 mm thick for Treads

b) 25 mm thick for Risers

The slabs shall be of selected quality, in one piece of specified length and width as directed

137

by Engineer in Charge, hard sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free form cracks,

decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness.

They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-

Charge. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work the contractor

shall get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Dressing:

Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the

full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it.

The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All

angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, corners at right angle and free from Chippings and

the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be as

specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of +/- 2 mm shall be allowed for the thickness.

In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of + 5 mm for hand cut slabs and

+ 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed.

Preparation of Surface and Laying:

The edges of the slabs to be jointed shall be buttered with gray / white cement, with admixture

of pigment to match the shade of the slab. Before laying, the stone, flags shall be thoroughly

wetted with clean water. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread on the

mortar bed over as much area as could be covered with the slabs within half an hour. The

specified type of stone flags shall be laid on the neat cement float and shall be evenly and firmly

bedded to the required level and slope in the mortar bed. Each flag shall be gently tapped with

a wooden mallet till it is firmly and properly bedded. There shall be no hollows left. If there is a

hollow sound on gentle tapping of the slabs, such slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The

mason shall make the joints of uniform thickness and in straight lines. The joints shall not be

thick more than 1.5 mm and filled solidly with mortar for their full depth. The joints shall be

struck smooth. But there shall be no smearing on mortar over the slabs. When pointing is to be

done the joints shall be raked out for not less than the width of the joints when the mortar is

green. The flags shall be laid so as to give continuous parallel long joints with cross-joints at right

angles to them. The edges of the adjoining slabs shall be in one

138

plane.

Item To Include:

Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, tools and equipment for cutting,

dressing, laying for treads and risers of steps etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment:

The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per

sqm of Marble treads and risers laid.

C – 12 & 30) GRANITE FLOORING / DADO / TREADS & RISERS, JAMBLINING:

Granite Flooring:

Granite shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture in accordance to the sample

and of the required size and thickness approved by Engineer. It shall be reasonably uniform in

colour, texture, pattern and shape and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering and of

specified quality. The granite slabs shall be pre-polished or matte flamed finished in the factory

before delivery. Before placing order a sample shall be installed at the site and got approved.

The granite slabs mirror polished, wherever required shouls be polished in the factory with

Silicon Carbide abrasives starting from no. “00” up to no. 5 and then using buff / lead strip rolls

with tin oxide for final mirror polish. For flooring and counter top the final tin oxide polish shall

not be used.

Dressing of Slabs:

Every stone shall be pre polished and accurately machine cut to the required size and shape so

that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone is fully in contact with it. For patterned

flooring actual dimensions shall be taken at the site and shop drawings in suitable scale prepared

to identify correctly the sizes and shapes of all stones. Each stone shall be marked with a suitable

identification number. All angles and edges of the granite slab shall be true, square or angular as

required and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane.

The thickness of the slabs shall be shown in the drawing with allowable tolerance of + - 2 mm. in

respect of length and breadth of slabs a tolerance of + - 5 mm will be allowed.

139

Laying:

Sub-grade concrete or the RCC slab on which the slab are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and

mopped. For patterned work the stone shall be laid in position loose to ensure achievement of

the required pattern and any adjustments required shall be made and all stone shall be wetted

and washed just before placing and bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1

cement: 4 coarse sand) or as described in the item.

The average thickness of the bedding mortar under he slab shall be to suite the overall thickness

of flooring specified and the thickness at any place under the slab shall not be less than 12 mm.

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average

thickness specified in the item. The pre-polished slabs shall first be laid on top of the mortar in

accordance with the approved drawing and pressed tapped with wooden mallet and brought

to proper level in continuity with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top

surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar shall

be allowed to stiffen slightly and uniformly and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be

spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already

paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with or without admixture of pigment to

match the shade of the slabs as given in the description of the item. The slab to paved shall then

be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in

level and line with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner.

After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The

flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days.

The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to falls and, slopes as required. The slabs shall

be matched as shown in drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.

Slabs, which are fixed in the door adjoining the wall, shall enter not less than 12 mm under the

plaster skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly

and without waviness. Wherever required the flooring shall be laid in patterns and / or with

140

brass divider strips are required.

Curing and Finishing:

The day after the slabs are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the cement grout with a brush and

all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with white cement

mixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the topping of the wearing layer of the

slabs in a thin coat to protect the surface from abrasive damage.

Before handing over the protective coat shall be removed carefully and the surfaces cleaned and

carefully rubbed with a ‘namdah” block to leave a clean and shining floor without any defects to

the satisfaction of the Engineer. If any slab is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or

replaced and properly jointed. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a

wooden mallet.

Item to Include : Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, tools and

equipment for cutting, dressing laying and polishing of the slabs for flooring etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm of stone slab laid.

Granite Dado:

Every tile shall be pre-polished and accurately machine cut. The stone shall be reasonably

uniform in colour, texture, pattern and shape and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering

and of specified quality, size and thickness, before placing order, a sample of the marble slab

shall be installed at the site and got approved. The surfaces shall be hacked and roughened with

wire brushes. The surfaces on which the tiles will be fixed shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed

with water and kept wet before skirting / riser / dado is commenced. The granite shall be set in

gray or white cement 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) admixed with or without pigment to match

the shade of stone.

The joints shall be as fine as possible and the joints shall be set in white cement.

Curing, Polishing and Finishing:

Curing, polishing and finishing shall be carried out in the same manner as specified for the

141

flooring work.

Item to Include: Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, tools and

equipment for cutting, dressing, laying and polishing of the slabs for dado etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2

decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm of stone slab laid.

Granite Tread and Risers:

General:

Providing and fixing Polished Granite Treads and Risers using Granite stone slabs of approved

size, laying on 20 mm cement mortar bed 1:4, filling the joints with a mixture of cement slurry

and pigments as required, curing, polishing, all labour & materials complete.

Stones shall be 25mm thick in Treads and Risers single piece including provision of 2 grooves

for treads with rounded nosing over 20 mm thick bedding of cement mortar 1:4 including

polishing, moulding etc. complete as shown in drawing.

Material:

Granite Stone Slab:

c) 25 mm thick for Treads

d) 25 mm thick for Risers

The slabs shall be of selected quality, in one piece of specified length and width as directed

by Engineer in Charge, hard sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free form cracks,

decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness.

They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-

Charge. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work the contractor

shall get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Dressing:

Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the

full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it.

The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All

142

angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, corners at right angle and free from Chippings and

the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be as

specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of +/- 2 mm shall be allowed for the thickness.

In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of + 5 mm for hand cut slabs and

+ 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed.

Preparation of Surface and Laying:

The edges of the slabs to be jointed shall be buttered with gray / white cement, with admixture

of pigment to match the shade of the slab. Before laying, the stone, flags shall be thoroughly

wetted with clean water. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread on the

mortar bed over as much area as could be covered with the slabs within half an hour. The

specified type of stone flags shall be laid on the neat cement float and shall be evenly and firmly

bedded to the required level and slope in the mortar bed. Each flag shall be gently tapped with

a wooden mallet till it is firmly and properly bedded. There shall be no hollows left. If there is a

hollow sound on gentle tapping of the slabs, such slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The

mason shall make the joints of uniform thickness and in straight lines. The joints shall not be

thick more than 1.5 mm and filled solidly with mortar for their full depth. The joints shall be

struck smooth. But there shall be no smearing on mortar over the slabs. When pointing is to be

done the joints shall be raked out for not less than the width of the joints when the mortar is

green. The flags shall be laid so as to give continuous parallel long joints with cross-joints at right

angles to them. The edges of the adjoining slabs shall be in one plane.

Item To Include:

Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, tools and equipment for cutting,

dressing laying for treads and risers of steps etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment:

The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per

sqm of Granite treads and risers laid.

143

Granite Jamblining:-

General : Providing and fixing in position & in stepped manner one side mirror polished machine

cut Granite slab 18 mm+/-2mm thick jamb lining for door / window frames of specified width in

neat cement and adhesives such as araldite of required thickness. All exposed edges to be

rounded & polished as per drawings and as per best engineering practice or as per IS wherever

they apply for and as per instructions of Engineer In charge and with necessary materials and

labour costs etc. complete.

Material :

a) Granite Slab 18mm thick (+/- 2 mm tolerance)

b) Neat Cement

c) Rounding & Polishing of edges

Fixing : Providing and fixing in position & in stepped manner one side mirror polished machine

cut Granite slab 19mm thickness jamb lining for door / window frames of specified width in neat

cement and adhesives such as araldite of required thickness. Joints, edges to be floated and

finished on neat cement of the same colour as the slab. After setting, the slabs (if reqd) are to be

machine polished at site to obtain perfect finish. All exposed edges to be rounded & polished as

per drawings and as per best engineering practice or as per IS wherever they apply for and as

per instructions of Engineer In charge.

Item to Include : The rate to include all necessary chipping of brickwork / concrete so that the

slab is 12mm projects from plaster / POP surface with rounding of edges, polishing etc. complete

as shown on drawing & as per directions of Engineer In charge. Note: No payment will be

made for overlapped portion of the jamblining.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The Granite Slab Jamblining is recorded separately for

each item and measured in sqm of exposed face. The contract rate shall be per sqm for the

specified quality of Granite slab Jamblining as specified.

C - 6) INDIAN PATENT STONE (Ironite Topping): -

Providing Indian patent stone flooring 40 mm thick with M-15 grade concrete using 6 mm to 20

mm metal over bedding laid in proper grade and slope in alternate bays, including compaction,

filling joints with bitumen and sand, marking lines, to give appearance of tiles, finishing smooth

with extra cement curing etc. complete

144

Material : Concrete of M-15 grade shall conform to I.S. Specifications and 456 revised edition.

The coarse aggregates, Fine Aggregates, Water will be as mentioned under Section 4. The

maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 12 mm. The fine aggregate shall consist of property

graded particles. The proportion of mix shall be M-15. The least amount of mixing water that will

produce in workable mix and will allow finishing without excessive trowelling shall be used.

Generally a water cement ratio of 0.5 should suffice.

Laying :

a) Sub grade: Before placing the concrete flooring, the sub grade shall be passed by the

Engineer-in-Charge. The sub grade for the concrete floor shall be a bedding of cement concrete

of sufficient thickness properly executed as per specifications and shall be paid, under a separate

item in the tender. The sub-grade in all cases shall be formed to proper levels and slopes, well

compacted and cured. The top surface shall be kept slightly rough. Any slope required to be

provided in the floor is to be given to the sub-grade. The surface of the sub- grade shall be

cleaned of all loose materials and moistened immediately before laying the concrete floor. No

slope shall be adjusted in IPS flooring.

b) Formation of Bays : The concrete flooring shall be laid in alternate bays, area not exceeding

6 m2 each. The edge/side of each panel into, which the floor is divided should be supported by

M.S. Flat of 6 to 10 mm or wooden bottom of 6 mm to 10 mm duly oiled to prevent sticking.

Their depth shall be the same as that proposed for the finished floor as mentioned in the item.

The bars should be removed after filling in the adjoining panels. At least 48 hours shall elapse

before concreting in the adjacent bays is commenced.

c) Concrete Flooring : The concrete shall be laid immediately after mixing. While being placed,

the concrete shall be vigorously sliced and spaded with suitable tools to prevent formation of

voids or honey comb pockets. The concrete shall be brought to the specified levels by means of

a heavy straight edge resting on the side forms and drawn ahead with a sawing motion in

combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with small lateral shifts. While concreting

the adjacent bays, care shall be taken to ensure that the edges of previously laid bays are not

broken by careless or hard tamping. Immediately after laying the concrete, the surface shall be

inspected for high or low spots and any needed correction made up by adding or removing the

concrete. After striking off the surface to the required grade, it shall be

145

compacted with a wooden float. The blows shall be fairly heavy in the beginning but as

consolidation takes place, light rapid strokes shall be given to complete the ramming. Steel

trowelling shall follow the floating after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess

of fine material from working to the surface. The finish shall be brought to a smooth and even

surface free from defects and blemishes and tested with straight edges. No dry cement or

mixture of dry cement and sand shall be sprinkled directly on the surface of the concrete to

absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix. After the concrete has been thoroughly rammed and has

dried sufficiently to allow the rendering to be worked up, surface shall be rendered with a thin

coat of 1:1 cement mortar with fine sand and uniformly floated. If so directed by the Engineer

in- Charge, approved mineral colour pigment shall be added to the cement mortar to give the

required colour and shade to the flooring. When the cement mortar rendering is sufficiently stiff,

lines shall be marked on it with strings or by any other device to give the appearance of tiles 30

cm x 30 cm or any other size laid diagonally or square as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge.

The junction of floor and walls shall be rounded off if so directed without any extra payment.

d) Filling of Joints : After the concrete in the bays has set, the joints of the panels shall be filled

with cement cream or with suitable bituminastic compound as shown on the drawings or

directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Vertical edge of the bays shall be neatly marked on the

surface of the concrete with a pointed trowel after filling the joints.

Curing : Curing shall start on the next day after finishing and shall be continued for 7 days.

Item to Include : The item shall include all labour, materials, tools and equipments for cleaning

and preparing the sub-surfaces, formwork, providing concrete of the specified mix (M-15),

compacting, rendering, using coloring pigment when required, marking lines on the surface,

finishing and curing as specified above.

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The linear dimensions shall be measured net between

plastered walls or skirting correct up to 2 places of decimal of a metre and area worked out

correct up to two places of decimals of a square metre. The contract rate shall be per square

metre of the flooring of the specified thickness of 40 mm.

146

Ironite Topping: -

Instead of finishing the top with rendering coat of 1:1 cement mortar, the top shall be finished

with 12 mm thick ironite topping. Unless otherwise specified, one part of ironite and four parts

of ordinary cement by weight shall be mixed thoroughly dry. This dry mixture shall be mixed

with stone grit 6mm and down size or as directed the ration of 1:2 by volume and well turned

over. Just enough water shall be added to this dry mix and mixed thoroughly well and laid to

uniform thickness of 12mm and compacted. After initial set has started thesurface shall be

finished as directed.

C - 11) CHINA MOSAIC CHIPS:

General : Providing and laying China Mosaic Flooring of approved colour including under layer

usually of 20mm thick cement concrete 1:2:4 or as specified and the top layer usually 6mm thick

china mosaic consisting of cement, ceramic /glazed chips in the specified proportion and water

and cleaning etc. complete.

a) As per approved design

Material, Mortar Bedding, Fixing Tiles :

The China mosaic floor consists of two layers, the under layer usually of 20mm thick cement

concrete 1:2:4 or as specified and the top layer usually 6mm thick china mosaic consisting of

cement, marble powder, marble chips in the specified proportion and water.

A. Under layer: Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall be of granite stone chips of 12mm

gauge, sand shall be coarse, cement shall be fresh Portland cement each of them with their

standard specification. Cement concrete of specified mix usually 1;2:4 shall be prepared

following the standard specifications as for cement concrete work. The bed for the under layer

shall be cleaned and cement slurry @ 2.0 Kg per sqm. shall be applied before laying of under

layer over the cement concrete or R.C.C. surface. The whole area shall be divided into various

patterns as per drawings with their top at proper level, giving slopes. Each panel shall not be

exceeding 2 Sqm. in area. In exposed situations the length of any side of the panel shall not be

more than 1.25 mtrs. Cement slurry @ 2 Kg /Sqm shall be applied before laying the under bed

over concrete or R.C.C. surface. The concrete shall be laid with in the panel and thoroughly

147

compacted with wooden mallet with required thickness generally 20mm and smoothed wooden

floats.

B. Top Layer : A neat cement paste should be laid on the bed prepared to receive china flooring.

If there is more water in paste dry cement should be sprinkle over it. The china portry chips

should be fixed as closed as possible (minimum gap in between chips should be 2 to 3 mm) on it

as per required design and pattern. After this procedure dry cement should be sprinkle over it

and the surface should be made cleaned with cloth. Optimum precaution should be taken while

fixing the chips to avoid air pockets from the chips if so the air should be removed.

Curing: After fixing the China Chips finally in an even plane/ required slope, the flooring shall

be covered with wet saw dust and allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days.

Cleaning: After the China Chips have been laid or at the day's fixing work is completed, the

surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be cleaned off before it sets.

Once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully washed clean and dried. When dry, the floor

shall be covered with oil free dry saw dust which shall be removed only after completion of the

construction work and just before the floor is occupied.

Item to Include: The item shall include all labour, materials, cement concrete, cement mortar /

slurry bedding, tools and equipment required for the operations to carry out the for providing

and fixing the china mosaic flooring as specified above

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The area of the flooring shall be measured in sqm correct

up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm for the specified quality of China mosaic

Flooring as specified.

D – PAINTING

D - 1) Exterior Acrylic Antifungus Paint:

Product Description:

100% Acrylic exterior paint is premium water based, high performance, long lasting exterior

paint, formulated to suit extreme tropical conditions of high rainfall, humidity and heat. The

148

paint should have properties that prevent the fungal and algae growth and ensures constant

surface activity against these irritants for a long period.

Surface Preparation:

The Surface to be prepared must be free of all dust, grease, traces of paint flakes, algae, and

fungus etc. the surface previously coated with paint must be cleaned thoroughly with a stiff

coir brush, to remove dust, dirt, chalking or any friable material and loose flakes. Wash

thoroughly with water and allow to dry. This ensures proper adhesion of the new paint system.

In case of a fungus affected area, apply a liberal coat fungicidal solution. Allow to react for

minimum 6 to 8 hours. For parapet tops and other horizontal surfaces, application of 3 coats is

recommended. All structural cracks must be opened in a V shape and filled with white cement

/ cement based plasters and leakage should be topped before actual painting. Freshly plastered

surfaces must be allowed to cure completely. Apply top coats as follows.

D - 2) ZINC PAINT

a) One coat

b) Two coats

11.1 General : The item pertains to providing and applying Zinc / Lead based paint of approved

colour and shade with specified number of coats including removing oil paint by scrapping or

any other suitable method.

11.2 Preparing the Surface : Before new work is applied paint, the surface shall be thoroughly

brushed free from mortar dropping and foreign matter. In case of old work, all loose particles

and scales shall be scrapped off. Where so specifically ordered by the Engineer-in- Charge, the

entire surface of old paint shall be thoroughly removed by scrapping and this shall be paid for

separately. Where efflorescence is observed the deposits may be brushed clean and washed.

The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 40 hours before painting is done.

11.3 Mode of Measurement and Payment:

1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. and area shall be calculated in m2

correct to two places of decimals.

149

2. Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and the area so measured shall be

increased by the following percentages to allow for the girthed area.

Corrugated asbestos cement sheet 20% Semi corrugated asbestos cement sheet 10%

3. Cornices and other such wall or ceiling features, shall be measured along the girth and

included in the measurements.

4. The number of coats of each treatment shall be stated. Not exceeding 50 sqm. each with

material similar in composition to the surface to be prepared.

5. Work on old treated surfaces shall be measured separately and so described. The contract

rate shall be per sqm area painted including all material and labour involved in all the operations

described above.

D – 3 & 4) LUSTER PAINT & STIPPLE PAINTING

General

i) Double scaffolding shall be used for work. All painting work shall proceed from top to

bottom. In case of internal painting ceiling shall be painted before walls.

ii) Materials to be used shall be of 1st quality from approved manufacturers of approved

shade.

iii) Work shall be carried out by experienced and skilled workers.

iv) Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt, mortar drops oil paints, scales etc.

by wire brushing, scraper tools.

v) In case of ready mixed paints are used and if thinning is required, only the brand

recommended by the paint manufacturer shall be used.

vi) All subsequent coates shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried thoroughly.

One coat shall constitute of one horizontal stroke immediately followed by one vertical

stroke, in all cases.

Paints For Walls / Ceiling

i) New plaster surfaces shall be completely dry before application of paint.

ii) Surface shall be prepared as per IS - 2395 (Part - I): 1966.

iii) A putty of POP and water shall be applied on entire surface including filling up of

150

undulations etc.

iv) The surface shall be sand papered and dusted off with a clean cloth.

v) Alkali resistant cement primer as recommended by manufacturer of paint, shall

be applied (one coat only) and allowed to dry for 48 hours.

vi) Primed surface shall be lightly sand papered and dusted off.

vii) The thinning of plastic emulsion shall be done with water and a thinned coat of

paint shall be applied on the absorbent surface as primer. Surface shall be

perfectly dry before priming coat of Paint is applied.

viii) No subsequent coats shall be applied till the preceding coat has dried for 2 to 3

hours and gets hard. Two or more coats shall be applied on the priming coat by

using roller or spray gun to get a flat uniform and velvet smooth finish.

ix) Washing of surface shall not be done with 3 to 4 weeks of application of paint.

Materials of paint shall be from the approved Manufacturers

The rate of application shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions.

Lustre Paint:

Providing and applying Lustre Paint of superior quality and of approved make, colour and shade

to the old & new surfaces in two coats including scaffolding, preparing the surfaces to receive

the paint and applying primer and putty etc. all complete as per manufacturers specification and

to the satisfaction of Client/Consultant/PMC.

D - 5) WHITE WASH:

Surface Preparation:

The surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar dropping and foreign matters. All

plaster damages shall be made good by cement sand mortar and curing it sufficiently before

the painting work is taken up.

Material:

The white wash shall be prepared from fresh shell lime to which shall be admixed with

sufficient quantity of whiting and gum. The lime and whiting shall be made into thin cream and

screened through clean coarse cloth. 40 gms of gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to

each 10 cu. Decimeter of the cream. Indigo up to 3 gms per kg of lime dissolved in water shall

then be added to the composition. Water at the rate of about 5 litres per kg of lime shall be

151

added to produce a milky solution.

Application:

In case of colour washing approved mineral colours not affected by lime shall be added to the

white wash in required quantities instead of indigo.

The wash shall be applied with approved brushes in minimum 3 coats. Each coat shall be

allowed to dry before applying the next. In case the surface does not present a smooth and

uniform finish throughout to the satisfaction of Engineer. More coats shall be added as

required at no extra cost.

The finished dry surface shall not be powdery and shall not readily come off on the hand when

rubbed.

Item to Include : Item includes all material, labour, tools and equipment for Painting,

preparation of surface to receive the paint, scaffolding etc all complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2

decimals.

D) Synthetic Enamel Paint: General: Synthetic enamel paint conforming to IS: 1932-1974 of approved brand and manufacturer and

of the required colour shall be used for the top coat and undercoat of shade to match the top

coat as recommended by the manufacture shall be used.

Painting on New Surfaces: Preparation of surface shall be as specified above or as the case may be.

Preparation of Surface:

a) Wood work:

The surface shall be cleaned and all unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand

paper and cleaned removed as specified above. Knots if visible, shall be covered with a

preparation of red lead mixed with strong glue sized and used to. Holes and indentations

on the surface shall be filled in with glazier’s putty or wood putty and rubbed smooth

before painting is done. The surface should be thoroughly dry before priming coat is

applied.

b) Iron and steel work:

152

The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is started. Rust and

scaling shall be carefully removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brushes.

All dust and dirt shall be carefully and thoroughly wiped away from surface.

c) Plastered surfaces:

The surface shall not be painted until it has been dried completely, before primer is

applied, holes, undulations shall be filled up with plaster of paris and rubbed.

The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and spread even

and smooth.

Application:

The number of coats including the undercoat shall be as stipulated in the item.

a) Undercoat:

One coat of the specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat shall be

applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade

of wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and

all loose particles dusted off.

b) Top coat:

The painting of approved brand and manufacturer shall be laid on evenly and smoothly

by means of crossing and laying off which consists of covering the area over paint,

brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternately at right

angles to the same. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.

The number of coats as specified in the item shall be applied and the painted surface

shall present uniform appearance and finish, free from streaks, blisters etc.

E – FALSE CEILING

CALCIUM SILICATE BOARD FLASE CEILING General Introduction

Calcium Silicate Board is manufactured from siliceous & calcareous materials reinforced with

fibers. The boards are made in a laminar process and then autoclaved to give a stable

crystalline structure. Of board can be easily decorated with most of the paints, wallpapers,

153

laminates, veneers etc. these boards are compatible with common building material,

galvanized steel and anodized aluminum.

Appearance:

The board has an off-white surface, which is suitable for all type of decoration. it is light weight

and offers the user the qualities of wood, as it can be cut ,planed, bent and drilled by ordinary

carpenters tool. It can be nailed or screwed easily.

Technical details:

Sr.No. PROPERTIES UNIT VALUES

1 Sizes:

Thickness mm 6,8,10 & 12 Length mm 1220,1830 & 2440 Width mm 1220,610

2 Density Kg / m3 900

3 Compressive strength Kg / cm2 225

4 Tensile strength Kg / cm2 60

5 Bending strength Kg / cm2 100

6 Impact strength J / m2 1700

7 Young’s modulus Kg / cm2 265

8 Flexural strength N / mm2 10 Longitudinal direction 5.5 Transverse direction

9 Fire Protection:

a) Material class - Non-combustible b) Surface spread of flame - Class – 1 c) Ignitability - Not easily ignitable d) Fire Propagation Fire Propagation index I = 4.0

10 Thermal conductivity-k W/mk 0.15

11

Thermal resistance-R

m2 k / w 0.04/0.05/0.066/ & .08 for 6/8/10 & 12 mm thick boards respectively.

12 Moisture content % Under 15% Shrinkage dimension

(Dry-saturated) % 0.10%

Length change in water % 0.15% Biological - No fungus growth Alkalinity pH 10

Applications:

Calcium silicates Board have a wide range of applications. These can be used in new as well as

existing building as partitions, false ceiling, wall linings, beams & column encasements, tunnel

154

linings, and door, where is a danger of accidental water spoiling the surface. It is also used

where termite & fungus growth are of prime concern.

Cutting:

Score-and-snap:

Scoring is done with hard pointed tool on face side of the by positioning the straight edge along

the line of the cut and repeating the action to obtain adequate depth for a clean break. The

board is then snap upward to achieve break. The boards can also be cut with the carpenter’s

handsaw. The use of circular saw with carbide tipped blade is the most efficient way of getting

neat & clean cut with speed.

Beveling:

Calcium silicate Boards can be beveled easily with carpenter’s tools.

Planning:

The edge of the boards can be smoothened by using carpenters plainer

Bending:

6 mm thick boards can be bend to minimum 600 mm radius, to make curved lining i.e. curved

partitions, false ceiling and wall linings.

Decoration:

The surface of calcium silicate Boards can be decorated with most forms of paints, wallpapers,

soft or hard laminate and ceramic tiles, if required. The boards have an unsanded finish suitable

for semi gloss-acrylics or textured coatings. Before painting, remove any surface dirt grime or

other containments with a soft brush. Do not use water for cleaning and ensure that the surface

is dry before painting.

Fittings and Fixtures:

It is easy and simple to attach different hangings to calcium silicate Boards. Inclined nails can be

fixed to board for light material. For heavier materials, the fastening should be centered on

internal stud work, steel or wood frame behind board, fixed before boarding.

155

Handling and storage:

Calcium silicate Boards should be carried on edge preferably by two persons. The boards should

not be carried in flat position. The boards should be stacked horizontally on a flat surface under

covered area. Wooden pallets/battens, not more than 400 mm apart, can be used to keep the

boards away from the moisture from the ground the boards should be lifted, not dragged.

Protected the boards with heavy water proof covering if stored out side and shift them inside at

the earliest possible if the boards do get damp they should be dried by standing them at long

edge to allow for ventilation never install damp boards.

FEATURES

Non- combustibility:

Calcium silicate boards are non-combustible as per BS:476: part-4-1970

Fire Resistance:

Calcium silicate boards have class-1 surface spread of flame with ignitability as “p” not easily

ignitable hence can provide good fire resistance in the range of 30 minutes to 240 minutes

depending on the construction Design.

Sound insulation and absorption:

Calcium silicate boards help in reduction of sound transmission, because of its nature however

this can be enhanced by putting mineral wool in the cavity of the wall / partition and behind

the board in case of false ceiling perforated calcium silicate boards with non-woven cloth backing

can provide should absorption NRC-value .75 to .85.

Thermal Resistance:

Calcium silicate boards have “k” value of .15 w/mk hence can contribute to energy saving can

provide comfort to the occupants.

Asbestos Free:

Calcium silicate boards are free from asbestos fiber. These are made from minerals and treated

156

cellulose fibers.

Water Resistance:

Calcium silicate boards when immersed in water for 24 hours will loose its strength slightly but

it regains its full strength as soon as it is dry. Hence it is a water resistant boards it has no long-

term effects on the board or most of the decorated surfaces hence these can be used in high

humid areas and or where there is a risk of accident water coming in contact with the board.

Moulds Growth:

Calcium silicates boards are made from natural minerals and are free from mould growth.

Termite Resistance:

Calcium silicate boards are made of inorganic minerals and has stable crystalline structure. This

makes the boards termite resistant and the material will not contribute to fungus growth.

Screw / Nail Holding:

Calcium silicate boards have a good screw/ nail holding capacity they do not require any backing

frame to hang light weight objects like picture frames etc.

Strong & Durable:

The stable crystalline structure makes Calcium silicates boards strong and durable. The boards

are strong enough to take normal impacts. The boards neither degrade/deteriorate Physically

nor turn into powder. These are most suitable for pharmaceutical and hospital industries.

Dimensional stability

Calcium silicate board is cured in high-pressure steam autoclave, which causes an irreversible

chemical change. Thus providing high dimensional and chemical stability accompanied by low

alkalinity.

Light weight:

The boards are light weight therefore can be handled easily the dry density of Calcium silicates

157

board is 900 kg/m2

Easy workability:

Calcium silicate boards are very easy to work with. They can be cut and drilled with ordinary

carpenter’s tools. Sanding is also possible with conventional sandpapers.

Bending:

6 mm thick Calcium silicate Boards can be bent (minimum radius- 600 mm) to provide curved

surfaces. Boards will bend more easily, if bent across their long axis by marking the boards wet.

Light Reflection:

Undercoated boards, provide 75% light reflectance

Compatibility:

The board will not promote corrosion or saponification of paints or affect bituminous compound

these are compatible with common building materials. These may cause corrosion of unanodised

aluminum under humid conditions.

Feature Joints:

Square edge boards can provide featured joint. The boards with joints can be decorated with

mouldings and beadings available in the market they can also be faxed a groove, which can be

in different colours

Tapered Edge:

Calcium silicate Boards are also available with tapered edge (longitudinal direction), which helps

to provide seamless finish.

Seamless Finish:

158

Boards can provide seamless finish decorated with most forms of paints, wall paper &

laminates.

Decoration:

The boards can be decorated with any type of paint, wall papers, wood veneers and hard

laminate Boards, using suitable adhesives

METAL FRAMED SUSPENDED CEILING (Seamless Finish) --

SINGLE LAYER

A non –load bearing system which includes calcium silicate Boards fixed to the G.I frame is mostly

used to provided a suspended false ceiling with seamless finish it is very easy and fast to erect it

can easily accommodate all type of light and air conditioning fittings.

Frame work

First of all ceiling is marked on to the wall/partition as per the perimeter of the wall/partition

with nylon sleeves and wood screws (38 mm long) at 457/610 mm centers at the above level

intermediate channel is suspended from the sofit at 1220 mm centers with the help of rowl plug,

sofit cleat and the ceiling angle in one direction ceiling section or intermediate channel across to

it by connecting clips at 610 mm centers. The length of ceiling sections or intermediate channels

can be increased by providing an overlap of 6” and are screw fixed at four places.

Boards Fixing

Calcium Silicates tapered edge boards of size, 6’x4” are fixed to the under side of ceiling

sections by 25 mm long self drilling & taping screws having Phillips head with under head

cutter at 200 mm c/c. The screws should be 15 mm away from the edges and 40 mm from the

corners. The square edges of the boards are made tapered (40 x 1.5) or chamfered by 4 x 3 mm

INSTALLATION

159

at site before fixing. The joints between boards are staggered in brick work style to make the

ceiling rigid and properly aligned to the required level.

Calcium silicate Board joints are finished with specially formulated jointing compound and 48

mm wide, fiber tape to get seamless finish.

METAL FRAMED SUSPENDED CEILING (Seamless)

Main system

Metal framed suspended ceiling comprises of G.I perimeter channel having .55 mm thickness,

two unequal flanges of 20 and 30 mm and web 27 mm is fixed to surrounding wall / partition

using nylon sleeves and screws at 450 mm centers. Then intermediate channel (.91 mm thick)

having two equal flanges of 15 mm each and a web of 45 mm is suspended from the sofit at 1220

mm center with ceiling angle of width 25 mm x 10 mm x 0.55 mm thickness having knurled web

of 50.5 mm and flanges of 26 mm each with lips of 10.5 mm are then fixed to the intermediate

channel with connecting clips across to the intermediate channel, at 610/457 mm centers. 8 mm

thick square / tapered edge calcium silicate Boards are then screw fixed long/across the ceiling

section with 25 mm long self drilling & tapping screw having Phillips head with under head cutter,

at 200 mm centers though the calcium silicate Board fillets.

Joining and Finishing

The joints of the face boards are finished with especially formulated jointing compound and 48

mm wide fiber tape to provide seamless finish.

NOTE:

G.I perimeter channel and supporting material are to be provided to make any opening for Light

fittings, diffusers etc. and should be supported properly to maintain the integrity of the ceiling

and should be charged extra.

Jointing & Finishing

160

Material required for 100 m2 area

Board 6’ x 4’

Perimeter channel

Intermediat e

Channel

Ceiling Section

Ceiling Angle

Connecting clip

Soffit Cleat

Rowl plug

Self drilling

& tapping screw

46 No.

40 mtr

84 mtr

173/180 mtr

64 Nos.

130/180 Nos.

64 Nos.

64 Nos.

25mm- 1500 Nos.

Aluminium Tile Acoustical False Ceiling 600mmx600mm Perforated Exposed Grid

Providing and fixing in true horizontal level False Ceiling Grid of exposed grid of 600mm X 600mm

shall be made of galvanized Steel Section with White pre-coated exposed surface. Main Tee

3600mm X 34mm X 24mm X 0.30mm and suspended with G.I rod. With pre-punched Cross Tee

Slots to be placed at 1200mm c/c. The Cross Tee of 1200mm length of size28mm X 24mm X 0.30

shall be locked in Main Tee at every 600mm c/c. The Sub cross of 600mm length of size 28mm X

24mm X 0.30mm shall be locked in the Cross Tee at 600mm c/c. The Cross Tee shall have an over

ride at both end to avoid swivel moments of Cross Tee. COMCEIL 595mm X 595mm X 0.5/0.7mm

thick tile will be laid to complete the job. Soundtex acoustic soundproofing non-woven fibre

fabric is used.

Perforated tile’s have standard perforations which has 1.5 or 2.5mm dia holes.

Item to Include: Item includes all material, labour, tools and equipment for false ceiling,

scaffolding etc all complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be recorded in sqm up to 2

decimals.

F - DOORS & WINDOWS

F – 1, 2, 3, 4) WOOD WORK:

161

1. General

1.1. Scope

The section shall cover all woodwork, joinery and similar work in the building. All wood

associated with work of all other sections shall also be done generally according to these

specifications unless specified otherwise. Unless otherwise specified, Timber used in the

work shall be approved quality from the species of wood listed in IS: 399-1963.

1.2. General

No wood work shall be painted, vanished waxed or otherwise finished before specifically

approved by the Engineer.

1.3. Fixing Generally

All wood shall be fixed in the manner as shown in the drawings. If not shown, fixing with

masonry or concrete shall be done with expansion plugs and screws of approved size, under

no circumstances they shall be fixed by wooden plugs.

1.4. Workmanship

All work shall be done in workmanlike manner as per best trade practices by skilled

workmen.

1.5. Starting of work

Unless otherwise instructed, finishing of wooden work on trims, finished frames, etc. shall

not be commenced until all interior plastering and flooring is completed and cured and are

cared of all rubbish. Whenever so required samples of actual work shall be installed at the

site and got approved by the Engineer.

1.6. Timber

162

All wood shall be of best quality klin seasoned timber of its kind specified. Unless otherwise

stated all of the hard wood shall be approved Ghana teak wood except for non-visible areas,

which shall be approved red Assam Hollock wood/ Burma Teak. All timber shall be treated

with approved anti-termite treatment with 10 years guarantee. All wood in contact with

masonry or concrete shall be painted with hot bitumen before placing in position taking care

to ensure that exposed parts of the timber are completely free from any bitumen. Samples

of all wood shall be got approved before ordering. Moisture content of wood shall be not

more than 8% in accordance to IS : 287 – 1993.

1.7. Saving

All scantlings, planks, battens etc. shall be sawn in straight lines, planes, uniform

thickness of full measurements from end to end and shall be sawn in the direction of grain.

They shall be procured with sufficient margins in as to secure the specified dimensions, lines

and planes after being wrought.

2.0 Timber

a) Ghana Teak Wood

Teak wood shall not possess any individual hard and sound knot exceeding 25mm in diameter

and the aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed one percent of the area of the

piece.

3.0 Door Frames

1. General

These specifications shall be used for wooden frames of doors, if used. The frames shall

be wrought, framed and fixed in positions as per detailed drawings and as directed by

Engineer. It shall be awn in the direction of the grains. Sawing shall be truly straight and

163

square. The scantling shall be planned smooth and accurate to hold full dimensions

with rebates, rounding and mouldings as shown in the drawings before assembling.

Patchwork of plugging of any kind shall not be permitted except as provided. A tolerance

of maximum +(-) 1 mm shall be allowed in the finished cross dimensions of door frames.

The maximum permissible limits for moisture content shall conform to IS 287-1993.

Wood shall be drawn which are representative of the lot in dimensions, quality and

moisture content.

2. Joints

These shall be of mortice and tenon type, simple, neat and strong. Mortice and tenon

joints shall fit in fully and accurately without wedging or filling. The joints shall be glued

with approved adhesive, framed, put together and pinned with hardwood or bamboo

pins not less than 10mm dia. after the frames are out together pressed in position by

means of a press.

3. Surface Treatment

Wood work shall not be painted, oiled of otherwise treated before it has been approved

by Engineer. All portions of timber abutting against masonry or concrete or bedded in

ground shall be painted with approved bitmastic paint or with boiling coaltar.

4. Fixing in position

Before the frames are fixed in position these shall be inspected and approved by

Engineer. The frame shall be placed in proper and secured to walls or columns as the case

may be with metallic fastener; iron hold fasts as shown in drawing or as directed by

Engineer. The doorframes without cills, while being placed in position, shall be suitable

strutted and wedged in order to prevent wrapping during construction. Under

164

no circumstances the frames shall be embedded in the floor finish. The frames shall also

be protected from damage, during constructions.

5. Flush door Shutters

Flush door shutters shall be of approved factory make and of the specified type. Samples

of doors shall be tested in an approved laboratory in accordance with the provisions of

the code.

6. Solid Core Type – Decorative Non-decorative

The specifications in general shall conform to Indian Standard Specifications IS – 2202

(Part-I) – 1991 and 2202 (Part-II) –m 1983. Samples of shutters shall be got approved

before ordering in bulk.

7. Core

The core shall be one of the following types :-

i) Block board core

The block board core shall conform to the requirements in Indian Standard Specification

IS – 1659-1990. The wooden strips for the core shall not exceed 25mm in width. The

length of the majority of strips shall extend to the full length of the board. But end joints

are permissible provided the jointed strips are distributed between full- length strips and

the joints are staggered. In any one-block board, the core strips shall be of one species of

timber only. A wooden frame prepared from styles and rails of well-seasoned and treated

good quality wood shall be provided for holding the core. The width of the members shall

not be less than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm. alternatively; the core shall be of

solid board with slots extending for about two third depths and at approximately 20 mm

spacings. The slots shall be made alternatively on

165

two faces of the board.

ii) Particle board core with or without block board

The core shall be either particle board or a combination of block board and particle board.

In a combined construction the width of block board construction shall extend at least

150mm from inner edge of the style, on either side, and the rest shall be particle board.

Block board shall conform to the requirement of IS:1659-1990. The particle board shall

be either of flat pattern pressed type or extrusion type conforming to IS 3478:1966.

iii) Particle board core

The particle board core shall be three layer of flat layer pressed type.

iv) Laminated Core

It shall be constructed by gluing together under pressure plywood strips in a laminated

way. The frame for holding the core shall be as specified in (a) above.

8. Lipping

Lipping in teak wood shall be provided internally as in the drawing. Unless otherwise

specified, internal lipping shall have a total depth not less than 22mm. Internal lipping

may be provided separately or as one piece with the style.

9. Rebating

In case of double leaved shutters, the meeting of the styles shall be rebated by one

166

third of the thickness of shutter. The rebating shall be either splayed or square type.

Where lipping is provided, the depth of lipping at the meeting of styles shall not be less

than 35mm.

10. Face Panel for Solid Core Board

The face panel shall be formed by gluing by hot press process on both faces of the core

with either plywood or cross – bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross- bands

as such or in the plywood shall be between 1mm and 3mm. The thickness of the face

veneers as such or in the plywood shall be between 0.5 and 1.5mm for commercial

veneers and between 0.5mm and 1.00 mm for decorative veneers. The combined

thickness of cross bands and face veneers shall not be less than 25mm. The plywood

conforming to these requirements shall be glued under pressure on both faces of the

core. When the panel consists of cross bands and face veneers to those of the core and

glued to its both faces. Face veneer shall then be laid with their grains at night angles to

those of the cross bands. Where it is described to have wooden strips in the block board

core horizontal rather than vertical, this shall be permitted only if 3 ply panel is pressed

on either side of the core and the total is a 7-ply construction. Application of a decorative

face veneer on a finished face panel having veneer in the same direction as proposed

shall be avoided. Wherever specified, the face veneering plywood shall be with BWP

Marine Grade ply conforming to IS 303-1989 and IS 710-1976.

11. Adhesives

Adhesive used for bonding cross-band and plywood to core and face veneers to cross

band, shall be phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin conforming to BWP type specified in

IS:848-1974.

Only synthetic resin adhesive shall be used for binding core members to one another

including core frame, and for lipping, glazing, frame, venetian frame and other exposed

parts where such binding is done.

167

12. Face Panel for cellular and Hollow Board

The plywood forming the face panel shall not be less than 3mm in thickness in the case

of cellular core shutter and not less than 6mm in thickness in the case of hollow core

shutters except for 25mm thick door in which case 4mm thickness may also be permitted.

Two ply face skin construction in a combination of cross band and face veneers may also

be adopted in which case the combined thickness shall not be less than 4mm. The

thickness of face veneers in the plywood shall be between 0.5mm and 1.5mm for

commercial veneers and between 3mm and 4mm for decorative veneers. The plywood

face skin assembly conforming to these requirements shall be glued under pressure on

both faces of the core.

4.0 Plywood

Plywood for general purposes shall be of three grades namely BWP, WWR and CWR

depending upon the adhesives used for bonding the veneers. The plywood used for

paneling of door shutters shall be BWP grade and not less than 10mm thickness for two

or more panel construction and 12mm thickness for single panel construction. It shall

have been bonded with BWP (Boiling water proofing) type synthetic resin adhesive.

5.0 Panelled, Glazed or Panelled and Glazed shutters

1. General

The frames for door shall be wrought, framed and fixed in position as pe detailed drawing

and as directed by the Engineer. Specified approved timber shall be used, and it shall be

sawn in the direction of the grains. Sawing shall be truly straight and square. The timber

shall be planed smooth and accyrate to the full dimensions, rebates, roundings and

mouldings made as shown in the drawings, before assembly. Patching or plugging of any

kind shall not ber permitted except as provided. Whereever specified for factory made

paneled door shutter, these shall be of approved make and shall conform to relevant ISI

specifications. The Contractor shall obtain approval from Engineer before placing the

order.

168

4. Depth of Rebate

2. Panelling

The panels shall be framed into grooves to the full depth of groove leaving an air space

of 1.5mm and the face shall be closely fitted to the sides of the groove. Mouldings to the

edges of panel openings shall be scribed at the joints.

3. Joinery Work

All pieces of timber shall be accurately cut and planed smooth to the full dimensions

without any patching or plugging of any kind. Rebates, roundings and mouldings as

shown in drawings shall be made before assembling. The thickness of styles and rails shall

be as specified for the shutters.

All members of the door shutters shall be straight without any wrap or bow and shall

have smooth, well planed faced at right angles to each other. The corners and edges of

panels shall be finished a shown in drawings, and these shall be feather tongued into

styles and rails. Sash bars shall have mitred joints with the styles. Styles and rails shall be

properly and accurately mortised and tenoned. Rails which are more than 180mm in

width shall have two tenons. Style , rails and bottom rails of shutter shall be made out

of piece of timber only. Intermediate rails exceeding 200mm in width may be made out

of one or more pieces of timber but the width of each pieces shall be not less than 75mm.

Where more then one piece of timebr is used, they shall be jointed with a continuous

tongued and grooved joint, glued together with bulk type synthetic resin adhesive of

make approved by the Engineer abd reinforced with metal dowels at regular intervals

not exceeding 200mm or pinned with not less than three wooden / bamboo pins. Jointed

pieces of timber shall belong to the same species. The bottom lock and top rails shall be

inserted 25mm inside the width of the styles. When assembling a leaf, styles shall be left

projecting as a hom. The styles and rails shall have 12mm groove in paneled partition for

the panel to fit in.

169

7. Beading

The depth of rebate in frames for housing the shutters shall in all cases be 12.5mm and

the rebate in shutters for closing in double shutter doors or windows shall not be less

than 20mm. In the case of double leaved shutters, the meeting of the styles shall be

rebated 20mm. The rebate shall be splayed.

The joinery work shall be assembled and passed by the Engineer, and then the joints shall

be pressed, and secured by bamboo pins of about 6mm diameter. The horns of styles

shall be sawn off.

5. Tolerance

The finished work with a tolerance of +(-) 1mm in thickness and +(-) 2mm in width of

styles and rails below 100mm and +(-) 3mm for 100mm and above shall be accepted. In

case of glazing bars tolerance of +(-) 1mm in width and thickness shall be accepted.

6. Gluing of joints

The surfaces of tenon and mortise shall be treated, before putting together, with bulk

type synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS : 851 – 1978 suitable for construction in

wood or synthetic resin adhesive (Phenolic and aminoplastic) conforming to IS : 848 –

1974 or polyvinyl acetate dispersion based adhesive conforming to IS : 4835 – 1979 and

pinned with 10mm dia hardwood dowels or bamboopins or star shapped metal pins;

after the frames are put together and pressed in position by means of press.

Stiles and bottom rail shall be made out of one piece of timber only. Intermediate rail

exceeding 200mm in width may be out of one or more pieces of timber. The width of

each piece shall be not less than 75mm. Where more than one piece of timber is used for

rails, they shall be joined with a continuous tongued and grooved joint glued together

and reinforced with metal dowels at regular intervals not exceeding 20mm.

170

Anchor Fasteners shall be used to fix the wooden frame with concrete surface. The anchor

Timber, plywood, hard board and particle board panels shall be fixed only with grooves

but additional beading may be provided either on one side or on both sides. 1st class teak

wood moulded beading shall be provided of sizes and pattern as shown in drawing or as

described in the item. In so far as glass panels are concerned, beading shall always be

provided without grooves, where beading is provided without grooves, the beading shall

be only on one side, the other side being supported by rebate from the styles. For

external doors beading shall be fixed on the outside.

8. Glazing

Glass panes shall be fixed by wooden beading having mitred joints as detailed above. A

thin layer of putty of approved make and conforming to IS : 419 – 1967 shall be applied

between glass panes and sash bars and also between glass panes and beading. Fixing

glass panes with simple putty and beads shall not be permitted. Frosted glass panes shall

be fixed with frosted face on the inside.

8. Fittings / Door Closer

All fittings used in the manufacture of the door shall be heavy duty type. The doors shall be

fitted with heavy duty concealed type automatic door closers, of approved make.

9. Hold Fast

Hold fast for the use with wooden doors shall be made from mild steel flats not less than

5mm thick, in accordance to IS:7196-1974 and shall be galvanized. The shutter shall be

supported by 125mm medium duty hinges.

Hold fast shall be fixed with the timber frame by steel screws only. The frames in masonry

wall shall be fixed in cement concrete blocks as per drawing and as directed by Engineer.

10. Anchor Fasteners

171

grove of the frame with fixing arrangements of 3 nos. of G.I. hold fast 225mmX20mmX4mm

shall be internally threaded carbon steel anchor. The anchor fastener shall be of galvanized

steel and the thickness of galvanized coating shall be 8mm.

F – 5) FIRE RETARDANT DOOR:

BOQ Item

Providing fire rated clear glass panes having minimum 2 hrs. fire rating for integrity

performances, 6mm thick, cut to required size and shape and fixing it in position in the paneled

door shutter/wooden frame work for fixed partition using GI angle metal beading of 10 x 10 x

2mm size on both the faces of shutter with necessary stainless steel screws etc. as specified,

including concealing the same by providing and fixing moulded beadings of second class teak

wood, of required size on both the faces of shutter, with necessary concealed fasteners and

10mm x 2mm intumescent strips (provided in “U” shape ie. On both sides of glass as well as

below the glass) in the gap between the glass and the beading & between the glass and the cut

face of the opening / rails for fixing the glass panel, alround the glazing panel on both faces of

shutters etc., all complete as per the Architectural drawings, as specified and as directed by the

Engineer-in-Charge. (For the purpose of payment, overall area of glass panel excluding portion

in the rebate/ beading shall be measured).

Specification

Providing, Supply & Fixing 2 Hours fire rated doors system duly tested for Integrity & Insulation

Criteria as per the IS:3614 Part 2 and BS:476 part 20 at Fire Research Laboratory Central Building

Research Institute Roorkee with standard heating conditions as specified in IS:3809 - 1979 and

BS:476 part 20 & 22 1987 to achieve the required integrity & insulation (i.e. to restrict the heat

radiation, temperature rise on the non fire side to the maximum of 140 degree Centigrade

above the ambient temperature on the unexposed surface of the shutter), RedMarenti

hardwood frame of section 150mm X 75mm with 1 nos. of brush type Intumescent strip

(Imported) to take care of Hot and cold smoke of size 20mm X 4mm concealed in the

172

with split end on ether side and wall grouted with cement concrete mix 1:3; 6 adjustable lugs

with split end tail to each jamb and 56mm thick single leaf shutter made out of perimeter railing

of RedMarenti hard wood of size 100mmX30mm and 2 nos. of 9mm thick PROMINA® –

60 board with 30mm thick Non–combustible Fire Retardant compound coated with Intumescent

sealant and faced with 4mm thick Water Proof marine Ply with brush type Fire and Smoke

Intumescent Seal of size 10mm x 4mm mounted in the grooves in the shutter on all sides except

bottom with 10mm thick teak wood beading on all side and Promaseal Intumescent sealant is

used to seal the gaps between Promina-60 Board and shutter beading along with cold pressing

of 1.5mm thick lamination of approved make and shade. The fire Doors with frame will be as

per IS: 3614 part 2 and BS: 476 part 20 at FRL CBRI Roorkee with standard heating conditions as

specified in IS: 3809 - 1979 and BS:476 part 20 & 22 1987 all complete to the entire specification

with the certified copy from M/s.Pomat International Asia Pacific Ltd. of the valid Test Certificate.

F – 7) Automatic sliding door:

BOQ Item

Providing & fixing of Automatic sliding door operator ES200-Easy Structural opening

4000X2400mm, clear opening: 2000X2400mm Automatic sliding door operator, modular design,

including internal cover.

2- panel sliding door

Operator Dimensions (H x T): 100 x 180 mm.

Microprocessor control, self-learning, reversing when obstruction is encountered.

Clear Passage Width:

2-panel = 800 – 2500 mm

Door weight:

Bi-Parting Door Panel, max. 2 x 85 kg.

Function programs:

Program modes:

Off, Automatic, Permanent open, Partial opening, Exit only, Selfregulating

Partial open, Exit only partial opening, Night-bank facility. Compliant with future European

173

standards and specifications per EN 12650.

Microprocessor-controlled control unit. Self-learning, with adjustable parameters for opening

and closing speed, hold-open time and opening and closing force. With pulse expansion for

cheque card or code card reader or key switch. Class of protection IP 20.

Produced according to the guidelines for power-operated windows, doors and gates BGR 232,

the UVV and the VDE regulations. TÜV design tested, tested according to the low- voltage

guidelines, production according to ISO 9001:2000 certification. Fulfils the DIN V18650 (prEN

12650).

Off, Automatic, Permanent open, Exit only, Partial open, Night-bank switch, Emergency off.

Choice between emergency opening and emergency closing in the event of a power cut (with

optional battery pack).

Safety devices:

Obstruction detection feature, automatic reversing cycle, dynamic and static force limitation,

emergency control unit (emergency stop), connections for light barriers for through-passage

monitoring.

1. Auto Reversal – Inbuilt

2. Light Barrier – 01 Pair (Optional)

Connection:

230 V, 50/60 Hz, UPS Supply.

Activators:

Radar system 02 Nos

Locking:

() Electro-mechanical locking, Bitable

Colour light alloy parts:

() Silver, Anodized E6/C0 - standard

Make:

DORMA ES 200 Easy

G - WATERPROOFING WORK

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Standards

174

Indian and other international standards followed for this section shall be as listed below.

Any discrepancies or ambiguities seen shall be brought to the notice of the PMC and

clarification / confirmation sought. His decision shall be final. However, as a general rule,

more stringent specifications shall be followed.

(1) I.S. 269 Specifications for 33 grade ordinary and low heat Portland cement.

(2) I.S. 283 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources.

(3) I.S. 2645 Specification for integral cement waterproofing compound

(4) I.S. 283 Code of practice for waterproofing of underground reservoirs and swimming pool.

(5) I.S. 8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement.

(6) I.S. 12118 Specification for two part polysulphide base cement : Part-I General requirements

(7) I.S. 13826 Method of Test for bitumen based felt.

(8) I.S. 3495 Method of Test for Burnt clay building bricks.

1.2 Quality Assurance

1.2.1. Manufacturer’s Qualification a) Not less than five years experience in manufacturing of membrane roofing.

1. Obtain primary materials from single manufacturer. Manufacturer’s name shall appear on containers and accessories.

2. Provide secondary materials as required by manufacturer of primary materials.

1.2.2. Applicators Qualification

a) Approved by manufacturer prior to execution of this contract, with experience on at least five projects.

b) Foreman of Fields Crew: Minimum five-year experience with system of

waterproofing being installed.

1.2.3. Certification Manufacturer’s certifications on manufacturer’s letterhead:

175

1. Certify system design: penetration, transition, and perimeter details; and system specifications are appropriate and satisfactory for this particular project.

2. Certify products proposed for use comply with standards.

3. Certify materials ordered and supplied are compatible with each other, suited for local and purpose intended and shipped in sufficient quantity to ensure proper timely installation.

4. Certify materials have express warranty of merchantability and fitness for

particular purposes of this project.

5. Certify manufacturer has reviewed project and will issue warranty upon successful completion of installation.

6. Certify materials shipped to site meet membrane manufacturer’s published

performance standards and requirements of this specification.

7. Membrane manufacturer’s approval of insulation type and method of installation.

8. Manufacturer’s approval of installer.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Product Data

Contractor to submit along with his proposal product data for material he proposed to use.

1.3.2 Information Submittals a) Certifications specified in quality assurances.

b) Manufacturer’s instructions.

1.4 Waterproofing Compounds

1.4.1 Waterproofing compounds shall be cementious (cement based) non-shrinking, self-

curing mixtures. These shall be

Free from sodium and chlorides

Free from material detrimental to concrete and reinforcement.

Able to create a membrane in one or multiple coats as per manufacturer’s

instruction.

176

Membrane capable to prevent infiltration when applied to interior faces and

ponded.

Permeability, shear bond strength, compressive strength, volume changes

meets minimum requirements of codes.

1.4.2 Accessories

All other accessories materials such as primers, bonding agents, polymers etc. shall be as

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1.5 Warranty

A. Special Warranty:

1. Warranty with attachments for full replacement value of completed installation

signed by manufacturer, applicator and contractor warranting against water

infiltration and defects of materials and workmanship for period of ten years.

2. Provide warranty that covers labour and workmanship, including labour for

access to waterproofing, for watertight warranty.

a. Warrant penetrations, terminations, changes of direction, and

membrane.

b. Warranty shall include removing and reinstalling superimposed work

covering waterproofing.

2. MATERIALS

2.1. Cement

2.1.1 Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS and shall be of grade 43 or 33.

It shall be received in bags of 50 kg and each batch shall be accompanied with a test

certificate of the factory. Also it shall be tested before use to ascertain its strength, setting

time, etc. In case cement has been stored for over 6 months or for any reasons the stored

177

cement shows signs of deterioration or contamination, it shall be tested as per the

direction of the PMC prior to use in the works.

2.1.2 Cement shall be stored in such locations so as to prevent deterioration due to moisture

dampness. A dry and water proof shed shall be provided. Bags shall be stacked on rigid

waterproof platform about 15 to 20 cm clear above the floors and 25 to 35 cm clear or

away from the surrounding walls. A maximum high stack of 12 bags is permitted. Stacks

shall be so arranged that the first batches are used first (FIFO), and that they permit easy

access for inspection and handling.

2.2 Sand

2.2.1. Natural and deposited by stream or glacial agencies as a result of disintegration of rock

is the best form of sand and shall be used.

2.2.2. 2.2.1.1 Sometimes it is obtained from crushed stone screenings but often contains a high

percentage of dust and clay. It tends to be flaky and angular. This type produces harsh

concrete and should be avoided.

2.2.1.2 Sea sand shall not be used.

2.2.2 Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter

and shall not contain any appreciable ;amount of clay. Sand shall not contain harmful

impurities such as iron, pyrites, coat particles, lignite, mica shale or similar laminated

material, alkali, and organic impurities in such form or quantities as to affect the

strength or durability of concrete or mortar.

2.2.2.1 When tested ;as per IS 2386 Part I and Part II, sand shall not exceed permissible quantities

of deleterious materials as given in table 1 of IS 383.

2.2.3 Grading of sand shall conform to IS and shall fall within limits

2.2.4 Sand shall be stored in such a way that it does not get mixed with mud, grass, vegetable

and other foreign matter. The best way is to have a hard surface platform made out of

concrete, bricks or planks. It should be to the approval of the PMC.

178

2.3 Brick bats

2.3.1 It shall be prepared from well burnt bricks. In no case shall under-burnt bricks be used.

Flaky and elongated pieces shall be avoided. It should also be free from adherent

coatings of soil or silt. Brick bats should be free from alkalies, soft fragments, organic

impurities, etc. In such quantities as not to affect strength and durability of concrete.

2.3.2 Water absorption for the bricks after 24 hours immersion in cold water shall not exceed

15%.

2.4 Water

2.4.1 Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from

objectionable quantities of silt, oils, alkalise, acids, salts so as not to weaken mortar,

or concrete or cause efflorescence or attach the steel in RCC while curing, acids, salts;

so as not to weaken mortar, or concrete or cause efflorescence or attack the steel in

RCC while curing. It shall be free of elements, which significantly affects the hydration

reaction. Potable water is generally satisfactory but it shall be tested prior to use in the

works.

2.4.2 Water tested shall be in accordance with IS 3025. Maximum permissible limits of

deleterious materials in water should be as given in IS 456.

2.4.3 Water storage tanks shall be such as to prevent any deleterious materials getting mixed

with it.

2.4.4 Water shall be tested and approved in writing by the PMC prior to use in the works.

2.4.5 Stone tiles such as Kota / shahbad shall be of best quality and free from any defects and

of uniform thickness.

2.5 MATERIALS

179

2.5.1 FORMDEX UNIFLEX ELASTOMERIC CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

DESCRIPTION:

Formdex Uniflex is a cementitious, two-component, polymer-modified, elastomeric

Waterproofing and protective membrane. Owing to its composition of cement, quartz sand and

a special blend of chemical ingredients of an inorganic nature, Formdex Uniflex is 100%

compatible with all masonry structures. It is efflorescence free and can be used against active or

passive water pressure. Due to its excellent adhesion, high flexural and tensile strength, it can

be easily applied to both horizontal and vertical surfaces.

AREAS OF USAGE:

Formdex Uniflex is used to waterproof areas such as:-

Basement walls and floors

Wet areas

Underground shafts

Basements

Garages

Foundation walls and footings

Tunnels

Retaining walls

Swimming pools

Lift pits

SPECIFICATION DATA

Component A Component B COLOUR: Grey White BULK DENSITY: 1.02 kg/lit 1.02 kg/lit PACKAGING: 25 kg Bag 17 kg

MIX RATIO: A : B = 1.5 : 1.0 (by weight)

A : B = 1.5 : 1.0 (by volume)

SHELF LIFE: One year in dry environment

ELONGATION AT BREAK 309% (ASTM D412)

TENSILE STRENGTH 1.2 N/mm2 (ASTM D412)

ADHESION TO SUBSTRATE

0.85 N/mm2 (ASTM D4541) RESISTANCE TO WATER No Penetration

180

COVERAGE: Surface water pressure – min. 1.0 kg/m2/coat x 2 coats (approximately 1.0 mm dry film thickness) Ground water pressure – min. 1.0 kg/m2/coat x 3 coats (Approximately 1.5 mm dry film thickness)

Actual coverage depends on site condition.

DRYING AND OVERCOATING TIMES: 3 hours between coats

INITIAL CURE: - 1 day FULL CURE: - 7 days POT LIFE: - 60 minutes @ 25oC

(DIN 1048: Part 5) @ 3.0kgf/cm2

CRACK BRIDGING Passed 2mm (ASTM C836)

SHORE A HARDNESS 78 (ASTM D2240)

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

(ASTM D412) Change in elongation after - Ageing at 50oC in oven x 2 weeks +5% - Immersion in 5% NaOCl +4% - Immersion in 1.25% ammonia +10% - Immersion in 3.7% HCl -29%

Change in tensile strength after - Ageing at 50oC in oven x 2 weeks +31% - Immersion in 5% NaOCl -21% - Immersion in 1.25% ammonia -18% - Immersion in 3.7% HCl -25%

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION:

Prior to application, ensure that the temperature of the substrate is at least 10oC. Make sure the

substrate is sound and clean. All dirt, dust and loose materials shall be removed. All tie wires,

wood or steel separators should be removed. All cracks and joints should be treated in an

appropriate manner. The surface to be treated shall be pre-wetted down using clean water and

there should be no free-lying water when applying Formdex Uniflex.

APPLICATION:

Add 3 parts of Component A (powder), to 2 parts of Component B (liquid) by volume, and mix thoroughly with a mechanical mixer for at least 3 minutes. Mix only sufficient material that can be used up within its pot life.

Apply Formdex Uniflex by masonry brush, trowel roller or spray equipment. For areas subjected

to only surface (or low) water pressure, apply two coats of Formdex Uniflex at min.

1.0 kg/m2/coat, giving an approximate dry film thickness of 1.00 mm. For areas subjected to

ground (or high) water pressure, apply three coats of Formdex Uniflex at 1.0 kg/m2/coat, giving

an approximate dry film thickness of 1.5 mm. Allow 3 hours drying time between each coat.

181

CURING AND PROTECTION:

The treated surface must be protected from rain and direct sunlight, frost and wind. Canvas or

wet hessian bags may be used to protect surfaces. Curing can also be done by covering the

hardened surface with plastic sheets, canvas. The total curing time takes 7 days.

Back-filling, screeding, tiling etc. can normally be carried out carefully 24 hours after

application of the final coat. Water-retaining structures can normally be filled with water after

three days of curing. Ventilation should be provided in enclosed or humid areas.

HEALTH AND SAFETY:

Due to the content of cement, Formdex Uniflex is highly alkaline. It is relatively nontoxic and

harmless when used properly. Prevent contact with eyes and skin. Do not inhale dust. Wear

suitable gloves and eye protection. If in contact with eyes, wash immediately with clean water.

2.5.2 VANDEX SUPER/SUPER WHITE

Waterproofing Slurry

In-depth waterproofing and protection

Permanent active

Applied to pressure or non-pressure concrete face

Approved for potable water contact

Grey or white

VANDEX SUPER and VANDEX SUPER WHITE are of a similar nature. Whereas VANDEX SUPER is based on grey Portland cement VANDEX SUPER WHITE uses white cement as binding agent. All technical information of VANDEX SUPER apply also for VANDEX SUPER WHITE except for colour, bulk density and setting time.

Product Description

182

VANDEX SUPER is a surface-applied material, which waterproofs and protects concrete in-

depth.

It consists of grey or white Portland cement, specially treated quartz sand and a compound of active chemicals. VANDEX SUPER is supplied in powder form in 25 kg bags and needs only to be mixed with water prior to application.

Areas of Application

VANDEX SUPER can be applied to all structurally sound concrete – new or old. It may be applied

to either the pressure or non-pressure concrete face (i.e. with or against water pressure).

VANDEX SUPER may be used in conjunction with VANDEX PREMIX (see separate data sheet).

Typical areas of application are:

Basement retaining walls

Swimming-pools

Concrete slabs (floor/roof/balcony, etc.)

Sewage treatment plants

Construction joints

Channels

Water retaining structures

Bridges, etc.

Properties

When VANDEX SUPER is applied to a concrete surface the active chemicals combine with the

free lime and moisture present in the capillary tract, to form insoluble crystalline complexes.

These crystals block the capillaries and minor shrinkage cracks in the concrete to prevent any

further water ingress (even under pressure). However, the Vandex layer will still allow the

passage of water vapour through the structure (i.e. the concrete will still be able to „breathe“).

In addition to waterproofing the structure, VANDEX SUPER protects concrete against sea water,

waste water, aggressive ground water and certain chemical solutions. VANDEX SUPER is

approved for use in contact with potable water, and is therefore suitable for the treatment of

water storage tanks, reservoirs, water towers, etc.

VANDEX SUPER and VANDEX SUPER WHITE are not decorative materials.

183

Surface Preparation

All concrete to be treated with VANDEX SUPER must be clean and have an „open“ capillary system. Remove laitance, dirt, grease, etc. by means of high pressure water jetting, wet sandblasting or wire brushing. Faulty concrete in the form of cracks, honeycombing, etc. must be chased out, treated with VANDEX SUPER and filled flush with VANDEX UNI MORTAR 1. Surfaces must be carefully prewatered prior to the Vandex application. The concrete surface must be damp but not wet.

Mixing

VANDEX SUPER is mechanically mixed with clean water to a consistency of thick oil paint.

Approximate mixing ratio is 0.8 parts of water to 2.0 parts of powder (by volume).

Mix only as much material as can be used within 20 minutes and stir mixture frequently. If the mixture starts to set do not add more water, simply restir to restore workability.

Application

Slurry consistency. Apply VANDEX SUPER in one or two coats according to specification by

masonry brush or appropriate power spray equipment. When two coats are specified apply the

second coat whilst the first coat is still „green“.

Dry powder consistency (for horizontal surfaces only). The specified amount of VANDEX SUPER

is distributed in powder form through a sieve and trowelled into the freshly placed concrete once

this has reached initial set.

Post treatment. The treated areas should be kept damp for a period of five days and must be

protected against direct sun, wind and frost, by covering with polythene sheeting, damp hessian

or similar.

Note:

Do not apply VANDEX SUPER at temperatures below + 5 °C.

VANDEX SUPER cannot be used as an additive to concrete or plasters. Consumption

Concrete surfaces to be backfilled. One coat of VANDEX SUPER at 0.75 kg/m2 followed by one

coat of VANDEX PREMIX at 1.0 kg/m2. Brush or spray applied.

Water retaining structures, internal concrete wall surfaces. Two coats of VANDEX SUPER each

at 0.75 kg/m2. Brush or spray applied.

Concrete slabs. VANDEX SUPER at 1.2 kg/m2 applied in one slurry coat to hardened concrete

184

or dry sprinkled and trowel applied to fresh concrete when this has reached initial set.

Construction joints. VANDEX SUPER at 1.5 kg/m2 applied in slurry or dry powder consistency

immediately prior to placing the next lift/bay of concrete.

Blinding concrete. VANDEX SUPER at 1.2 kg/m2 applied in slurry or dry powder consistency

immediately prior to placing the overlying concrete slab.

Packaging

25 kg PE-lined paper bags

Storage

When stored in a dry place in unopened, undamaged original packing, shelf life is 12 months.

Technical Data

VANDEX SUPER VANDEX SUPER WHITE

Aggregate state

Colour

Bulk density Setting time

Powder

Cement grey

Approx. 1.25 kg/l 60 minutes

Powder

White

Approx. 1.20 kg/l 120–180 minutes

All data are averages of several tests under laboratory conditions. In practice,

climatic variations such as temperature, humidity, and porosity of substrate may

affect these values.

Health and Safety

VANDEX SUPER / SUPER WHITE contains cement.

Irritating to eyes and skin. VANDEX SUPER (grey) may cause sensitization by skin contact. Keep

out of reach of children. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. In case of contact with eyes, rinse

immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice. Wear suitable gloves. For further

information please refer to Material Safety Data Sheet.

2.5.3 FORMAK 629

ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

DESCRIPTION:

Formak 629 is a single component, liquid applied, elastomeric waterproofing membrane based

185

on highly elastic organic polymers. Formak 629 contains no bitumen or coal tar and will not cause

staining to marble, ceramic tiles or tile grouts. Formak 629 has more than 500% elongation, and

it is non-flammable and non-toxic. Formak 629 can be reinforced with fiberglass mat for extra

strength in areas where high stress may be encountered such as around pipes and up stands.

Formak 629 is seamless and therefore eliminates potential failure due to poor joints.

AREAS OF USAGE:

Formak 629 should be used as an effective membrane to waterproof wet areas such as

bathrooms, kitchens, ground slabs, walkways and concealed roofing applications. As a liquid

applied system, it is ideal for areas that require a lot of detailing work.

SPECIFICATION DATA

COLOUR: Grey

PACKING SIZE: 20 litre pail

SHELF LIFE: 2 years in unopened container

SOLIDS (by volume): 59%

THINNING: As Formak 629 is based on polyisoprene it can not be thinned with water.

SPREADING RATE: Refer overleaf under application.

DRYING TIMES: 1 - 2 hours for roofing applications

DRY FILM THICKNESS 0.8 to 1.0 mm. ELONGATION 527% nominal (ASTM D412) (unreinforced)

TENSILE STRENGTH 7.79 N/mm2 (ASTM D412)

CRACK BRIDGING – 2MM No cracks (ASTM C836)

WATER VAPOUR TRANSMISSION 116.82/m2.24h (ASTM E96)

WATER PENETRATION No penetration (DIN 1048: Part 5)

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION:

Make sure the substrate is clean, dry and free of dirt, oil etc. The structure and substrate have

to be of sound construction, with expansion joints where necessary. New concrete needs to be

cured for a minimum of 28 days before the system can be applied.

186

APPLICATION:

PRIMING:

Stir Formak 629 primer well before use.

Concrete: - Apply one coat of Formak 629 Primer and allow to dry before over coating.

Steel and Galvanized iron: - Mix one part of Formak 629 Primer with one and a half parts of

Portland cement by volume. Mix well by mechanical means until lump free and apply at

5m2/litre. Allow to dry before overcoating.

TREATMENT TO LARGE CRACKS:

Apply one thick coat of Formak 629 and incorporate a strip of fibreglass. Leave to dry.

TREATMENT TO DETAILING:

Apply Formak 629 at 1.0 litre/m2 making certain to dress up at least 150mm from the finished

floor or roof level, around pipes, along walls and upstands. Immediately roll a layer fibreglass

mat and apply another coat of Formak 629 at 0.5 litre/m2.

ROOF APPLICATION:

Apply Formak 629 by roller or brush at 0.6 litre/m2 and leave to dry for at least 16 hours. Apply

two coats.

WET AREAS

Apply Formak 629 by roller or brush at 0.4 litre/m2 and leave to dry for at least 6 hours. Apply

three coats.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Formak 629 contains ammonia, when used indoors provision should be made to ensure that

adequate ventilation is provided. In cases where ventilation is not adequate, operators should

wear safety masks suitable for use with ammonia. Dry paint can be removed from the skin by

using warm water and soap.

187

2.5.4 FORMDEX UNI

CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

DESCRIPTION:

Formdex Uni is a two-component, cementitious waterproofing and protective membrane. Owing

to its composition of cement, quartz sand and a special blend of chemical ingredients of an

inorganic nature, Formdex Uni is 100% compatible with all masonry structures. It can be used

against active or passive water pressure. Due to its excellent adhesion and high tensile strength,

it can be easily applied to both horizontal and vertical surfaces.

AREAS OF USAGE:

Formdex Uni is used to waterproof areas such as:-

basement walls and floors

wet areas

underground shafts

foundation walls and footings

garages

retaining walls

lift pits

SPECIFICATION DATA

Component A Component B

COLOUR: Grey White BULK DENSITY: 1.02kg/lit 1.05 kg/lit PACKAGING: 25 kg Bag 17 kg

MIX RATIO: 1.5 : 1 (by weight) 1.5 : 1 (by volume)

SHELF LIFE: One year in dry environment

ELONGATION AT BREAK 127% (ASTM D412)

TENSILE STRENGTH 1.6N/mm2 (ASTM D412)

TEAR STRENGTH 12.9N (ASTM D1004)

188

COVERAGE: Surface water pressure – min. 1.0 kg/m2/coat x 2 coats (approximately 1.0 mm dry file thickness)

*Actual coverage depends onsite condition.

DRYING AND OVERCOATING TIMES: 3 hours between coats

INITIAL CURE: 1 day FULL CURE: 7 days POT LIFE: 60 minutes @ 25oC

CRACK BRIDGING Passed 2mm (ASTM C836)

RESISTANCE TO WATER No penetration (DIN 1048: Part 5) @ 6.0 kgf/cm2

WATER TOXICITY Passed (SS 375: 2001)

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION:

Prior to application, ensure that the temperature of the substrate is at least 10oC. Make sure the

substrate is sound and clean. All dirt, dust and loose materials shall be removed. All tie wires,

wood or steel separators should be removed. All cracks and joints should be treated in an

appropriate manner. The surface to be treated shall be pre-wetted down using clean water and

there should be no puddles of water when applying Formdex Uni.

APPLICATION:

Add 3 parts of Component A (powder) to 2 parts of Component B (liquid) by volume, and mix

thoroughly with a mechanical mixer for at least 3 minutes. Mix only sufficient material that can

be used up within its pot life.

Apply Formdex Uni by masonry brush, trowel roller or spray equipment. Apply two coats of

Formdex Uni at min.1.0 kg/m2/coat, giving an approximate dry film thickness of 1.00 mm.

Allow 3 hours drying time between coatings.

CURING AND PROTECTION:

The treated surface must be protected from rain and direct sunlight, frost, wind and rain. Canvas

or wet hessian bags may be used to protect surfaces. Curing can also be done by covering the

hardened surface with plastic sheets, canvas. The total curing time takes 7 days.

Ventilation should be provided in enclosed or humid areas.

HEALTH AND SAFETY:

189

Due to the content of cement, Formdex Uni is highly alkaline. It is relatively non-toxic and

harmless when used properly. Prevent contact with eyes and skin. Do not inhale dust. Wear

suitable gloves and eye protection. If in contact with eyes, wash immediately with clean water.

2.5.5 VANDEX BB 75

Waterproofing Slurry

Efflorescence-free surface waterproofer

For concrete, masonry and render

Can be used against active or passive water pressure

Approved for drinking water structures

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

VANDEX BB 75 is a cementitious, ready mixed, efflorescence – free surface water proofer with hydrophobic properties, resistant to water and moisture.

AREAS OF APPLICATION

VANDEX BB 75 is applied to surfaces such as concrete, masonry and render which have to be

sealed and protected against the influence of water and moisture.

PROPERTIES

Owing to its composition of cement, quartz with graded grain – size distribution and special

chemical ingredients of an inorganic nature, VANDEX BB 75 is waterproof (tested upto 7.0 bar).

It can be employed against active and passive water pressures. VANDEX BB 75 is safe to use

190

with patable water. The initial and final bonding capability of VANDEX BB 75 is excellent, making

its suitable to be applied to horizontal as well as vertical surfaces. It is durable, resistant to frost

and heat after setting, but all the same permeable to vapour. VANDEX BB 75 is not a decorative

material.

SURFACE PREPARATION

The substrate to be sealed must be firm and relatively even, and its surface free from voids,

gaping cracks or ridges. Bitumen, oil, grease or remains of paint have to be removed by suitable

means.

Laitance and unsound concrete have to be removed by bush hammering or sand blasting. The

substrate should be well prewatered and slightly damp at the time of application.

MIXING

Place 25 kg of VANDEX BB 75 in a clean container, add 5.0 – 5.75 litres of water for brush or

trowel application, or 5.75 – 6.25 litres of water respectively for spray application and stir for at

least 3 minutes with a mechanical mixer.

APPLICATION

VANDEX BB 75 may be applied with masonry brush, trowel or spray equipment. Do not apply

at temperature below +50 C, or to a frozen substrate. A maximum of 4 kg / m2 can be laid on in

one application. Provide suitable protection against extreme weather conditions while setting.

In case of subsequent screeds, renders or tile fixings, the VANDEX BB 75 coating is to be covered

by a thin rough cast of sand and cement 3:1 while still green.

CONSUMPTION

Water Sealing problem Minimum thickness of layer Approx. minimum amount of sealing slurry to be applied.

Ground moisture 1.5mm 3 kg / m2

Pressure less surface water and seepage

2mm 4 kg / m2

Water under pressure 3mm 6 kg / m2

191

Max. thickness of layer is 5mm

PACKAGING

25 kg PE – lined paper bags.

STORAGE

When stored in a dry place in unopened, undamaged original packaging, shelf life is 12 months.

TECHNICAL DATA

Aggregate state Powder

Colour Grey

Bulk Density Approx. 1.4 kg / L

Setting time Approx. 2 to 4 hours

Compression strength 40 N / mm2 28 days air storage 200 C / 65 % relative humidity

Bending tensile strength 6 N / mm2 28 days air storage 200 C / 65 % relative humidity

Modulus of elasticity 2.14 x 104 N / mm2 28 days air storage / 230 C / 50% relative humidity

All data are averages of several tests under laboratory conditions. In practice, climatic variations such as temperature, humidity and porosity of substrate may affect these values.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

VANDEX BB 75 contains cement.

Irritating to eyes and skin. May cause sensitization by skin contact. Keep out of reach of

children. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with

plenty of water and seek medical advice. Wear suitable gloves. For further information please

refer to Material Safety Data Sheet.

2.6 Delivery / Storage.

192

All materials shall be delivered and stored at site conforming to following minimum

requirements.

Material received is approved by PMC.

Material is in unopened container and labled with manufacturer’s name, brand

name and instruction for use.

Material received shall be along with manufacturer’s certificate for quality and

period by manufacturer.

Material shall be stored in dry, well ventilated and covered storage if so desired

by manufacturer.

Primers, adhesives etc. shall be as recommended by the membrane

manufacturer.

3.0 SCOPE OF WORK.

3.1 Work shall include design, supply, install and test proprietary waterproofing systems to

underground structure, terrace, toilet sunk slabs, UG and Overhead water tanks etc.

this shall be guaranteed for 10 years on Rs. 100/- stamp in preformed to be approved

by the PMC.

a) Waterproofing of basement including sealing of services junctions, drain points,

sumps shall be as per approved box type proprietary treatment.

b) Waterproofing of terrace inclusive of grouting, sealing rainwater down takes outlets,

other services outlets, junctions of walls, slab, beam, columns, parapet wall etc.

where required expansion joints all as per approved terrace proprietary

treatment.

3.2 Waterproofing of toilet sunk portions and water tanks inclusive of grouting, sealing,

outlet pipes of services, junctions of slab, beams, walls and covering with protective

cement sand plaster coat / screed.

3.3 Work shall included design, supply, install and test proprietary box type system for

basement and terrace system for sloped / flat roofs as approved by the PMC. This shall

193

be guaranteed for 10 years on Rs. 200/- stamp paper in proforma to be approved by the

PMC.

Work shall conform to minimum standards specified. Systems detailed hereunder are to

clarify type of waterproofing system expected. Contractor is at liberty to suggest and

submit equivalent system with products meeting / exceeding standards.

3.4 Sub Contractor / Specialist shall be from the approved list and shall be approved by the

PMC in writing before being employed by the contractor.

3.5 The contractor shall submit

1. Statement giving detailed brief of work he proposes to carry out.

a. Name of agency with his experience certificate and quantum of work

carried out.

b. Technical specifications.

c. Product data sheets of material to be used.

d. Shop drawing detailing.

Sections co-ordinated with typical installations details

Vertical termination and sealing

Laps needed if any

Typical expansion, construction and control jointing details with

minimum requirements.

Horizontal fixing and laying details.

Typical finishing arrangement.

Flashings if required.

e. Protective measures to be taken

f. Installation guidance

g. Samples of each product in duplicate fixed over plywood boards or

similar to enable proper cross sections.

h. Manufacturer’s certificate that product and material to be used is

correct and shall give intended results when applied through authorized

agency.

194

4. WORKMANSHIP

4.1. Preparation of Surfaces

a) The surfaces to receive the treatment shall be thoroughly cleaned of

Laitances, scales, loose material on surface.

Grease, oil or other contaminants by etching with 10-15% of solution of

muriatic acid using commercial grade alkaline cleaner, flushing with clean

water drying and vacuuming.

b) Surfaces shall be examined and well-defined cracks grouted by making “V” groove

/ notches with cement slurry, shall be cured and dried well before treatment.

c) Any honeycombs shall be carefully cut and plugged, and cured well before treatment.

d) Examination of surfaces shall account for the fact that,

Surfaces are cured for 14 days and no condensation has taken place.

Horizontal and vertical surfaces have smooth finish, free from defects.

Surfaces are dry, clean, free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, other

coatings and contaminants which could affect bond of waterproofing

system

4.2 Terrace waterproofing (brick bat coba)

4.2.1 Various experienced waterproofing specialists shall carry out the following or similar

types of waterproofing treatments. Terrace and roof slabs shall be treated with integral

cement based waterproofing consisting of brick coba concrete laid to slope. There

treatment shall be taken over vertical surfaces as required / specified. Final finished

surfaces may be laid with paving tiles, stone or finished smooth in cement and marked

with false chequred marking. Points given below are just for guidelines. The actual

195

steps and details shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of the PMC. Work

shall be carried out as per approved method by the PMC.

4.2.2 Surface preparation

The surface to be treated shall be cleaned and inspected thoroughly

a) All minor, medium cracks shall be marked.

b) All cracks shall be well defined and “V” groove made. These shall be cleaned with

compressed air, grouted with cement sand mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 sand) slurry

mixed with no shrinking and waterproofing compound.

c) Then again surfaces shall be well cleaned of all loose particles, laintances, moss,

oil / greasy material, cement etc

d) Roof areas shall be well marked with spot datums to create ridge, lines, slopes

and drain points for easy draining of water (Nominal slopes shall be about 1: 100)

e) Cement sand mortar mixed in ration 1:4 along with waterproofing and non

shrinking compound as specified by manufacturer shall be mixed with clean water

and layer of about 20 to 30 mm laid over the entire area to be treated; then well

soaked saturated brick bats shall be arranged by proper placing to create required

slope as per datum established. Minimum thickness at draining point shall be 50

mm. Rain water inlet, pipes etc. shall be well grouted; edge, corners shall be well

rounded (watta) by taking up treatment about 300 mm above proposed finished

level

f) These mortar laid and bat fixed area shall be kept dipped in water for at least 3

days.

g) Slab and roof sofits shall be examined for dampness from under. Any leakage /

dampness noticed shall be treated with pressure grouting and again checked by

dipping the area for 3 days.

h) When no dampness noticed, area shall be drained out and cement0sand mortar

mixed in ratio 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) shall be spread over the entire area and

bats well grouted. The top surfaces shall be finished to a neat horizontal datum

level to achieve well-defined ridges, gutters, watta etc. Edges shall be tucked in

grooves in wall / parapet about 300 mm above proposed finished level.

196

i) Surfaces shall be finished / prepared to receive about 40 mm thick IPS (Indian

Patent Stone) or stone paving etc.

j) All expansion joints shall be cleaned, primed and finished with sealant as specified

by manufacturer of sealant and approved by PMC.

4.3 Waterproofing by Chemical coating

4.3.1 Various reputed and experienced chemical companies offers waterproof coatings

thorough their approved applicator or under their direction. RCC slab shall be treated

with approved chemical integral cement based waterproof coating. Slopes to RCC slabs

are achieved by laying the same while concreting or by laying screed / light weight

concrete. Treatment is carried over to watta and on parapet at least 300 mm above

finished surfaces. Chemical coated areas are further finished with 40 mm thick IPS or by

laying paving stone, tiles, china mosaic etc. The actual steps shall be directed by

manufacture chemical and approved by the PMC. For guidance following steps shall be

followed :

4.3.2 Surface preparation a) All minor, medium cracks shall be marked.

b) All cracks shall be well defined and “V” groove made. These shall be cleaned with

compressed air, grouted with cement sand mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 sand) slurry

mixed with non-shrinking and waterproofing compound. Areas well cured.

c) Then again surfaces shall be well cleaned of all loose particles, laintances, moss,

oil / greasy material, cement etc.

d) Prepared surface shall be finished smooth with cement sand mortar mixed in ratio

CM 1: 4 and applied about 8-10 mm and finished smooth by trowel. (this is

basically to get smooth surface) for application of cement based chemical coating.

e) Smooth surface cured and moistened

f) Chemical added with cement as per direction of approved manufacturer shall be

mixed, stirred and applied in one, two or three coats allowing required curing

(minimum time gap between two consecutive coats).

197

g) Surfaces cured as per direction.

h) Surfaces shall be finished with screed about 15-20 mm if to be left long as

protective coarse to receive further specified finish.

4.3.3 Measurements shall be in square meter for finished surface area. Rates shall include all

items right from cleaning of surface to completion and testing required against defects

such as leakage, seepage, dampness, sweating etc.

5 TESTING

5.5.1 On completion of installation and prior to next operation or as directed by PMC work

shall be tested by the contractor. Required water shall be arranged sand disposed of by

the contractor at his cost.

a) All openings, drains etc. shall be plugged.

b) Water shall be flooded about 200 mm over the sunk portion. Water shall be kept

for 72 hours.

c) Surfaces shall be observed critically and incase any leakage is observed areas shall

be treated again and tests to be carried out against to the satisfaction of the PMC

5.5.2 Approval of water test does not relieve the contractor of his obligation of providing

installed waterproofing guaranteed for 10 years as per contract.

5.5.3 All arrangement of material, labour etc. required including preserving and maintaining

areas flooded shall be carried out by the contractor at his cost.

5.5.4 WATERPROOFING MATERIAL /COMPOUND USED IN THE ABOVE TREATMENT SHOULD BE

GOT TESTED FROM THE APPROVED LAB FOR THE PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.

6 GUARANTEE

6.1 All waterproofing system described above are to be referred as guide-lines only. The

contractor shall propose the system along with his tender, giving full description.

198

6.2 The system shall be guaranteed for 10 years against all defects and liabilities thereof from

the date of completion of project. The guarantee shall be one Stamp Paper of Rs. 100/-

in proforma to be approved by engineer by Employer/ PMC (The contractor shall submit

proforma to PMC for approval to employer/ PMC before being written on stamp paper)

The cost of stamp paper shall be to the contractor’s account.

6.3 The Waterproofing Treatment to be carried out as per manufacturer's specification. The

Contractor should furnish details of waterproofing treatment for various items

mentioned in the BOQ with respect to agency, chemicals and methodology. The

waterproofing treatment will be approved by the PMC/ Architect/ Client before

commencing of work.

H - MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

Stainless Steel Hand Rail: -

199

H– 2) Wall Mounted Hand Rail with Brackets: -

Providing and Fixing Wall Mounted Stainless Steel (S.S.) Hand Rail with brackets made up of

Anticorrosive High Grade AISI 316 Stainless Steel

Type : 38 mm S. S. Handrail (Satin finish),

Brackets (Glossy Finish)

Material: Stainless Steel Grade AISI 316

Specification

Stainless Steel AISI 316 grade Modular type Handrail with brackets comprises of:

38 mm dia. S. S. Handrail, Brackets fixed on wall. Fixing of Brackets should be with Grub

Bolt & Anchor Fasteners & System should be assembled with Allen Key fixing (no welding

allowed for assembling the hand rail).

Item to Include: Item includes all material, Bolts and anchor fastener system, labour, tools

and equipment for fixing, drilling etc. complete.

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be recorded in running metre up to 2 decimals for the length of Handrail.

200

LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS FOR CIVIL WORKS

NOTE: -

1. All materials to be used should be as per the list given below.

2. Use of equivalent make shall be only with prior approval from consultants & clients in writing. It must be at par with specified list below – in all respect any additional expenditure time due to this will be on contractors account & no claims shall be entertained.

3. Contractor Should make payment to all suppliers / Sub contractor proportionately as per the payment received form client for the particular item of work other wise client have full rights to make payment to the party directly to avoid any payment problem with supplier / sub contractor .

4. Client / Consultant reserve the right to select / prefer the material from the approved list.

5. Any other item not mentioned but required at site will be as per the final approval of Client / Consultant.

SR

NO

MATERIAL APPROVED MANUFACTURER / SUB

CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIERS

CIVIL WORK

1 Cement Ultra Tech, ACC, J.P. Cement, Ambuja

2 White cement Birla, J.K.

3 Structural steel RNIL, SAIL, TATA , APOLLO, LLYOD

4 Water-proofing compound / material BAL adhesives, Pidilite, Sunanda,

Weber

5 Tile adhesive cement and joint filling

compound

Bal Adhesive, Pidilite Industries,

Weber, Ferrous Crete

6 Glazed tiles (1st Quality) Kajaria, Nexion, RAK, H & R Johnson,

Somany

7 Vitrified tiles (1st Quality) Kajaria, Nexion, RAK, H & R Johnson,

Somany

8 Ceramic tiles(1st Quality) Kajaria, Nexion, RAK, Somany

9 Italian marble CMC or approved equivalent

Glass mosaic tiles Bisazza or Shinex

201

SR

NO

MATERIAL APPROVED MANUFACTURER / SUB

CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIERS

10 Paver block 65 mm thk Shreeji (Navi Mumbai), Siddhi Tile,

Basant Betons

11 Paver Tile Pavit, Somany & H & R Johnson

12 Wooden Flooring Pergo, Armstrong, Floorwalk, Karnav

13 Wooden Decking Anika Global, Prolific Artisans, M.A.

desai & Co.

14 False Flooring Kebao, Uni tiles, Tate, Llyod Insulation

15 AAC Block CK Birla Aerocon, ACC Concrete,

Ultratech

16 Block joint Mortar Weber Blockset / Wallplast / Ultratech

17 Composite Marble CMC, Asian

HARD WARE /PAINT/PLYWOOD

18 Paint-Plastic Emulsion/ Exterior/ OBD/

Luster/ Texture/ Primer & Cement Paint

Asian paint, ICI Dulux, Burger, Nerolac

Zinc Paint Prabhat, RR, Novel

Water based Melamine and PU Polish Asian paint, ICI Dulux, Burger, Nerolac

19 Fire retardant paint Akzonnobel, Newkem, Fire retard,

Noble, Shalimar, Viper

20 Automatic Sliding Door fitting GEZE, Dorma, Assa Abloy

21 Floor spring / Door closer / Patch fittings GEZE , Dorma, Assa Abloy

22 Stainless steel handle, Stopper, Hinges,

Mortise lock, Tower Bolt, drawer channel

GEZE, Dorma, Assa Abloy

23 Slimline Glass Partition & Bend Glass

Partition

Dorma, Otic Particion, Bene, Citterio,

CBI-Europe, Sonic

24 Plywood Marine ply Green certified IS - 710 Anchor, Century, Green ply

25 BWR Plywood Anchor, Century, Greenply

202

SR

NO

MATERIAL APPROVED MANUFACTURER / SUB

CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIERS

26 Laminate – Green certified Merino, Formica, Century, Greenlam

27 Veneer Jalaram or approved equivalent

28 Flush Doors Anchor, Century, Greenply

29 Wood preservative Termiseal by pest Control India, Bison

by British paints.

30 Adhesive Pidilite Fevicol (Marine), Araldite

31 Glass (Toughened / Clear) Asahi, Saint Gobain,

32 Back painted & Laminated Glass Asahi, Saint Gobain, 7 colours

33 Fire Rated Hardware Dorma , GEZE, Assa Abloy

34 Stainless steel Railing Neki, Kitch

Glass Railing Dorma,

35 Chairs / Soft seating Eurotec, Amber, Monarch Herman

Miller, Godrej and Boyce, Human Scale

36 Spider Glazing Hardware GEZE, Dorma

37 Hardware for Storages Kich, Godrej, Enox

39 Screw G.K.W. Nettlefold, Ebco or equivalent

40 Blinds & Blackout Blinds Hunter douglas, Serge Ferrari,

MAP,Soflite, Implex, Mado Design

Blinds,

41 Blinds Motor Sonfy, Selvel, Lutron

42 Compactor System Equipment Co., Kompress

43 Frosted Film, Film, Sun Control Film 3M, Saint Gobain & LG

44 Carpet Tile Ecosoft, Tuntex, Forbo, Interfance,

Shaw, Milliken

45 Fire Rated Wooden Door – 30min & 2 Hrs Sukri, Promat, Kenwood, Sonic

46 Fire Rated Glass Door – 30min & 2 Hrs Saint-Gobain, FG, Pyroguard

47 Signage System Vista System, Scildre, Allufor

48 Polishes Touch wood of Asian Paint, Wudfin of

Pidilite industries, Goodlas Nerolac

203

SR

NO

MATERIAL APPROVED MANUFACTURER / SUB

CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIERS

49 Silicone Sealant Dow Corning, GE Silicon, Pidilite

50 Aluminium Section/ Panelling / Window Jindal, Hindalco, Nalco, Indal

51 MDF Board – Green certified Green Panelmax, Asis, Asian, Merino

52 Partical Board Asis, Asian, Greenply (Panelmax)

53 Soft Board Jolly board or equivalent

54 Wall paper Omexco, Muraspec, Marshall

55 White board Whitemark, Altop, Alko-sign

56 Double side Acrylic Foam Tapes for

Lacquered coated Glasses and Mirrors

Bonding and Fixing

Pentagon Bow – PT715T/PT702T, 3M –

VHB 4915/4918, Saint Gobain

57 Stud Anchors & Anchor Fasteners Hilti, Fischer, Bosh, AXE

58 Melamine Polish Asian Paint, Pidilite Industries, ICI

Dulux

59 Glasswool Sipla, Armasoe, Supreme

60 SS Dust Bin Godrej, Ozone

61 Vinly Flooring Hego, Heritage, Welspun

LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS FOR FALSE CEILING & MISC ITEMS

SR

NO

MATERIAL APPROVED MANUFACTURER / SUB

CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIERS

FALSE CEILING

1 Gypsum board false ceiling Gypsum India or approved equivalent

2 Open Cell Ceiling Armstrong, Techno Ceiling Products,

Hunter Douglas, Lindner

3 Aluminium false ceiling Armstrong, Techno Ceiling Products,

Hunter Douglas, Lindner

4 Acoustical false ceiling, Sound Scape &

Panelling

Armstrong, Ecophone - AMF

5 Moisture Resistance Board Gypsum India or approved equivalent

204

6 Section for false ceiling (Internal GI

framing)

Gypsteel – Gyproc (Gypsum India),

Western infra build Product (LLP)

7 Calcium Silicate Board Hilux, Aerolite

205

Section 5

Glass & Glazing

Part 1 – General

1. Scope

1.1. Work as shown shall be specified for all glass and glazing components within the Specification Section. All material and workmanship shall be in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.

2. Work Included

2.1. The work of this Section includes all labour, material, equipment and services necessary to complete related trades with glazing components as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to Composite Glazed Curtain Wall specified in Section 08920.

3. Description

3.1. Glass and glazing shall be comprised of insulated glass that is fabricated to specific size as determined by the window manufacturer to fit within framing elements allowing for proper movement, performance and loading. Window fabricator shall be responsible for the application of said glazing and shall accommodate limitations in regard to fabricated sizes, installation and protection of work in accordance with the design intent illustrated in the design drawings.

4. Design Drawings

4.1. The Facade Consultant’s Drawings indicate the design concept and relation to adjacent construction together with specified “Performance Criteria” tolerances, materials, finishes and standards.

5. Standards

5.1. AAMA “Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront & Entrance Guide Specification Manual”

5.2. FGMA “Glazing Sealing Systems Manual” and “Glazing Manual”

6. Quality Assurance

6.1. The glazing elements shall be installed by a firm with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the design, engineering, fabrication and installation of glazing within the glazed scope of work.

6.2. The work of this section, specifically the application of glazing accessories and glass, determination of size of lites, and installation practices shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer utilizing the glass specified herein. Said manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience installing glass on comparably sized projects and of comparable design complexity.

6.3. Performance

206

6.3.1. Tempered and heat strengthened glass shall be subject to a maximum spontaneous lites breakage of 8 lites per 1000. Manufacturer shall warrant against breakage exceeding 8 lites per 1000.

6.3.2. Systems incorporating glazed elements shall limit deflection of glass per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

6.3.3. Glazing shall not be used as a diaphragm to brace glazed elements unless design / build trade vendor demonstrates the ability of the glass and sealants to resist forces without putting undue stress on the glass.

6.3.4. Glass shall be designed to withstand glazed element performance criteria times 1.5.

7. Warranty

7.1. Submit manufacturer’s warranty certifying that, except where specifically noted, the glass has been furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

7.2. Certify that the glazing including, but not limited to Low E glass, laminated glass and insulated glass shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date the glass is accepted by the Facade Consultant or owner.

7.3. The glass shall be warranted against defective materials, delamination, seal failure, condensation and defects in manufacture pursuant to Paragraph 7.2.

8. Submittals

8.1. Product data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

8.2. Samples: For the following products in the form of 300mm long samples for sealants. Install sealant samples between strips of material representative in colour of the adjoining framing system.

8.3. Samples: For the following products in the form of (4) 300mm x 300mm samples for glass of each make – up.

8.4. Glazing Schedule : Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings in prep rating a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location

8.5. Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of glass products certifying that products finished comply with requirements.

8.6. Qualification data; for firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Facade Consultants and owners, and other information specified.

8.7. Pre-construction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

8.8. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:

8.8.1. Coated Float glass

8.8.2. Insulated Glass

207

Part 2 – Products

9. Manufacturers:

9.1. Float glass products to be provided from the following list of manufacturers;

9.1.1. Shanghai Yaohua Pilkington

9.1.2. Pilkington

9.1.3. Viracon

9.1.4. Emirates Glass

9.1.5. PPG

9.1.6. Or equal approved.

10. Materials

10.1. Several Glass Types are used on the Project. Base Option for the Glass Types is noted below (Bidders are required to price all options on the Schedule of rates – refer BOQ Document); (Also refer performance data requirements in table below)

10.1.1. Glass Type – 6mm clear Heat Strengthened outer lite +

12mm airspace utilizing aluminium spacers +

6mm Fully Tempered inner lite.

Note: Final responsibility lies with the Façade Contractor to check Glass thickness as per structural requirement.

Manufacturer

Glass Type

Coating

Visible Light Solar Energy U- Value

W/m2k

Shading Coefficient

Solar Factor LT

LR (Out)

LR (In)

ER EA ET UV

Asahi

Saint Gobain

PILKINGTON

Hard/ Soft

42%

12

12

-

1.8

33

29

U-Value: Heat Transmittance through a surface by Conduction, convection, and radiation is expressed by its U-Value. This is the rate of heat loss per square metre for a temperature difference of 1 degree Kelvin, or Celsius, between the interior and exterior.

Solar Factor: The Solar Factor is the amount of energy entering the building, expressed as a percentage of the incident solar energy. The lower the Solar Factor, the lower is the solar energy heat gain.

208

11. Fabrication

11.1. Fabricate glass units in accordance with industry standards.

11.2. Provide certification to glass make up and heat strengthening or tempering in lieu of etching glass make up on lite.

11.3. Fabrication tolerances shall be per FGMA

12. Insulated Glass

12.1. Insulated Glass Units: Pre assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated interspaced and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements article.

12.2. Provide HS (heat strengthened float glass in place of annealed glass wherever thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in “performance Requirements” clause. Provide FT (Fully tempered) Where safety glass is indicated.

12.2.1. Sealing System: Dual seal with primary and secondary sealants as follows: Manufacturers standard sealants.

12.2.2. Spacer specifications : Manufacturer’s standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements ;

12.2.2.1. Aluminium – mill finish / Black Anodised

12.2.2.2. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

12.2.2.3. Corner construction : Manufacturer’s standard corner construction

13. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants

13.1. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

13.1.1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products ,seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel substrate, under conditions of service and applications, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

13.1.2. Suitability; Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers’ written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

13.1.3. Colours of exposed glazing sealants: As selected by Facade Consultant from manufacturer’s full range for these characteristics

13.1.4. Elastomeric Glazing sealant standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid – applied, chemically curing sealant in the glazing schedule.

13.1.4.1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the glazing sealant schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.

209

14. Glazing Gaskets

14.1. Dense Compression Gaskets: Moulded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below ,complying with standard referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

14.1.1. Silicone, ASTM C 1115

14.2. Soft Compression Gaskets : Extruded or Moulded ,Closed - cell ,integral – skinned gaskets of material indicated below ;complying with ASTM C 509,Type II, black; and of profile hardness required to maintain water tight seal.

14.2.1. Silicone

15. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials

15.1. General: Provide products of material .,size and shape complying with referenced glazing standards, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated ,and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

15.2. Cleaner, primers and sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturers

15.3. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5

15.4. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lite in place for installation indicated.

15.5. Edge Blocks; Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement.

16. Fabrication Of Glass And Other Glazing Products

16.1. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of the product manufacturer and referenced glazing standards, to comply with the system performance requirements.

16.2. Clean – cut or flat – grind vertical edges of butt – glazed monolithic lite in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and out door faces.

16.3. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges

Part 3 – Installation

17. Factory Inspection

17.1. Inspect all windows prior to installation of glass to ensure glazing pockets are the appropriate size and free of obstructions. Utilize proper setting blocks, anti-walk blocks and specified sundries to ensure a stable glazing installation.

18. Installation

18.1. Install all glazing components in accordance with FGMA standards by experienced installers, in a clean and workmanlike manner.

18.2. Apply all sealing materials in strict compliance with the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations. Before application, remove dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign

210

matter from contact surfaces. Mask adjoining surfaces to maintain a clean and neat appearance. Tool the sealant to fill the joint and provide a smooth finish.

18.3. Protect all installed material to ensure continuity of finishes, sealant joints and glazing.

19. Cleaning & Protection

19.1. Install the glazing elements so as to avoid soiling or smudging of the face of glass.

19.2. Clean glass at the time of the installation. Final cleaning shall be conducted prior to final acceptance by Facade Consultant.

***********

211

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING WORKS

Section I General Requirements

1. Scope of work

1.1. The form of Contract shall be according to the "Conditions of Contract". The following clauses shall be considered as an extension and not in limitation of the obligation of the Contractor.

1.2. Work under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required. The Contractor is required to completely furnish all the plumbing and other specialized services as described hereinafter and as specified in the schedule of quantities and/or shown on the plumbing drawings.

1.3. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the sanitary installations shall include the following:-

Plumbing Works Sanitary Fixtures Soil, Waste, Vent, Rainwater Pipes & Fittings Water Supply System Under ground drainage

Services rendered under this section shall be done without any extra charge.

Specifications

1.4. Work under this Contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with specifications attached with the tender.

1.5. Items not covered under these specifications or due to any ambiguity or misprints, or additional works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications of the latest Local authority of Water / Drainage Bye-Laws with up to date amendments as applicable in the Contract.

1.6. Works not covered under Para 2.1 and 2.2 shall be carried out as per relevant Codes & Bureau of Indian Standards and The Uniform Plumbing Code of India.

Execution of work

1.7. The Contractor should visit and examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the nature of the existing roads and other means of communication and other details pertaining to the work and local conditions and facilities for obtaining his own information on all matters affecting the execution of work. No extra charge made in consequence of any misunderstanding, incorrect information on any of these points or on ground of insufficient description will be allowed.The work shall be carried out in conformity with the Plumbing drawings and within the requirements of architectural, HVAC, electrical, structural and other specialized services drawings.

1.8. The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site. He/They shall make provision for hangers, sleeves, structural openings and other

212

requirements well in advance to prevent hold up of progress of the construction schedule. All supports to the civil structure shall be provided with dash fasteners.

1.9. On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the form of a PERT chart or BAR chart for approval of the Project Manager/Architect/ Consultant. All dates and time schedule agreed upon shall be strictly adhered to within the stipulated time of completion/ commissioning along with the specified phasing, if any.

Drawings

1.10. Contract drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the architectural and other services drawings.

1.11. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over plumbing or other services drawings as to all dimensions.

1.12. Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Project Manager all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Project Manager shall be final.

1.13. Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take precedence over small scale drawings.

1.14. Any drawings issued by the Architects/Consultant for the work are the property of the Architects/ Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other than intended without the written permission of the Architects/Consultant.

Inspection and testing of materials

1.15. Contractor shall be required, if requested, to produce manufacturers test certificate for the particular batch of materials supplied to him. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant Bureau of Indian Standards.

1.16. For examination and testing of materials and works at the site Contractor shall provide all testing and gauging equipment necessary but not limited to the following:

a) Steel tapes b) Weighing machine c) Plumb bobs, sprit levels, d) hammer e) Micrometers f) Hydraulic machine

1.17. All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at any approved laboratory, if required by the Project Manager. All testing equipment shall be preferably located in special room meant for the purpose.

1.18. Samples of all materials shall be got approved before placing order and the approved samples shall be deposited with the Project Manager.

213

2. Metric conversion

2.1. All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender document are commercial metric sizes.

2.2. Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the nearest equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additional cost.

3. Reference points

3.1. Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks, flag tops and oth er reference points and check that with other agencies to confirm the same reference point for all the proper execution of work and these shall be preserved till the end of the work.

3.2. All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations, given in the architectural and plumbing drawings.

4. Reference drawings

4.1. The Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These shall not be used on site. All important drawings shall be mounted on boards and placed in racks indexed. No drawings shall be rolled.

4.2. All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these reference drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings to be submitted by the contractor in fulfilment of the conditions of this contract.

4.3. On award of the work the contractor shall be issued four sets of consultant’s working drawings stamped “good for construction” by the Project Manager. The consultant’s drawings shall be the basis of contractor’s shop drawings. In addition, the Project Manager shall also issue one copy of the Interior Designer’s; Electrical & HVAC approved shop drawings relevant to his work.

4.4. Shop drawings are detailed working drawings which incorporate the contractor's details for execution of the work and incorporate equipment manufacturer's details and dimensions to ensure that the same can be installed in the space provided.

4.5. All shop drawings should show detailed pipe routing and levels, location of other services at crossings etc., cable runs, route cable trays and all allied works and must be fully co- ordinated with other services and approved by the Project Manager before execution of the works. Project Manager shall arrange to issue two copies/prints of services drawings from the respective contracting agencies. Additional copies/prints may be provided on payment of actual cost of the copies/ prints. All drawings will valid only when stamped and issued by the Project Manager.

4.6. Shop drawings shall also be furnished for detailed layout of all equipment, foundation, bolting and vibration elimination details along with information on dead and dynamic load, vibration etc.

214

4.7. Six sets of manufacturer's equipment drawings, roughing in and wiring diagrams shall be submitted.

4.8. Contractor shall submit shop drawings furnishing all details of MCC panels, cable routes, wiring diagrams and connection details as required.

4.9. Three copies of each set of shop drawings shall be submitted for initial scrutiny, discussion and approval.

4.10. Each submission shall be accompanied by contractor's certificate stating that the shop drawings meet all the contract requirements and that the piping and equipment can be satisfactorily installed without any obstructions in the space available.

4.11. On approval of the above the contractor shall furnish six sets of the approved shop drawings for execution of the work.

5. Completion drawings

5.1. On completion of work, Contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and two prints of "As Built" drawings to the Project Manager. These drawings shall have the following information.

5.1.1. Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of external services.

5.1.2. Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with location of all manholes and connections up to Sewage Treatment Plant with bypasses and/or outfall.

5.1.3. Run of all water supply lines with diameters, locations of control valves, access panels.

5.1.4. Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections

andmechanical equipment.

5.1.5. All shop drawings shall be updated from time to time for the purpose of making completion drawings. No completion certificate shall be issued unless the above drawings are submitted.

5.2. Contractor shall provide four sets of catalogues, service manuals, manufacturer's drawings, performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and address of the manufacturer for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him.

5.3. All "warranty cards" given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the Project Manager.

5.4. Contractor's rates: Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labor, supervision, erection, tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to site, GST, breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be necessary and required to completely do all the items of work and put them in a working condition. Rates quoted are for all heights and depths and in all positions as may be

215

required for this work.

5.5. All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories, fixtures and fixing arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of the particular item except where specially mentioned otherwise.

5.6. All rates quoted are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making good the same with cement mortar/concrete/water proofing of appropriate mix and strength as directed by the Project Manager. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses in the concrete and masonry work as the work proceeds. All hot and cold water supply pipes crossing masonry walls shall be provided with G.I. pipe sleeves. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve shall be filled up with fire proof sealant after testing. Contractor shall give the pipe sleeves to the civil contractor well in time so that the same can be fixed along with civil works. Any co-ordination gap shall be of contractor’s responsibility.

5.7. The Contractor shall furnish the Project Manager with vouchers & test certificates, on request, to prove that the materials are as specified and to indicate that the rates at which the materials are purchased in order to work out the rate analysis of non- tendered items which he/they may be called upon to carryout.

6. Testing

6.1. Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses of the specifications.

6.2. Tests shall be performed in presence of the Project Manager and test records for the tests shall be duly signed by Contractor and the Project Manager.

6.3. All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work tested to meet the requirements of the specifications.

6.4. Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the local authorities to meet municipal or other bye-laws in force.

6.5. Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials for the performance of the tests at his/their cost.

7. Site clearance and cleanup

The Contractor shall, from time to time, clear away all debris and excess materials accumulated at the site.

After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, Contractor shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints, stains, stickers and other foreign matter or discoloration leaving the same in a ready to use condition.

On completion of all works, Contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all

surplus materials and leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which

216

the same shall be done by the Project Manager at the Contractor’s risk and cost. Cost of the cleanup shall be deducted from the contractor's bills on pro- rata basis in proportion to his contract value.

8 License permits and authorities

8.1 Contractor must hold a valid plumbing or any other as required license by the municipal authority or other competent authority under whose jurisdiction the work falls.

8.2 Contractor must keep constant liaison with the local development,

municipal/statutory authority and obtain approval of all drainage, water supply, fire suppression and other works carried out by him.

8.3 Contractor shall obtain, from the municipal and other authorities forms as

requifor approval of drainage and water supply works during execution and the completion certificate with respect to his work as required for occupation of the building. Contractor shall obtain permanent water supply and drainage connections from authorities concerned. The Employer shall re-imbrues the fees paid to the authorities towards the connection charges on production of receipts for money paid.

8.4 Contractor shall get any materials tested from the appropriate authority if

so required with no cost to the Employer.

9 Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free of cost.

If any material issued free of cost by the Employer to the contract for use on the work and the same is lost, stolen ,pilfered or broken while in contractor’ possession, the cost of the same shall be recovered from the Contractor on the basis of actual cost to Employer. The cost shall include the cost paid, freight, transportation, excise duty, sales tax, octroi (LBT), import duty and other levies, plus 100% as penalty. The decision on the actual cost given by the Employer shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Contractor has to keep full records of material issued by the Employer with reference

and challans etc. Contractor has to give account of all such materials to the Project Manager.

10 Cutting of Water Proofing Membrane:

No walls terraces shall be cut for making and opening after water proofing has been done without written approval of project manager. Cutting of water proofing membrane shall be done very carefully so as other portion of water proofing is not damaged. On completion of work at such place the water proofing membrane shall be made good and ensured that the opening/cutting is made fully water proof as per specifications and details of water proofing approved by Project Managers.

217

11 Cutting of structural members No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the Project Manager

12 Materials supplied by Employer. The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Employer conform to the specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the notice of the Project Manager.

13 Materials

a. Unless otherwise specified and expressly approved in writing by the Project Manager, only materials of makes and specification as mentioned in the list of approved makes attached with the specifications shall be used.

b. If required, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials proposed to be used in

the works. Approved samples shall be kept in the office of the Project Manager.

End of Section I

218

Section II Sanitary Fixtures

1. Scope of work

1.1. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all materials & labor necessary and required to completely install all sanitary fixtures, chromium plated fittings and accessories as required by the drawings specified hereinafter and given in the Schedule of Quantities.

1.2. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the sanitary fixtures shall include the following:-

a) Sanitary fixtures b) Chromium plated fittings c) Porcelain or stainless steel sinks d) Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, towel rails, coat hooks etc. e) Connections to all kitchens, equipment, pump headers and other equipment

requiring water and drainage connections.

1.3. Whether specifically mentioned or not all fixtures and appliances shall be provided with all fixing devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required.

1.4. All exposed pipes within toilets and near fixtures shall be chromium plated brass or

copper unless otherwise specified.

2. General requirements

2.1. Sanitary fixtures and C.P. fittings in manufacturer’s packing as specified in the schedule of quantities shall be supplied to the Contractors free of cost at the stores of the Employer.

2.2. All fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete the item in working condition whether specifically mentioned or not in the Schedule of Quantities, specifications, drawings. Accessories shall include proper fixing arrangement, brackets, nuts, bolts, screws and required connection pieces, WC flexible connectors etc.

2.3. Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated brass screws with C.P. washers where necessary.

2.4. Contractor shall furnish without cost all such accessories and fixing devices that are necessary and required but not supplied along with the Plumbing Fixtures & CP Fittings by the manufacturers as a part of the original and standard supply.

2.5. All fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to level and heights shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all inlet and outlet pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and any damage to the finished floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at Contractor's cost.

219

2.6. Contractor shall seal all fixtures fixed near wall, marble and edges with an approved type of poly-sulfide sealant appropriate for its application.

3. European W.C

3.1. European W.C. shall be wash down or siphonic-type wall mounted set flushed by means of Concealed type Cistern with Dual Flow Facility (Concealed Body) with Exposed Shut Off valve Provision, which will be an integral part of the WC system. Framework, walling and finishing will not form a part of the contractor’s work. Where applicable flush pipe/ bend shall be connected to the W.C. by means of a suitable rubber adapter. Wall hung W.C. shall be supported by appropriate brackets for a dry-wall installation.

3.2. Each W.C. set shall be provided with a plastic seat shall be with rubber buffers and

chromium plated hinges.

3.3. Plastic seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in vertical position without falling down on the W.C. Each W.C. shall be suitable for flushing in low volume of water 3-6 liters.

3.4. Flushing cistern if and when provided shall be provided with all internal flushing mechanism, 15 mm dia angle cock with unbreakable polythene float and overflow pipe. Any frame work required for fixing cistern has to be provided by the contractor.

4. Urinals

4.1. Urinals shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type shall be specified in

the Bill of Quantities otherwise selected by architect / interior designer or client.

4.2. Bowl urinals shall be provided with 15 mm dia C.P. spreader, 32 mm dia stainless steel domical waste and C.P. cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange, and shall be fixed to wall by C.I. brackets and C.I. wall clips as recommended by manufacturers complete as directed by Project Manager.

4.3. Urinals shall be fixed with C.P. brass screws and shall be provided with 32 mm dia domical

waste leading to urinal's trap.

4.4. Flush pipes shall be uPVC pipes concealed in wall chase but with chromium plated bends at inlet and outlet or as given in Bill of Quantities.

4.5. Urinals shall be flushed by means of fully automatic no-touch battery operated infra-red sensor having pre & post flushing with water (250 ml & 500 ml consumption).

4.6. Waste pipes for urinals shall be uPVC class III (6 kg/sqcm) conforming to IS: 4985 as given in schedule of quantities. Waste pipes may be exposed on wall or concealed in chase as directed by the Project Manager.

5. Wash Basins

5.1. Wash basins shall wall mounted type or Counter top type as specified in the BOQ. Size,

shape and type shall be specified in the Bill of Quantities otherwise selected by architect / interior designer or client.

220

5.2. Each basin shall be supported on MS galvanized or CI brackets and clips and the basin securely fixed to wall or on the counter. The design of the brackets shall suit the basin selected and as recommended by the manufacturer. Installation of pedestal type basins shall be made as per the manufacturer’s specifications.

5.3. Each basin shall be provided with 32 mm dia C.P.waste with overflow, pop-up or standard waste with rubber plug and chain, 32 mm dia C.P. brass bottle trap with CP pipe to wall and flange.

5.4. Each basin shall be provided with a chrome plated brass auto-closing pillar cock (metered faucet with 1 ltr discharge per cycle), for wash basin, having foam flow technology and 15mm nominal bore, with pop up waste fittings, 32 mm dia. CP cast brass bottle trap with outlet pipe and wall flange. Washbasins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawings. If height is not specified, the rim level shall be 79 cms or as directed by Project Managers.

6. Sinks

6.1. Sinks shall be stainless steel or any other material as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

6.2. Each sink shall be provided with brackets of approved and securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable brackets or clips as recommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40 mm dia C.P. waste with chain and plug as given in the Schedule of Quantities. Fixing shall be done as directed by Project Manager.

6.3. Supply fittings for sinks shall be mixing fittings or C.P. taps as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

7. Hand Drier

7.1. The hand drier shall be no touch operating type with solid state time delay to allow user to keep hand in any position.

7.2. The hand drier shall be fully hygienic, rated for continuous repeat use.

7.3. The rating of hand drier shall be such that time required to dry a pair of hands upto wrists is approximately 30 seconds.

7.4. The hand drier shall be wall mounting type suitable for 230 volts, single phase, 50 Hz, A.C. power supply.

8. Toilets for Differently Abled

8.1. Where specified in washroom facilities designed to accommodate physically handicapped, accessories should be provided as directed by the Project Manager.

8.2. Stainless steel grab bars of required size suitable for concealed or exposed mounting and non-slip gripping surface shall be provided in all washrooms to be used by physically handicapped as directed by the Project Manager.

221

9. Accessories

9.1. Contractor shall install all chromium plated and porcelain accessories as shown on the drawings or directed by the Project Manager.

9.2. All C.P. accessories shall be fixed with C.P. brass half round head screws and cup washers in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required or directed by Project Manager.

9.3. Recessed porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work as per Interior Designer’s drawings.

10. Urinal partitions

10.1. Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china, marble, granite or any other material selected by the Project Manager.

10.2. Urinal partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with C.P. brass bolts, anchor fasteners and M.S. Clips as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by Project Manager.

11. Measurement

10.1 Sanitary fixtures and accessories shall be measured by numbers in the unit given in the Bill of Quantities.

10.2 Rates for all items shall be inclusive of cutting holes and chases and making good the same, C.P Brass screws, nuts, bolts and any fixing arrangements required and recommended by manufacturers, testing and commissioning.

End of Section II

222

Contractor MMRDA

Section III Soil, Waste, Vent, Rainwater Pipes & Fittings

1. Scope of work

1.1. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install all soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes and fittings as required by the drawings, and given in the Bill of Quantities.

1.2. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the soil, waste, vent pipes system shall include the following:-

a. Vertical and horizontal soil, waste, vent pipes, and fittings, joints, clamps,

connections to fixtures. b. Connection of all pipes to sewer lines as shown on the drawings at ground

floor levels. c. Drainage, channels, gratings & floor drains. d. Floor and urinal traps, cleanout plugs, inlet fittings and rainwater

heads/Khurras. e. Testing of all pipe lines.

2. General requirements

2.1. All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the approval of Project Manager.

2.2. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workmanlike manner.

2.3. Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.4. Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps intervals specified.

2.5. Access doors for fittings and clean outs shall be so located that they are easily accessible for repair and maintenance. Any access panel required in the civil structure, false ceiling or marble cladding etc. shall be clearly reported to the Employer in the form of shop drawing so that other agencies are instructed to provide the same.

3. Piping System

3.1. Schedule of Pipes Use stacks for Soil, Waste., Vent & RWP Silent Drain pipes 75,110 ,150 mm dia Vt. uPVC pipes 40,50 & 63 mm dia Horizontal. For Soil, Waste, Vent pipes 6 kg/sq cm

4. Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes

4.1. All soil/waste from will be collected in i.c. chambers and after treatment in STP shall be pumped into sewer line. The Soil & Waste Pipe System above ground as defined in IS : 13592 Two- Pipe system using the silent- drain system. connections for soil and waste

223

Contractor MMRDA

for kitchen sinks, showers, washbasins and floor drains and is approved by Project Manager subject to approval from local authority or Two-Pipe system using the silent-drain system.

4.2. All soil/waste from will be collected in i.c. chambers and after treatment in STP shall

be pumped into sewer line.

5. Rainwater Pipes

All open terraces shall be drained by rain water down comers.

Rainwater down comers are separate and independent of the soil and waste system and will discharge into the open ground Storm water Drainage system / Rainwater harvesting system of the Complex.

Rain water shall be collected in catch basins and connected to the storm water drain

/ recharge pits.

6. Sound-Proof Pipes & Fittings

6.1. Pipes and fittings for main vertical stacks & branches 110 mm, & 75 mm dia shall be (SWR drainage system) with injection molded fittings with approved socket & ‘O’ rubber ring joints.

6.2. Joints shall be done as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. The pipes and fittings must have matching dimension for perfect joints in the system. ‘O’ ring fittings must have sufficient gap (approx. 10 mm) for thermal expansion of pipes.

6.3. Pipes shall be clamped to the wall with approved type of uPVC saddle clamps/U clamps and G.I. rod fixed to the angle iron support system within the shaft. Such as to achieve maximum soundproofing.

6.4. Use proper pipe adapters for connections between cast iron pipes, traps & uPVC pipes where necessary. Such joints shall be made of an approved type of ‘Putty’.

7. Performance Criteria

7.1. All above ground drainage pipework has been designed to IS 13592. Install pipework, fittings and accessories to ensure that:

7.1.1. Appliances drain quickly, quietly and completely at all times without nuisance or risk to

health.

7.1.2. Discharge is conveyed without cross flow, back fall, leakage or blockage.

7.1.3. Foul air from the drainage system does not enter the building.

7.1.4. Pressure fluctuations in pipework do not vary by more than +/-38mm water gauge.

7.1.5. All traps to sanitary appliances to retain a water seal of not less than:

WC’s 50mm

224

Contractor MMRDA

Floor Gully 75mm

WHB 75mm

Urinal 75mm

Bath/shower 50mm

Individual shower 50mm

Washing Machine 75mm

7.1.6. The system can be adequately tested, cleaned and maintained.

8. Installation Generally

8.1. Obtain all components for each type of pipework from the same manufacturer unless specified otherwise.

8.2. Cut ends of pipes to be clean and square for solvent joints and chamfered for ring seal

joints. 8.3. Allow for adequate thermal expansion/contraction and building movement when

jointing and fixing.

8.4. Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose.

8.5. Prevent entry of foreign matter into any part of the system by sealing openings during

construction. Fit all access covers and cleaning eyes as the construction proceeds.

9. Access Points

Provide access points for cleaning purposes at the following:

(a) Access shall be at all changes of direction and at each floor level (1200mm above

finished floor level) on each soil and waste stack.

(b) Provide access on all horizontal branch waste floats.

(c) Check and place appropriately handed access fittings as required.

(d) Locate to allow use of cleaning equipment or the insertion of testing apparatus.

(f) Fit all access doors/covers and cleaning eyes as the construction proceeds.

10. Pipe Routes

To be the shortest practical, with as few bends as possible.

225

Contractor MMRDA

11. Lubricant

Using lubricant recommended by the pipework manufacturers and agreed with the

Engineer prior to installation works commencing.

12. Solvent Cement

Liquid weld cement for jointing PVC-u pipe systems as recommended by the pipework

manufacturers and agreed with the Engineer prior to installation works commencing.

13. Base of Stack

Base of stack shall be formed using 2 x 45 degree bends connected together by an

appropriate length of pipe or a 90o large radius support bend to ensure that the formed

bend is a minimum of two times the outside diameter of the stack.

14. Couplings and Adaptors

Appropriate connections shall be installed to suit pipes and fittings being jointed, refer

to Terrain PVC-u soil and waste system installation guide for manufacturer’s

recommendations.

15. Bends, Branches and Boss Pipe Connections

All branches to be swept in direction of flow at all connections.

Ensure factory moulded and/or pre fabricated fittings are used.

16. Floor Gullies

Compact design PVC-u 75mm trapped floor gully with side sockets to allow waste

connections.

17. Vent Stack

A vent stack shall be considered part of the system and shall be installed using the same

methods required for the soil and waste stacks.

Also provide vent pipe for Starting of ic chambers of the sewer line.

18. Clamps

18.1. For UPVC pipes standard UPVC clamps shall be used. For other pipes M.S. clamps, supports and hangers provided shall be galvanized. Factory made Pre-fabricated clamps shall be preferred. Contactor may fabricate the clamps of special nature and galvanize

226

Contractor MMRDA

them after fabrication but before installation. (Clamps shall be fabricated from mild steel sections) All nuts, bolts, washers and other fasteners shall be factory galvanized.

18.2. Clamps shall be of approved designs and fabricated from M.S. flats and other sections of thickness and sizes as per drawings or contractor’s shop drawings. Clamps shall be fixed in accordance to manufacturer’s details/shop drawings to be submitted by the contractors.

18.3. When required to be fixed on RCC columns, walls or beam they shall be fixed with approved type of galvanized expansion anchor fasteners (Dash fasteners) of approved design and size according to load.

18.4. Structural clamps e.g. trapeze or cluster hangers shall be fabricated by electro-welding from M.S. structural members e.g. rods, angles, channels flats as per Contractors shop drawing shall be galvanized after fabrication. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be galvanized.

Pipework Supports

General Requirements

Pipework supports shall be provided in accordance with the following table and either

side of bends.

Pipe Material Pipe Size (mm) Vertical Pipes (m) Low Gradient Pipes (m)

uPVC (unplasticized

polyvinyl

chloride)

32 – 40

50

1.2

1.2

0.5

0.9

uPVC (unplasticized

polyvinyl

chloride)

32 – 40

50

75 – 100

150

1.2

1.2

2.0

2.0

0.5

0.9

1.0

1.0

Multiple pipe supports for pipes of differing sizes shall be spaced at intervals required

for the smallest pipe.

All internal pipework shall be supported using protected holderbats.

227

Contractor MMRDA

The holderbats shall either:

1) Locate around fitting sockets to provide an anchor point for support and as a fixed point

to control thermal movement.

2) Locate around the pipe to act as a support while still permitting free longitudinal movement of the pipework. Long sections of drains shall be laterally braced to the structure with angle section mild steel to prevent horizontal movement.

3) Pipes in shafts shall be supported using protected mild steel holderbats bolted together with cadmium plated mild steel bolts and nuts and screwed to shaft walls using 50mm no. 10 cadmium plated mild steel screws and plastic wall plugs.

Exposed pipework fixed to walls in occupied areas shall be supported using one piece

brackets screwed to walls using 50mm no. 10 cadmium plated mild steel screws and

plastic wall plugs.

19. Traps

19.1. Floor traps

Floor traps where specified shall be of multi inlet traps (SWR) having a minimum 50 mm deep seal as per the Uniform Plumbing Code of India. The trap and waste pipes when buried below ground shall be set and encased in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on firm ground or when installed on a sunken RCC structural slab. The blocks shall be in 1:2:3 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 3 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).

Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centring for the blocks. Size of the block shall be 30x30 cms of the required depth.

19.2. Urinal traps

Urinal traps/horn shall be multi inlet uPVC traps with or without vent and set in cement concrete block specified for floor traps.

20. Cleanout plugs

20.1. Floor Clean out Plug.

Clean out plug for Soil, Waste or Rainwater pipes laid under floors shall be provided near pipe junctions bends, tees, “Y’s” and on straight runs at such intervals as required as per site conditions. Cleanout plugs shall terminate flush with the floor levels. They shall be threaded and provided with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be Cast Brass s c r e w e d to the socket. The socket shall be jointed properly to the drain pipes.

21. Waste pipe from appliances

21.1. Waste pipe from appliances e.g. washbasins, sinks and urinals shall be uPVC in all

228

Contractor MMRDA

toilets, kitchen, pantries and service areas where so required, and as given in the Bill of Quantities or shown on the drawings.

21.2. All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the connection to stack, trap or drain. Pipes inside all toilets shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings where so required and shown on drawings or directed by the Project Manager.

22. Encasing in Cement Concrete

22.1. Encasing of pipes is required to provide stability to the line and prevent its damage during construction.

uPVC soil and waste pipes under floorPipes laid in sunken slabs and in wall chases (when cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased in cement concrete 1:2:3 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 3 stone aggregate 12 mm size) 75 mm in bed and all round. When pipes are running well above the structural slab, the encased pipes shall be supported with suitable cement concrete pillars of required height at intervals of 1.8 m.

23. Painting

23.1. Paints used shall be of approved quality and shade. Where directed pipes shall be painted in accordance with approved pipe color code.

23.2. All cast iron, soil, waste, vent, anti-siphonage, rainwater pipe sand CI (LA) Drainage pipes in exposed locations e.g. in shafts, pipe spaces and service floors or fixed at ceiling levels shall be painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint to give an even shade.

24. Cutting and making good

24.1. Contractor shall provide all holes cut outs and chases in structural members necessary and required for the pipe work as building work proceeds. Wherever cut outs, holes are left in the original construction, they shall be made good with cement concrete 1:2:3 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 3 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and the surface restored as in original condition.

25. Sleeves/ Cut-outs.

The contractor shall utilize all cut- outs and sleeves provided during construction to prevent breaking. The annular space between the pipe and the sleeve shall be filled up with approved type of fire retardant sealant. When sleeves are misplaced or inaccurately located contractor shall make the holes in the wall or structural members at his own cost but only with the prior permission of the Project Manager.

26. Testing

26.1. Testing procedure specified below apply to all soil, waste and vent pipes above ground including spun C.I. pipes laid in ceiling, if any.

229

Contractor MMRDA

26.2. Entire drainage system shall be tested for water tightness and smoke tightness during and after completion of the installation. No portion of the system shall remain untested. Contractor must have adequate number of expandable rubber bellow plugs, manometers, smoke testing machines, pipe and fitting work test benches and any other equipment necessary and required to conduct the tests.

27. Storm Water Syste

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the drainage system shall interalia include:

Storm water drainage system including, earth works for excavation, disposal, backfilling and compaction, pipe lines, manholes, catch basins and connections to Rain water Harvesting or connected as indicated by the Architect/Consultants.

Overflow from Rain Water Harvesting Pit shall be discharge to existing Storm Water drain .

All material shall be of the best quality conforming to specification and subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

Storm Water Drainage lines and open drains shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles.

All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal bye-laws.

Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage system

from the municipal or any other competent authority if required.

28. Measurements

28.1. General

Rates quoted for all items shall be inclusive of all work and items given in the Specifications and Bill of Quantities.

Rates are applicable for the work in ground, upper floors, in shafts at ceiling level area and for all depths and heights of buildings.

28.2. Rates are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in RCC and masonry work where no sleeves or cut outs have been provided during construction and making good the same.

28.3. Rates are inclusive of pre-testing on site, testing of the installations, materials and commissioning of the works.

28.4. uPVC soil, waste, vent, anti siphonage, rain water pipes, drainage pipes shall be measured net when fixed correct to a centimeter including all fittings along its finished length.

230

Contractor MMRDA

28.5. Other waste pipes shall be measured per running meter correct to a centimeter for the finished work which shall include fittings e.g. bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, sockets, nipples and nuts. The length shall be taken along center line of the pipes and fittings. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to their diameter, method of jointing and fixing substance, quality, and finish. The diameters shall be nominal diameter of internal bore.

28.6. Cement concrete around pipes shall be measured along the center of the pipe line measured per linear meter and include any masonry supports, shuttering and centering cutting complete as described in the relevant specifications.

28.7. Slotted angles/channels shall be measured per linear meter of finished length and shall include support bolts and nuts embedded in masonry walls with cement concrete blocks and nothing extra will be paid for making good the same.

28.8. Fittings (excluding pipe fittings) (Unit of measurement by numbers) Urinal traps, trap gratings, hoppers, cleanout plugs shall be measured by number per piece and shall include all items described in the relevant Specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

29. Painting of pipes and fittings shall be measured per running meter.

End of Section III

231

Contractor MMRDA

Section IV Water Supply System

1. Scope of work Work under this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install the water supply system as required by the drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the Bill of Quantities.

1.1. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply system shall include the following:-

Distribution system from main supply headers from pump to all fixtures and appliances for cold & hot water.

Cold water supply lines from city water connections to Fire and Under Ground Water Tanks.

Pipe protection and painting. Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances. Connections to all plumbing fixtures, tanks, appliances and municipal mains Inserts for R.C.C. tanks

2. General requirements

2.1. All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications. All works executed shall be to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

2.2. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workmanlike manner.

2.3. Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of elbows shall be restricted for short connections.

2.4. Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.5. Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified.

2.6. Clamps, hangers and supports on RCC walls, columns & slabs shall be fixed only by

means of approved made of expandable metal fasteners inserted by use of power drills.

2.7. All pipe clamps, supports, nuts, bolts, washers shall be galvanized MS steel throughout the building. Painted MS clamps & MS nuts, bolts & washers shall not be accepted.

2.8. Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy accessibility for

operations, maintenance and repairs.

232

Contractor MMRDA

3. Water Supply System

Contractor should study the site plan and the two water supply systems one for flushing water and other for domestic water supply.

Water supply will be acquired from Local Corporations or authority water mains (as available) to a service connection collected in water storage tanks located underground.

The domestic and flushing system has been connected to a pressurized feed system

from main pump to all parts of the building. The Pumping system shall be hydro-pneumatic variable frequency drive system.

It is proposed to provide Concealed cisterns for all WCs. Infra-red NO-TOUCH flush valves shall be provided for Urinals. These will be fed from flushing hydro- pneumatic variable frequency drive pumping system.

Domestic water supply shall be provided with cold water system only. These will be

fed from flushing hydro-pneumatic variable frequency drive pumping system.

Hot water provisions to cafeteria kitchen & Pantry shall be through water heater.

The hydro-pneumatic pumping systems should be as follows:

The pumps equipped with one external frequency converter.

The frequency controller should maintain a constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of one of the pumps.

The system performance is adapted to the demand through cutting in/out the required number of pumps and through parallel control of the pumps in operation.

Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, time and fault.

The system should consist of:

1set(1W+ 1S) vertical multistage centrifugal pumps.

Pump bases and heads of cast iron; other vital parts made of stainless steel. The pumps to be equipped with the service-friendly cartridge shaft seal.

Two manifolds of galvanized steel.

One non-return valve and two isolating valves for each pump.

Pressure gauge and pressure transmitter (analog output 4 - 20 mA).

233

Contractor MMRDA

Base frame of galvanized steel.

Control MPC in a steel cabinet, including main switch, all required fuses, motor protection, switching equipment and microprocessor-controlled CU 351.

Dry-running protection and suitably sized diaphragm tank.

Pump operation is to be controlled by Control MPC with the following functions:

Intelligent pump controller. Constant pressure control through continuously variable adjustment of the speed of

one pump. PID controller with adjustable PI parameters. Constant pressure at setpoint, independent of inlet pressure. On/off operation at low flow. Automatic cascade control of pumps for optimal efficiency. Selection of min. time between start/stop, automatic pump changeover and pump

priority. Automatic pump test function to prevent idle pumps from seizing up. Possibility of standby pumps. Possibility of back-up sensor. Manual operation. Possibility of external set point influence. Possibility of digital remote-control functions: System on/off Max., min. or user-defined duty Up to 7 alternative set points. Digital inputs and outputs can be configured individually. Pump and system monitoring functions: Minimum and maximum limits of current value Inlet pressure Motor protection. Sensors and cables surveyed against malfunction. Alarm log with the previous 24 alarms. - Display and indication functions: 320 x 240 pixels graphical display with back-light Green indicator light for operating indications and red indicator light for fault

indications Potential-free changeover contacts for operation and fault.

234

Contractor MMRDA

4. CPVC & uPVCpipes, fittings & valves

4.1. All pipes inside the buildings for domestic and flushing, hot and cold water supply shall be CPVC (conforming ASTM F-441 with only CPVC solvent cement confirming to ASTM F- 439.)

4.2. Fittings such as tees, elbows, couplers, unions, reducers, brushing etc. including transition fittings (connection between PB and metal pipes/G.I. ie. Brass adopters conforming to ASTM D-2846) shall be provided.

4.3. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets. Supply pipes inside toilets shall run above false ceiling with vertical drop in wall chases for all fixtures. No pipes to run inside sunken floor as far as possible. Pipes may run under the ceiling or floors and other areas as shown on drawings.

4.4. Joining Pipes & Fittings

a) Cutting

Pipes shall be cut either with a wheel type plastic pipe cutting or hacksaw blade and care shall be taken to make a square cut. All burrs should be removed for proper contact between pipe and fittings during jointing.

b) Assembly

After applying the solvent cement on both pipe and fitting socket, pipe should be inserted into the fitting socket within 30 seconds, and rotating the pipe ¼ to ½ turn while inserting so as to ensure even distribution of solvent cement with the joint. The assembled system should be held for 10 seconds (approximately) in order to allow the joint to set up.

c) Testing

The system should be hydrostatically pressure tested at 150 psi (10 Bar) for one hour. During pressure testing, the system should be fitted with water and if a leak is found, the joint should be cut out the replaced with new one.

4.5. Transition of PB in metals

When making a transition connection to metal threads, special brass/plastic transition fitting (Male and female adapters) should be used. Plastic threaded connections should not be over torque.

Threaded sealants Teflon (PTFE) tape shall be used to make threaded connections leak proof.

4.6. Hangers and supports

235

Contractor MMRDA

For Horizontal runs, support should be given at 3 feet (90 cms) intervals for diameters of one inch and below and at 4 feet (1.2 m) intervals for larger sizes or as per UPC-I guidelines.

Supports should be as per the below mentioned table:

ze of pipe 20ºC 49ºC 71ºC 82ºC Inch Ft. Ft. Ft. Ft. ½” 5.5 4.5 3.0 2.5 ¾” 5.5 5.0 3.0 2.5 1” 6.0 5.5 3.5 3.0

1¼” 6.5 6.0 3.5 3.5 1¼” 7.0 6.0 3.5 3.5 2” 7.0 6.5 4.0 3.5

4.7. Anchor Fasteners

All pipe supports, hangers and clamps to be fixed on RCC walls, beams, columns, slabs and masonry walls 230mm thick and above by means of galvanized expandable anchor fasteners in drilled holes of correct size and model to carry the weight of pipes. Drilling shall be made only by approved type of power drill as recommend and approved by manufacturer of the anchor fasteners. Failure of any fastening devices shall be the entire responsibility and contractor shall redo or provide additional supports at his own cost. He shall also compensate the Employer for any damage that may be caused by such failures.

4.8. Unions

Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable easy dismantling later when required. Unions shall be provided near each gunmetal valve, stop cock, or check valve and on straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as required and/or directed by Project Manager.

4.9. Flanges

Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes as required or where shown on the drawings, all equipment connections as necessary and required or as directed by the Project Manager. Connections shall be made by correct number and size of GI nuts, bolts & washers with 3 mm thick gasket. Where hot water connections are made insertion gasket shall be of suitable high temperature grade and quality approved by the Project Manager. Bolt hole dia for flanges shall conform to match the specification for C.I. sluice valve to I.S. 780. and C.I. butterfly valve to IS: 13095.

4.9.1. Sand Filling

Water supply pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand 15 cms all round before filling in the trenches.

236

Contractor MMRDA

4.10. Painting

All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes shall be painted to standard colour code given in this documents or specified by Project Manager.

4.11. Pipe protection

All pipes in wall chase /below floors or laid underground shall be protected against corrosion by the application of two coats of bitumen paint covered with polythene tape and a final coat of bitumen paint.

Pipes, if any, buried in ground or sunken slab shall be protected with multilayer bitumen membrane tape 3mm thick with a final coat of hot or cold applied bitumen. Pypkote or equivalent.

5. Valves

5.1. Ball Valves

Valves up to 40 mm dia. shall be screwed type Ball Valves with stainless steel balls,

spindle, PTFE seating and gland packing tested to a hydraulic pressure of 20 kg/cm2, and accompanying couplings and steel handles.(to BS 5351)

5.2. Butterfly Valves

Valves 50 mm dia and above shall be cast iron butterfly valve to be used for isolation. The valves shall be bubble tight, resilient seated suitable for flow in either direction and seal in both direction with accompanying flanges and steel handle.

Butterfly valve shall be of best quality conforming to IS: 13095.

5.3. Non Return Valve (Slim Type)

Where specified, non-return valve (swing check type), shall be provided through which flow can occur in only one direction. It shall be single door swing check type of best quality.

5.4. Each Butterfly and Slim Type Swing Check (NRV) Valve shall be provided with a pair of flanges screwed or welded to the main line and having the required number of galvanized nuts, bolts and washers of correct length.

6. Storage tanks. (Accessories & Connections)

6.1. Storage tanks for water supply shall be in reinforced cement concrete built by the building Contractor.

Each tank shall be provided with lockable type manhole cover fabricated from

237

Contractor MMRDA

M.S. sheets.Manhole covers shall be 450-500 mm dia and fully galvanized after fabrication or as approved by the Project Manager.

6.2. Outlets and overflow

All nozzles for puddle flanges in RCC tank for inlet, outlet, overflow and scour etc. shall be provided by civil contractor or as given in the Schedule of Quantities. Further connections and accessories shall be provided under this contract.

7. Testing

All pipes, fittings and valves after fixing at site, shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure or 10 kg/cm2 whichever is more. Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least sixty minutes without any drop.

A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by Contractor(s) and Project Manager.

7.1. In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction, Contractor shall test the entire installation after connections to the tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages and shall replace all defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture and fixtures shall be made good by the Contractor during the defects liability period without any cost.

7.2. After commissioning of the water supply system, Contractor shall test each valve by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively operate shall be replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the same shall be tested as above.

8. Measurement

o Pipes above ground shall be measured per linear meter (to the nearest cm) and shall be inclusive of

o All fittings e.g. coupling, tees, bends, elbows, unions, flanges and U clamps with

nuts, bolts & washers fixed to wall or other standard supports.

o Jointing with PTFE tape, white lead and insertion gasket of appropriate temperature grade.

o Cutting holes, and chases in walls, floors, any pipe support required for pipes

below ground & making good the same.

o Excavation, back filling, disposal of surplus earth and restoring the ground & floor in original condition.

8.1. Pipe Supports.

Fabricated and galvanized supports shall be measured by weight. Weight for each type of clamp shall be calculated on basis of the quantity of structural and MS used from the theoretical weight calculated on basis of

238

Contractor MMRDA

the components theoretical weight of the sections.

8.2. Rate quoted for supports & hangers shall be inclusive of:-

a) Expandable anchor fastens. b) Galvanizing of all supports & hangers. c) Cutting holes in walls, ceilings on floors and making good where permitted. d) Nuts, bolts and washers for fixing and assembling. e) Wooden/PVC pipe saddles for vertical or horizontal runs.

8.3. Valves

Gunmetal, cast iron, butterfly and non-return valves and puddle flanges shall be measured by numbers and shall include wheels/caps, GI nuts, bolts, washers and insertion gasket.

8.4. Painting/pipe protection/insulation

Painting/pipe protection/insulation for pipes shall be measured per linear meter over finished surface and shall include all valves and fittings for which no deduction shall be made. No extra payment shall be made for fittings, valves or flanges.

End of Section IV

239

Contractor MMRDA

External Underground Drainage

1. Scope of work

1.1. Work under this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install the under-sewer network drainage system as required by the drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the Bill of Quantities.

1.2. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the Underground Drainage system

shall include the following:-

Excavation in soil conditions present on site to lay sewer network. Distribution system underground sewer network. Connection of soil and waste stacks to traps and bends for connection to sewer

lines. Pipe protection and encasing. Venting, inspection chambers, manholes, etc, that may be required as per relevant

municipal norms/bye-laws. Connections to Sewage treatment plant. Terminal connection of excess treated effluent to Muncipal Sewer with sewer trap

chamber.

2. General Requirements.

2.1. Piping for the underground drainage shall be Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and sewerage- structured-wall piping systems of PVC-U duly manufactured out of Polyvinyl Chloride Compound conforming to ISO 21138-2 or EN13476 or compliance IS 15328 with stiffness class of SN4 with selfit connection method. The jointing method should be done using specified solvent cement as per the manufacturer.

2.2. Unless otherwise specified, manholes or inspection chambers of required depth shall be

provided on all external drains, at all change of direction of the drain and where branch drain meets the main drain. All the chambers and manholes should be inclusive of molded base, corrugated shaft and adjustable telescopic adapter for provision of proper seating base of GRP/FRP ring and cover.

3. Chambers / manholes shall be of such size as will allow necessary examination and clearance of drains. The minimum internal bases as per the requirement of Local authority and their bye-laws if any, shall be adhered to.

4. In the absence of local bye-laws, the requirements stipulated in I.S. 4111 [Part-I] code of

practice for ancillary structures on sewerage system, shall be followed.

5. Excavate to the sizes and depths required for the manholes. Install the manholes and refill outer space with selected excavation materials and dispose of surplus earth. The

240

Contractor MMRDA

specified size of manholes and chambers refers to inside dimensions.

5.1. Installation of the chambers is to be done with the standard practice and as requirement of local authorities.

5.2. The chamber base and shaft should be bedded with 1:2:3 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 3 stone aggregate 12 mm size) 75 mm in bed and all round granular material with aggregates having no sharp edges, for traffic load conditions.

5.3. For FRP / GRP cover and frame, the cover and frame is to be supported on a concrete

base while the chamber is surrounded by granular backfill 150mm wide as recommended. When RCC or other cover is used, the chamber should be fully supported in concrete surround.

5.4. The top level of the manhole with the cover on must be in line with the finished ground

level. However, if required and the finished ground level is not ascertained during

construction of the manhole, the contractor shall temporarily fix the manhole cover till such time the final/paved ground level is established, or temporarily cover the built up

manhole at no extra cost to owner. In case of any damage to the covers due to traffic or

any other reasons during the course of the project, or in the maintenance period attributable to the negligence of the contractor, the same shall be replaced immediately

by the contractor at his own cost. The frame and the cover shall be painted with black Bitumen Anti- corrosive paint.

5.5. Gully traps in all waste pipes shall be of pre-molded plastic 160mm x 110mm as indicated and laid on a 150 thick 1:3:6 cement bedding. They shall be enclosed in brick and cement mortar masonry with cement plaster forming as inspection chamber with full size 230 x 300 cast iron frame and cover (15 kg) or open grating 300 x 300 as required. Location and details indicated in the drawing.

5.6. Soil stack to be connected using a soil bend directly to the inspection chamber / manhole.

5.7. There shall be 100 mm. dia vent pipes at the sewer trap chamber and 100 mm. ventilating pipe at the manhole at the head of the drain to be routed aesthetically as directed.

Section VII Pipe Colour Code

This Colour Code is as per I.S. 2379.

Ground Colour 1st Colour Band 2nd Colour band

Proportional width of band 4:1 Note:-Arrow indicating the direction of flow.

Pipe lines Ground Color 1st Color 2nd Color Band Band 1. Drinking water

(all cold water lines after filter)

Sea green French blue Signal red

Treated water (soft water)

Sea green Light orange

Domestic hot water

Sea green Light grey

Drainage Sewer /SWD

Black

Fire services Fire red

This Color Code is as per I.S. 2379.

Final design for color coding will be of Employer only

End of Section VII

SECTION X - LIST OF APPROVED MAKES

(Listing as per priority, 1st name with top priority)

1) C.I. PIPES : NECO, Kapilansh, HEPCO. 2) S.W.R uPVC PIPES : Astral, Supreme, Ajay. 3) CPVC Pipes / fittings : Astral, Supreme, Ajay. 4) Underground Drainage : Astral Foamcore, UDS, Supreme

Eco-Drain 5) G.M. Valves : RB, Sant, Itap,Zoloto. 6) C.P. Fittings : Jaquar, Hindware, Aquel,Kholer 7) SS Kitchen Sinks : Nirali, Jayna, Anupam, Kholer. 8) Sanitary wares : Hindware, Parryware, Cera,

Kohler 9) Dual flush, Flush Valves : Jaquar, Hindware, Aquel , Kholer. 10) UPVC Pipes/fittings : Astral, Supreme, Precision. 11) Pressure Reducing Valves : Vartsila, Itap, RB. 12) Pumps : Grundfos, Ebara, Kirloskar 13) CI Valves : Lehry, Marck, LP 14) Pressure Gauge : Fieber, Guru 15) Accessories : Technocrats, Technical Concepts

(Hand Driers, Soap Dispensers)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FIRE FIGHTING 1. Scope of work

1.1. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install wet-riser fire hydrant and sprinkler system as required by the drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the Schedule of Quantities (BOQ)

1.2. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the work shall include but not limited to the following:-

a) Piping for wet riser hydrant systems and for yard hydrants. b) Landing valves, canvas hose pipes, hose-reels, hose cabinets & connections to mains. c) Fully automatic sprinkler system d) Isolation valves, non-return valves, installation valves, flow control switches and

accessories.

2. General

2.1. All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to the approval of the Project Manager.

2.2. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workman like manner.

2.3. Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance

and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.4. Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls, and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings and walls.

2.5. Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for operations, repairs and maintenance.

2.6. The rules and regulations of Local Fire Authority as per the statutory regulations applicable for obtaining the occupation certificate from the Local Development / Fire Authority.

2.7. Drawings issued with the tenders are schematic and indicate the concept. Contractor shall make his shop drawings on basis of Architectural and Interior design drawings issued by the Engineer-in-Charge. Work will be executed only as per approved shop drawings.

2.8. It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure the competence of design to meet the above requirements.

2.9. Where it is mentioned in the specification that the contractor shall perform certain work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that the contractor shall do so at his cost. The material, design and workmanship shall satisfy the regulations of the TAC / BIS / CFO, the job specifications contained herein and codes referred to where the job specification and TAC / BIS / CFO requirements stipulate in addition to these contained in the standard codes and specification, these additional requirements shall also be satisfied .

3. Interpretation

3.1 In interpretation of specification, the following order of decreasing importance shall be followed:

a) Schedule of quantities. b) General Technical specifications. c) List of approved make of materials. d) General rules and conditions /Special Conditions.

3.2 Matters not covered by the specifications given in this contract as a whole shall be covered by relevant and latest Indian Standard Codes. If such codes on a particular subject have not been framed, the decision of the engineer–in–charge/ Project Manager shall be final and binding.

4. Responsibilities of Contractors

4.1 Contractor shall be responsible for procuring supplying and providing all labour, tools and plant and equipment, etc., required for completing the work in all respects and as per the scope of the contract.

4.2 All expenses towards mobilization at site and demobilization including brining in equipment,

work force and materials, dismantling the equipment, clearing the site, etc. shall be deemed to be included in the rates quoted by the contractor against various items of schedule rates and no separate payment on such expenses shall be entertained .

4.3 The contractor shall acquaint himself with access availability, facilities such as railway siding local labour, etc., to provide suitable allowance in his quotation. The contractor may have to build temporary access to roads to aid him own work which may also be taken care of while quoting for the work.

4.4 The procurement and supply in sequence and at the appropriate time of all materials and

consumables shall be entirely the contractor’s responsibility and his rates for execution of work will be inclusive of supply of all these items.

5. Specifications

5.1 Work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the specifications attached to the tender.

5.2 Works not covered in the specifications shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standard Code of practice specifications of materials.

6. Execution of work

6.1 The work shall be carried out in conformity with the contract drawings and within the requirements of architectural, HVAC, plumbing, electrical, structural and other specialised services, drawings.

6.2 The Contractor shall liaise with all traders and agencies working on the site. He shall ensure / liaison with civil contractor for hangers, sleeves structural openings and other requirements well in advance prevent hold up of the construction schedule.

6.3 On award of work, the contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the form of Pert Chart or Bar Chart for approval of consultant / engineer – in – charge, all dates and time schedule, agreed upon shall be strictly adhered to.

6.4 The work shall be executed strictly as per the time schedule given in the tender document.

6.5 A joint program of execution of work will be prepared by the Contractor based on priority

requirement of the project. This program will take in to account the time of completion mentioned above and the time allowed for the priority works by the owner.

6.6 Monthly/weekly construction program will be drawn up by the Owner jointly with the

Contractor. Based on availability of work fronts and joint construction program as per 6.5 above. The contractor shall scrupulously adhere to these targets /programs by deploying adequate personnel and construction tools and tackles and he shall also supply himself all materials of his scope of supply in good time to achieve the urgent / program. In all matters concerning the extent of targets set out in the weekly and monthly targets programs and the degree of achievement, the decision of the Owner will be final and binding on the Contractor.

7. Drawings

7.1 Contractor drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as actual construction Permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the architectural and other services drawings. Shop/working drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with para 17 of this chapter.

7.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over contract or other services drawings as to all dimensions.

7.3 Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring the notice of the owner any or all discrepancy or deviations noticed. The decision of the owner in the regard shall be final.

7.4 Large size details and manufacturer’s dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take precedence over small scale drawings.

7.5 Any drawings supplied with the tender shall be returned in good condition along with the

tender.

7.6 All drawings issued by the consultants for the work are the property of the consultants and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any other works than intended, without the written permission of the consultants.

8. Tender Information

8.1 The Contractor shall obtain all information relating to the preparation of the tender entirely on his own responsibility and expense.

8.2 The contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with the actual site conditions, access, availability of materials and other related problems for the speedy execution of the work.

8.3 The contractor shall examine all specifications, tender conditions and drawings before

tendering for the work.

8.4 Information, levels and dimensions given in the tender drawings are supposed to be correct but the contractor shall make independent inquiries and verify the same. No claims for extras shall be admissible in case of any deviations for incorrectness of the information, levels or dimensions.

8.5 The contractor shall obtain all information relation to the local regulations, bye- laws, application of any and all laws relating to him work or profession. No additional claims shall be admissible on this account.

9. Materials

9.1 All materials used on this work shall be new, conforming to the specifications.

9.2 Materials shall conform to the latest TAC Regulations/Indian Standards Specifications as amended up to date and carry certification mark, wherever so required.

9.3 All materials used on the project shall be approved by the owner.

9.4 Contractor may be required to purchase such materials of particular make or from a particular source if in the opinion of the owner the same is necessary and required for the proper and reasonable compliance of the specifications and in the interest of better quality of work.

10. Storage of materials

10.1.1 All materials shall be stored in a proper manner protected from natural element so as to avoid contamination and deterioration.

10.1.2 Contractor’s stores shall be open to inspection by the owner at all reasonable hours.

10.1.3 Location of stores and stores yards shall be approved by the owner prior to construction and occupation.

10.1.4 Contractors shall take adequate protection of the stores maintained by him, at his own

expense.

11. Materials by owners

11.1 Materials designated to be supplied by owners shall be supplied at locations given under the relevant clause of the agreement.

11.2 Any materials supplied by the owners shall be protected and stored as given in para 10

above.

11.3 Any damage during cartage, execution, installation or before formally handing over shall be made good by the contractor at his own expenses.

12. Inspection and testing of materials

12.1 Contractor shall be required to produce manufacturer’s test certificates for the particular Batch of materials supplied to him. The test carried out shall be as per the relevant India Standards.

12.2 For examination and testing of materials and works at the site contractor shall provide all

Testing and gauging equipment necessary but not limited to the following :

a) Steel tapes b) Painting / Coating thickness gauge c) Plum bobs, spirit levels, hammers d) Micrometers / Vernier calipers e) Hydraulic test machine, pressure gauge, flow meter

f) Clamp –on – ammeter, megger g) ‘Holiday Test’, machine

12.3 Contractor shall submit calibration Test Certificate not older than 15 days for all such equipment / instruments. Further if required by the owner, calibration test certificate of any approved laboratory may have to be submitted by the Contractor.

12.4 All testing equipment should be located at the site.

12.5 The contractor shall carryout the various tests as enumerated in the technical specifications of tender documents.

12.6 All tests whether on the field or outside concerning the execution of the work and supply of

Materials by the contractor shall be carried out by the contractor at his own cost.

12.7 The work is subjected to inspection at all times by the Owner. The contractor shall carry out all instructions given during inspection and shall ensure that the work is being carried out according to the technical specifications of this tender.

12.8 The contractor shall provide for purpose of inspection access ladders, lighting and necessary instruments at his own cost.

12.9 All results of inspection and test will be recorded in the inspection reports, performance of

which will be approved the owner .These reports shall form part of the completion documents.

12.10 Any work not conforming to the execution drawings, specifications or codes shall be rejected forth with and the contractor shall carryout as per the specification at his own cost.

13. Metric

13.1 All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender documents are Commercial metric sizes.

13.2 Any weights of sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the

nearest equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additional cost. The decision of the owner shall be final and binding on the contractor.

14. Reference points

14.1 Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks, flag tops and other reference points for the proper execution of work and the same shall be preserved till the end of the work.

14.2 All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations given on Architectural and contract drawings.

15. Reference drawings

15.1 The contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These shall not be used on site.

15.2 All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these reference

Drawings for final incorporation.

16. Site order book

16.1 The contractor shall maintain a site order book at the site office.

16.2 All instructions relating to the job shall be recorded by the owner, along with contractor’s compliance.

16.3 Contractor is bound to carry out all such instructions given to him.

17. Working / shop drawings

17.1 The contractor shall submit to the owner, six copies of the working / shop drawings.

17.2 Working drawings shall be approved by the consultant. Six sets of shop drawings shall be Submitted for approval showing :

a) Any change in layout from the contract drawings. b) Equipment layout, piping, wiring diagram and instrumentation. c) Manufacturer’s or contractor’s fabrication drawings for any material or equipment.

18. Information to be furnished by tenderer

The following details are required to be furnished along with the tender:

18.1 Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence in support of jobs carried out / under execution, turnover statements and profit and loss account for the last 3 years.

18.2 Technical information (Catalogues / Leaflets) in duplicate about all equipment’s, materials

which are to be supplied by the tender.

18.3 All letters / information, specification and details shall be submitted in duplicate .

19. Completion drawings

19.1 On completion of works, contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and two prints of “As Built” drawings to the owner. These drawings shall have the following information.

a) Run of all piping, with diameters on all floors and vertical stacks. b) Run of all fire lines with diameters, location of control valves, access panels. c) Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections. d) Run of control wiring and circuit diagrams of motor control panels.

19.2 Contractor shall provide six sets of catalogues, maintenance manuals, performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and address of the manufacture for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him.

19.3 All “Warranty Cards” given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the owner.

20. Contractor’s Rates

20.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, erection, tools, plant scaffolding, services, connections, transport to site, taxes, octroi and levies, breakage, wastage an all such expenses as may be necessary and required to completely do all the items of work and put them in a working condition to the satisfaction of the owner.

20.2 Rates quoted are for all heights and depths required for this work and must be for complete

items inclusive of such accessories, fixtures and fixing arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of the particular item unless given separately in the schedules of quantities.

20.3 All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of accessories, fixtures and fixing arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are standard part of the particular item unless given separately in the schedule of quantities.

20.4 All rates quoted shall be inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and making good the

same with cement concrete. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses in the concrete and masonry work as the work proceeds.

20.5 The schedule of rates is to be read with all the other sections of this tender document.

20.6 The owner reserves the right to interpolate the rates of such items of work fall in between

similar items of lower and higher magnitude.

20.7 All items of work, in the schedule of rates shall be carried out as per the specifications, drawings and instructions of the owner and the rates shall provide for supply of required materials, consumables, skilled and unskilled labour, supervision, tools and tackles, etc., as called for in the detailed specifications and conditions of the contract .

21. Testing

21.1 Piping system shall be tested as specified under the relevant clause of the TAC Regulations / BIS Guidelines / Specifications and shall be performed in the presence of the owner/local fire inspector.

21.2 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and the whole work again

tested to meet the requirements of specifications, at the cost of the contractor.

21.3 Contractor shall perform all such tests may be necessary and required by the local authorities to meet the municipal or other bye – laws in force at his own cost .

21.4 Contractor shall provide free of cost all labour, equipment and materials for the performance

of the test.

22. Site clearance and clean –up

22.1 The contractor shall from time to time, clear away all debris and excess material accumulated at the site.

22.2 After all the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned;

contractor shall clean up the same and remove all plaster, paint, stains, stickers and other foreign matter and discoloration leaving the system in a ready to use condition.

23. License and permits

23.1 Contractor must be an experienced firm, approved by the local fire brigade authority for execution of fire protection system.

23.2 Contractor shall obtain the approval of all works executed by him from the local fire brigade

authority.

24. Electrical works

24.1 Electrical work done under this contract shall be executed by licensed wiremen under the supervision of licensed electrical supervision as per requirements of the Indian Electricity Act.

24.2 Contractor shall obtain the approval of all electrical installation done under this contract from the appropriate competent authority before the installation is commissioned.

25. Approval of Fire Installation

25.1 Contractor shall prepare detailed drawings for fire fighting systems and obtain prior approval of the same from the Local Fire Authority.

25.2 Contractor shall keep a constant liaison with the above authorities to keep them aware of

the progress and standards of works followed, and for the inspections to be carried out during the fabrication / construction phase.

25.3 Contractor shall obtain all NOC/ Approvals / Completion Certificates with respect to the fire

fighting installations from the District Magistrate / Local Fire Officer.

26. Welding

26.1 The welding procedure, types of electrodes etc. shall be in accordance with the following IS Specifications.

Welding Procedures IS : 823 Welding Electrodes IS : 814, but of approved makes only Testing of Welders IS : 817

26.2 Only welders filling the requirements of IS : 817 and approved by the owner shall be

employed by the contractor.

27. Jointing of pipes

Pipes and fittings shall be joined with electrical resistance welding in approved manner. Gasket, for use in between flanged joints, to be of CAF as per IS – 2712, thickness as specified in BOQ.

28. Painting

28.1 All above ground pipes, pipe fittings, hose cabinets, structural steel work pipe supports etc. shall be painted as per specifications given below.

28.2 Painting shall be done only after completion of fabrication work and testing.

28.3 The instructions of paint manufacture shall be followed as far as possible otherwise the work is to be done as directed by the Owner.

28.4 All cleaning materials, brushes, tools and tackles, painting, material etc. shall be arranged by

the contractor at site in sufficient quantity.

28.5 All rust, dust scales, welding slag or any other foreign materials shall be removed fully so that a clean and dry surface is obtained prior to painting. Any other oily containment shall be removed by use of a solvent prior to surface cleaning.

28.6 First coat of primer paint must be applied by brush on dry clean surface immediately or in any case within 3 hours of such cleaning.

28.7 Primer paint – one coat (minimum thickness 100 microns) self – priming epoxy mastic.

28.8 Finishing coats:

a) For production areas – 2 coats (thickness minimum 50 microns each ) of epoxy paint, Fire Red shade as per IS : 5.

b) For other than production areas – 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint, fire red shade as per IS:5.

29. Coating wrapping for underground pipes

29.1 All underground piping shall be protected by coating and wrapping as per the following procedure.

29.2 The materials and workmanship shall in general confirm to IS: 10221 or as directed by the owner.

29.3 Cleaning – The pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned off dust, rust will scales, oil, grease etc. by stiff wire brush and scrappers. The surface shall be coated with the primer immediately after cleaning.

29.4 The ‘Holiday Test’ is to be conducted for detecting any entrapped air or any other defect. 29.5 The contractor is to arrange for the Holiday Test and to rectify the defects if found any.

4. C I non return valves:

SPECIFICATIONS

1. Pumps

1.1 Motor driven fire pumps: End suction type, horizontally mounted centrifugal pump (as per IS 1520), TAC approved each capable to deliver required discharge of clear water at minimum developed head, coupled to a suitably electric motor mounted on a common base frame and anti-vibration pads coupling, coupling guard and fixing bolts etc. Motor HP to be suitably selected to suit minimum discharge and residual head at the top most hydrants. The characteristic curve should have a large range of discharge points for different heads.

Note:

a) Above pumps shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150% of rated discharge capacity at

a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.

b) The pump sets with cushy foots shall have to be installed on RCC floor already constructed and cost of the required civil works viz chipping of floor & concrete base etc (as required), shall be included in the quoted price of respective pump sets.

2. C I Sluice Valve: C I components of the sluice valve shall be of Grey cast iron conforming to IS 210. The valves shall be flanged having solid wedge gate valve, inside screw, hand wheel with open-close indications etc all conforming to IS 780 but of nominal pressure rating of PN 1.6 as per TAC norms.

Test Pressure at manufacturers’ works

Flange drillings shall normally be as per IS 1538. However, if the manufacturer drills the flanges to other standard specifications, the valves shall be supplied with a pair of matching flanges, nuts, bolts, washers, rubber insertion, etc. and such flanges shall have inside threads to suit pipes of same nominal size as that of the valve.

The quoted price of the valves shall also include cost of arrangement for securing the valves in `open' or `closed' positions by padlock/rivetted strap, where required per TAC norms.

3. G M Valves:

Gun metal components of the peet valves i.e. Gate Valves, Check Valves i.e. non-return valves, and Globe valves etc. shall be of Gun Metal conforming to Grade 2 of IS 318. The valves shall be having flanged or screwed ends, hand wheel with open-close indications etc all conforming to Class-2 Valves of IS 778 (ISI marked) or imported as per ASTM.

7. Branch Pipe:

C I reflux valves, i.e. swing check type non-return valves, shall be conforming to IS 5312. Test pressures shall be same as per CI sluice valves.

5. G.I. Pipes and Fittings: All G.I. pipes shall be as per IS 1239 (heavy/medium quality as mentioned in the schedule of items upto 150 mm N B, as per IS 3589 (minimum 6 mm thick) above 150 mm N B, and the fittings shall be of all welded construction, butt weld type flanges shall conform to IS 6392 and gaskets of synthetic moulded rubber approved by Fire Standard.

All pipes outside the building shall be laid underground at a depth of 1 mtr (approx) and laying shall be as per layout drawing, excavation, back filling of earth, cutting holes in existing structure where necessary, providing puddle collars/pipes as required & making good the damages including making the concerned portion of the structure water tight.

Erection of over ground piping shall be complete with necessary pipe supports hangers with MS angles/plate/nut bolts/clamps etc with fabrication as required including providing MS puddle pipes/collars as required for punctures through walls/slabs etc.

Erection of pipe lines shall also include chipping of wall; making holes inside RCC or brick walls, slabs and necessary civil works for restoration of the surface after completion of erection. The quoted tender rate shall include all the above works, as well as the cost of route markers for underground pipe lines as per following specifications.

Route marker with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) of size 60 cm x 60 cm at bottoms and 50 cm x 50 cm at the top with a thickness of 10 cm including inscription duly engraved as required (spacing approx 15 mtrs or as directed at site). No extra payment will be made on this account.

5.1 Pressure Gauges: Pressure gauges with controlling cocks etc. shall be of approved make having pressure range, bourdon material and dial size as specified in schedule of items.

5.2 Pressure Switches: Pressure switches with accessories shall be of approved make and design and shall actuate (`cut-off' and/or `make contact' as required) at pre-set pressures.

6. Landing Valves (Hydrant Valve): Gun metal landing valve (internal/external Fire-Hydrants) with oblique type single outlet as per schedule of quantities complete with hose coupling adaptor of 63 mm size, instantaneous spring lock arrangement and blank cap with chain conforming to IS 5290. External Fire- Hydrants to be provided with stand posts as specified in schedule of quantities. Orifice plates may be provided where inlet pressure is required to be reduced as per WBFS requirement.

Gun metal, short type, instantaneous pattern branch pipe to suit fire hose delivery coupling of 63 mm size complete with G M nozzle of 20 mm nominal size conforming to IS 903.

8. Hose with Coupling: 63 mm nominal internal dia. hose, rubber lined woven-jacketed coupling with Type-II (Reinforced Rubber lined type) of IS 636, fire fighting delivery hose 15 M long each, fitted with gun metal coupling of 63 mm size with multi serrated tail and double instantaneous spring lock arrangement comprising of male half at one end and female half at other end complete with rubber cup washer and conforming to IS 903.

9. Hose Reel:

Swinging hose reel conforming to IS 884 & comprising of 3 ply rubber hose of length specified in schedule of items, 20 mm (3/4") nominal bore (25 kg/cm2/350 psi bursting pressure), mild steel pressed reel with 170 degree swinging, nozzle of G M chromium plated, with non- jamming controlling handle which shall stay at the `ON' `OFF' position as set, wall brackets with `U' shaped reel carrier made of C I complete with 25 mm NB G M valve at the inlet, and orifice plates (if necessary for reducing pressure).

10. Air Vessel (if any): Mild steel air vessel adequate size to take care of pressure surges during operation of the system and venting of entrapped air in the system shall be complete with air relief valve, pressure gauge, drain valve and shut off valve at the inlet.

11. Valve Chamber:

Valve chamber of adequate size to accommodate external valves shall be constructed as directed per site condition.

12. Fire-Brigade Connections: Fire-Brigade connections (inlets) to Riser and Under Ground Reservoir shall be with two numbers of 63 mm instantaneous inlets for each connection as per TAC norms. Other aspects of the connection shall be as per IS 904.

13. Sprinkler Installations: All sprinkler installations shall adhere to IS 15105 : 2002

Sprinkler heads shall be installed in conformity with approved shop drawings and in co- ordination with electrical fixtures, ventilation ducts, cable galleries and other services along the ceiling.

Following type of sprinklers shall be used:

S.No. Type of Sprinkler Temprature

a) Pendent/Upright type 68°C

13.1 Spacing and coverage of sprinkler shall be in accordance with risk classification of area in which they are installed, design density and TAC regulation.

13.2 Spare Sprinklers

Provide lockable enamel painted steel cabinet including following type of spare sprinklers. a) Pendent/Upright type 20

13.3 The cabinet should also contain one pair of wrenches (of each size of the same are different) for the sprinklers.

Spare sprinklers shall be of the same specifications as that of the original sprinklers specified.

14. Testing

All piping in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure or14kg/sq.cm (whichever is more) without drop in pressure forat-least2 hours.

15. Jointing

15.1 Screwed (50mm dia pipes and below) Joint for black steel pipes and fittings shall be metal to metal thread joints. As mall amount of red lead may be used for lubrication and rust prevention. Joints shall not be welded or caulked.

15.2 Welded (65mm dia and above) Joints between M.S. and pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and fittings having "V" groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner. But welded joints are not acceptable.

15.3 Flanged a) Flanged joints shall be provided on: b) Straight runs not exceeding 30m on pipelines 80mm dia and above. c) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bend tees etc. of 65mm dia or larger diameter. d) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with other type of

pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and required as per good engineering practice.

e) Flanges shall be as per I.S. with appropriate number of G.I. nuts and bolts, 3mm insertion neoprene gasket complete.

16. Unions

Approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65mm and below in similar places as specified for flanges.

17. Excavation

17.1 Excavation for pipelines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades shown on the drawings or as required at site. Pipelines shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1.2 meter or as shown on drawings.

17.2 Wherever required contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining structures with

adequate timber supports.

17.3 On completion of testing and pipe protection, trenches shall be refilled with excavated earth in15cmslayersandconsolidated.Contractorshalldisposeoffallsurplusearthwithina

18. Measurement

18.1 Mild steel pipes shall be measured in linear metres of the finished length correct upto one cm. and shall include all fittings, flanges, and welding, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers, anchor fasteners, painting and testing complete in all respects.

18.2 Sluice and full way valves, check valves, install at ionvalves, air valves & flow switches shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items necessary and required for fixing and as given in the specifications and bill of quantities.

18.3 Fire hydrants, hose reels, fire brigade connections, orifice flanges shall be measured by

number and include all items given in the specifications and bill of quantities.

18.4 Fire hose and boxes specified shall be measured by number and include all items given in specifications and Bill of Quantities.

Hand Appliances

1 Scope of work

1.1 Work under this chapter shall consist of furnishing all labour, material, appliances and equipment necessary and required to install fire extinguishers and appliances.

1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work shall consist of the following:-

Install at ionof fully charged and tested fire extinguishers and appliances CO2foam, ABC

Chemical powder type as required by the specifications and/drawings.

2 General requirements

2.1 Fire extinguishers shall conform to the following Indian Standard Specifications and shall be with ISI approved stamp as revised and amended up to date:-

2.2 Fire extinguishers shall be installed as per Indian Standard" Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Portable First Aid Appliances "I.S.2190-1962.

2.3 Hand appliances shall be installed in readily accessible locations with the appliance brackets

fixed to wall by suitable anchor fasteners.

2.4 Each appliance shall be provided with an inspection card indicating the date of inspection, testing, change of charge and other relevant data.

2.5 All appliances shall be fixed in atrue work-man like manner truly vertical and at correct locations.

3.0 Measurement

Fire extinguishers shall be measured by numbers and include installation and all items necessary and required and given in the specifications.

Chapter- III: Pipe Colour Code

This Colour Code is as per I.S.2379.

Ground Colour 1stColourBand 2ndColourband

Proportional width of band4:1 Note:-Arrow indicating the direction of flow.

Pipelines Ground Color 1stColor 2ndColor Band Band 1. Drinkingwater

(allcold water lines

after filter) Sea green French blue Signal red

2. Treated water (softwater)

Sea green Light orange

3. Domestic hot water Sea green Light grey

4. Drainage Sewer/SWD

Black

5. Fire services Fire red

This Color Codeis as per I.S.2379.

Final design for color coding will be of Employer only

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES

(Listing as per priority, 1st name with top priority)

16) C.I. PIPES : NECO, Kapilansh, HEPCO.

17) S.W.R PVC PIPES : Astral, Supreme, Ajay.

18) CPVC Composite Pipes / fittings : Astral Bendable / Lubrizol or Equiv.

19) Underground Drainage : Astral Foamcore, UDS, Supreme Eco-Drain

20) G.M.Valves : RB, Sant, Itap.

21) C.P. Fittings : Jaquar, Hindware, Aquel

22) SS Kitchen Sinks : Nirali, Jayna, Anupam.

23) Sanitary wares : Hindware, Parryware, Cera.

24) Dual flush, Flush Valves : Jaquar, Hindware, Aquel

25) UPVC Pipes/fittings : Astral, Supreme, Precision.

26) Pressure Reducing Valves : Vartsila, Itap, RB.

27) Pumps : Kirloskar, Grundfos, Ebara,

28) CI Valves : Lehry, Marck, LP

29) Fire Pipes : Blazemaster / Tata, Zenith, Surya

30) Fire Fittings / Hydrant Valves / Connections : Newage, Minimax, Nitin Fire

31) Fire Hoses : Newage, Minimax, Nitin Fire

32) Flow Switches : Flowell, Flowman

33) Sprinkler heads : Tyco, Newage, Minimax

34) Anticorrosive Bituminous Paint : Shalimar/ Asian Paint/ Nerolac

35) Pressure Gauge : Fieber, Guru,

36) Sewage Treatment Plant (MBR) : GE Water / Ion Exchange / Pratham Enviro

37) Accessories : Technocrats, Technical Concepts (Hand Driers, Soap Dispensers, Auto Janitor, etc)

38) G.I. PIPES : TATA , JINDAL.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS LT INFRASTRUCTURE AND INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION WORK

1.0 The following Technical Specifications are made applicable for the Stated Job and shall be rigidly adhered to while supplying and installing the materials at site.

1.1 Codes And Standards:

1.1.1 The following Codes and Standards shall be applicable for continuous performance of all electrical equipments to be supplied, delivered at site, erected, tested and commissioned. The Electrical equipments offered shall comply to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications, Fire Insurance Regulations, Tariff Advisory Committee’s Regulations, and in particular to Indian Electricity Rules in all respects with all its latest amendments up-to-date.

1.1.2 For guidelines to the tenderers, few of the Indian Standards are indicated below: IS

116 Circuit Breakers for AC System.

IS 159 Busbars and Busbar connections. IS 3043 Code of Practice for earthing. IS 3072 Code of Practice for Installation of Switchgear IS 3106 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance

of Fuse (upto 650 Volts) IS 3202 Climate Proofing of Electrical Equipment IS 3427 Metal enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear. IS 3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits. IS 4047 Heavy Duty Air Break Switches and composite Switch Fuse Units for

voltage not exceeding 100 Volts. IS 4064 Switch Fuse Units for Industries etc. IS 4237 General requirements for Switchgears not exceeding 1000 Volts. IS 4615 Switch Socket Outlets. IS 5133 (Part-I) Sheet Steel Boxes. IS 5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electric work. IS 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors. IS 5820 Pre-cast concrete cable covers. IS 5908 Method of measurement of electrical installation in building. IS 6381 Specifications for construction and testing of electrical apparatus. IS 1818 Isolator and Earthing Switches. IS 1947 Flood Lights. IS 2147 Degree of Protection provided for enclosure for Switchgear. IS 2208 HRC Cartridge Fuse Units upto 650 Volts.

IS 2251 Code of Practice for Danger Notice Plates IS 2268 Call Bells/Buzzers IS 2274 Code of Practice for wiring installations (exceeding 650 Volts). IS 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purpose. IS 2312 Exhaust fans IS 2309 Code of Practice for Lightning Protection IS 2418 Tubular fluorescent lamps for General Lighting Service. IS 2509 PVC Electrical conduits

IS 2516 A.C. Circuit Breakers IS 2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electric wiring. IS 2675 Enclosed distribution fuse boards cutouts for voltage upto 1000 Volts. IS 2705 Current Transformers IS 3070 (Part-I) Lightning Arrestors IS 2834 L. T. Capacitors. BS 162 Electric Power Switchgear for Indoor and Outdoor Installations. IEC Pub 26 Circuit Breakers. IS 374 Ceiling Fans. IS 375 Marking and arrangement for Switchgear Boards Main connections

and Auxiliary Wiring. IS 415 Tungsten Filament lamps. IS 694 PVC insulated cable and cords for Power/Lighting. IS 722 Three Phase Watt Hour meters with MDI. IS 732 Electrical wiring installation (upto 650 Volts) IS 1087 Single pole tumbler switch 5 Amps. IS 1248 Direct acting Electrical Indicating Instruments. IS 1293 3 Pin Plugs and Socket Outlets. IS 1554 PVC Insulated Cables - Heavy Duty. IS 1567 Metal Clad Switches upto 100 Amps. IS 1651 Lead Acid Cell Batteries. IS 1653 Rigid Steel Conduits for Electric Wiring IS 1771 Industrial Light Fittings with accessories. IS 6946 Pliable (flexible) non-metallic conduits for electricals.

The entire electrical installation work shall be strictly complied with the Codes Standards, Rules and Regulations framed under the Indian Electricity Act. Further, it shall be carried out as per the Regulations and Rules setout by "Tariff Advisory Committee and/or Fire Insurance Regulations".

Any other IS Codes As applicable at the time of execution over and above whatever stated above. Some of the Rules framed under Indian Electricity Rules of 1956 and all amendments thereof more particularly complied to :-

35, 43, 44, 44-A, 45 (Part-I), 50, 51, 59, 61 (a), 61 (c), 62, 63 (2), 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 and 92 (2).

SPECIFICATION FOR SAFETY EQUIPMENT IN LT ROOM

1.0 Scope :-

This Specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supplying at site, testing and commissioning of L.T substation equipments such as LT Panel Boards, Earthing , Cable Trays, in LT Panel Rooms as required to be installed to complete of the sub- station in all respect and to complete the installation in working condition .

2.0 Applicable Standards :-

All relevant Indian Standards shall be made applicable with latest amendments. Also any other specific application is required, then the same shall be complied to.

3.0 440 Volts grade Warning Boards :-

440 Volts Red Warning Boards of appropriate size shall be fixed at prominent places. These shall have minimum 3 languages inscribed on it, mainly Marathi, Hindi and English and shall be enameled type. The Warning Boards shall also have the usual Electrical shock inscriptions as well as the small mark of danger on it. These shall be fixed in places as per directions and of appropriate voltages.

4.0 FRP Chequered Insulated Mats :-

In the front operational part of the High Voltages and Medium Voltages Panels a FRP Checkered Matts shall be placed. Chopped Strand Mat is made from Fibre Glass Strands of 50mm length, which are evenly dispersed and bond together with emulsion Binder. The FRP Matting shall be of approved quality of size not less than 1000mm (wide) x 20mm (thick). The length of the FRP matting shall be such as to cover the entire working area in front of all the equipments placed in the Main HT room. These shall further comply to relevant standards under Indian Electricity rules and Codes of Standards. The mats shall be so designed to withstand 22000 volts for 1 minute and leakage of current shall not exceed 160 mA/square meter.

5.0 Fire buckets, extinguishers and charts :-

Fire buckets, Fire extinguishers and charts shall be supplied as per the list given below. The fire buckets shall be made up of galvanised Iron Sheets of approved thickness and painted Red with letters of 'FIRE' written on it. 5 such buckets shall form one set and they shall be hung by means of hook arrangement from a stand prepared out of Round steel bars with supporting frame. This frame work shall also be painted 'RED'. The fire buckets shall be filled with clean, dry and peddle free sand ready for immediate use for extinguishing fires.

There shall be two such sets kept ready one in the switchyard under a proper weather protection shed and the other inside the HV/LV Room. The number of Fire extinguishers shall be as per the inspectorate. These shall be ABC type and shall be

tested at least once in six months on the site, after erection. This shall be as per relevant Indian Standards of minimum 5.0 Kgs. Instructions charts of restoration of persons suffering from Electric shocks in English, Hindi and Marathi shall be displayed in an enclosed wooden/glass frame work, one in the LV Room and the other in the H.V. Room.

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

9.1 SCOPE

This section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the sub-station for

compliance with statutory regulations, safety and operational needs.

9.2 REQUIREMENTS

Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A) and (C) of CPWD

General Specifications of Electrical Works. In particular following items shall be provided:

(a) Insulation Mats

Insulation mats conforming to IS 15652: 2006 shall be provided in front of main switch

boards as well as other control equipment’s as specified.

(b) First Aid Charts and First Aid Box

Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional language), displaying methods of

giving artificial respiration to a recipient of electrical shock shall be prominently provided

at appropriate place. Standard first aid boxes containing materials as prescribed by St.

John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in each sub-station.

(c) Danger Plate

Danger Plates shall be provided on HV and MV equipment’s. MV danger notice plate shall

be 200 mm x 150 mm made of mild steel at least 2 mm thick vitreous enameled white

on both sides and with the descriptions in signal red colour on front side as required.

Notice plates of other suitable materials such as stainless steel, brass or such other

permanent nature material shall also be accepted with the description engraved in signal

red colour.

(d) Fire Extinguishers

Portable Conforming to IS 2878 /1976 Chemical confirming to 2171 :1976 extinguishers,

HCFC Blend A (P-IV) shall be installed in the sub-station at suitable places. Other

extinguishers recommended for electric fires may also be used.

(e) Fire Buckets

Fire buckets conforming to IS 2546: 1974 shall be installed with the suitable stand for

storage of water and sand.

(f) Tool Box

A Standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and

maintenance shall be provided in the sub-station.

(g) Caution Board

Necessary number of caution boards such as “Man on Line” ‘Don’t Switch on’

etc. shall be available in the sub-station.

(h) Key Board

A keyboard of required size shall be provided at a proper place containing castle

keys, and all other keys of sub-station and allied areas.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHING

1.0 Scope :

a) Earthing system to be provided shall comprise of earth electrode of copper plate or hot dipped Galvanised plates in earth pits, earth bus/grid of copper flats or GI Flats or Aluminium flats as called for and bare copper earth wires or Galvanised earth wires or aluminium earth wires as called for, for acting as earth continuity conductor.

b) Lightning Protection system shall comprise of earth electrode of Cu or GI plate in

earth pits, earth bus of down conductors of Cu or GI flats.

c) Earthing of Compound, Flood Lighting and Road Lighting poles shall be done by using Cu or GI plates in earth pits near pole and 7/16 size galvanised strained wire for connecting to the pole or as specified in the Schedule or in drawings.

d) Entire earth system shall conform to the Code of Practice as per IS. 3043 of 1987.

2.0 General Requirement :

a) Enclosures and frame work of all current carrying equipment and accessories, structural steel/columns shall be adequately earthed to a single earthing system, unless separate earthing systems are specifically stipulated. All electrical equipment shall be earthed at two distinct points.

b) Earth loads and risers shall follow as direct and short a path as possible. Suitable risers shall be provided as directed if equipment is not available when earthing is installed.

3.0 Earth Electrodes in Earth Pits :

Plate electrodes of Copper shall be 600 x 600 x 3.15 mm thick and 600 x 600 x 12 mm thick for GI unless otherwise specified.

4.0 Earth Bus and Earth Continuity Conductor :

a) Earth bus is a copper strip or flat of specified size interconnecting all earth electrodes.

b) Switchgears and Power Distribution Boards shall be earthed by a copper flat strip.

c) Panels, fused DBs and motors upto 30 KW rating shall be earthed by a continuity conductor, as specified. Minimum size of continuity conductor shall be 25 x 3 mm bare copper strip, soft drawn.

d) Road Lighting Poles shall be earthed with Cu stranded wire conductor while for lighting and power wiring bare copper conductor shall be provided unless otherwise specified to use insulated conductor.

5.0 Earth Bus Station :

Earth Bus Station shall be provided to facilitate tapping of earth continuity conductor from earth bus/grid very conveniently. It will comprise of a 400 mm long 50 x 6 mm bare copper strips/flat fixed with rawl plugs/bolts securely on wall/column above floor level. Spacers of 20 mm to 25 mm shall be provided to keep the flat away from wall and facilitate connections of earth conductor for which 6 mm dia holes 8 to 10 numbers are provided with proper size brass nuts, bolts, and washers. Earth bus shall be connected to it.

6.0 Lightning Protection System :

a) Air termination shall be five prong type copper Rod with round head and the same shall be securely clamped/installed to withstand severe weather conditions and provide protection against lightning. Horizontal air termination conductors shall be Cu or GI flat/strip and shall be provided where specified.

b) Earth Electrodes for lightning protection system shall be Copper plate installed in

earth pits as per IS.

c) The down conductors from air terminals shall be done in tinned Cu or GI Flat/strip, of size as specified in the schedule of quantities or drawings, but shall not be less than 12.5 x 3mm as required. The down conductors shall follow a direct path to the earth electrode without any sharp bend, turn or kinks. These down conductors shall not be connected to other earthing conductors above ground level but the metallic parts in the vicinity of lighting protection conductor such as ladders, pipes, etc. shall be effectively connected and bonded.

d) A test joint as per IS shall be provided for every down conductor within 1500 mm

above ground level.

e) Hardware and clamps shall be similar as used for the earthing systems.

7.0 Artificial Treatment of Soil :

If the earth resistance is too high and the multiple electrode earthing does not give adequate low resistance to earth, then the soil resistivity immediately surrounding the earth electrodes shall be reduced by adding sodium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium carbonate, copper sulphate, salt and soft coke or charcoal in suitable proportions.

8.0 Resistance to Earth :

The Contractor shall measure the resistance of the individual earthing pit and report to the Architect/Consultants. The Contractor will make after due consultation with Architect/Consultants, No. of Earth pits, such that, the overall resistance in the earth mat does not exceed 1.0 ohm.

9.0 Earthing Station :

9.1 Plate Electrode Earthing :

Earthing electrode shall consist of a tinned copper plate not less than 600 x 600 x 3.15 mm thick, or, 600 x 600 x 6 mm G.I. as called for in the drawings. The plate electrode shall be buried as far as practicable below permanent moisture level but in any case not less than 3 mts. below ground level. Wherever possible earth electrode shall be located as near the water tap, water drain or a down take pipe as possible. Earth electrodes shall not be installed in proximity to a metal fence.

It shall be kept clear of the buildings foundations and in no case shall it be nearer than 1 meter from the outdoor face of the wall. The earth plate shall be set vertically and surrounded with 150 mm thick layer of charcoal dust and salt mixture. 20 mm G.I. pipe shall run from the top edge of the plate to the ground level. The top of the pipe shall be provided with a funnel and a mesh for watering the earth through the earth. The main earth conductors shall be connected to the electrode just below the funnel, with proper terminal lugs and checks nuts. The funnel over the G.I. pipe and earth connections houses 300 mm wide and 300 mm deep. The masonry chamber shall be provided with a cast iron cover resting cover a C.I. frame embedded in masonry.

9.2 Pipe Electrode Earthing :

Earthing electrode shall consist of a G.I. Pipe (Class 'B') Indian Tube Company make/ zenith or approved equal, not less than 40 mm dia and 5 meters long. G.I. Pipe electrode shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided with holes of 12 mm dia. drilled at 75 mm interval upto 2.5 meters length from bottom. The electrode shall buried vertically in the ground as far as practicable below permanent moisture level with its top not less than 200 mm below ground level.

The electrode shall be in one piece and no joints shall be allowed in the electrode. Wherever possible earth electrodes shall be located as near water tap, water drain or a down take pipe. Earth electrode shall not be located in proximity to a metal fence. It shall be kept clear of the building foundations and in no case shall be nearer than 2 meters from the outer face of the wall. The pipe earth electrode shall be kept vertically and surrounded with 150 mm thick layer of charcoal dust and salt mixture upto a height of 2.5 meters from the bottom. At the top of the electrode a funnel with a mesh shall be provided for watering.

10.0 Chemical Earthing using TEREC compound.

10.1 Chemical compound “Terrafill” should provide a simple method to substantially lower the earth resistance of grounding systems. When used in conjunction with copper grounding equipment. Terrafill should lower the contact resistance to earth by upto 63%.

Terrafill is an easily applied product, which produces lower steady state and stable grounding impedance. Terrafill produces lower surge impedance resulting in faster transient dissipation. Manufactured from environmentally safe and stable products, Terrafill has an excellent shelf life and long term storage has no performance effects.

Terrafill creates a positive, low resistance, electrical connection between the grounding system and the earth. It is manufactured to be compatible with copper grounding system and standard field application methods. It can be used in connection either grounding grids to minimize step and touch potentials. In high resistivity soils, Terrafill can be used to produce acceptable grounding impedance with reasonable size.

The versatility & ease of applying Terrafill to lower ground resistance of grounding equipment allows for a variety of earthing designs to be used which would otherwise not to be economical or practical. Terrafill requires only minimal instruction for application. No special tools are needed.

10.2 Effective:

Should reduce resistance to earth

Should perform in all soil conditions even during dry periods

Should freeze increased resistivity less than 10 percent

It does not depend on the continuous presence of water

10.3 Permanent:

Should not dissolve or decay with time

Requires no Maintenance

Maintains constant resistance for the life of the system

10.4 Environmentally Friendly:

Should not adversely affect soil

Should not contaminate ground water

Should meet all EPA requirements for landfill

Furnished material safety data sheets (MSDS)

All relevant Indian or any other Standard should be furnished

10.5 Resistivity (OHMS-cm)

10.6 Used Terrafill Backfill with Terradyne Electrolytic Grounding systems for 30 years of maintenance free, stable & efficient earthing

The technical specifications of the chemical should satisfy the following conditions:

Hydroscopic

Non-corrosive

Self-settling

Maintenance free

Consistence performance

Should improve soil resistivity around the rod

Should increase the conductivity

Should have proper dissipation Can be used in any soil condition

What does Terrafill consist of ?

“Terrafill C Rod Ground system”

The system consist of two nos. of copper coated rods 5/8” (coating of 250 microns) joints with a coupler to have minimum 3m, 5m, 6m in lengths as per the site requirements

Diameter of rod 15mm

10.7 Installation Method

Appropriate depth of bore depending upon length of electrode Width of bore should be 6” Make a bed of 6” thick with Terrafill compound Insert the rod Pore the dry backfill compound around the rod (let some be remained) Pore 3-4 bakes of water Let it set and after 2 hour pore the remaining compound and little water to set it Connect the strip of earthing to Rod and your Machine

ELECTRIFICATION WORK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sr. Section Description Page No.

No. No.

1.0

I

LT PANELS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 01 - 00

2.0 II ARMOURED CABLES , TRAYS & TRUNKING 00 - 00 3.0 III EARTHING 00 - 00

4.0 IV POINT WIRING 00 - 00 5.0 V LIGHTING FIXTURES 00 – 00 6.0 VI DATA – NETWORKING SYSTEM 00 – 00 7.0 VII INTELLIGENT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 00 – 00 8.0 VIII PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 00 - 00 9.0 IX ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 00 - 00 10.0 X SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM 00 - 00

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS LT INFRASTRUCTURE AND INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION WORK

1.0 The following Technical Specifications are made applicable for the Stated Job and

shall be rigidly adhered to while supplying and installing the materials at site.

1.1 Codes And Standards:

1.1.1 The following Codes and Standards shall be applicable for continuous performance of all electrical equipments to be supplied, delivered at site, erected, tested and commissioned. The Electrical equipments offered shall comply to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications, Fire Insurance Regulations, Tariff Advisory Committee’s Regulations, and in particular to Indian Electricity Rules in all respects with all its latest amendments up-to-date.

1.1.2 For guidelines to the tenderers, few of the Indian Standards are indicated below: IS

116 Circuit Breakers for AC System. IS 159 Busbars and Busbar connections. IS 3043 Code of Practice for earthing. IS 3072 Code of Practice for Installation of Switchgear IS 3106 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance

of Fuse (upto 650 Volts) IS 3202 Climate Proofing of Electrical Equipment IS 3427 Metal enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear. IS 3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits. IS 4047 Heavy Duty Air Break Switches and composite Switch Fuse Units for

voltage not exceeding 100 Volts. IS 4064 Switch Fuse Units for Industries etc. IS 4237 General requirements for Switchgears not exceeding 1000 Volts. IS 4615 Switch Socket Outlets.

IS 5133 (Part-I) Sheet Steel Boxes. IS 5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electric work. IS 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors. IS 5820 Pre-cast concrete cable covers. IS 5908 Method of measurement of electrical installation in building. IS 6381 Specifications for construction and testing of electrical apparatus. IS 1818 Isolator and Earthing Switches. IS 1947 Flood Lights. IS 2147 Degree of Protection provided for enclosure for Switchgear. IS 2208 HRC Cartridge Fuse Units upto 650 Volts.

IS 2251 Code of Practice for Danger Notice Plates IS 2268 Call Bells/Buzzers IS 2274 Code of Practice for wiring installations (exceeding 650 Volts). IS 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purpose. IS 2312 Exhaust fans IS 2309 Code of Practice for Lightning Protection IS 2418 Tubular fluorescent lamps for General Lighting Service. IS 2509 PVC Electrical conduits IS 2516 A.C. Circuit Breakers IS 2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electric wiring.

IS 2675 Enclosed distribution fuse boards cutouts for voltage upto 1000 Volts. IS 2705 Current Transformers IS 3070 (Part-I) Lightning Arrestors IS 2834 L. T. Capacitors. BS 162 Electric Power Switchgear for Indoor and Outdoor Installations. IEC Pub 26 Circuit Breakers. IS 374 Ceiling Fans. IS 375 Marking and arrangement for Switchgear Boards Main connections

and Auxiliary Wiring. IS 415 Tungsten Filament lamps. IS 694 PVC insulated cable and cords for Power/Lighting. IS 722 Three Phase Watt Hour meters with MDI. IS 732 Electrical wiring installation (up to 650 Volts) IS 1087 Single pole tumbler switch 5 Amps. IS 1248 Direct acting Electrical Indicating Instruments. IS 1293 3 Pin Plugs and Socket Outlets. IS 1554 PVC Insulated Cables - Heavy Duty. IS 1567 Metal Clad Switches up to 100 Amps. IS 1651 Lead Acid Cell Batteries. IS 1653 Rigid Steel Conduits for Electric Wiring IS 1771 Industrial Light Fittings with accessories. IS 6946 Pliable (flexible) non-metallic conduits for electrical.

The entire electrical installation work shall be strictly complied with the Codes Standards, Rules and Regulations framed under the Indian Electricity Act. Further, it shall be carried out as per the Regulations and Rules setout by "Tariff Advisory Committee and/or Fire Insurance Regulations".

Any other IS Codes As applicable at the time of execution over and above whatever stated above. Some of the Rules framed under Indian Electricity Rules of 1956 and all amendments thereof more particularly complied to :-

35, 43, 44, 44-A, 45 (Part-I), 50, 51, 59, 61 (a), 61 (c), 62, 63 (2), 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 and

SPECIFICATION FOR SAFETY EQUIPMENT IN LT ROOM

1.0 Scope :-

This Specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supplying at site, testing and commissioning of L.T substation equipments such as LT Panel Boards, Earthing , Cable Trays, in LT Panel Rooms as required to be installed to complete of the sub- station in all respect and to complete the installation in working condition .

2.0 Applicable Standards :-

All relevant Indian Standards shall be made applicable with latest amendments. Also any

other specific application is required, then the same shall be complied to. Safety

provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A) and (C) of CPWD General

Specifications of Electrical Works. In particular following items shall be provided:

3.0 440 Volts grade Warning Boards :-

440 Volts Red Warning Boards of appropriate size shall be fixed at prominent places. These shall have minimum 3 languages inscribed on it, mainly Marathi, Hindi and English and shall be enameled type. The Warning Boards shall also have the usual Electrical shock inscriptions as well as the small mark of danger on it. These shall be fixed in places as per directions and of appropriate voltages.

4.0 FRP Chequered Insulated Mats :-

In the front operational part of the High Voltages and Medium Voltages Panels and Low

Voltage Switchgear and Panels a FRP Checkered Matts shall be placed. Chopped Strand

Mat is made from Fibre Glass Strands of 50mm length, which are evenly dispersed and

bond together with emulsion Binder. The FRP Matting shall be of approved quality of size

not less than 1000mm (wide) x 20mm (thick). The length of the FRP matting shall be such

as to cover the entire working area in front of all the equipments placed in the Main HT

room. These shall further comply to relevant standards under Indian Electricity rules and

Codes of Standards. The mats shall be so designed to withstand 22000 volts for 1 minute

and leakage of current shall not exceed 160 mA/square meter. Insulation mats

conforming to IS 15652: 2006 shall be provided in front of main switch boards,

Distribution Boards, Floor Distribution Boards and all other control equipment’s as

specified

5.0 Fire buckets, extinguishers and charts :-

Fire buckets, Fire extinguishers and charts shall be supplied as per the list given below. The fire buckets shall be made up of galvanized Iron Sheets of approved thickness and painted Red with letters of 'FIRE' written on it. 5 such buckets shall form one set and they shall be hung by means of hook arrangement from a stand prepared out of Round steel bars with supporting frame. This frame work shall also be painted 'RED'. The fire buckets shall be

filled with clean, dry and peddle free sand ready for immediate use for extinguishing fires.

There shall be two such sets kept ready one in the switchyard under a proper weather protection shed and the other inside the HV/LV Room. The number of Fire extinguishers shall be as per the inspectorate. These shall be ABC type and shall be tested at least once in six months on the site, after erection. This shall be as per relevant Indian Standards of minimum 5.0 Kgs. Instructions charts of restoration of persons suffering from Electric shocks in English, Hindi and Marathi shall be displayed in an enclosed wooden/glass frame work, one in the LV Room and the other in the H.V. Room.

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

9.1 SCOPE

This section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the sub-station for

compliance with statutory regulations, safety and operational needs.

9.2 REQUIREMENTS

(a) Insulation Mats

(b) First Aid Charts and First Aid Box

Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional language), displaying methods of

giving artificial respiration to a recipient of electrical shock shall be prominently provided

at appropriate place. Standard first aid boxes containing materials as prescribed by St.

John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in each sub-station.

(c) Danger Plate

Danger Plates shall be provided on HV and MV equipment’s. MV danger notice plate shall

be 200 mm x 150 mm made of mild steel at least 2 mm thick vitreous enameled white

on both sides and with the descriptions in signal red colour on front side as required.

Notice plates of other suitable materials such as stainless steel, brass or such other

permanent nature material shall also be accepted with the description engraved in signal

red colour.

(d) Fire Extinguishers

Portable Conforming to IS 2878 /1976 Chemical confirming to 2171 :1976 extinguishers,

HCFC Blend A (P-IV) shall be installed in the sub-station at suitable places. Other

extinguishers recommended for electric fires may also be used.

(e) Fire Buckets

Fire buckets conforming to IS 2546: 1974 shall be installed with the suitable stand for

storage of water and sand.

(f) Tool Box

A Standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and

maintenance shall be provided in the sub-station.

(g) Caution Board

Necessary number of caution boards such as “Man on Line” ‘Don’t Switch on’

etc. shall be available in the sub-station.

(h) Key Board

A keyboard of required size shall be provided at a proper place containing castle

keys, and all other keys of sub-station and allied areas.

CHAPTER - I

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 415 VOLTS, MAIN LT PANEL AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1.1 General Specification of Equipment :-

1.2 The scope of work comprises of Designing, Obtaining Approval of the Owner / Consultants and Fabricating as per approved Drawings, Testing at Works, Packing and Forwarding, Supplying, Storing at Site, Checking at site, Touching Up all Damaged portions, Erection and testing and commissioning at site. Further Touching up of damaged powder coated painting shall be carried at site after the installation of all panels is completed by the contractor.

1.3 The Main Power Control Centre, distribution boards shall be metal clad, totally enclosed,

rigid, floor mounting, air-insulated, cubicle type for use on 415 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles system.

1.4 The equipment shall be designed for operation in high ambient temperature and high humidity tropical atmospheric conditions. Means shall be provided to facilitate ease of inspection, cleaning and repairs in the installations where continuity of operation is of prime importance.

1.5 Standards :-

The equipment shall be designed to conform to the following requirements and to the latest amendments in the codes or relevant BS applicable standards :-

IS-13947 Marking and arrangement for switchgear bus bars, main connection and auxiliary wiring.

IS-722 Part-I AC Electricity Meters & Part - I General requirements and tests

IS-1248 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories

IS-1822 AC Motor starters, of voltage not exceeding 1000 volts

IS-2147 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage

switchgear and control gear

IS-2419 Dimensions for panel mounting indicating and recording electrical instruments

IS-2516 Circuit Breakers - Requirements and Test voltages not exceeding 1000V

AC or 1200V DC

IS-2607 Air break isolators for voltages not exceeding 1000 volts

IS-2705 Part-I Current Transformer - General Requirements

IS-2705 Part-II Current Transformer - Measuring Current Transformers

IS 8623 - Factory Built Assemblies of switchgear and control gear.

IS 4237 - General requirements for switchgears and control gear for voltages not exceeding 1000 Volts.

IS 2147 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control-gear.

IS 375 - Marking and arrangement of bus bars.

IEC 647-2 and IS 13947-2 Air Circuit Breakers

IEC 60947-2 and IS 13947-2. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers

IS. 2208:1962 or IS.9224:1979 - HRC Fuse-links

IS.3156 - Voltage Transformers

IS.3231.- Relays

IS 6875. Control Switches & Push Buttons -

IS.2959 - AC Contractors

7.0 Scope

This covers supply/ erection/ testing and commissioning of the equipments suitable for

415 Volt, 3 Phase, 50 HZ 4 wire system.

7.1 Requirements

(i) For each equipment, required IP rating and short circuit rating capacity will be

specified. Governing BIS also will be specified.

(ii) All the equipments will be factory fabricated in an approved factory having modern

fabrication and testing process. It shall have seven tank pre-treatment process

comprising of degreasing, rinsing, de-rusting, rinsing, phosphatising, rinsing and

passivation followed by powder coat painting having a paint thickness of 60 microns or

as specified. The powder paint will be subjected to oven-heated process. All panels will

be provided with suitable gasket to make it dust/ vermin proof.

7.1.1 Specification of LT Cubicle Panel

(i) Cubicle panel shall be floor mounted (on a base frame) totally enclosed and extensible

type. The general construction shall conform to IS 8623 : 93. The design shall include

all provisions for safety of operating and maintenance personnel. Degree of IP

protection shall be IP-42 for indoor application and IP-54 for outdoors, unless

otherwise specified.

(ii) The panel shall be compartmentalized type having space and arrangement for

incoming cable/ bus ducting, incoming switchgear/ switchgears, bus coupler, insulated

and properly supported compartmentalized bus bars, outgoing compartmentalized

switchgear, bus bar supports, joint shrouds, cable alleys of suitable size for cabling

routing, support and terminations, inter-connection between bus bars and switchgear

with auxiliary bus bars/ insulated conductors/ strips etc. Also the panel will be

provided with necessary instrumentation like CTs, PTs, Ammeters, Voltmeters, phase

indicating lamps, other required instruments, wiring, fuses etc.

(iii) It shall be fabricated out of CRCA sheet not less than 2.0 mm thick for load bearing

members and 1.6 mm for doors of LT panels. The framework may be Angle Iron/

Channel/ Bolted type construction. General constructions shall employ the principle

of compartmentalization and segregation of each circuit. Unless otherwise approved,

incomer and bus section panels shall be separate and independent and shall not be

mixed with sections required for feeders. Each section of the rear accessible type

board shall have hinged access door at the rear. Operating handle of the highest unit

shall be at a height not more than 1.7 mt. Overall height of the board shall not exceed

2.3 metre.

(iv) Arrangement for Incoming/Outgoing Cable Termination

Cable entries shall be provided either from the rear or from the front through cable

alleys of suitable size. Removable gland plate to be provided for each cable entry.

Cable support arrangement to be provided inside cable alley so that cables are neatly

arranged and fixed. From each outgoing switch, insulated strip/ conductor of suitable

size to be provided up to suitable terminal block, which will receive incoming/

outgoing cable termination. It is desirable that cables are not terminated directly to

switchgear, but terminated through proper terminal blocks.

(v) Specification of Cable Terminal Block

Terminal block of reputed make shall be used. The housing material shall be

polyamide having unbreakable and fire-retardant characteristic. All the metal parts

shall be made up of copper alloy including the screws. Mounting shall be ‘Din’ or ‘G-

rail’ type. Screws shall be self captive type. No protection cover is required, and the

block should be touch proof.

(vi) Bus bars/ Supports/ Clearances

The bus bar system may comprise of a system of main/ auxiliary bus bars run in bus

bar alleys.

For bus bar material, ratings, current density, insulation, supports, bus bar clearances and joints see para 7.2 (iii).

(vii) Earthing

2 Nos. 20 x 3 mm copper strip for LT panel upto 400 Amp. capacity or 2 Nos. 20 x 5

mm copper strip for LT panel of higher capacity shall be fixed all around the panel

connected to 2 Nos. earth bus copper strips connected to incoming earth conductors.

(Typical Cubicle Panel is explained in Fig. 8)

(viii) Commissioning

After erection, the LT panel will be commissioned after:

(a) Tightening of all nuts and bolts.

(b) Closing any left out holes to ensure the entire panel is insect proof.

(c) Megger testing.

(d) Earth testing.

7.1.2 Specification of DB

As a general practice only prewired MCB/HRC type DBs shall be used, on account

of their superior technical features, compared to conventional DBs, which don’t

allow for proper wiring space and wiring termination. Rewirable fuse type DBs shall

not be used.

DBs shall have following features:

(i) Recess/ Surface type with integral loose wire box.

(ii) Phase/ neutral/ earth terminal blocks for termination of incoming & outgoing wires.

(iii) Din Channel for mounting MCBs.

(iv) Arrangement for mounting incomer MCB/ RCCB/ RCBO/ MCCB as required.

(v) Copper Bus bar.

(vi) Earthing terminals.

(vii) Wiring from MCBs to phase terminal block.

(viii) Interconnection between terminal block/ incoming switch/ bus bar/ neutral terminal

block/ earth terminal connector with specified size of FRLS preinsulated copper

conductor cable duly fitted with copper lugs/ thimbles.

(ix) Terminal blocks should be suitable for termination of conductor/ cable of required

size but minimum rated cross section of the terminal blocks should be 6 sq. mm.

(x) Terminal block shall be made of flame retardant polymide material.

(xi) Colour terminal blocks and FRLS wires for easy identification of RYB Phases, Neutral

and Earth.

(xii) Prewired DB shall be provided with a detachable cassette for safe removal of MCBs,

RCCBs. Terminal connectors from the DB without loosening the internal cable

connections of phase and neutral circuits. (This is an optional feature.)

(xiii) The prewired DB shall have peelable poly layer on the cover for protection from cement, plaster, paints etc. during the construction period.

(xiv) Detachable plate with Knock out holes shall be provided at the top/ bottom of board.

Complete board shall be factory fabricated and pre-wired in factory ready for

installation at site. The box and cover shall be fabricated from 1.6mm sheet steel,

properly pre-treated, phosphatized with powder coated finish.

Where specified it shall be of double door construction provided with hinged cover

in the front.

Note: DB will be factory manufactured by reputed manufacturer of MCB DBs.

CHAPTER - II SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUPPLY OF ALUMINIUM /COPPER L.T. XLPE ARMOURED CABLES

1.0 Codes and Standards :

1.1 The design, manufacture, testing and supply of the cables under this specification shall comply with the latest revisions including amendments of the following standards.

IS : 7098-I - XLPE insulated heavy duty cables for working voltages upto 1100 Volts.

IS : 3961-II - Recommended current ratings for cables.

IS : 8130 - Conductors for insulated cables.

IS : 5831 - XLPE Insulation and outer sheath of electric cables.

IS : 7098-I - Test Procedures for cables.

IS : 10418 - Specification for drums for electric cables

IS : 3975 - Mild steel wire, strips, and tapes for armouring of cables.

2.0 Technical Requirements :

2.1 All XLPE Aluminium/Copper Power cables shall be 1100 Volts grade, multi core constructed as per IS : 7098 Part-I of 1988 as follows :

a) Stranded Copper conductor in case of 16 sq.mm. and above and solid conductor in case of 6 sq.mm. and below.

b) All Aluminium/Copper XLPE cables insulation shall be of high grade Cross- linked Polyethylene from insulation for extrusion process.

c) Cores laid up

d) The inner sheath should be bonded over with thermo-plastic material for protection against mechanical and electrical damage.

e) Armoring should be provided over the inner sheath to guard against mechanical

damage. Armouring should be Galvanised steel wires or galvanised steel strips. (In single core cables used in A.C. system armouring should be non-magnetic hard aluminium Wires/Strips. Round steel wires should be used where diameter over the inner sheath does not exceed 13 mm; above 13 mm flat steel armour should be used. Round wire of different sizes should be provided against specific request.)

f) The outer sheath should be specially formulated heat resistant black PVC compound conforming to the requirement of type ST2 of IS : 5831-1984 extruded to form the outer sheath.

2.2 Conductor shall be of electrolytic Aluminum /Copper conforming to IS : 8130 and

are compact circular or compact shaped.

2.3 Insulation shall be of XLPE type as per latest IS general purpose insulation for maximum rated conductor temperature 70 degree centigrade.

2.4 In Inner sheath laid up cores shall be bonded over with thermoplastic material for protection against mechanical and electrical damage.

2.5 Insulation, inner sheath and outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion and lapping up process only.

2.6 Armouring shall be of galvanised steel wire/flat.

2.7 Repaired cables shall not be used.

2.8 Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS : 3961.

2.9.1 The XLPE insulated cables shall conform to latest revision IS read along with this specifications. The Conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper circular/ sector shaped and compacted. In multi core cables the core shall be identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloring of insulation.

2.9.2 The XLPE insulated 1100 Volts grade power cables shall conform to latest IS and shall be suitable for a steady conductor temperature of 70 degree centigrade. The conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper as called for in the Schedule of quantities. The outer sheath shall be as per the requirement of type ST-2 of IS:5831 of 1984.

2.10.1 The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and

underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water.

2.10.2 Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of the length of cables in meters at every one meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables.

2.10.3 Cables shall be supplied in non returnable wooden drums as per IS : 10418. Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate ingress of water during transportation, storage and erection.

2.10.4 The Cables while laying in shaft other than on trays shall be supported using

perforated Z section clamps of suitable gauge. The cables will be clamped properly or boned to the perforated section using Nylon chords.

3.0 Tests and Test Reports :

Cables shall be subjected to type tests, acceptance tests and routine tests as per 7098 Part - I . The Owner reserves the right to witness any or all the tests for which

at least 20 days advance notice shall be given by the contractor. Six (6) copies of all test reports shall be submitted for approval by owner before despatch of the materials from works.

4.0 Drawings and Data :

The Contractor shall furnish technical particulars of cables, type, make and catalogue for the approval by Owner.

5.0 The product should be coded as per IS :- 7098 Part-I and the codes should be as follows

:-

Aluminium Conductor A XLPE Insulation 2X Steel round wire armour W Steel strip armour F Steel Double round wire armour WW Steel Double strip armour FF Non-magnetic (Al.) round wire armour Wa Non-magnetic (Al.) strip armour Fa PVC outer sheath Y

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE TRAYS

1.0 Perforated Cable Trays of ladder type and associated accessories tees, bends, elbows and reducers shall be fabricated from 12 gauge (2.5 mm) mild steel. Prefabricated Cable trays of perforated type and associated accessories tees, elbows and reducers shall be fabricated from 14 gauge (2 mm ) White CRCA Sheets. Cable trays shall be made of corrosion resistant material or if made of material shall be adequately protected against the corrosion.

2.0 Cable trays accessories shall be painted with One Shop coat of Red oxide zinc chromate primer and two side coats of Aluminum alkyd paint.

3.0 Cable trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs or projections that may damage the

insulation jackets of the wiring.

4.0 Cable trays shall not have side rails or equivalent structural members cable trays shall include fittings or other suitable means for change in direction and elevation of runs.

CABLE TRAY MOUNTING

Unless otherwise specifically noted on the relevant layout drawing, all cable tray mounting works to be carried out the following :

a) Cable tray mounting arrangement type to be as marked on layout drawing.

b) Assembly of tray mounting structures shall be supplied fabricated, erected & painted by the electrical contractor.

c) Tray Mounting structures shall be welded to plate inserts or to structural beams as approved by the Project Manager.

d) Wherever embedded plates & structural beams are not available for welding the tray

mounting structure electrical contractor to supply the MS plate & fix them to floor slab by four anchor fasteners of minimum 16 mm dia having minimum holding power of 5000 Kg, at no extra cost.

e) Maximum loading on a horizontal support arm to be 120 Kg/metre of cable run.

f) Width of the horizontal arms of the tray supporting structures to be same as the tray widths specified in tray layout drawings, plus length required, for welding to the vertical supports.

g) The length of vertical supporting members for horizontal tray runs will be to suit the

number of tray tiers shown in tray layout drawings.

h) Spacing between horizontal support arms of vertical tray runs to be 300 mm.

i) Cable trays will be welded to their mounting supports. j) Minimum clearance between the top most tray tier and structural member to be

300 mm.

k) Cable in vertical race ways to be clamped by saddle type clamps to the horizontal slotted angles. Clamps to be fabricated from 3 mm. thick aluminium strip at site by the electrical contractor to suit cable groups.

l) The structural steel (standard quality) shall be according to latest revision of IS : 226

& 808. Welding shall be as per latest revision of IS : 816. All structural steel to be painted with one shop coat of red oxide and oil primer followed by a finishing coat of aluminium alkyd paint where any cuts or holes are made on finished steelwork these shall be sealed against oxidation by red oxide followed by the same finishing paint. Steel sheet covers wherever indicated to be similarly painted.

TECHNICAL SPECFICATIONS FOR UNDER FLOOR TRUNKING AND CABLE WAYS ALONG WITH JUNCTION BOXES AND INSPECTION OUTLETS.

1.0 Scope of Work :

The scope of this section comprises the supply, delivery, erection, testing and commissioning of Under floor Trunking along with Floor Outlet Boxes for Power wiring, Data Networking and Tele Networking of the installation.

1.1 a Applicable Standards :

The relevant sections of Indian Standard Specifications as more particularly stated herein and broadly to all the codes, statues and regulations as applicable shall be strictly enforced and adhered to. More particularly following codes should be strictly followed.

IS 732 : Wiring Practice. IS 1653 : Metallic Conduits.

IEC- 61084-2-2 : Under floor Trunking and Junction Boxes.

1.2 Trunking : 1.2.1 The under floor GI trunking along with its cover to be fabricated using pre galvanized

sheet steel conforming to EN 10142 and 3.

1.2.2 The GI trunking to be manufactured in 14 Gauge hot dipped galvanized sheet steel.

1.2.3 The GI trunking should have the following sections :

a. 50X38 mm

b. 75X38mm

c. 100X38mm 1.2.4 Floor Outlet Boxes junction box should be fabricated using 14 Gauge Pre galvanized hot

dipped Sheet steel. The floor outlet boxes should have adequate space to have trunk entry on all four sides.

1.2.5 They should be available in the following sizes.

150 x 150 x 65 mm ; 300 x 300 x 65 mm , 400mm x 400X65 mm Generally the covers could be of Stainless steel having 10 Gauge, screwed to the junction boxes. Covers are available in the following sizes: 150 x 150mm ; 300 x 300 mm , 450mmX 450mm, 600 mm X600mm

CHAPTER - III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHING

8.0 Scope

This chapter covers the essential requirements of earthing system components and

their installation. This shall be read with Appendix F, which lays down criteria for their

design. For details not covered in these specifications IS code of Practice on Earthing

(IS 3043 : 1987) shall be referred to.

8.1 Application

(i) The electrical distribution system in the Department is with earthed neutral (i.e.

neutral earthed at the transformer / generator end). In addition to the neutral

earthing, provision is made for earthing the metallic body of equipment’s and non-

current carrying metallic components in the sub-station, as well as in the internal/

external electrical installations.

(ii) Earthing system is also required for lightning protection, computer installations and hospital operation theaters, etc. for functional reasons.

(iii) Earthing requirements are laid down in Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, as amended

from time to time, and in the Regulations of the Electricity Supply Authority

concerned. These shall be complied with.

(iv) Application for Internal E.I.

(a) Every sub-main will have earth continuity conductor to run along with sub-main

wiring. In case of 3-phase sub-main wiring two earth continuity conductors shall be

provided.

(b) Every circuit will have its earth continuity conductor to run alongwith circuit wiring. In case of 3-phase circuit two earth continuity conductors shall be provided.

(c) Looping of earth is allowed only in case of point wiring.

(d) When 2/3 power outlets are looped to one circuit, earth looping of these outlets is

permissible.

291

8.2 Types of Electrodes & Material

8.2.1 Earth Electrodes

8.2.1.1 Types

The type of earth electrode shall be any of the following, as specified. (For selection

criteria in designs, Appendix F may be referred to).

(a) Pipe earth electrode.

(b) Plate earth electrode.

(c) Strip or conductor earth electrode.

8.2.1.2 Electrode Materials and Dimensions

(i) The materials and minimum sizes of earth electrodes shall be as per Table IX

(revised).

(ii) GI pipe electrodes shall be cut tapered at the bottom, and provided with holes of 12

mm dia, drilled not less than 7.5 cm from each other upto 2 m of length from the

bottom.

(iii) The length of the buried strip or conductor earth electrode shall be not less than

15 m. This length shall suitably be increased if necessary, on the basis of the

information available about soil resistance, so that the required earth resistance is

obtained. Prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge shall be taken for any such

increase in length.

(iv) All hardware items used for connecting the earthing conductor with the electrode

shall be of GI in the case of GI pipe and GI plate earth electrodes, and forged

tinned brass in case of copper plate electrodes.

8.2.2. Earthing Conductor & Sizes

(i) The earthing conductor (protective conductor from earth electrode up to the main earthing terminal/earth bus, as the case may be) shall be of the same material as

the electrode, viz. GI or copper, and in the form of wire or strip as specified.

(a) The size of earthing conductor shall be specified, but this shall not be less than the

following (For calculating the size of the earthing conductor in design, Appendix F

para 3.5.1).

(b) 4 mm dia. (8 SWG) copper wire,

(c) 25 mm x 4 mm in the case of GI strip, or

(d) 20 mm x 3 mm in the case of copper strip.

292

(ii) Earthing conductor larger than the following sectional areas need not be used, unless

otherwise specified.

(a) 150 sq.mm. in case of GI, or

8.2.3 100 sq.mm. in case of copper.

8.2.4 Earth Continuity / Loop Earthing Conductor & Sizes

(i) The material and size of protective conductors shall be as specified below (for

criteria in design of these Appendix F may be referred to):

Size of phase

conductor

Size of protective conductor of the same

material as phase conductor

Upto 4 sq.mm.

Above 4 sq.mm. up to 16 sq.mm.

Above 16 sq.mm. up to 35 sq.mm.

Above 35 sq.mm.

Same size as that of phase conductor

Same size as that of phase conductor

16 sq.mm.

Half of the phase conductor

8.3 Location for Earth Electrodes

(i) Normally an earth electrode shall not be located closer than 1.5 m from any building.

Care shall be taken to see that the excavation for earth electrode does not affect

the foundation of the building; in such cases, electrodes may be located further

away from the building, with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

(ii) The location of the earth electrode will be such that the soil has a reasonable chance

of remaining moist as far as possible. Entrances, pavements and roadways, should

be avoided for locating earth electrodes.

8.4 Installation

8.4.1 Electrodes

8.4.1.1 Various Types of Electrodes

(i) (a) Pipe electrode shall be buried in the ground vertically with its top at not less than

20 cm below the ground level. The installation shall be carried out as shown in Fig.

11 (revised).

(b) In locations where the full length of pipe electrode is not possible to be installed

due to meeting a water table, hard soil or rock, the electrode may be of reduced

293

length, provided the required earth resistance result is achieved with or without

additional electrodes, or any alternative method of earthing may be adopted, with

the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Pipe electrodes may also be installed

in horizontal formation in such exceptional cases.

(ii) Plate electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical, and its top not less

than 3.0 m below the ground level. The installation shall be carried out as shown in Fig. 12 (revised).

(iii) When more than one electrode (plate/pipe) is to be installed, a separation of not

less than 2 m shall be maintained between two adjacent electrodes.

(a) The strip or conductor electrode shall be buried in trench not less than 0.5 m deep.

(b) If conditions necessitate the use of more than one strip or conductor electrode,

they shall be laid as widely distributed as possible, in a single straight trench where

feasible, or preferably in a number of trenches radiating from one point.

(c) If the electrode cannot be laid in a straight length, it may be laid in a zigzag manner

with a deviation upto 45 degrees from the axis of the strip. It can also be laid in

the form of an arc with curvature more than 1 m or a polygon.

8.4.1.2 Artificial Treatment of Soil

When artificial treatment of soil is to be resorted to, the same shall be specified in

the schedule of work. The electrode shall be surrounded by charcoal / coke and

salt as indicated in Fig. 11 and 12. In such cases, excavation for earth electrode

shall be increased as per the dimensions indicated in these figures.

8.4.1.3 Watering Arrangement

(i) In the case of plate earth electrodes, a watering pipe 20 mm dia. Medium class

pipe shall be provided and attached to the electrodes as shown in Fig. 11 and

12. Afunnel with mesh shall be provided on the top of this pipe for watering the

earth.

(ii) In the case of pipe electrodes, a 40 mm x 20 mm reducer shall be used for fixing

the funnel with mesh.

(iii) The watering funnel attachment shall be housed in a masonry enclosure of size

not less than 30 cm x 30 cm x 30 cm.

(iv) A cast iron / MS frame with MS cover, 6 mm thick, and having locking

arrangement shall be suitably embedded in the masonry enclosure.

8.4.2 Earthing Conductor (Main Earthing Lead)

(i) In the case of plate earth electrode, the earthing conductor shall be securely

294

terminated on to the plate with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers.

(ii) In the case of pipe earth electrode, wire type earthing conductor shall be secured

as indicated in Fig. 11 using a through bolt, nuts and washers and terminating

socket.

(iii) A double C-clamp arrangement shall be provided for terminating tape type

earthing conductor with GI watering pipe coupled to the pipe earth electrode.

Galvanized “C” shaped strips, bolts, washers, nuts and check nuts of adequate

size shall be used for the purpose.

(iv) The earthing conductor from the electrode up to the building shall be protected

from mechanical injury by a medium class, 15 mm dia. GI pipe in the case of wire,

and by 40 mm dia, medium class GI pipe in the case of strip. The protection pipe

in ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep (to be increased to 60 cm in case of

road crossing and pavements). The portion within the building shall be recessed

in walls and floors to adequate depth in due co-ordination with the building work.

(v) The earthing conductor shall be securely connected at the other end to the

earth stud/earth bar provided on the switch board by:

(a) Soldered or preferably crimped lug, bolt, nut and washer in the case of wire,

and

(b) Bolt, nut and washer in case of strip conductor.

In the case of sub-stations or alternators, the termination shall be made on the

earthing terminal of the neutral point on the equipment and/or the earth bus,

as the case may be.

8.4.3 Loop Earthing/ Earth Continuity Conductor

(i) Earth terminal of every switchboard in the distribution system shall be bonded to

the earth bar/ terminal of the upstream switch board by protective conductor(s).

(ii) Two protective conductors shall be provided for a switchboard carrying a 3- phase

switchgear thereon.

(iii) Loop earthing of individual units will not be however necessary in the case of

cubicle type switchboards.

(iv) The earth connector in every distribution board (DB) shall be securely connected

to the earth stud/ earth bar of the corresponding switch board by a protective

conductor.

(v) The earth pin of socket outlets as well as metallic body of fan regulators shall be

295

connected to the earth stud in switch boxes by protective conductor. Where the

switch boxes are of non-metallic type, these shall be looped at the socket earth

terminals, or at an independent screwed connector inside the switch box.

Twisted earth connections shall not be accepted in any case.

8.5 Earth Resistance

(i) The earth resistance at each electrode shall be measured. No earth electrode

shall have a greater ohmic resistance than 5 ohms as measured by an approved

earth testing apparatus. In rocky soil the resistance may be up to 8 ohms.

(ii) Where the above stated earth resistance is not achieved, necessary improvement

shall be made by additional provisions, such as additional electrode(s), different

type of electrode, or artificial chemical treatment of soil etc., as may be directed

by the Engineer-in-charge.

8.6 Marking

(i) Earth bars/terminals at all switch boards shall be marked permanently, either as

“E” or as

(ii) Main earthing terminal shall be marked“SAFETYEARTH–DONOT DISCONNECT”

8.7 Use of Residual Current Devices (RCDs)

An extract on selection and application of RCDs (also known as RCCBs) from IS

12640: 1988 is given at Appendix G. Provision of RCD shall be specified in

individual cases keeping in view the type, use, importance, system of earthing

and nature of electrical installations to be protected by the RCCBs, requirements

of the local electric supply company, etc. The sensitivity shall be 30 mA, 100 mA,

300 mA, or 500 mA, as specified.

TABLE IX (Revised)

Materials and Sizes of Earth Electrodes

[Clause 8.2.1.2(i)]

Type of Electrodes Material Size

Pipe GI medium class 40 mm dia, 4.50 m long (without any joint)

296

Plate (i) GI

(ii) Copper

60 cm x 60 cm x 6 mm thick

60 cm x 60 cm x 3 mm thick

Strip (i) GI

(ii) Copper

100 sq. mm section

40 sq. mm section

Conductor (i) Copper 4 mm dia (8 SWG)

Note : Galvanisation of GI items shall conform to Class IV of IS 4736 : 1986.

CHAPTER - IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR POINT WIRING USING PVC/GI CONDUITS

1.0 Scope of Work :

The scope of this section comprises of supply, delivery, store at site, prepare the conduit assembly, fix and erect in proper position, rigid PVC conduits of minimum 2.0 mm wall thickness and as per IS 2509 of 1973. Concealed work check before casting of slab, measure and tie the assembly to reinforcements, complete with providing GI pull wires.

1.1 Applicable Standards :

The relevant sections of Indian Standard Specifications as more particularly stated herein and broadly to all the codes, statues and regulations as applicable shall be strictly enforced and adhered to. More particularly following codes should be strictly followed.

IS 2509 of 1973 : Rigid non metallic conduits for Electrical work. IS 732 : Wiring Practice. IS 3043 : Code of Practice of Earthing. IS 3202 : Climate proofing of Electrical Work.

2.0 Rigid PVC Conduit Work :

2.1 Material :

2.1.1 The minimum wall thickness of Rigid PVC Conduits permitted for concealed conduiting shall be 2.0 mm thick.

2.1.2 The tubing must be perfectly circular, without any burrs or kinks.

297

2.1.3 The Conduits shall be of such type, so as to be capable of making tight fitting joints.

2.1.4 The minimum size of Rigid PVC Conduits allowed in concealed work shall be of

20 mm and above.

2.2 Conduit Accessories :

2.2.1 All conduit accessories that are to be used in concealed work shall be of Rigid PVC type conforming to latest and relevant IS codes.

2.2.2 Conduit Accessories shall be capable of clean and tight fittings.

2.2.3 All junction boxes of one way or above shall be of high dome type with a depth of minimum 65 mm and minimum 2 mm wall thickness.

2.2.4 In concealed work, inspection types of bends are not allowed, normal bends/elbows may be permitted after specific approval.

2.3 Conduit Assembly Work :

2.3.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Consultant detail layout plan of conduit network containing particulars regarding size and routes of conduits, number of wires carrying in each conduit, inspection and junction boxes provided along with the routes of the conduits. The number of wires in each conduit shall not exceed as specified in the table of conduit capacity. All the conduits are supported using minimum 16 gauge M.S. Spacers and G.I Saddles fabricated using 16 gauge sheets and fixed using GI Screws.

2.3.2 Initially all drawings for concealed conduit work shall be inspected. Any

discrepancies or otherwise occurring due to site conditions or change in internal layouts or in walls shall be reported. After rectification of the same, then the measurements and marking shall be done for the conduit assembly, on the shuttering of the slab.

2.3.3 All conduits shall be assembled. Wherever straight runs exceeds 3 mts., additional pull boxes or junction boxes shall be provided. However, the entire assembly shall be so assembled in order to facilitate renewal of wires etc. in the future.

2.3.4 Wherever fluorescent light fixtures are shown in the layout, the conduit shall be

terminated in a high dome junction box at the centre of the fixture, unless otherwise specified or indicated in drawings.

298

2.3.5 In the concealed conduit work, all junction boxes, bends, elbows shall have PVC tapes on either side to ensure security of the accessories in its place. They shall also be PVC taped at all joints in order to prevent cement, water or slurry entering the Rigid PVC conduit assembly.

2.3.6 All precautions should be taken in concealed work, to ensure no entry of cement slurry or blocking of conduits due to concreting.

2.3.7 For all circuit wiring, i.e. from Lighting Distribution Boards to Individual

Switchboards, minimum 25 mm Rigid PVC conduits and minimum 2.0 mm wall thickness conduits shall be used.

2.3.8 All PVC conduits drops that are to be taken for the purpose of joining the Distribution Board or Switch Boards shall be taken out of the shuttering with a clean hole. Sand then shall be provided at the bottom most part of the entry in the shuttering. The projected part of the PVC conduit shall have a coupling over the same.

2.3.9 The entire PVC conduit assembly shall be properly secured and bonded by means of steel wires, twisted and fixed to the reinforcements. Additional fixing shall be done near joints, junction boxes, pull boxes etc.

2.3.10 The entire Rigid PVC conduit assembly then shall be checked for rigidity and no

movement shall be allowed in the assembly.

2.3.11 The entire Rigid PVC conduit assembly shall be provided with proper GI pull wires of minimum 14 gauge.

2.3.12 Adequate number of PVC, pull boxes of suitable sizes shall be provided in the PVC conduit assembly.

2.3.13 It shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor to supervise the concealed conduit assembly work during the casting of the slabs. Adequate precautions should be taken to spread fine sand covering the opening of the PVC conduit boxes or junction boxes at the bottom of the slab.

2.3.14 Where the conduit passes through the flooring the same shall be passed through

galvanised pipe of suitable size fixed in the flooring, so that conduits, cables or wires can be renewed at any time without breaking the floor.

2.3.15 Where the conduit runs in brick walls same should be necessarily fixed by using

MS clamps. In the straight run the distance between the two clamps shall not exceed 500 mm and additional clamps should be provided near bend and junction box.

299

2.3.16 The entire jointing in PVC conduit assembly shall be done using PVC solvent cement only. Wherever the conduits are terminated in PVC switchboard boxes or PVC, socket outlets boxes, the use of collars, male female type of adaptors shall be only used.

2.4 Conduit Capacity :

The maximum capacity of a conduit for drawing in Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires shall be in accordance with IS 732 of 1963. The minimum size of conduit to be used shall not be less than 20 mm (approx.) and not more than two circuits connected to same phase be bunched in one conduit. Two different phases are not allowed in one conduit.

Commonly used sizes of 650/1100 Volts Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires and conduit capacities are as tabulated below :-

Size of Voltage Capacity of the Conduit Wire Grade 20 mm 25 mm

1.5 sq.mm. 650/1100 5 Nos. 8 Nos. 2.5 sq.mm. 650/1100 5 Nos. 6 Nos. 4.0 sq.mm. 650/1100 3 Nos. 5 Nos. 6.0 sq.mm. 650/1100 2 Nos. 3 Nos. 10.0 sq.mm. 650/1100 ...... 3 Nos.

2.5 Point Wiring :

The wiring shall be of the looping in system as different from the tree system. Connectors should not be used without specific prior approval. Looping in on the phase side shall be at the switches and that on the neutral side at the ceiling roses. Every light point, fan point and plug point shall have individual control switch unless stated otherwise. Earthing shall be provided for all the points according to the statutory requirement wherever necessary. The number of points per circuit shall not exceed 8 in any case.

2.6 a) The point wiring in conduit consists of wiring from the branch distribution

board in conduit with its ancillary work, such as inspection bends, junction boxes and FRLS wires upto the fixed terminals of ceiling roses, connectors, batten holders, etc. depending upon the type of point.

300

b) For easy identification, wires with different colours shall be used for phase and neutral as far as practicable. All the wires used should be of Lapp make only.

c) The control switches for lights, fans, wall sockets and fan regulators shall suitably be grouped on sheet steel cases of all welded design fabricated out of 1.2 mm (approx.). Generally, the bakelite sheet shall be 3 mm thick where SP Piano type flush mounting switches are to be accommodated and in all other cases it shall be 5 mm thick. The bakelite sheet cover shall be fitted above the sheet steel case and shall be levelled on the outer edges. Control accessories for one circuit only shall be grouped on a sheet steel case. Not more than 2 ceiling fan regulators shall be mounted on a sheet steel case. Suitable earthing terminal shall be provided on the sheet steel case. All the conduits entering and leaving D.B. shall be bonded together with 4 sq.mm bare aluminium/copper wire and earth clips (as mentioned in the schedule.).

d) Point Wiring by using Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) Wires :-

This shall be similar to point wiring in conduit system. The fixing of cables shall, however, be according to the specifications.

e) All the Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires shall have a grade 650/1100 Volts for lighting and power wiring.

2.7 Mains and Sub-Mains Wiring :

This shall include the cost of all Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires of Lapp make, conduit, conduit accessories, clamps spacers, Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires on battens depending upon the type of wiring, all masonry work, such as cutting, neat finishing of walls, floor openings etc. Only approximate lengths are included in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates, but the actual lengths of the mains and sub-mains executed will be measured between terminating points and will be paid for. Where the mains and sub- mains pass through the flooring, or through the wall, the same shall pass as specified in 3(b) above. Mains and Sub-Mains risers in conduit shall be bonded together with 4.0 sq.mm. bare aluminium/copper as specifically mentioned in Schedule and earth clips on each floor landing/mid-landing. The Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires are provided as mains and sub-mains, the same shall be fixed as per specifications.

301

3.0 Switches, Sockets & Ceiling Roses :

3.1 Ceiling Roses :

These shall be of bakelite and of approved make and colour and shall not contain fuse terminals. These shall be provided with brass ceiling plate and M. T. Brass screws and washers with cord grip for termination of wires.

4.0 Plate type, moulded design - switches on white Urea Power pressed cover

plates :

These shall be of single pole, double pole, two ways, one ways or otherwise as called for in the Schedule. These shall be manufactured as per relevant IS Codes and shall amply to Indian Electricity Rules. The minimum rating shall be 5 Amp at 250 V AC.

5. 0 Flat switches

Switches shall be flat switches with LED indicator

5.0 Socket Outlets With Plugs :

These shall be with porcelain base, in 2 Pin and earth design of best quality, suitable for single phase, 250 volts supply. The earth pin shall be effectively connected to the nearest conduit or earth connections in distribution board with not less than 3 mm2 (No. 14 SWG) copper wire. The socket outlet shall be complete unit shall be with ratings of 5 Amps. 250 Volts or 15 Amps 250 Volts to suit individual requirement as stated in Schedule of Quantities and Rates. The socket outlets shall be in flush mounting or on plate designs as called for in the Schedule.

6.0 Interlocked Metal Clad Switch Fuse Units :

a) The Metal Clad switch fuse unit shall be of the heavy duty type, quick make

and quick break action, of approved pattern and capable of carrying continuously the current specified. All the switch fuse units shall have 'U' type contacts on fuse carriers and the switch fuse units of capacities 30 Amps. and above shall be provided with spring type contacts on the fuse bases. Unless otherwise specifically brought out in the Schedule the metal cases shall be of cast iron and shall be provided with knock-outs for incoming and outgoing pipes or cables and earthing terminals. The cover of the switch shall be interlocked with the switch handle so that the cover cannot be opened unless the switch is 'OFF' and the switch cannot be made on unless the cover is fixed.

302

b) The fuse shall be either rewirable type or HRC type as detailed in Schedule of Quantities and Rates. The Switches with HRC fuse links shall be supplied with insulated fuse removers.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCEALED / SURFACE CONDUIT WORK USING GI CONDUIT

1.0 Lighting & Power Wiring Materials :

1.1 Scope :

The scope of this section comprises the supply, delivery, erection, testing and commissioning of GI Conduiting, wiring and Power wiring of the installation.

1.1 a Applicable Standards :

The relevant sections of Indian Standard Specifications as more particularly stated herein and broadly to all the codes, statues and regulations as applicable shall be strictly enforced and adhered to. More particularly following codes should be strictly followed.

IS 2509 of 1973 : Rigid conduits for Electrical work. IS 732 : Wiring Practice.

303

IS 3043 : Code of Practice of Earthing. IS 3202 : Climate proofing of Electrical Work.

IS 1653 : Metallic Conduits.

1.2 Conduit :

Conduit shall be HGBE heavy duty minimum 14/16 gauge GI Conduit, electric threaded type as per IS 1653 of 1960 including latest amendments and in accordance with the requirements set out in the schedule. The gauge of the conduit shall be 16 BG (minimum) and the tubing must be perfectly circular and capable of clean and tight fitting joints. The Galvanized conduit shall also be used wherever the conduits are exposed to weather i.e. run outside the structure.

1.3 Accessories :

GI Conduit accessories shall be of G.I iron and shall comply with IS 2667 of 1964 and be of threaded type with clean tight fitting threads. The cover of accessories for outdoor use shall be made water tight in an approved manner. Normal bends/elbows can be used only after obtaining specific approval. Junction boxes used for suspension of fittings shall be secured to the ceiling, clamps or spacers as the case may be. High dome junction boxes shall be used where a SP tumbler switch is to be mounted or a 15 Amps. porcelain connector is to be housed for looping wires.

1.4 Fixing of Conduit :

a) The conduit shall be fixed to the structures by means of adequate numbers

and appropriate size of G.I. saddles of minimum 18 Gauge fixed on GI clamps or on GI spacers as specified and shall run throughout adjacent to either steel work, walls or ceiling.

b) Where the conduits or armoured cables pass through the flooring the same shall be passed through a galvanised pipe of suitable size fixed in the flooring so that conduits, cable or wires can be renewed at any time without breaking the floor. The galvanised pipe shall extend 75 mm above the flooring and shall be flush with ceiling surface on other side.

c) All conduit wiring in the building, workshops, substations, sheds, pump houses, shall be fixed on GI clamps or on GI spacers as specified and shall be of appropriate size. The conduit wiring in offices and quarters running at ceiling height shall be fixed on MS spacers, the raising main

304

being fixed on clamps unless otherwise specified in the notes. The minimum size of GI spacers shall be 15mm wide and 4 mm thick.

d) GI clamps for fixing conduits shall normally be prepared from GI. flats of size

25 x 3 mm. In case more than 5 conduits are running side by side the GI flats of size 30 x 5 mm (minimum) shall be used for this purpose. For suspension of conduits from ceiling or structural member at a distance of more than 100 mm clamps made of flats of size 37 x 5 mm shall be used with additional supports in the run as required to keep the conduits held firm in position.

e) GI clamps for conduit run on brick walls should necessarily be grouted and on

R.C.C. works the same are to be screwed to instructions. Philip or teakwood plug shall be inserted in punched or drilled holes of appropriate size to secure the screws to the walls.

f) The spacing of clamps or spacers in the straight runs shall not exceed 800 mm

and additional clamps or spacers shall be provided near bends, curves and under/near junction boxes for fittings so as to make the whole fixture quite rigid.

g) For metallic fastenings, galvanised bolts and nuts shall be used. No holes shall be drilled in the steel supports of the shed structure for the purpose of fixing or suspending conduit, switch gear, fitting etc. For this purpose suitable clamps shall be provided.

h) The run of the conduit must be such as to give an esthetic appearance to the finished work and with that end in view all the conduits entering or leaving a D.B. or switch should be neatly arranged. Any crossing of conduit should be avoided as far as possible, but if required to cross, the conduits shall be neatly bent and fixed.

i) At every six meters straight run the conduits shall be provided with sufficient extra threads and a check-nut for easy running of the coupling back on the conduit for the purpose of renewal of wires etc. Sufficient number of inspection bends and junction boxes shall be provided for easy drawing-in of new and repair works in future. Normal bends shall only be used after obtaining specific approval.

j) Termination of the conduit runs must invariably have check nuts on either side of the entry to the metal clad boards, switches and fittings and shall be provided with insulating bushes of appropriate size screwed tight on to the end of the conduit so as to prevent any cutting of the insulation by rubbing against the ends. Even individual lengths of conduits should have no burrs left

305

on the ends after a die has been run for threading the ends. The continuity of whole conduit system shall conform with the requirements of the Regulations issued by the Institute of Electrical Engineers, London. The entire conduit work shall be given two coats of approved brand and colour of enamel paint on completion of the work. All the threads, running couplers, lock nuts, joins of entry into boxes and abrasions resulting in exposure of the metal shall be given two coats of approved brand of black enamel paint or any other colour shade as approved immediately after erection.

2.1 Point Wiring :

The wiring shall be of the looping in system as different from the tree system. Connectors should not be used without specific prior approval. Looping in on the phase side shall be at the switches and that on the neutral side at the ceiling roses.

Every light point, fan point and plug point shall have individual control switch unless stated otherwise. Earthing shall be provided for all the points according to the statutory requirement wherever necessary. The number of points per circuit shall not exceed 8 in any case.

2.2 a) The point wiring in conduit consists of wiring from the branch distribution board in

conduit with its ancillary work, such as inspection bends, junction boxes and cable upto the fixed terminals of ceiling roses, connectors, batten holders, etc. depending upon the type of point.

b) For easy identification, wires with different colours shall be used for phase and

neutral as far as practicable.

c) The control switches for lights, fans, wall sockets and fan regulators shall suitably be grouped on sheet steel cases of all welded design fabricated out of 1.2 mm (approx.). Generally, the bakelite sheet shall be 3 mm thick where SP Piano type flush mounting switches are to be accommodated and in all other cases it shall be 5 mm thick. The bakelite sheet cover shall be fitted above the sheet steel case and shall be leveled on the outer edges. Control accessories for one circuit only shall be grouped on a sheet steel case. Not more than 2 ceiling fan regulators shall be mounted on a sheet steel case. Suitable earthing terminal shall be provided on the sheet steel case. All the conduits entering and leaving D.B. shall be bonded together with 4 sq.mm bare aluminium/copper wire and earth clips (as mentioned in the schedule.) .

d) Point Wiring by using Armoured cables :-

306

This shall be similar to point wiring in conduit system. The fixing of cables shall, however, be according to the specifications.

2.3 Mains and Sub-Mains Wiring :

This shall include the cost of all armoured cable, and, clamps spacers, armoured cables on battens depending upon the type of wiring, all masonry work, such as cutting, neat finishing of walls, floor openings etc. Only approximate lengths are included in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates, but the actual lengths of the mains and sub-mains executed will be measured between terminating points and will be paid for. Where the mains and sub-mains pass through the flooring, or through the wall, the same shall pass as specified in 3 (b) above. Mains and Sub-Mains risers in conduit shall be bonded together with 4.0 sq.mm. bare aluminium/copper as specifically mentioned in Schedule and earth clips on each floor landing/mid-landing. The PVC heavy duty cable are provided as mains and sub-mains, the same shall be fixed as per specifications.

2.4 Fire resistant Low Smoke – Zero Halon Wires/Cables.

The wires to be used for Point wiring shall be minimum 2.5 sq.mm FRLS-ZH Cables/Wires. The properties should be as under :

The conductor should be copper. The grade should be 1.1 KV.

The inner Sheath should be having properties which shall satisfy Low Smoke and Fire retardant. They should also have the property of Zero Halon emission.

The Wires used should have the colour code RED, Yellow, Blue, Black and Green for earthing.

2.5 Conduit Capacity :

The maximum capacity of a conduit for drawing in Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires shall be in accordance with IS 732 of 1963, IS 1554 Part I and II and IS 7098 Part I and Part II. The minimum size of conduit to be used shall not be less than 20 mm (approx.) and not more than two circuits connected to same phase be bunched in one conduit. Two different phases are not allowed in one conduit.

Commonly used sizes of 650/1100 Volts Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) wires and conduit capacities are as tabulated below :-

307

Size of Voltage Capacity of the Conduit

Wire Grade 20 mm 25 mm

1.5 sq.mm. 650/1100 5 Nos. 8 Nos.

2.5 sq.mm. 650/1100 5 Nos. 6 Nos. 4.0 sq.mm. 650/1100 3 Nos. 5 Nos. 6.0 sq.mm. 650/1100 2 Nos. 3 Nos.

10.0 sq.mm. 650/1100 ...... 3 Nos.

CHAPTER - V

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURE

1.0 Scope: Supply, install, test and commission all the light fittings as per the approved schedule of the project. Before supply of any of the light fittings the bidder has to take prior approval of the Architect/Consultant/ Client. Before supply of any of the fittings the bidder has to submit the samples of all light fittings and the same needs to be approved from the Owner/Consultant/Architect.

All light fixtures above false ceiling shall be fixed with suitable safety chain with true ceiling.

2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The tendered materials should confirm the following Indian standard specification.

16101:2012 General Lighting. LEDs and LED modules Terms and definitions

16102(Part 1):2012 Self Ballasted LED Lamps for General Lighting Services. Part-1 Safety Requirements.

16102(Part 2):2012 Self Ballasted LED Lamps for General lighting Services. Part-2 Performance Requirements.

16103(Part I):2012 LED modules for General lighting Safety Requirements.

308

15885(Part 2/Sec. 13):2012 Lamp control gear Part 2 particular

16104:2012 D.C. or A.C. Supplied Electronic control gear for LED modules - Performance Requirements.

16105:2012 Method of Measurement of Lumen maintenance of Solid-state Light (LED) Sources.

16106:2012 Method of Electrical and photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting (LED) Products

16108:2012 Photo biological safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems IS 513 Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips

IS 12063 Classification of degree of protection provided by enclosures.

IS 14700 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) – Limits (Part 3/Sec. 2) for Harmonic current emission – THD < 15% (equipment, input current < 16 Amps. per phase.

IS 9000 (Part 6) Environment testing: Test Z – AD: composite temperature/humidity cyclic test.

IS 15885 Lamp control gear: particular requirements for (Part 2/Sec. 13) DC or AC supplied electronic control gear

IS 16004 – 1 and 2) for LED modules. IS 4905 Method for random sampling

Materials meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. In such case the salient points of difference along with advantages between the standards adopted and the specified standards shall be clearly brought out in a schedule.

For values not available in relevant IS, values indicated in the Tender specification shall be valid.

3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR LED LIGHTS

3.1 GENERAL:

Rated voltage (Vref): 230 volts 1 ph AC Rated frequency: 50 Hz Usage: Continuous

309

However, the materials should be robust enough to withstand and work satisfactorily with the following system variations:

Voltage: Vref + 30% to – 30% Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 5%

3.2 CONSTRUCTION:

The lamps should be robustly built with adequate mechanical strength, heat resistance, insulation resistance and flame resistant material complying with relevant clauses of IS 16102. The complete housing of the lamp should have an ingress protection level of IP 65/66 for the lamp compartment as well as the driver circuit.

The connecting wires used inside the system, shall be low smoke halogen free, fire retardant PTFE cable and fuse protection shall be provided in input side specifically for LED luminaires. Care shall be taken in the design that there is no water stagnation anywhere. The entire housing shall be dust and water proof protection as per IS 12063.

Driver Circuit: LED modules and drivers shall be compatible to each other. The LED module driver’s ratings and makes shall be as recommended by corresponding LED manufacturer.

LED Drivers may have following control & protections:- Suitable precision current control of LED. Open Circuit Protection Short Circuit Protection Over Temperature Protection Overload Protection

3.3 MARKING ON THE LAMP:

The lamps should be clearly and durably marked with the following mandatory markings:

a. Manufacturer’s name b. Rated voltage (marked “V” or volt) c. Rated wattage (marked “W” or watts) d. Rated lumen e. Rated frequency (marked “Hz”)

3.4 TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION:

Should be less than 10%

310

3.5 LAMP EFFICACY:

Should not be less than 100 lumens per watt.

3.6 POWER FACTOR:

Should be greater than 90 % including the driver circuit.

3.7 COLOUR RENDERING INDEX:

Minimum CRI of 70

3.8 DRIVER CIRCUIT EFFICIENCY:

Should be greater than 85%

3.9 CORRELATED COLOUR TEMPERATURE

Should be between 4000º K to 7000°K

3.10 LIFE EXPECTANCY:

Should be 50000 glow hours at normal ambient conditions and lumen maintenance of category 3 or better for L70 as per IS 16102 (Part-2):2012.

3.11 WORKING CONDITIONS:

Temperature: - 5 to 50°C Humidity: 10% to 90% RH

311

CHAPTER - VI

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF DATA – NETWORKING SYSTEM

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 BRIEF

The intent of this document is to provide a standard specification that will be used for proposed BANK OF INDIA, MUMBAI facilities requiring cabling installation. This document provides the minimum performance criteria for the components and sub-systems comprising a complete cabling system that shall accommodate Employer’s requirements.

Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this written document. The successful contractor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the cabling system described in this document. The Category 6 portion of the cabling system shall comply with the proposed link and channel performance requirements of the latest revision of ANSI/TIA-568- C.2“Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling”.

The successful contractor / OEM must have a Certified ITS Professional system integrator or any competent International acceptable authorities to review the drawings and meet with representatives from IT department of the Employer to discuss the project and to ensure that a structured cabling system is installed that provides a comprehensive Data and Telecommunication Networking infrastructure.

1.2 SCOPE

This document defines the cabling system and subsystem components to include cable, termination hardware, supporting hardware, and miscellaneous items to install a complete Data and Telecommunication Networking/Networking system supporting voice and data. The intent of this document is to provide all pertinent information to allow the contractor to bid for the materials, labor, supervision, tooling, and miscellaneous mounting hardware and consumables to install a complete system. However, it is the responsibility of the contractor to identify any and all items required for a complete system not identified in this specification (Data on Cat6 and Voice on Cat6)

312

1.3 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

The cabling system described in this specification is derived in part from the recommendations made in industry standard documents. The lists of documents below are incorporated by reference:

1) This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings

2) Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual, latest edition.

3) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 2001.

4) ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 2003.

5) ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 2002.

6) ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 2002.

7) ISO/IEC 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises.

Other standards that contain requirements pertaining to the safety of and access to private and public telecommunications networks include:

1) ANSI/NFPA 70 The National Electrical Code®, current edition.

2) IEEE C2-2002 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC®) current edition.

Guidelines and Specifications as provided by the IT Department of the Employer and other special codes that may apply:

If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents; the contractor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation.

1.4 The Category 6 Structured Cabling System (SCS) shall further comply with the following

requirements:

313

STANDARDS COMPLIANCE

The Category 6UTP SCS shall comply with the following standards ISO/IEC 11801 EN 50173 Part 1 through Part 5: 2010 and 2011 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 IEC 60603-7-4 IEEE 802.3 applications as outlined in section 2 Local/National Codes and Regulations

Cat6 UTP Cable

APPLICATION SUPPORT

Introduction:-Cat6 4 Pair UTP Cable has been designed for Horizontal Cabling Networks for Transmission of High Speed Data, Digital and Analog, Voice and Video Signals over LANs. Supports Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T) Standard Suitable for Noisy Environments, High EMI Interference Surroundings and Complies to The Requirement of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and ISO/IEC 11801. Performance Verified Up to 600mhz. UL Listed and ETL Verified.

Technical Specifications:-

Mechanical Properties:-Conductor : 23AWG Solid Bare Cable CENTRAL ELEMENT: PE Cross Separator Insulation: High Density Polyethylene Solid Pairs: 4 Pairs Twisted Together Cable Diameter: 5.9+/-0.01MM Rip cord: Yes JACKET: FRPVC/LSZH sheath JACKET Color: Light Grey Bending Radius:< 4X Cable Diameter at -20°C +/- 1°C Pulling Force: 25.35 LBS Operating Temperature: (-20°C to +70°C) Installation Temperature: (-20°C to +70°C)

Electrical Properties:-Conductor Resistance: 9.38OHM (For 100M) Mutual Capacitance: 5.6NF (For 100M) Resistance Unbalance (%) : Max 5 Capacitance Unbalance: 330

314

PF(For 100M) Delay Skew (For 100M) : 45NS Propagation Delay Skew: 536BS (For 100M) Current Rating: MAX 1.5A Operating Voltage: 72V Dielectric strength: 1000 V RMS

Keystone, Cat6, UTP, Toolless

Introduction:-Category6 Keystone is Toolless Design 50 Micron Gold Plating Suitable For23~24 AWG Stranded and Solid Wire, EasyForTermination and Compliant to T568A and T568B Wiring Schemes.

Key Features:- • Efficient Rotation Design Tool Free Press with Click to Terminate Wires • Cable Holder with Strain Relief function for Better Termination and Transmission • Reliable IDC Contacts with Color Coding for Better Contact Resistance and Transmission • Fast, Easy, Reliable Termination • Removable Shutter Option • Patented Design • Keystone Jack Can Be Easily Terminated by Hand, Optional Termination by Hand Tool • Support Both RJ11/RJ12 Plug

Technical Specifications:- Electrical:- Current Rating: 1.5amps Insulation Resistance: 500 MΩ minimum Contact Resistance: 10 mΩ maximum DC Resistance: 0.1 Ω maximum

Mechanical:- Plug Insertion Life: 750 Cycles minimum Plug & Jack Contact Force: 100 Grams minimumusing FCC-approved PlugPlug Retention Force: 30 lbs minimum Temperature: -40° to 150°F (-40° to 68°C)

Physical:- Housing: High impact flame retardant plastic,UL 94V-0 rated PCB: FR4, 1.6mm Thickness JackWire: Phosphor bronze gold over nickel plating Nickel Plating Base(Ni) : 40μ~80μ

315

Gold Plating: 50 microns Connector: Insulation displacement connector (IDC) Accept #23~24 AWG solid wire

Face Plate, One Piece, Single/Dual/Quad Port, W/O Shutter

Introduction:-One Piece Design Face Plate is a ModularStraight without Shutter, Robust and InstallerFriendlyDesign and available in Single/Dual/Quad Ports.

Key Features:- • One Piece design • Robust and Installer Friendly Design • Wall Flush Installation

Technical Specifications:- Port Details:- Port : Single/Dual/Quad Port Material Description:- Base Material : ABS-UL94-V2 Screw Cover Cap Material : ABS-UL94-V2 Mechanical Properties:- Size : 86 X 86 X 12mm (Single/Dual/Quad) Plug Retention Force : 14Kgf (140N)Plug Reliability: 750 Cycles minimum

Patch Cord, Cat6, UTP

Introduction:-Category 6 UTP Patch Cords are Factory Tested for Better Quality and Suitable for the High Speed Data Transmission. Complies to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Standard. Supports Data Networks Speeds Up to 10/100-Base-T and 1000-Base-T.

Key Features:- • Available In LSZH Jacket- Reduced Toxic Gasses Emitted During Combustion • RJ45, 8P8C, 2 FORK 50μ’’ Gold Plated Contacts • 100% Factory Tested• Transparent Boot Cable Assemblies • Available in 5 Different Colors

Technical Specifications:-

Conductor Material : Stranded Copper Conductor Diameter: (24 AWG) Insulation Material : HD-PE Insulation Thickness : Min at any point: 0.18mm MAX AVG:0.20mmMin at any point: 0.17mm MAX AVG:0.19mmInsulation Diameter: 0.94±0.01mm/0.92±0.01mm

316

Cross Filler : Transparent 4.2×0.35 Jacket Type : LSZH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) Jacket Thickness : Min at any point: 0.51mm MAX AVG: 0.55mm Jacket Width : Min at any point: 5.2mm MAX AVG:5.8mm Plug : 50μ’’ Gold Plated Contact Boot : Transparent Standard : ANSI EIA/TIA 568-C.2Colors : Light Grey/Blue/Green/Yellow/Orange

Patch Panel, 24 Port, Cat6, UTP

Introduction:-Category6 UTP Patch Panel is 90 Degree (Top Entry) Punch Down Design For Convenient Network Terminations. Patch Panels Have Integral Cable Management Shelf Ensured For Bend Radius Compliance. Exceeds ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Standard and Supports 1000-Base-T.

Key Features:-

• 90 Degree (Top Entry) Punch Down Design for Convenient Network Terminations • Ease of Installation is assured with built in Rear Cable Management • 6x4 Module Specially Designed Jack Configuration • Removable Module Design • 1U Patch Panel to Mount In any Standard Rack • Easy Port Labeling Identification Provision • Accommodates 22~26 AWG Stranded and Solid Wires

Technical Specifications:- Electrical:- Current Rating : 1.5amps Insulation Resistance :>= 500mΩ Contact Resistance : <=10mΩ DC Resistance :<=0.1Ω DC/AC Volt Endurance : DC 1000V/AC 750V 1 Min

Mechanical:- Plug Insertion Life : >= 750 Cycles with FCC Compliant RJ-45 Plug Plug& Jack Contact : >=100GramswithFCCCompliantRJ-45Plug Force Plug Retention Force : >= 11 LBF Durability: 200 Termination Cycles Operating Temperature : -10 Degree ~ 60 Degree Operating Humidity: 10% ~ 90% RHStorage Temperature : -40 Degree ~ 68 Degree

317

Physical:- Panel Frame : SPCC Powder Coating In Black Color Housing : High Impact Flame Retardant Plastic, UL 94V-0 Rated PCB : FR4, 1.6mm Thickness JackWire : 50μ’’ Phosphor Bronze Gold OverNickel Plating Jack Configuration: 6x4 Module Special DesignIDC Conductor: 0.5 mm Phosphor Bronze, Tin Plating Contact Compatibility: 22~26 AWG Stranded and Solid Wires

Multi Mode, Unitube Armoured Cable

Introduction:-Multi Mode UnitubeArmoured Cable is a Direct Burial Cable with Thixotropic jellyin Central Loose tube to prevent Wateringress and Armourwith High QualityElectro Chromium Corrugated Steel Tape. Embedded Strength members byusing 2 steel wires provides bettertensile strength and antibuckling properties. Available in UVHDPE Sheath and LSZH Sheath

Key Features:- • Suitable for Outdoor Network Direct Burial • Rodent Proof• UV Protection • Polyster based yarns below Armour tape for easy ripping • Thermoplastic Material Tube • Excellent Water Proof Layer and Moisture Resistance • Excellent Crush Resistance Performance • Light Weight and Compact Structure

Mechanical Specifications:- Jacket Material : UV Stabilized HDPE/LSZH-Black Fiber Count : 4F-12F-24F Outer Diameter (mm) : 8.8 +/- 0.5 Nominal Cable Weight : 72/78 and 98/106 (kg/km) (HDPE/LSZH) Tensile Strength (IEC 60794-1-2-E1) : 1800 Crush Load (IEC 60794-1-2-E3) : 4000 (N/100mm) Bend Radius (IEC 60794-1-2-E11/ : 20D IEC 60794-1-2-E6) Torsion (Degree) : 180\ Impact Strength (NM) : 25

FIBER LIGHTGUIDE INTERCONNECT UNIT (LIU)

Introduction:-12 Port Fiber Termination LIU slide type is a 1U configurable rack mount unit

318

for storing and terminating incoming fiber cable. The front of the LIU panel slides open to reveal a recessed configurable patch panel with 2 blank plates. The 24 Port slide type LIU comes with lock and key to prevent unauthorized tampering and safety.

Key Features:- • Available in Standard 19” • Cold Rolled Steel as Raw Material • Versatile Panel with Expandable Double Slide Rails for Smooth Sliding • 1RU Installs 2 Pcs Standard Adapter Plates at Different Types • Front Saddles Pivot for Improved Patch Cord Routing and Organization • Comprehensive Accessory Kit for Cable Entry and Fiber Management • Patch Cord Bend Radius Guides Minimize Macro Bending • Different 175 mm Adapter Interface Including ST, SC, FC, LC ETC • Splice Capability is Upto Maximum 48 Fibers with Splice Trays Loaded • Full Assembly Loaded or Empty Panel

Technical Specifications:- Adapter Capacity : 12/24 Adapter Plates : 2Splice Tray: 2

FIBER COUPLERS

Introduction: -LC Adapters are designed for high density applications and available in Simplex and Duplex types. Available in either Snap mount or Screw mount installation style.

Key Features:- • Small Footprint • Telcordia GR-326-Core • RoHS Compliance • Low Insertion and Return Loss • Self Adjusting Metal Panel Clips • Available in Simplex and Duplex Types

Specifications:- Insertion Loss :<= 0.20 db for Zirconia Sleeve /ferrule Withdrawal Force : 1.0N ~ 2.5N Durability(1000 Matings) : <= 0.2db Main Body Material : P

Pig Tails, Multi Mode (OM3) Type

319

Introduction:-Fiber Optic Single Mode OS2 and Multimode OM1/OM2/ OM3/OM4 Pig Tails are offered In LSZH Jackets with Corning Fiber. Available in a Variety of Different Connections in Simplex and Duplex Options with Low Insertion Loss. Supported for a Wide Variety of

Key Features:- • LSZH Jacket-Reduced Toxic Gasses Emitted During Combustion • 100% Factory Tested • Low Insertion Loss and Return Loss • Available with Corning Fiber • Available in PC/APC Type Options • High Precision Ceramic Ferrule with Good Concentricity

Technical Specifications:-

Connector Type : SC, ST, FC, LC, MTRJ Fiber Type : OM1/OM2/OM3/OM4 (50/125 Corning Clear Curve)OS2(9/125 Corning Clear Curve) Tight Buffer Color : White/yellow Tight Buffer Material :LSZHTight Buffer Diameter (mm) : 0.9 +/- 0.05 Strength Member : Aramid Yarn Jacket Color : Orange for OM1 & OM2, Aqua for OM3 and OM4, Yellow for OS1/OS2 Jacket Material : LSZH Jacket Thickness (mm) : 0.45 +/- 0.05 Cable Diameter (mm) : 2.9(+/-0.1) X 5.9(+/-0.2) Cable Weight (kg/km) : Approx. 13.0 Minimum Bending : 30 (static) Radius (mm) Attenuation (db/km) :<= 1.5 at 1300nm, <= 3.5mm at 850nm Short Term Tensile (n) : 160 Crush Resistance (n/100mm) : 500 Operation Temperature : Minus 20 ~ Plus 70

Patch Cord, Multi Mode, LSZH Type

Introduction:-Fiber Optic Multimode Mode OM1/OM2/OM3/OM4 Patch Cords are Offered in LSZH Jackets with Corning Fiber. Available in a Variety of Different Connectors in Simplex and Duplex Options with Low Insertion Loss. Supported fora Wide Variety of Applications

Key Features:- • LSZH Jacket-Reduced Toxic Gasses Emitted During Combustion

• 100% Factory Tested • Low Insertion Loss and Return Loss • Available with Corning Fiber

320

• Available in PC/APC Type Options • High Precision Ceramic Ferrule with Good Concentricity • Available in Simplex and Duplex Modes

Technical Specifications:- Connector Type : SC, ST, FC, LC, MTRJ Fiber Type : OM1/OM2/OM3/OM4 (50/125 Corning Clear Curve) Tight Buffer Color : White/yellow Tight Buffer Material : LSZH Tight Buffer Diameter (mm) : 0.9 +/- 0.05 Strength Member : Aramid Yarn Jacket Color : Orange For OM1 & OM2, Aqua for OM3 and OM4 Jacket Material : LSZH

Jacket Thickness (mm) : 0.45 +/- 0.05 Cable Diameter (mm) : 2.9(+/-0.1) X 5.9(+/-0.2) Cable Weight (kg/km) : Approx. 13.0 Minimum Bending : 30 (static) Radius (mm) Attenuation (db/km) :<= 1.5 at 1300nm, <= 3.5mm at 850nm Short Term Tensile (n) : 160 Crush Resistance (n/100mm) : 500O Operation Temperature: Minus 20 ~ Plus 70

24PORT SEMI MANAGEBLE GIGABYTE POE SWITH

Key Features:-

• Energy Efficient with Energy saving feature & Fan less design • Advanced Security features including RADIUS & TACACS+ Authentication • Supports Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS) • Supports Multicast Features including MVR(Multicast VLAN Register)

Technical Specifications:-

HARDWARE FEATURES PORTS • 24x10/100/1000Base-T- • + 4 x 1000Base- SFP

Performance • Switching Capacity: 56Gbps • Forwarding Rate: 41.7Mpps

321

• MAC address: 16K • Jumbo Frame: 12K • ACL Table : 2K- Queues Per Port :8 • VLAN Table : 4K Physical

• Dimension (W×H×D)- 440mm x 260mm x 43.6mm • Power Input : 100~240VAC, 50~60Hz • Temperature Working : 0°C~50°C, Storage -40°C~70°C • Relative Humidity: - 5%~95%, non-condensing • PoE: IEEE 802.3af POE (15.4W),

IEEE 802.3at POE+ (30W), • PoE Budget: 370w

SFP TRANSCEIVERS SFP Transceivers

The industry-standard ® Small form Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver modules are specifically designed for the high performance integrated data link over optical fiber. With the hot pluggability, these modules offer an easy way to be installed into SFP ports at any time without the interruption of the host equipments operating online.

CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

The contractor installing the Data and Data and Telecommunication Networking facilities and equipment herein specified shall be an experienced and Certified ITS Professional or any other competent authority. Experienced meaning that the contractor has been in this type of business for a minimum of (5) Five years and have personnel that have been trained and certified in the installation of Data and Telecommunication Networking facilities equipment. Additionally, the contractor will have successfully completed installation of similar equipment and size to that specified herein within the last year of the project.

2.0 DATA AND TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

2.1 FACILITIES DESCRIPTION Employer’s facilities vary in function and size. The buildings are divided into offices with personnel may be situated in modular office furniture with hard wall offices around the exterior of the floor. Generally, an under floor trunk system of Aluminum or GI is being used for distribution cabling system. The back bone cabling is proposed to be done using cable trays and conduits if so used. These specifications apply for all Data and Telecommunication Networking cabling installations.

2.2 DATA AND TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2.2.1 Employer’s data distribution network is based on a star topology with a

322

collapsed-backbone. The data cabling should be designed end to end to meet or exceed 1G BASE standard.

2.2.2 As a standard configurationeach work area will consist of an approved brand of communications outlet containing one Cat 6 jacks inserts.

2.2.3 All data jacks are terminated using Category 6 horizontal cables pulled and terminated on Category 6 insulation displacement connector patch panels in the Data and Telecommunication Networking room / Floor Patch Panel. Patch cords/equipment cords are used to connect each jack to the appropriate service connector.

2.2.4 The floor Switches connectivity / TTB connectivity via Category 6 cables and 125 micron – OM3 multi-mode Fiberoptic cables are used as backbone/riser cables for data.

3.2.5 WORK AREA COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET INSTALLATION

3.2.5.1 All outlets shall be installed in the following manner:

†Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. In hollow wall installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. No more than 12” of slack shall be stored in an in-wall box, modular furniture raceway, or insulated walls. Excess slack may be neatly coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable.

3.2.5.2 In addition, each cable type shall be terminated as indicated below:

† Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the Data and Telecommunication Networking Distributions Methods Manual, manufacturer’s recommendations and/or best industry practices.

† Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed .25 inch for Category 6 connecting hardware.

† Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.

† The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.

3.3 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE INSTALLATION

323

3.3.1 The SCS must consist of individual components provided by the same manufacturer. “Mix and Match” products are not allowed as there is no guarantee that the overall channel will meet Category 6 Channel requirements if constructed with components from different vendors. The components provided shall consist of:

Horizontal cable Information Outlets Loaded patch panel Patch-cords Zone cords (outlet-to-plug) Pre-Terminated cable assemblies

3.3.2 The following guidelines should be used when installing Horizontal distribution cable:

† All horizontal data distribution cable should be Category 6, 100 ohm, UTP of an approved vendor. † Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and best industry practices. † Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the NEC maximum fill for the particular raceway type. † Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices). †Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends less than four times the cables outside diameter (4 X cable O.D.) at any point in the run. †Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25-pounds for a single cable or cable bundle. †If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. †Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of not greater than 40 cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 40 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle. †Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler and systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cabling system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. †Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. Where light support for drop cable are required, the contractor shall install clips to support the cabling. † Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to

324

Employer. †Cables shall be identified by a self-adhesive label in accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification. The cable label shall be applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable that can be accessed by removing the cover plate.

3.3.3 When configured in worst-case 100 meter channels with full cross- connects and consolidation points with the other products proposed, the cable shall be capable of delivering the minimum guaranteed channel performance specified in section 3.0

3.3.4 The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the telecommunications closet on each floor to the telecommunications outlet shall not exceed 90 meters, and shall be continuous without any joints or splices.

3.3.5 Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of the 4pair UTP cable during handling and installation.

3.3.6 The cable shall be round in construction, with a separator.

3.3.7 The cable will consist of eight 23 AWG copper conductors. Copper-clad aluminum is not permitted.

3.3.8 3rd Party verification of the Fire Safety/ Environmental tests listed above must be provided as part of the bid response. 3.3.9 The OEM must provide test report along with the products. The test parameters shall include NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, Attenuation, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT. 3.3.10 The Cat 6 horizontal cable shall be available to order in the following options:

Cardboard box in 305 meter (1000 foot) lengths Non-returnable reel in 305 meter (1,000 foot) lengths

3.4 HORIZONTAL CABLE TERMINATION

All horizontal distribution runs shall work together to produce optimum efficiency and throughput. All cable and jack combinations must be tested by an independent laboratory to determine their performance when paired together. It is the responsibility of the contractor to make sure that both jack and wire are of the same “category” rating.

3.4.1 HORIZONTAL DATA CABLE TERMINATION PATCH

325

All horizontal data cables will be terminated on Category 6 patch panels in the Data and Telecommunication Networking room. The horizontal cables termination patch panels shall be colored black and contained in standard 19” x 7’ rack(s), wall-mount racks or equipment cabinets as specified by the project drawings. All equipment racks shall be properly secured to the floor or wall and augmented with horizontal and vertical management hardware, both front and rear, to properly dress horizontal cables. Patch panels shall provide 24 or 48 modular jack ports, wired to T568B. The front of each module shall be capable of accepting 9mm to 12mm labels. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on 110-style insulation displacement connectors. Patch panels shall be of an approved brand. Modular jacks for use in the patch panel must be of the same manufacturer as the jacks used at the work area station outlets.

3.4.2 HORIZONTAL CABLE SUPPORT

3.4.2.1 12” ladder rack system shall be installed in the Data and Telecommunication Networking room to support the cables. The ladder should encompass the room allowing the cables to be properly dressed and supported.

† secure the top of all freestanding equipment racks using 12” ladder racks to the wall or intersect with the ladder system encompassing the room.

3.4.2.2 The patch panel type shall be compliant with IEC 60603-7-4.Patch panel must be 24 port keystone type to support 1G. The same must be available in Straight as well as angular pattern.

3rd Party Verification test certificates shall be provided to show compliance to ISO/IEC 11801 testing for Category 6 components.

When configured in worst-case 100 meter channels with full cross-connects and consolidation points with the other products proposed in this tender, the panel shall be capable of delivering the minimum guaranteed channel performance specified in section 3.0.

3.6 Labeling Requirements

The copper cable assemblies shall be labeled to include the following information when required by the end user:

Individual leg number Cable Assembly Part Number Source location Destination location

326

Manufacturer Name

3.6.1 Cable assembly ends shall be labeled as follows to simplify the assembly installation: End A indicating Source Location End B indicating Destination Location Packaging Requirements

3.6.2 The following information shall be included on the outside of the shipping box to allow for easy identification of each copper cable assembly:

Cable Assembly source Cable assembly Destination Customer information

The cable assembly shall be packed as follows to simplify the installation

Cable End A (source location) to be placed at the Top of box Cable End B – (Destination Location) to be placed at the Bottom of box

4.0 BACKBONE CABLE

4.1.1 Data backbone cabling installed between the floor outlets and main Data and Telecommunication Networking room and each Data and Telecommunication Networking room will consist of one or more of the following types of cable:

† Category 6, 100 ohm, UTP as described in the horizontal distribution section for data distances upto 90 Mtrs (295’).

† 50/125um multimode OM3 optical Fiber(inside building) terminated with LC connectors.

† The minimum strand count for the Fiber optic backbone is 6 strands of MM which should be terminated on a wall mounted Fiber box or a rack mounted Fiber patch panel in the Main Distribution Room. Connection into Employer’s existing Fiber backbone should be included in all design drawings and bids. This should include splicing, termination, testing, conduit, vaults and boring necessary to provide full connectivity into Employer’s existing Fiber backbone.

† The minimum strand count of Fiber between Data and Telecommunication Networking closets that exist on the same floor of a building shall be 6 strand of MM. All Fiber should be terminated on a wall mounted Fiber box or in a rack mounted termination panel.

† The minimum strand count of Fiber between a server room and the Main Distribution Room shall be 6 strand of MM. All Fiber should be terminated on a wall mounted Fiber box or in a rack mounted termination panel.

327

† A minimum of 25’ of excess Fiber shall be provided at each Fiber termination point. Such service loops should conform to specifications to include total length and bend radii.

4.1.2 The types and number of cables used for backbone systems will vary for each project

and must be documented in the project specifications and documented on the drawings. Any termination or splice enclosures used for optical Fiber will be listed in the specifications and documented on the drawings.

4.2 BACKBONE CABLE INSTALLATION

4.2.1 All copper backbone cables shall be installed in the following manner:

† Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables. † Where cables are housed in conduits, the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in separate conduits or in separate inner duct within conduits. † Where cables are installed in an air return plenum, the cable shall be installed in conduit, or plenum cable shall be installed in a plenum inner duct to provide protection to the cable † where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wire way, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables.

4.2.2 For optical Fiber backbone cables:

† do not exceed the cable’s minimum bend radius. Bending cable tighter than the minimum bend Radius may result in increased optical Fiber attenuation or Fiber breakage. † the minimum bend radius for indoor backbone optical Fiber cable is 10 times the cables outside diameter under no load conditions and 15 times the cables outside diameter when being pulled. † do not exceed the cables maximum vertical rise and tensile rating. † where cables are installed in an air return plenum, the cable shall be installed in

conduit, or plenum cable shall be installed in a plenum inner duct to provide protection to the cable

† where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wire way, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables use inner duct whenever possible.

† all Fiber should be from the same manufacture and preferably the same lot if possible. All lot numbers of Fiber should be documented on drawings.

NOTE: Do not locate backbone cable pathways in elevator shafts. Do not over fill conduits, ducts or sleeves. Refer to the Data and Telecommunication Networking Distributions Methods Manual, latest edition for more information.

328

6.0 CABLING SYSTEM TESTING

All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions. The contractor prior to system acceptance shall verify all conductors of each installed cable useable. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, and best industry practices. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall be responsible to bring any discrepancies to the attention of the project manager for clarification and/or resolution.

6.1 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

6.1.1 COPPER

Category 6 data cable shall be performance verified using an automated test set. Test results shall be automatically evaluated by the equipment, using the most up- to-date criteria from the TIA/EIA Standard currently ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, and the result shown as pass/fail. Test results shall be printed directly from the test unit or from a download file using an application from the test equipment manufacturer. The printed test results shall include all tests performed, the expected test result and the actual testresult achieved.

6.1.2 FIBER

All 50/125um multimode optical Fiber and/or Single mode optical Fiber must be manufactured by Approved Brand of Cable Systems and it would be preferable that all Fiber cable is from the same manufacturer lot number. After installation, it must be performance verified using an automated test set. Test results shall be automatically evaluated by the equipment, using the most up-to-date criteria from the TIA/ EIA Standard currently ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, and the results shown as pass/fail. Test results shall be printed directly from the test unit or from a download file using an application from the test equipment manufacturer. The printed test results shall include all tests performed, the expected test result and the actual test result achieved.

8.1.1 DEFAULT LABELING SCHEME

All cable outlets and termination panels/bays or blocks will be appropriately labeled

329

to match the cable using the following default labeling scheme is an approved scheme has not been negotiated:

† Floor and Room number † – (dash) † Device Code (O-outlet, P-Patch Panel, B-Block) † Device number (devices numbered 1-9 going around the room in a

clockwise direction from the entrance) † D or V (for data or voice) † Outlet number on the plate, port number on the panel.

8.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

The installation contractor will be provided with 2 sets of A-1-size drawings at the start of the project. One set will be designated for as the central location to document all as-built information as it occurs throughout the project. The central set will be maintained by the Contractor’s Foreman on a daily basis, and will be available to the Technical representative upon request during the course of the project. Anticipated variations from the build-to drawings may be for such things as cable routing and actual outlet placement. No variations will be allowed to the planned termination positions of horizontal and backbone cables, and grounding conductors unless approved in writing by Employer OR IT personnel of Employer

The Contractor shall provide the central drawing set to the Employer IT PERSONNEL OF EMPLOYER at the conclusion of the project. The marked up drawing set will accurately depict the as-built status of the system including termination locations, cable routing, and all administration labeling for the cabling system. In addition, a narrative will be provided that describes any areas of difficulty encountered during the installation that could potentially cause problems to the Data and Telecommunication Networking system.

8.2.1 Requirements for As-built drawings

Backbone diagrams shall include: †One line diagrams for UTP copper cabling with cable counts. †One line diagrams for optical Fiber cabling with cable counts (including lot number).

Floor Diagrams shall include:

†DTR locations and room numbers. †Work area outlets (WAO) and faceplate labels. †TR wiring zones, which identify WAOs served.

330

†Horizontal cabling pathways including penetrations and fire stopping.

TR Diagrams shall include:

†TR room number. †Rack locations. †Power outlet locations. †Conduit locations.

8.3 TEST DOCUMENTATION

Test documentation shall be provided in a three ring binder(s) within three weeks after the completion of the project. The binder(s) shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover and spine with the words “Test Results”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and year). The binder shall be divided by major heading tabs, Horizontal and Backbone. Each major heading shall be further sectioned by test type. Within the horizontal and backbone sections, and scanner test results (Category 6), shall be segregated by tab. Test data within each section shall be presented in the sequence listed in the administration records. The test equipment by name, manufacturer, model number and last calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless a more frequent calibration cycle is specified by the manufacturer, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific settings of the equipment during the test. Scanner tests shall be printed on 8-1/2” x 11” paper.

When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be collocated in the binder.

8.3.1 DOCUMENTATION

• The Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Structured Cabling System (SCS) shall be provided with a complete set of documentation such that the design, installation and commissioning of the system can be done properly.

• This documentation shall consist of the following, to be included in the bid response:

• Design and Installation guidelines, which shall include configurations for typical local- area network and data centre applications for 2, 3 and 4 connector channels

• Performance specifications, which shall state the maximum supportable distance for all protocols which are anticipated to be transported by the SCS

• Zone cabling guidelines

• Power separation guidelines

331

8.3.2 CABLING VENDOR CHECK LIST – in progress, to be filled out for each numbered item

Section Compliance (Yes/No)

Notes

Standards Compliance

Application Support

Channel Performance

Component Requirements

Documentation

9.0 WARRANTY AND SERVICES

9.1 CABLING SYSTEM WARRANTY The Data and Telecommunication Networking contractor shall facilitate a 25-Year extended System Performance Warranty between the manufacturer and Employer OR IT PERSONNEL OF EMPLOYER. The performance warranty shall warrant the installed 250 MHz horizontal copper, and if installed by the contractor both the horizontal and backbone optical Fiber portions of the cabling system. Copper links shall be warranted against the link performance minimum expected results defined in ANSI /TIA -568-C.2 (latest draft)

FIBRE OPTIC STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The optical Fiber SCS shall serve as the transport infrastructure for data, video and voice telephony signals throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various Desktop, Workstation, Data Centre, Intelligent Building facilities or other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein.

The Fiber-optic SCS shall be offered with several options which are tailored to suit the needs of the specific application in the network.

The Fiber-optic SCS shall be available with OM3 multimode Fiber, based on network requirement.

Optical Fiber connector options shall include at minimum the LC connectors.

The Fiber-optic SCS shall comply with the relevant sections below regarding components, in accordance with the type of Fiber optic system being deployed:

332

CHAPTER - VII

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

1.0 The scope of work shall comprise of the following:

The scope shall be for Supplying, installation, testing and commissioning of a fully digital Public Address System for public address & voice alarm evacuation and sound management, capable of making manual and automatic announcements from more than one location.

The proposed system shall be a Public Address (PA) and Emergency Evacuation System (EVAC), which shall meet and comply with all the requirements of IEC60849 for an emergency sound system.

It shall be a fully digital, network controller based system. The network controller, which shall also be a web server, must be capable of handling multiple functions simultaneously. The public address and emergency system shall be using web technology and digital audio transportation and processing. The system shall provide a very user-friendly user interface and shall be based on a network based concept. This means that the system shall allow additional functions to be added at any time by adding more equipment. Every equipment such as the network controller, Class D digital amplifiers, paging/call stations, and similar such interfaces shall support dual network cabling providing a loop through and must be monitor able.

The systems shall conform and comply with all the emergency voice evacuation specifications.

In case of multiple network controller based scenario, using suitable interfaces, it shall be possible to connect multiple systems on fiber optics and/or CAT5e/CAT6 based Ethernet connectivity while keeping simple management functionality.

It shall allow announcement from more than one location, capable of setting priorities, override and multiple simultaneous audio sources. Paging facility shall also be provided to facilitate zone wise announcement or ALL CALL as the case may be

The Digital Public Address system shall be based on digital audio processing. The Public Address (PA) system shall have 28 simultaneous audio channels available for audio transportation between any inputs and outputs. The PA system shall be designed for a ring network so that a single break in the system does not affect the system performance.

333

The PA system shall also provide extensive audio processing facilities. The equipment shall be provided with digital audio processing facilities for all audio inputs and outputs. The call stations shall also be provided with audio processing facilities. The audio transport from the call stations to the power amplifier shall be achieved by using digital audio technology right up to the amplifying circuits, before which the digital audio is converted to analog audio.

Web-based technology

The Public Address system network controller shall be a web server, which can be accessed by any properly authorized workstation connected to the network. It means that for diagnostic & logging or even configuration, there shall be no need to have software installed in the PC.

The functional combination

Various functions shall be combined and incorporated in each system unit, such as audio processing and speaker line monitoring in the power amplifier. Even the delay function amplifier channel shall also be incorporated in the power amplifiers.

It should be possible to add any components – amplifiers, routers, audio processing equipments, call stations, etc. – at any level of connectivity while maintaining the network- redundancy feature of the system.

Software

The system shall be provided with access to an in-built web server based architecture for configuration and diagnostic & logging as standard. The configuration software can be used to configure all system parameters. The software shall be designed to allow even first-time users to navigate through the configuration and to enter various parameters of the system. The configuration software ensures that if the installer follows the sequence as displayed on the menu, there will be no chance of missing any of the configuration items.

The diagnostic & logging software shall provide extensive diagnostic and logging functions. This software shall enable the user to find details of any status changes in the system. The same software shall also be used to display call status in either text or graphic form.

Display on equipment

The system units shall have a 2 x 16-character display for user interaction. The navigation control shall enable the user to view any change in status of that particular equipment on the display. The user shall be able to carry out enquiries on the status of all units for faults and calls from the network controller.

External interfaces

334

The network shall have three types of interfaces; namely RS232, Ethernet and control inputs/outputs for interfacing with other systems. In the public address and emergency systems, the fault status and other status changes have to be reported to a central building management system. The interfaces can be used for these purposes.

The system shall be able to accept large numbers of control inputs, which can be used to initiate actions in the system. The system shall come with control outputs, which can be used to interface with external systems.

Easy configuration, but without losing the ability to solve complex requests. A basic mode configuration wizard and an expert mode program interface shall be provided. Fast and correct installation shall be possible, but it shall also be possible to handlecomplex and specific application requirements. A free programmable Task Engine shall be available via the expert mode program interface. The basic mode wizard shall be able to provide a step-by-step configuration guide that creates a complete IRIS-Net basic system configuration file. It shall be possible to create basic system with just 30 minutes.

Due to its flexibility, the system shall eliminate the project risk right from the start. The matrix structure shall be evident throughout the system. Dynamic routing and intelligent audio power distribution shall make the system suitable for almost any application. The system shall be designed to ensure a system-wide intelligent power management architecture. The system shall raise the bar and creates a PA/EVAC system that uses the lowest power consumption for the application without losing functionality. It shall save batteries and maintenance costs!

The system shall be built by professional sound engineers, and shall add pro-sound audio quality level to the PA/EVAC system. This high-quality level shall enable combined use of Fire/EVAC with applications that requires high-quality audio, such as presentation rooms, school stages, etc. The excellent sound quality shall ensure excellent intelligibility in all kind of situations.

The new Call station shall be designed as a modern device. The new call station shall provide a green LED on the Microphone in to show that a call isgoing across from the call station. The system shall be able to handle up to 16 call stations

The system shall be capable to address up to 492 zones with a total speaker load up to 40.000 Watt. It shall be able to handle 4 system sources and up to 16 music sources including local source inputs.

335

It shall be possible to have just one spare amplifier in the system to take over from a duty amplifier in case one fails.

1.1. DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1. System controller

• The system controller shall be an EN54-16 compliant and certified device in a 2 RU, 19”- cabinet. The TCP/IP capable network device shall contain all controlling and monitoring functions of a voice evacuation system.

• The controller shall manage the supervision of its own operation and that of the connected devices. It shall control and activate the connected amplifiers and spare amplifier and shall replace the amplifier routing and channel that has reported a fault. A failsafe mode shall ensure that emergency calls are passed through to the amplifiers even if the controller itself fails.

• The controller shall support single line switching or redundant group A/B switching. • Network connectivity status and fault conditions shall be displayed via LEDs on the front

panel. • >1000 fault, warning and event conditions shall be logged internally and it shall be

reported with the possibility to look real-time into the logging and save the log with logging tools. Four 100V audio inputs shall be routed to 12 speaker line outputs. Each block of 6 loudspeaker zones shall allow separate two-channel operation to ensure continuous business music or it shall allow to be configured to double the amount of power in a 6 zone 1 channel block. It also shall have an option to have multiple calls in parallel in a 2 channel operation mode.

• In case of too much amplifier power, it shall be possible to also transfer overrun amplifier power to additional system routers.

• The controller shall provide an internal 16x 4 Audio matrix with full DSP functionally on each of the 4 outputs. The controller shall operate as a four channel output matrix.It shall be possible to adjust channel delays up to 10s per channel.

• A single system controller shall be able to manage up to 20 routers, 16 call stations and up to 492 loudspeaker circuits. It shall allow up to 12 controllable local audio inputs.

• A built in message manager shall be able to store up to 100 emergency- or business- calls, with a total storage time up to 85 minutes. It shall be possible to send two different messages simultaneously to individual destinations.

• In combination with license free spoken word evac sound files shall be provided in 7 languages.

336

• A separate included tool shall provide on the fly replacing non-evac messages at any time without system interruption or system restart; So called hot swappable messages.

• Loudspeaker supervision shall be fully controlled by the controller and executed from the router. The user shall be able to choose between impedance measurement, simple EOL boards with pilot tone supervision (requires return wires) or via advanced addressable EOL supervision boards, which requires a ground connection but no additional return wires.

• Zones outputs shall be able to handle a load from 2-500 Watt. • Max 500 Watt per 6 zones shall be provided, if required. The controller shall be able to

handle up to 2000 Watt load. It shall be possible to use connect to a FPA5000 via Ethernet The controller shall have the following specifications:

16x4 DSP matrix mixing

Priority mixing with ducking, attack and release

3 band parametric PEQ in the inputs

5 band parametric PEQ in the outputs

up to 10s delay per output

Gain adjustment in the in- and outputs

Compressor on the inputs

Limiters on the inputs

Cross point matrix level adjustment with ducking level, fade in and fade out time

2 mic/line inputs (System s/n >= 106dB) – 2x Euro Style - 2x cinch

4 separate call station RJ45 input busses, each can be daisy chained up to 4 call stations

4 output channels for daisy chaining amplifiers via RJ45

12 input contacts; 6x voltage free (isolated) + 6x Supervised, to ensure compliancy to all different standards (like VDE0833 & NEN2575)

12 output contacts; 1x Relay + 12 Open Collector

6 High power output contacts (1A)

8 Analog input contacts with 256 steps resolution

Four input channels (100V, 70V) + 2 spare channel inputs (100V, 70V)

Real time clock with summertime and wintertime switching

DCF77 receiver sync input

Event scheduler

12 zone outputs (100/70V)

12 zone status LED (active – green, fault – yellow, alarm – red)

6 system status LED (general fault, system fault, alarm mode, power indicator, standby mode, network connection status)

Internal router pcb: 2x 2ch x 6zone (2 separate channels can be provided on each 6 zones. Blocks can be daisy chained)

Controller shall be configurable as 6 A/B zones or 12 single zones

Internal sounder

System access shall have password protection CAN bus between system components

337

Based on a fully digital platform

Network prepared (remote system racks) 24V DC Input

Audio: 16 (internal) audio Channels 4 Aux input channels 4 Callstation input channels 4 audio output channels

Safety: Internal supervision, system monitoring, watchdog,fault output

Software: Basic mode (Wizard) & expert Mode (IRISNet; Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision Net) Integration of controller, amplifiers, call stations and peripheral controlConfiguration, control and supervision for complete audio systems , Message swapper Programmable user control, GUI and access levels

Audio input specifications: +6dBu/ 1,55V Audio output specifications: +6dBu/ 1,55V Frequency response: 20Hz to 20kHz (-0,5dB) Signal-to-noise ratio (A-weighted): analog in to analog out: >106 dB typical THD+N: 0.01% Crosstalk: >100dB @ 1 kHz Sample rate: 48 kHz; 24bit DSP Processing: 3 DSPs (480 MIPS) internal Ethernet: 10/100 MB, RJ-45 (PC control) CAN: 10 to 500 kbit/s, 2x RJ-45 (remote and control) Networking: Module slot for optional Network / OMNEO interface Control Port: 1 slave clock output (max. 1 A)

1 time sync input (DCF-77 standard) 12 control inputs (logic control) 12 control outputs 6 analog inputs 0-10V

Power supply: +24 V DC (wide range tolerance: 18 V to 58 V DC)

Operating temperature: -5 C to +45 C Product dimensions (W x H x D): 19”, 2 HU, 483 x 88 x 376 mm Colour: Black / Silver Weight: 3.5 kg

2. Amplifier

338

The 2x 500W Class D, high efficiency amplifier shall be an EN54-16 compliant and certified system device in a 2 RU, 19”cabinet. It shall provide 70/100V loudspeaker output voltages that are galvanically separated. The amplifier shall be permanently monitored by the system controller. A special standby mode shall be provided for saving energy during the time the amplifier is not is use with respect to all economical and supervision aspects. System control and audio interconnections shall be done via RJ45 connectors. The amplifier shall be used as a system amplifier, but it shall also be possible to use the amplifier standalone. As a system amplifier, four automatic selectable audio inputs via RJ45 shall be available. It shall also be possible to use a local input, and as such shall provide local (non-system controlled) sources without losing system and line supervision. It shall be a requirement that local input is used in case of standalone mode. The local input shall be configurable in a way that it can be used in as source input for in an installed system, for example for an external PA or local source input. The amplifier shall have the following specifications:

2x 500 Watt Class D amplifier

4 channel input on RJ45 connector, amp link in and out (4 channel dynamic input channel switching for each amplifier)

Local input on amplifier: Enabled via software configuration or automatically selected when amplifier address is set to address "0", System channel 4 will be used as supervision channel in case local inputs are used.

Loop through on RJ45 connector (4 channels)

Amplifier efficiency >= 78%

Limiter prevents audible distortion

AC Power switch on rear side

24V DC Input

Front to rear air ventilation

Max amplifier load: 2x 500Watt Signal to noise ratio, A-weighted: >104 dB Power requirements: 100 – 240 VAC in, IEC non locking socket,

50 to 60 Hz or 24 VDC in (20 - 28 VDC) Product dimensions (Width by Height by Depth): 19”,

2RU, 483 by 88.1 by 374.8 mm Color: Black/Sliver

3. Router

The system Router shall be an EN54-16 certified device in a 2 RU, 19”cabinet. The device shall extend the number of zones in a system and shall contain all the necessary controlling and monitoring functions.

339

The internal supervision system shall monitor the functions and operation of both itself and the connected devices. It shall be capable of rerouting a spare amplifier channel and shall replace an amplifier channel that has reported a fault. Fault conditions shall also be reported to the connected system controller for operational control and logging purposes. A failsafe mode shall ensure that emergency calls are passed to the loudspeakers, even if the unit itself fails. The controller shall support single line assignment or redundant group A/B switching. Connectivity status and fault conditions shall be displayed via LEDs on the front panel, including a zone status LED. It shall be possible to route up to 4 channels into eight 100V audio inputs to 24 speaker line outputs. The router loudspeaker outputs shall be divided in blocks of 6 loudspeaker line outputs. Each block of 6 zones shall allow the same or a different two-channel operation mode to ensure continuous and/or different business music into different zone blocks. The router shall operate as a four in two out matrix (4 channel input matrix to 2-channel zone block output).

Zone outputs shall be able to handle a load from 2-500 Watt. Max. 500 Watt per 6 zones shall be provided.

The Router shall be able to handle up to a 4000 Watt load.

Integrated loudspeaker supervision shall eliminate the need of amplifier power for supervision, which shall result in very low power consumption.

The router shall have the following specifications:

24 input contacts; 12x voltage free (isolated) + 12x Supervised

24 output contacts; 24 Open Collector outputs

2 Relay switched outputs

Eight 100V input channels + 4 spare 100V channel inputs

24 zone status LED (active – green, fault – yellow, alarm – red)

4 system status LED (general fault, power indicator, standby mode, network connection status)

Internal router pcb: 4x 2ch x 6zone, were each block can be daisy chained

12 A/B zones or 24 single zones

CAN bus between system components

Max 1000 meter distance 24V DC Input

Safety: Internal supervision, system monitoring, watchdog,

fault output CAN: 10 to 500 kbit/s, 2x RJ-45

(remote and control) Control Port: 1 x 8-pin RJ connector

24 control inputs

340

(analog 0-10 V/logic control) 24 input contacts; 12x voltage free (isolated) + 12x supervised, to ensure compliancy to all different standards (like VDE0833 & NEN2575)

Power supply: +24 VDC (Range tolerance: 18VDC to 58VDC)

Operating temperature: -5 C to +45 C Product dimensions (W x H x D) 19”, 2 HU, 483 x 88 x 376 mm Color: Black/Silver

4. Call Station

The call station shall be an EN54-16 compliant and certified user interface. It shall be designed in a modern and robust chassis with a graphical display. As standard, the call station shall have a gooseneck microphone with pop shield and permanent monitoring, an illuminated LC-display and an integrated loudspeaker to be used for system sounds. The operation status shall be permanently supervised by the system controller. It shall be possible to modify the call station to suit the user’s requirements by connecting up to five remote call station extensions, each with 20 free customizable functions and selection buttons. It shall be possible to extend the call station extension at the right and at the left side. Is shall be possible to mount a maximum of 3 additional emergency buttons on the Call station. Optionally it shall be possible to mount a key switch to lock or enable call station functions with a key switch or to give access to a second access level. The Call station shall have a built-in numerical keypad; it shall be possible to enable or disable the keypad during configuration.

The call station shall have the following specifications:

Five menu/function keys (pre-programmed) – four buttons shall provide each 1 LED

(two LED’s shall be 2 green and 2 LED’s shall be yellow).

Green led on the microphone which is active during a call

15 function and speed dial buttons (customizable), two LEDs (green/red) per button. Button functions shall be programmable such as:

o Zone select, source select, level control, emergency on/off, message on/off, failure acknowledge/reset.

341

o switching output trigger on/off or 0 to 10V, select scheduled events, scheduled event on/off.

Fascia cover with transparent areas for customizable labels.

Multilanguage LCD display informs about system status, system faults, selected zones, source select, clock, different kind of additional (failure) messages shall be free configurable.

Supervised electrets microphone, with limiter and a speech filter for excellent speech intelligibility.

CAT5 cable for data and audio connection to controller (can bus, up to 1000 meter).

It shall be possible to daisy chain 4 call stations. It shall receive audio and operational control signals from the controller and report its

status to the system controller.

Internal monitoring with error logging– complying with all relevant national and international standards.

Supply voltage: 15–58 V DC Maximum supply current (without extensions): < 80 mA / 24 V

< 110 mA / 18 V Maximum supply current (with 5 extensions): < 180 mA / 24 V

< 250 mA / 18 V Maximum mic input level: -21 dBu Maximum line input level: +4 dBu Maximum NF output level: +12 dBu LC-Display: Lighted (122 x 32 pixel) External Connectors: 1 PCA BUS connector

(Control data + Audio + Power supply, RJ- 45) 1 Audio Source (Line level, phone jack) 1 Microphone input (phone jack) 1 EXT connector (call station extension, RJ-12)

Operating temperature: -5° to 45° C Product dimensions (Width by Height by Depth): 200 by 167 by 65 mm

(without microphone) Color: black Net weight: 0.6 kg

5. Keypad

The call station extension shall be EN54-16 compliant. It shall be designed in a robust and

342

modern chassis. It shall expand the call station by 20 customizable functions keys. It shall be possible to install a maximum of five call station extensions on one call station, which shall expand the call station by up to 100 function keys (115 in total). It shall be possible to mount the extension on the left or right-side of the call station. The call station extension shall have the following specifications:

20 free customable functions keys, and two LEDs per button (green/red).

It shall be possible to program button functions as: o Zone select, source select, level control, emergency on/off, message on/off,

failure acknowledge/reset. o switching output trigger on/off or 0 to 10V, select scheduled events, scheduled

event on/off.

An LED shall also be programmable for own indication functionality.

Fascia cover with transparent areas for customizable labels.

RJ12 cable for data connection to call station.

Max. 5 extensions per call station.

Sent & Receives operational control to and from the call station. Internal monitoring with error logging– complying with all relevant national and

international standards.

Connectors: RJ12 Operating temperature: -5° to 45° C Product dimensions (Width by Height by Depth): 140 by 167 by 65 mm Color: black Net weight: ` 0.29 kg

6. Loudspeakers

6.1 Ceiling Type Loudspeakerwith Back Box

A flush-mounting ceiling loudspeaker fitted in the back box. These full range loudspeakers are suitable for both speech and music reproduction .The speaker assembly consists of a single piece, 6 W loudspeaker and frame with a 100 V matching transformer mounted on the back. It should be in accordance with Accordance to EN 60065 for safety, According to EN 60529 IP 44- water & Dust protection, According to EN 54‑24 Compliant to BS 5839 part 8- Emergency, According to IEC 60068‑2‑11-Salt Mist, According to IEC 60068‑2‑60-Chlorine resistant when used with Back box .

Technical Specifications are as follows:

343

Maximum power 9 W

Rated power 6W(6/3/1.5/0.75W)

Sound pressure level at 6 W / 1 W (1 kHz, 1 m)

90 dB / 82 dB (SPL)

Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 85 Hz to 20 kHz Rated voltage 100 V

Diameter 88 mm (3.46 in)

Rated impedance 8 / 835 / 1667 Ohm

Back Box for speaker

Diameter 75 mm (2.95 in) Diameter 75 mm (2.95 in)

Maximum depth 83.5 mm (3.29 in) Maximum depth 83.5 mm (3.29 in) Material ABS (V 0) Material ABS (V 0)

Weight 41 g (0.09 lb) Weight 41 g (0.09 lb)

Color White (RAL 9003) Color White (RAL 9003)

6.2 Elliptical Horn (Wall Mount) Loudspeaker

A Wall Mount Horn loudspeaker High Efficiency Drivers with 22.5W (Max. Power) Wide Opening Angle, Excellent speech Reproduction, Simple Power Setting, Water-And Dust Protected to IP65, Versatile Mounting Bracket ,comply with Inter Nation Installation and Safety Regulations. Horn loudspeaker should be circular horn loudspeaker made from ABS finished in light gray (RAL 7035) and a 100V line output.

Technical Specifications are as follows:

Maximum power 22.5 W

Rated power 15 W (15,7.5,375 W)

Sound pressure level at 15 W / 1 W (1 kHz, 1 m)

103 dB

Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 500 Hz to 3.5 kHz Rated voltage 100 V

Rated impedance 667

344

Opening angle at 1 kHz/4 kHz (-6 dB) 110°(H)/50°(V)

6.3 Sound Projector Loudspeaker

A 10 W Projector speaker suitable for both speech and music reproduction .The speaker should come with 2 m fixed connection cable, should be Splash-waterproof, Robust self-extinguishing ABS enclosure to UL 94 with a 100 V matching transformer.

Technical Specifications are as follows:

Maximum power 15 W

Rated power 10W (10 –5 – 2.5W)

Sound pressure level at 6 W / 1 W (1 kHz, 1 m)

102 dB / 92 dB (SPL)

Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 140 Hz to13 kHz

Rated voltage 100 V

Rated impedance 1000

Opening angle at 1 kHz/4 kHz (-6 dB) 160° / 70°

CHAPTER – VIII

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

1 Access Control Software

1.1 The ACS shall be modular, networked access control system having centralized architecture, capable of handling large corporation with multiple remote sites. The system shall allow for easy expansion or modification of input, outputs and remote control stations.

345

1.2 The system control at the central computer location shall be under a single software program control, shall provide full integration of all components, and shall be alterable at any time, depending upon the facility requirements. Reconfiguration shall be accomplished online through system programming, without hardware change

1.3 The software program shall be a true 32-bit

1.4 The software program shall support multiple server configurations including, but not limited to, Access Control Server, * and Database server. Failover servers need not compulsorily be integral part of Access Control Software, but should be compatible with any other 3rd party applications. The ACS must provide a web server-based solution. Only Internet Explorer is required for a workstation to access the ACS login server.

1.5 The system shall have the capability to communicate with the control panels via LAN/Proposed Wireless connectivity connections(WLAN) utilizing industry standard communication protocol.

1.6 The system shall support upto 800 card readers on single server or unlimted card readers using multiple connection servers and shall support up to 4,00,000 card holders.

1.7 The system shall be compliant or compatible with international standards to enable future multiple application use of the smart cards, such as for logical security, canteen, digital signatures and convenience uses.

1.8 The Software shall be a highly scalable enterprise level software solution.

1.9 The ACS software package shall be fully parameter driven and operate within the Windows OS environment Like Windows 7 SP1 (32 or 64 bit, Pro, Enterprise) Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 (64 bit, Standard, Datacenter) Windows 8.1 (64 bit, Pro, Enterprise) Windows Server 2012 R2 (64 bit, Standard, Datacenter) Windows Server 2016 (64 bit, Standard, Datacenter) Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB (64 bit)

1.10 The system shall have an administrator’s interface to manage data and the individual applications.

1.11. The system shall provide context sensitive, online help file capabilities. The online help system shall contain enough information to inform the user of the nature of the current form/window, and provide a reference for the user to gather further information. The vendor shall populate the on-line help file

1.12. The Time attendance software should be able to be intergrated with the offered system provided the access to the sql database is provided .

346

1.13. Server Operating System: The system server shall be use latest edition of Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 (64 bit, Standard, Datacenter) Windows Server 2012 R2 (64 bit, Standard, Datacenter) Windows Server 2016 (64 bit, Standard, Datacenter) and shall include network capability with the TCP/IP data communications network protocol and hardware

Client Operating System: Client device shall use Windows 7 SP1 (32 or 64 bit, Pro, Enterprise) Windows 8.1 (64 bit, Pro, Enterprise) Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB (64 bit) based operating system with latest service pack.

1.14. "Audit trail for master record operations: The access control management must provide an audit trail for changes on cardholder master records as well as changes on access permissions. The audit trail must log at least the following operations - create, delete a cardholder master record - change cardholder master record content, e.g. name, address - change cardholder access rights - create, delete an access permission - change access permission content, e.g. time profile"

1.15. System shall include comprehensive report facilities of on-line activities and a permanent (or for an UCIL-defined time-period) record of card holder activity. Report Builder software shall be used for building comprehensive reports.

1.16. System shall provide investigation reports to generate event and activities pertaining to card, system operator and alarm according to the given search parameter with respect to date and time.

1.17. The system shall provide an audit trial function that is intended to record all permanent changes in data configured by system operators. The audit log shall consist of details of any database changes, when they were made and the username of the authorized ACS user who made the changes.

1.18. A search tool shall be provided to allow authorized ACS users to examine the audit log files.

1.19. Reports shall be initially displayable on the authorized ACS user screen, and then be saved as a pdf file or in the CSV format.

1.20. The system shall allow an authorized ACS user to design, save and generate customized report templates.

347

1.21. The ACS shall provide the following standardized reports as a minimum: Transaction report; Alarm report; Device report; Configuration report; Card report; Access right report; User audit Report; Card Holder onsite Report and Personnel Reports.

1.22. Local Audible/Visual alarms: The audible devices or lighting devices shall able to be combined with programmable relays of access controller and could also remotely be set/reset by the operator. The system shall also be capable of automatically resetting the horn and/or strobe after a programmable period of time. "The ACS analyzes all incoming events and messages. It provides a wide range of standard alarm/event states. There should be no limitation in creating additional customer specific states. For each event state, the following parameters are definable: - State name - Background/foreground color - Alarm sound - Priority

For alarm sounds, standard formats such as WAV, MP3 or WMA are supported. The priority directly controls the order how events are displayed. "

1.23. Duress Alarm: The system shall provide a feature whereby a cardholder, when forced to open a door under duress, shall be able to send a high priority alarm up to the operator, in order to alert security of the fact. For the cardholder’s safety, the raising of this alarm must not have any obvious effect at the door concerned. The alarm should not be evident at the card reader. The access checks normally executed by the system (e.g. Person is authorized for that door, at that time and that day of the week), shall still be enforced for a duress access event.

1.24. Silent Alarm: Silent Alarm push button/ Call button shall be mounted under counter desk or flush wall mounted. The Silent alarm push button shall be connected to the nearby access control panel as alarm input for monitoring by the alarm monitoring system. Configuration of such requirement should be done at the software level. The alarm shall be installed at all entrance points / security checkpoints as panic alarm initiation devices configured to a nearby Access Control Panel as alarm input.

1.25. ACS shall be configured to enable full monitoring including display of alarm and access control activities

1.26. An unlimited number of user defined alarms shall be able to be added to the system. Atleast 5000 states/alarms should be preconfigured. These will be assigned to the change of state of an input. It shall be configured in such a way that the alarm will only be cancelled when the input returns to its normal state.

1.27. Alarm shall be generated for various card access systems.

348

These alarms shall include but not be limited to: Invalid Card, Expired cards, Wrong Time zone, Card blocked.

1.28. The system shall allow each door to be configured to cause a variety of alarm to occur based upon activity at that door. These alarms shall include but not be limited to: Door half open, Door forced open, Door opened under duress, enclosure tampering, controller failure / communication loss, turnstile malfunction, boom barrier malfunction, card reader tampering, card reader failure/communication loss, Cable tamper (Supervised), power loss, low battery

1.29. Each alarm shall be able to be configured with following data as a minimum: alarm type (intrusion duress); Priority number (1-99) Date and time of occurrence; Description of the point going into alarm (minimum 80 characters); Alarm and trouble response instruction; and Operator identity: The operator who acknowledge the alarm, their name will be displayed at all monitoring stations.

1.30. System shall allow for programming of alarm message text for each alarm points. The alarm message text shall clarify the summarized point description and include alarm response action, contact names and telephone numbers. Should any incident, for eg. Fire or duress , happen the system should be capable display the action plan or standard procedure/documents to the operator.

1.31. The display shall be in English language and shall be require undue interpretation of information displayed.

2.32. The alarms, if required, could be able to be populated in upto three separate alarm/event window depending upon the priority. "The system must handle up to 5000 alarms/events simultaneously. A minimum of 500 events per second must be handled even on a long term."

1.33. The system, with help of third party SMS device, should be able to send SMS defining the alarm details, location etc. to pre-defined telephone numbers (defined as per the alarm location) without requiring manual /operator intervention. SMS integration can be provided using relays.

1.34. It shall be possible to perform the following alarm monitoring and notification tasks from the ACS Workstation: Acknowledgement as alarm Reset an acknowledged alarm Control a security system point

349

Respond to a security alarm Change an access level and download it to all affected controllers (by authorized user only) Display multiple alarm events, either directly on any of upto four associated monitors

1.35. All connected workstation on the LAN/Proposed Wireless Connectivity Link shall have a simultaneous operating capability.

1.36. The system shall support both manual and automatic responses to alarms entering the system. Each alarm shall be capable of initiating a number of different actions, such as activation of remote devices, door control, and activation of WAV files.

1.37. The system shall provide supervised and non- supervised alarm input point monitoring. The system shall be capable of arming or disarming alarm points both manually and automatically, by time of day, and by day of week.

1.38. Access control functions shall include validation based on time of day, day of week, holding schedule, site code and card number verification, automatic or manual retrieval of cardholder photographs, and access validation based on positive verification of card, card and PIN, card or pin, pin only

1.39. Alarm events with defined priorities shall be indicated by pop-up automatically for operator attention. The alarm events will always be displayed in the designated alarm window. The event inbox shall display the name of the event (reader, alarm point, cardholder or system alarm), time, date, site, account, if a card event the card number, type of event and card holder name. Action plan shall be made available by double clicking on the event.

1.40. The system programming shall be use friendly, for system programming basic computer knowledge is required and a comprehensive know-how about the system.

Quick start guide is available. Programming the system is easy.

1.41. Hardware dongle should be the need of the software but it should only resides on the application server machine Workstations work on Client-Server model. No dongles shall be required at any workstations.

Basic System Capabilities 1.42 Provide storage of all system transaction in a retrievable file.

1.43 Log all events by time and date.

1.44 Provide capability to store all or selected system transaction to a disk file. Event log shall be capable to be backed up on a disk

350

1.45. Provide ability for customer to make any system configuration changes such as, but not limited to door open time, door contact shunt time, point and reader names, when and where a cardholder is valid, and the ability to add or modify card database at any time.

1.46. Support “Global Anti-pass back” upon availibilty of host server.

1.47. Anti-pass back modes shall include hard (no forgiveness) & soft (allow access but generates as alarm event).

1.48. N PERSON ACCESS: The access control management must provide the possibility to allow access to an entrance/door only when at least two authorized cardholders swipe their badges. The number of cardholders for that kind of access check in front of an entrance shall not be limited by the system.

1.49. Ability to monitor the door when a card holder upon swiping the card at the reader and access grant condition, wether has accessed (opened) the door or has not opened the door.

1.50. Allow operator to enter a response to a particular device from device overview feature to an event when acknowledging it from the alarm view window. Alarm could be acknowledged, but auto response should be able to be configured for defined cases

1.51. The "ACS" must support the definition of escalation scenarios if an operator does not react within a defined period of time. The "ACS" forwards the alarm/message automatically to the next defined and authorized operator group when the time period is exceeded. There is no limitation to the escalation levels. If no operator group acknowledges the alarm, the "ACS" supports a separate and automatic way of alarm notification as a final step.

1.52. Provide mode of system operation where when an acknowledged, but not cleared event will be reissued requiring acknowledgement when the event changes to an alarm or trouble state.

1.53. Provide ability for manual operator control of system doors. The manual function shall include the ability to lock, Un- Lock, Disable, Card only, Card –Pin only, Pin only, exit only.

1.54. Provide ability to automatically display stored “image” of cardholder at operator's screen for any user defined card reader locations for any specific access grant/deny event upon swiping of the card.

1.55. Live Video of location shall popup in case of any user defined event at corresponding location. Information in the pop-up shall include, but not be limited to the card holder’s primary image, entrance name, time, date, cardholder name and status. User shall be able to display up to 40 note fields. The size of the pop-ups shall be adjustable by the vendor.

351

2.56. Support multiple card reader technology including: Proximity. Wiegand effect. Biometric / RFIDs. Magnetic strips. Bar Code. Keypad. Card/keypad (PIN). High-Speed long range vehicle ID. Smart Card.

2.57. Provide a means for scheduled automatic backups of any or all database system files. If there will be any storage space related constraint come auto backup of event database shall take place. A means to restore these files from a simple menu shall exist.

2.58. Provide a system scheduler that shall automatically: Initiate a pre-programmed command event/action.

2.59. Provide drop boxes for all system-required information that the user has previously entered.

2.60. Provide a simple card and card holder database import utility. The utility shall be password protected and accessible only to administrators of the access control system. Information that can be imported shall include but not be limited to: First Name, Last Name, card number, activation date, de-activation date, status, upto 40 note fields and photo images. A simple CSV (Comma separated variable) file shall be used for the importing of data and image file names.Photo images should be able to be imported to the system

2.61. Cardholder information shall include unique card number up to 15 digits and optional personal identification Number.

2.62. Any number of access level can be granted to a card holder. It should be also possible to define the expiry date of the card of a particular cardholder.

2.63. Provide special card option that include, but not limited to: Time schedule reference, which defines valid time. Visitor use, which provide a specific activation date and expiration date (Spanning years). Trigger control value, which can initiate a predefined procedure at the intelligent control independent from any control function from the system computer.

2.64. Provide a card”trace” function. The Trace function shall allow normal access control, but will provide a tracking alarm at the system monitor.

2.65. Provide ability to store digital images of card holder shall be associated with the card holder.

2.66. Provide the ability to prioritize specific alarm events from 1 to 100 with separate priority options shall included but not limited to Anti-pass back, trace, PIN Violation, Normal, Not found, Expired, Host Grant, Site Code and Time Zone card activities or violations.

2.67. Upon editing card information, the updated information shall be sent automatically to appropriate access control panel, when hardwired, with no other user intervention. User

352

information should be updated in database instantaneously upon editing. The modified access rights should be downloaded to controller in real time and if the network is down it should be updated as soon as controller is on-line.

2.68. Provide a template of a defined access level detail, where changes can be made to the template and saved as a new access level detail.

2.69. Provides a feature that allow grouping of entrance. User shall have the ability to group program al entrances on the branch or make specific changes to individual entrances.

2.70. Provide color for each specific alarm point action of “Alarm”, “Normal” and “trouble”, conditions.

2.71. Provide the ability to access the default floor plan graphic for any active alarm points by a right click option.

2.72. Provide display of system activity with the higher priorities displayed at the top of the list with identical points stacked with a frequency count of each point’s change of state.

2.73. Provide a display of the most current transaction in real time.

2.74. Provide an alarm view filter that is structured as a tree allowing the operator to select individual devices to be viewed.

2.75. Provide a “System” alarm upon a loop integrity violation.

2.76. Provide a “Panel Not Responding” alarm if communication to the panel is lost.

2.77. Provide color and icon shapes for each specific alarm point action of “Alarm”, “Normal”, “Trouble” and “shunted”.

2.78. Access control panels in the alarm tree, like alarm points, shall also indicate if they are in buffered mode of operation as well as any “system” related alarm such as “Tamper” or “ Primary Power Loss” or Loss of communication.

2.79. The software shall allow the assignment of operator level to define the system components that each operator has access to view, operate, change or delete.

2.80. The ability to view, edit or delete cardholder sensitive information such as note fields, card numbers and PIN shall be definable by field per operator.

2.81. Define the operator profile that will restrict operator to certain operations only. Access configuration of VIPs could be handled only by any/ or designated operator.

353

2.82. Reports: Provide reporting capability for printing of selected system transactions fom the disk files by specific time and date selection, range from time and date to time and date, or from start time to end time each day of the selected date range.

2.83. Provide feature to generate a history report for an alarm point(s) state. An alarm point state shall be defined as normal, Alarm, Trouble, or Ajar.

2.84. "Provide feature to generate a history report of system alarms. A system alarm state shall be defined by panel and include any of the following information: communication, ground fault, power, panel reset, low voltage, panel tamper and loop communication."

2.85. Provide feature to generate a event log report for a card(s) state, A Card state shall be defined as Normal, Trace, Not found, Anti-pass back Violation, PIN Violation, Time zone violation, Expired card. Additional search criteria shall include card holders that meet up to at least 3-note field restriction and filter the report with defined reader location(s).

2.86. Provide feature to generate a Event Log report for system operator(s) activities. The report shall include time, date, operator name the device associated with the action and the type of action performed by the operator. Activities shall include but not limited to: Acknowledged and cleared transaction, door mode, door and relay control such as unlock, lock; door and input control such as shunt, unshunt; login, logout, panel initialization, panel buffer and panel unbuffer.

2.87. Using Report Builder software it should be possible to define how long a card holder has been in a defined area. This report shall allow the time to be accumulated representing an attendance report. The definable filters shall include time/date range, reader(s) definition, card number, card holder and note field. The output of the report shall allow sort options to include First Name, Last Name, Event time and card Number. The sorted data shall be selectable as Alpha or Numeric sorting and Ascending or Descending.

2.88. Provide a means to create report templates. Report templates shall include, but not be limited to, History and card holder informations.

2.89. A tracking feature shall allow the system operator to identify an area and the person(s) in that area.

2.90. Area shall be defined by readers representing an IN or OUT read status.

2.91. Defined areas shall provide an automatic update of how many cardholders are in the area.

2.92. An area defined as an exit shall remove the person from the tracking area.

354

2.93. "Seamless Integration with PA or Evacuation Management The Management system must allow to trigger automatically announcements in a public address/evacuation system. With the Management system timer functions, progressive evacuation scenarios must be definable. This allows, for example, the triggering of the same announcement with a defined delay for different floors. Management system must allow to integrate and monitor all critical PA/VA devices like network controllers, amplifiers, call stations, network bridges like CobraNet or Dante/OMNEO. A seamless integration of PA/VA call management into the UI of the management system and display the current states of the audio zones in the AutoCAD maps must be possible."

2.94. "Seamless Integration with Video Management The Management system must allow to link directly to connected video systems. It can display live video from one or more dedicated cameras, in the same user interface for the surveillance of an escape route for example. At the same time, the Management system allows the automatic trigger of alarm archives in corresponding OPC compliant DVR systems. Links to such alarm archives must be stored in the Management system event log, and allow direct access to the archive when generating reports."

2.95. "Interface with Fire alarm system The Management system must allow to switch individual detectors or detector groups into maintenance mode, for operational testing on the fire system and the connected detectors. Activating a fire detector by using test gas or heat causes a maintenance alarm inside the Management system, and is handled according to the configuration.

The Management system must allow to deactivate/block individual fire detectors. This helps prevent false alarms if, for example, welding is taking place in the vicinity of a detector or detector group.

The actual status of the fire system, down to the individual detectors, must be visualized real- time in the device overview."

2.96. "3rd Party System Support The Management system must provide the connection of OPC-compliant 3rd party systems,

integrating them into the entire security solution. The following systems should be supported as subsystems: - Building automation systems - Perimeter fence/wall control systems - IP network and device monitoring - Intercom systems - Emergency exit management - And so on

The Management system must be able to perform a selective import of the existing 3rd party subsystem configuration, such as detector addresses and corresponding event states.

355

The Management system must provide at least the possibility to monitor the status of such subsystems and their peripheral devices. If supported by the subsystem, control is also possible.

The Management system must provide the definition of the specific event states as an alarm event, which are handled in the central Management system alarm management and monitoring with all corresponding alarm documents and location maps."

2.97. "Parking Lot Management The access control management shall allow the administration and control of parking lots. This includes the administration of the access authorization and the control of barriers and traffic lights. The system must provide the possibility to limit the number of vehicles inside a parking lot so that a balancing is possible, and the traffic lights are controlled accordingly. " A view displaying all card holders in a defined tracking or muster area shall have the ability to be sorted in columns where by clicking on the column the data in the column shall be sorted. At a minimum, the column can be sorted by: Card Number, Status, Card Holder, Reader and Time/Date. The access control management must support the defining of areas. An operator must be able to create separate areas for persons and vehicles (parking lots). Areas have to be assignable to entrances, allowing the tracking of persons, area balancing, and mustering. Passing an entrance/reader assigned to a parking lot shall show the location of the person’s car, or the location of the people using other entrances/readers.

2.98. A Muster area shall be defined by a reader(s) used to “muster” individuals in the event of an emergency. The access control management must allow area balancing. All doors to an area must have an entrance and exit reader, allowing an exact tracking and counting of people inside an area. In case of an emergency, the system must provide an area muster list. It must be possible to use the area balancing to interact with other subsystems connected to the Management system. For example, it must be possible to switch on/off the lights inside an area, when the first person enters or last person leaves.

2.99. Reports can be generated for the defined muster or tracking area.

2.100. Report can be generated for all muster or tracking areas in the system.

2.101. Reports can be sorted on time and date, Card number, card holder name or mismatching note field.

2.102. Tracking areas can include “nested’ areas. Nesting allows for various reports from a large area to smaller areas within a large area.

356

2.103. A Tracking and muster area screen shall be continually updated with the most recent card activity, therefore minimizing the time required generating a report.

2.104. Time Schedules: Time schedule definitions shall include Starting time, Ending time, Days of the week and Holiday override.

2.105. Time shall be definable in either AM/PM time.

2.106. Maximum time schedules that can be defined in a system shall be 255.

2.107. Graphics: Provided the ability to import floor plan graphics stored in AutoCAD DWF format. The ACS must support the display of location maps in AutoCAD DWF format and other bitmap and vector graphics format. Drawings from AutoCAD versions up to 2011 must be supported

2.108. Provide the ability to associate all Abstract Devices (AD’s) to floor plan graphic allowing the user to control and monitor the system.

2.109. Provide the ability to link floor plan (using CAD files) graphics together in a hierarchy fashion.

2.110. Allow multiple floor plan views to be displayed on selection from GUI but one at a time.

2.111. Provide capability to place remote control panel in server offline mode. In the offline mode, the remote control panels shall be capable of taking access decissions and shall retain all panel history events.

2.112. Ability to manage any number of remote locations.

2.113. the computer will automatically start uploading and downloading information to remote sites as there is any configuration changes. Information to be sent to the panel shall include Card Number, time, date and Access configurations Information received from the panel shall include all buffered events. When connected to the remote site, the system software shall poll, verify and report any loss of panel communication, If the site’s communication time is longer than expected, the system will automatically adjust the time schedule to allow the selected sites to be updated.

2.114. The system shall be able to receive or send information to remote access control panels on demand. The informations are Rx /Tx on real-time basis. In case of server down time, the informations shoul sync as soon as server is online.

2.115. ID Badging: Allow any card data fields to be assigned to a badge. The access control management must provide a tool for designing badges. The tool supports the input of

357

bitmaps, text, and database fields, such as name or badge number. The tool supports standard badge printers that come with a Windows compliant printer driver.

2.116. Allow a stored cardholder image to be associated to any background. Each cardholder can have any one of the background layouts.

2.117. Badges shall be printed without the need to assigned an access level or access control card number. Numbers and access levels may be assigned after the Print process.

2.118. Provide image export capability. Image shall be exported utilizing the cardholder’s unique database ID as the file name in .jpg format.

2.119. Provide unlimited custom badge layouts.

2.120. Provide color palette for background design or foreground ext.

2.121. Provide ability to implement all fonts, English supported by Windows.

2.122. Provide import capabilities of background image for card layout information via BMP & JPG files

2.123. Provide import capabilities of video images for compatible BMP, JPG, PCX, or TGA file formats.

2.124. Provide for multiple bitmap images to be imported onto the badge layout.

2.125. Provide video capture capability from a compatible video capture device, such as a high-resolution color camera.

2.126. Provide badges in horizontal or vertical format.

2.127. Provide ability for multiple card enrollment/Badging stations on networked system. The access control management must provide a tool for designing badges. The tool supports the input of bitmaps, text, and database fields, such as name or badge number. The tool supports standard badge printers that come with a Windows compliant printer driver.

2.128. Provide line, rectangle, round rectangle, and ellipses to be created on the backdrop with provisions for line thickness and color.

2.129. Provide signature capture or import capability for up to 99 signatures that can be previewed in the cardholders badge or printed on the cardholder’s card.

2.130. Provide the capability to have a front layout selected for a cardholder and the ability to print the card in one step.

358

2.131. Provide networking capabilities via LAN or PROPOSED WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY.

2.132. Provide the ability for a network system to support atmost 50 no. of concurrent users. i.e., one station adding cards and making badge, another station monitoring alarms, yet another running data base repots, another controlling door openings and alarm shunting, and so on.

2.133. The UI of configuration window should be different from system monitoring window

2.134. Raw database shall not be able to be browsed or modified. Any modification, if required, could be done only through the access control software. However, the database could be able

1 ACCESS CONTROLLER

1.1 Upto 4 card reader inputs (Wiegand) & Multi digital input/output Controllers for connecting Electro-Magnetic lock, and for door sensors:

The controller shall have minimum 8 digital input/output. reader control, digital inputs, outputs, communication ports (wiegand) for connecting to the smart card readers, Door electromagnet, Door sensor and ethernet connectivity for connecting to the Database server. Additionally 4 reader inputs can be added using extension module to cover a large geographical area by a single controller which shall expand the capability to 8 Readers It shall have extra provision for inputs and outputs for expansion for upto 64 I/O points Once extended, the basic access controller shall also show the states of the I/O extensions in its display. The I/O extensions must also be rail mountable. Shall perform in a peer to peer network with other controllers Card Holder Memory: 2,00,000 card holders Event buffer size: maximum of 4,00,000 events with date and time stamp. Shall have built in RTC calendar Shall have inbuilt linear power supply required for internal operation. Battery Backup (Sealed maintenance free batteries): 4 – 8 hrs (Fully operational, shall be able to control EM locks) DIN Rail Mountable Suitable to work with 230 Volts, AC power supply (single phase). Shall have minimum 8 lock outputs.

1.2 The controller shall provide access control processing and host functionality for 8 readers maximum.

1.3 The controller shall accept Wiegand output card readers and card formats up to 64 bits in length.

359

1.4 The controller shall provide a complete. Fully featured access control hardware and firmware infrastructure for host-based access control software applications.

1.5 The controller shall communicate with hosted access control software using TCP/IP protocol over Ethernet.

1.6 Controller itself will be capable of taking access decisions for the doors associated with it. Upon connection with the host access control software application, the Controller shall upload all buffered off-line transaction to the host software.

1.7 The controller shall have on board LCD Display to see the status of controller indicating the IP Configurations, online/offline server etc..

1.8 The Controller shall provide min. 2GB on-board Flash memory to allow program updates to be downloaded directly via the network.

1.9 Specifications a. Memory: Card Holder memory: 4,00,000 cards Event Buffer size: Max 4,00,000 events (with date & time stamp) Flash Memory: Min 2GB, on board b. Communications 10/100 Ethernet RS 485 for Extension modules I/Os: 8 per controller

c. Battery backup: Sealed Maintenance Free Batteries 4 – 8 hrs (Fully operational with control of EM locks) d. Environmental Operating Temperature : 0 to 45 degree Celcius Humidity : 5% to 95% relative, non-condensing e. Input Power: 110 - 230V, Single Phase AC Power Supply: Linear f. Certification: CE, EN, UL

3 BIOMETRIC READER

3.1 Provide surface mounting style 13.56 MHz contactless smart card + Fingerprint readers suitable for minimal space mounting configurations

3.2 Contactless smart card readers shall comply with ISO 15693 and shall read credentials that comply with these standards.

3.3 The fingerprint reader shall read a fingerprint template(s) from a Smart Card and verify with a live finger placed on the fingerprint sensor, once verified, a pre-programmed access control identification number is transmitted back to the host panel.

360

3.4 A 3x4 keypad which can provide supplemental PIN operation. The keypad shall provide the most popular industry formats including 4 bit or 8 bit bursts for every key press.

3.5 Data security with contactless cards shall use 64-bit authentication keys to reduce the risk of compromised data or duplicate cards. The contactless smart card reader and cards shall require matching keys in order to function together. All RF data transmission between the card and the read

3.6 Ability to store upto 2 templates on the card

3.7 Option of a dedicated Enrolment unit or Reader + Enrolment unit.

4 MIFARE SMART CARD READER Functional Objectives 4.1 The Contact less Smart card reader shall provide authentication by reading the Card ID & controller will compare with database and actuating the barrier/turnstile.

4.2 Surface mounting style 13.56 MHz contactless smart card readers suitable for minimal space mounting configurations

4.3 Contactless smart card readers shall comply with ISO 15693 and shall read credentials that comply with these standards.

4.4 It shall be plug & Play type with suitable locking devices.

4.5 It shall operate on its own. No software control is required for configuring the threshold sensitivity for readers

4.6 The contactless smart card reader shall provide the ability to change operational features in the field through the use of a factory-programmed command card. Additionally, firmware may be updated by flashing the reader. Command card operational programming options shall include:

4.7 A 3x4 keypad which can provide supplemental PIN operation. The keypad shall provide the most popular industry formats including 4 bit or 8 bit bursts for every key press.

4.8 It shall be possible to exchange the smart card reader without needing to reprogram the control unit

4.9 The fault of /at one smart card reader shall not affect the functioning of other smart card readers on the network.

361

4.10 The readers shall be powered by field panels itlself. No external power supply should be used for powering the reader

4.11 The Card reader shall confirm to ISO 14443

4.12 The Card reader shall be capable of reading the selected card technologies. (HID iClass/MiFareDESFire EV1 within the 13.56 MHz range).

4.13 Shall use 64-bit authentication keys to reduce the risk of compromised data or duplicate cards. The contactless smart card reader and cards shall require matching keys in order to function together. All RF data transmission between the card and the reader shall be encrypted, using a secure algorithm.

4.14 It shall have a read range of 5 cm – 7.5 cm when used with the accepted compatible access card technology

4.15 Each reader shall communicate directly back to the controller in a supervised mode.

4.16 The reader shall require that a card, once read, must be removed from the RF field for approximately one second before reading again, to prevent multiple reads from same card and anti-pass back errors.

4.17 It shall be capable of providing a unique tone and/or tone sequences for various status conditions such as access granted, access denied, reader power up, etc., and clear visual status LED indication (multi color) shall be provided for various status conditions. 4.18 The reader shall be manufactured using the latest and most accurate state-of-the art technology, and it shall provide for high speed processing

4.19 LED shall be provided for feedback on read process

4.20 It shall be able to read the smart card and send the data to the controller within 500 ms.

4.21 Reader should have a tri-color light emitting diode (LED) and audible annunciators.

4.22 Reader shall flash the LED green momentarily and emit a short beep to indicate that a card was read.

Specifications: 4.23 Reader Type: Contact less smart card 4.24 Mount type: Single Gang / Mullion 4.25 Keypad: Integrated / Optional 4.26 Reader Output format: Wiegand 4.27 Read Range: 5 cm – 7.5 cm

362

4.28 LED/Beep: Tricolor LED + Beep 4.29 Wiegand Interface: Yes 4.30 Voltage: 10~16 V DC (Suitable Power adapter for work with 230V AC) 4.31 Operating Temp oC: -35 to 65 degree C 4.32 Operating Humidity % : 5 to 95 Relative Humidity non condensing 4.33 Housing material: UL 94 Polycarbonate 4.34 Verification Time < 1 second 4.35 Mounting: Single Gang / Mullion 4.36 Transmit frequency 13.56 MHz 4.37 Compatible Cards: “Mifare DESFire EV1” OR HID iClass” 4.38 ISO Standard support 14443A / 15693 4.39 Date encryption Between card and reader: 64 -bit 4.40 Enrolment time < 3 second 4.41 Certification UL / CE/FCC / IP55

4.42 Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following physical specifications: a. Dimensions: 1.90” x 4.04” x .80” (4.83cm x 10.26 cm x 2.03 cm) b. Weight: 3.2.oz (90.7 g)

4.43 Others: a. Suitable for installation on metal surface b. Suitable to withstand exterior installation and / or harsh environments

5 SMART CARDS

5.1 The Cards shall be upto 4 Kilobytes memory & shall meet ISO 15693 and ISO 14443B2 standards for contactless smart cards

5.2 The card will have a Secure Format . It shall be factory programmed in Application Area 1 for use with access control systems. 5.3 Cards shall be durable, made of PVC and meet ISO 7810 standards for length, width, thickness and construction.

5.4 Cards shall be capable of accepting a slot punch on one end, allowing it to be hung from a strap or clamp in a vertical orientation.

5.5 The Card shall meet the following minimum requirement: 5.6 Cards shall contain a contact less smart chip that operates at 13.56 MHz and shall conform to ISO 15693 and ISO 14443B2 standards for contactless smart cards.

5.7 The Card shall have 32 application areas to support other applications.

363

5.8 The data inside the card shall be secure with a unique, diversified security key with 64 bit encryption as a minimum so that data stored in that area cannot be accessed or modified unit the card and reader have completed a mutual authentication process.

5.9 Card shall support read/write capability with a minimum 32 Kbits (4kB) of EEPROM memory. 5.1 The cards shall meet ISO 7810 specifications and shall be in form suitable for direct two sided dye-sublimation or thermal transfer printing.

5.11 The cards shall be capable of completing any write operation, even if the card has been removed from RF field during that operation.

5.12 The card shall meet the following environmental specifications:

5.13 Operating Temperature: - -35 to 65 degrees C and Operating Humidity 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing

5.14 The card shall be warranted against defect in material and workmanship for lifetime.

5.15 The Card shall be compatible with the photo imaging card printer such that cardholder images shall be printed directly onto the access card.

5.16 The card shall be laminated and will be embossed with a unique hologram/negative watermark of user photograph, which will act as a security feature.

5.17 The card will be color coded as per the type of the user.

5.18 The design of the unique security feature, the color coding patterns and the overall card design will be finalized along with the finalized bidder.

5.19 The smart card shall be supplied with 1 meter pre printed lanyard & a solid/rigid plastic card holder with slots for clip or lanyard

6 LONG RANGE READER (6 METER)

6.1 IP65 Certification: The Long Range Reader shall be IP65 certified (for outdoor use) by the Government of India approved/affiliated Laboratory

6.2 Wiegand communication: The reader shall be able to decode and communicate the tag ID read in 26 bit format to the controller on the wiegand interface

6.3 Communication Interface Protection: The Long Range Reader shall comprise of opto- isolator for optical isolation of Long Range Reader Wiegand communication Line/Interface from the controller unit for lightning, magnetic interference and surge protection.

364

6.4 Power Supply: The DC power adapter for the Long Range Reader shall be enclosed in an IP65 rated enclosure and shall be installed within 2 meter distance of the Long Range Reader to avoid power losses.

6.5 Reading Modes: The Reader shall be configurable to operate in various modes such as continuous read mode, trigger activated read mode and command mode.

6.6 Tag Read Indication: The tag read shall be indicated via an in build buzzer

6.7 Frequency: The Reader shall operate in 865-867 MHz frequency band

6.8 The reader shall provide the functionality to filter out the duplicate tag IDs during the specified time interval

6.9 The Reader shall fully support Anti-collision protocol, EPC Gen2 and ISO 18000-6B tag type

6.10 The Reader shall be provided along with an in built or an external 12dbi Linearly Polarized antenna and shall support only one such antenna.

6.11 The Reader along with antenna shall not be bigger than 450mm X 450mm

6.12 The Read distance shall be upto 6 meters

6.13 The reader/antenna shall be easily mountable on a metallic pole and shall be supplied along with mounting brackets and screws such that the antenna orientation can easily be adjusted left-right or up-down

6.14 Reader Operating Temperature: -20o to +65o C

7 LONG RANGE TAGS (6 METER)

7.1 The Long Range tags shall be pre-programmed with an unique ID in 26 bit format

7.2 The Tag shall be provided along with the bar-code label identifying the tag ID

7.3 The pre-programmed tag ID shall be tamper proof

7.4 The Long Range Tags shall be physically Tamper proof (On any attempt to remove the tag, the tag should become permanently non-functional)

7.5 The Tags shall be self-adhesive and shall provide strong adhesion on vehicle windshield/asset surface even at high temperatures

365

7.6 The Tags shall be rugged

7.7 The tag shall be EPC Gen2 compliant

7.8 The Tag shall provide the read distance of upto 6 meters in an ideal scenario on non- metallic surface with the compatible Long Range Reader with minimum operating power of - 15dBm

7.9 The Tag shall provide the read distance of upto 1.5 meters in an ideal scenario on metallic surface with the compatible Long Range Reader with minimum operating power of -15dBm

7.10 The Tags shall be passive and operate in 860-960 MHz frequency band

7.11 Tag Operating Temperature: -40O to +65O C

8 SPECIFICATIONS OF SINGLE LEAF MAGNETIC DOOR LOCKS: UL LISTED

1. Low energy consumption (DC 12V / 24V) 2. Silent and continuous duty operation 3. Applicable to wide variety of swing and sliding door 4. Instantaneous release in the event of emergency 5. 600 lbs holding force with LED indicator 6. Safety feature: LED will be GREEN color if the door is closed properly. Otherwise,

LED will be RED color.

9 Specifications of Magnetic Contacts / Door Position Sensor: UL Listed

1. The magnetic contact shall be of flush / surface mount type. 2. The contacts shall be corrosion resistant and completely hermetically sealed. 3. 3 million cycles of operation shall not affect the contact.

10 Specifications of Door Release switch (Exit Switch):

1. Type :Press to Exit 2. Operating Voltage : 24V DC 3. Safety :Complies to CE standards 4. Colour :White

K) Specifications of Single Leaf Panic Bar with Sounder:(UL listed)

1. Corrosion resistant lock body 2. Saw-resistant deadbolt

366

3. 110 decibel alarm 4. Suitable for Wood, Hollow metal or Aluminium doors 5. Monitoring switch on push bar should be available 6. Locking and unlocking the dead bolt feature should be available. 7. Resetting the alarm only through control key.

CHAPTER –IX

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM

VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

I Video Management System General Description

A. The video management system (VMS) specified is an enterprise-class client/server based IP video security solution that provides seamless management of digital video, audio and data across an IP network. The video management system is designed to work with same brand of CCTV products as part of a total video security management system to provide full virtual matrix switching and control capability. The video management system consists of the following software modules: central server, recording services, configuration client, and Operator Clients. Video from the site may be viewed from single or numerous workstations simultaneously at any time. Cameras, recorders, and viewing stations may be placed anywhere in the IP network.

B. The VMS shall support the following recording services: a. Video Recording Manager (VRM) b. Local Storage and Direct-to-iSCSI recording c. Recording Stations c. The software components of the video management system can be deployed on separate PCs and servers to meet systems requirements.

367

d. The central server and the Video Recording Manager shall run as services on latest Windows Server OS e. The Configuration Client software shall run as an application on latest Windows Server OS f. The Operator Client software shall run as an application on latest Windows OS.

II Video Management System

A. The video management system (VMS) specified shall be a centrally managed, scalable client/server based architecture that allows full virtual matrix switching and control systems.

B. The VMS shall be designed to use a structured cabling IT infrastructure and require no special cabling.

C. The VMS shall provide a built-in command script editor that allows customized command scripts to be written to control virtually all the system functions. Command scripts may be activated by system operators or automatically in response to alarms or system events. The built-in command script editor shall support C# and VB.NET.

D. The VMS shall support Security Systems MPEG-4 and H.264 or H 265 encoders, decoders, IP cameras, IP Domes, iSCSI disk storage (also supporting MPEG-2) and other compatible ATM bridge.

E. The VMS shall support Operator Clients that can playback iSCSI disk array storage and VRM recordings at the same time.

F. The VMS may allow Operator Clients to export all recording listed in (E) to one single archive

G. The VMS specified shall support the English language or shall use the same language as the Operating System language.

H. The VMS shall provide up to 10 different and independent programmable recording schedules. The schedules may be programmed to provide different record frames rates for day, night, and weekend periods as well as special days. Advanced task schedules may also be programmed that could specify allowed logon times for user groups, when events may trigger alarms, and when data backups should occur.

I. The VMS shall allow the establishment of user groups that have access rights to specific cameras, priority for pan/tilt/zoom control, rights for exporting video, and access rights to system event log files. Access to live, playback, audio, PTZ control, preset control, and auxiliary commands shall be programmable on an individual camera basis.

J. The VMS shall support Dual Authorization logon. It shall function as follows: a. Dual Authorization user groups may be created.

368

b. Logon pairs, consisting of any two normal user groups, may be assigned to each dual Authorization user group. c. A separate set of privileges and priorities can be assigned for each Dual Authorization user group. d. For each user group assigned as part of a logon pair, it shall be configurable whether the group can log on either individually or as part of the logon pair- Or log on only as part of the logon pair. e. If a user that is part of logon pair logs on individually, then he shall receive the privileges and priorities of his assigned user group. If the same user logs in as part of a logon pair, i.e. being authorized by the second user, then the user shall receive the privileges and priorities assigned to the Dual Authorization group to which the pair is assigned. f. The logbook shall log the log on procedure to identify a single user or a dual authorization log on. Subsequent user actions shall be logged as the actions of the first user.

K. The VMS shall interface with the Intelligent Video Analysis (IVA) techniques of the cameras or the video analytic server to provide advanced motion detection that analyzes object size, direction, and speed as well as detecting objects entering or leaving designated areas.

L. The VMS shall support configuring the IVA parameters from the Configuration Client.

M. The VMS shall react to events triggered by the IVA of the IP cameras for edge based analytics

N. The VMS shall react to events triggered by the IVA of the server

O. The VMS workstations may be connected to monitors or video wall where each monitor may be configured to display live streaming video, playback video, site maps, or alarms.

P. The VMS shall connect to an arrays of 42” monitors displaying 4x3 or 5x4 number of images from all cameras.

Q. The VMS shall support Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) that allows integration with enterprise user management systems such as Microsoft Active Directory.

R. The VMS shall export video and audio data optionally in ASF format to a CD/DVD drive, a network drive, or a USB drive. The exported data in ASF format may be played back using standard software such as Windows Media Player.

S. The VMS shall export video and audio data optionally in its native recording format to a CD/DVD drive, a network drive, or a direct attached drive. The exported data in native recording format shall include all associated metadata. Viewer software shall be included with the export. Once installed, the viewer software allows playback of the streams on any compatible Windows PC.

369

T. The VMS shall auto-discover encoder, decoder, iSCSI disk array, and VRM devices. Device detection shall support devices in different subnets.

U. The VMS shall auto-discover associated IP devices with their default IP addresses, and allow auto-assignment of unique IP addresses.

V. The VMS shall be able to simultaneously configure multiple encoders or decoders, even of different types. When devices of different types are being configured, only the parameters available in all devices are available for configuration.

W. The VMS shall support continuous operation during Central Server down-times as live viewing, playback of recording and export of video data. The Operator Client shall indicate its connection status to the Central Server.

X. The VMS shall be designed in such a way that configuration changes to any part of the system shall not interrupt operational tasks, until the operator decides to update re-fresh the workstation configuration.

III Video Management System Components

A. Central Server software shall provide management, monitoring, and control of the entire system. The central server software should typically be installed on a server-class computer, but may be installed, with all the other video management software modules on one workstation. The Central Server shall also maintain data stream management, alarm management, priority management, central logbook, central configuration and user management.

B. Software updates to the Operator Client and Configuration Client shall be automatically deployed from the Central Server.

C. The VMS software shall provide recording and playback management of video, audio, and data. The VMS software configures the streaming parameters of the assigned devices. The VMS software administers the data on the connected hard disk drives.

D. The VMS shall be designed in such a way the Central Server downtimes do not affect the functionality of the recording services (Video Recording Manager, Recording Station, Local Storage, Direct-to-iSCSI-Recording). Normal recording and Motion recording shall continue during the Central Server downtimes, only Alarm Recording cannot be activated as the Central Server is responsible for evaluating the alarm conditions. During Central Server downtime the recording services shall still be able to change the recording parameters schedule dependent.

E. Configuration Client software shall provide the user interface for system configuration and management.

F. Operator Client software shall provide the user interface for system monitoring and

370

operation. The Operator Client maintains live monitoring, storage retrieval, and alarm handling.

IV Video Recording Manager (VRM)

A. The video management system shall be capable of managing multiple VRMs.

B. The VRM shall be configured from the VMS Configuration Client. It shall be possible to assign encoders and IP cameras to it.

C. The recording parameters shall be configured in the recording tables of the VMS configuration program. These settings will be replicated into the devices from the Central Server.

D. The VRM shall offer system wide recording monitoring and management of iSCSI storage, video servers and cameras.

E. The VRM shall support the encoders and cameras to directly stream the data to the iSCSI storage. The VRM shall not be involved in the processing of the data.

F. The VRM shall manage all disk arrays in the system as a single virtual common pool of storage. It shall dynamically assign portions of that pool to the encoders and IP-Cameras.

G. The proposed network switches shall be compatible with the VRM and the transfer rate of the data from the encoder or IP-Camera shall supported by the network and the iSCSI data throughput rate.

H. The VRM shall provide redundancy main/ hot standby (load sharing) configuration for storage provisioning and failover design for central recording management service.

I. The VRM shall be able to restore a lost recording database from data on the iSCSI storages.

J. The VRM shall provide flexible retrieval of recordings. It shall be able to determine on which iSCSI disk array data from each camera or encoder has been stored.

K. It shall be possible to secure the access to the VRM software with a password. This shall be done in the Configuration Client.

L. The VRM software shall provide status monitoring information as a web interface. The following information shall be provided:

a. Uptime of the VRM software

b. Bit rate information for the recorded data

371

c. Retention times per camera

d. Status on recording and storage

M. The video management system shall allow configuring if playback of recordings is streamed through the VRM or is streamed directly from the iSCSI storage.

N. The video management system shall support to retrieve the playback information, i.e. from which iSCSI storages to retrieve the video, audio and meta-data, either from the Video Recording Manager or directly from the IP encoder or camera. Playback information directly from the IP encoder or camera is limited in time and should be used while the VRM is not available to increase the reliability of the video management system. V Recording Station support

A. The VMS shall be able to integrate Recording Stations. It shall be possible to playback data recorded by Recording Stations. This shall include MPEG-4, H.264 or H 265, and JPEG data.

B. The video management system shall be capable of managing multiple Recording Stations.

C. The cameras connected via Recording Station shall behave the same as VRM managed IP cameras in the video management system Operator Client.

D. The Operator Client shall display live and recorded data from cameras assigned to Recording Stations. In playback mode the Recording Station cameras shall appear in the graphical timeline.

E. Changing the configuration of a Recording Station shall require the Recording Station configuration software.

VI Monitor Support

A. The VMS shall support monitors connected to IP decoders.

B. It shall be possible to configure monitors in full screen mode, quad mode or 9 to 1 monitor configuration. When in any mode, the VMS shall be able to select video and control cameras in any quadrant.

C. It shall be possible to group monitors into Monitor Groups (MGs). An MG shall specify a monitor arrangement of rows and columns.

D. It shall be possible to restrict access to MGs to specified Operator Client workstations.

VII Alarm Management Capability

372

A. The video management system shall provide the capability to allow alarms to be schedule-dependent.

B. The video management system shall allow alarms to be individually allocated to specific user groups for processing.

C. The video management system shall support replication of events such that a single physical event causes multiple system events. These multiple events shall be independently configurable to allow independent handling of the alarms by multiple operator groups, or to be handled differently according to different schedules.

D. The video management system shall be programmable to selectively, per alarm and per user group, automatically pop-up the alarm video.

E. The video management system shall support display of alarm video in a special Alarm Image Window so users do not have to search their display screens to find the alarm images.

F. The video management system shall display alarm video in rows of Alarm Image Panes, with one row per alarm, and with up to 5 Image Panes per row.

G. The video management system's Alarm Image Panes shall be configurable to display live video, playback video, text documents, site maps, HTML files, or web sites (URLs). Per alarm one playback video and one site map can be configured.

H. The video management system's Alarm Image Pane rows shall be displayed in order of their priority, with rows for higher priority alarms always displayed above lower priority alarm rows. The display order for equal priority alarms shall be selectable between new alarms displayed above existing alarms, or new alarms displayed below existing alarms.

I. The video management system shall provide an alarm reaction time of maximum 2 seconds when sufficient network bandwidth is available.

J. The video management system shall distribute alarm notifications, via entries in the alarm list of the operator user interface, to all members of the user groups to which the alarm is assigned. The alarms shall appear in all said users' alarm lists.

K. The video management system shall operate as follows: when an alarm is accepted by a user, it shall be removed from the other users' alarm lists.

L. The video management system shall allow a user to un-accept an alarm he has previously accepted. In this case, the alarm shall re-appear in the alarm lists of all members of the user groups assigned to this alarm.

M. The video management system shall support the association of workflows with alarms.

373

Workflows shall consist of action plans and comment boxes. An action plan shall display a text document, HTML page, or web site that typically contains instructions for handling the alarm. Comments entered in the comment boxes shall be logged in the system logbook

N. The video management system shall be configurable to force an alarm workflow. In this case, the alarm cannot be cleared until the workflow is processed.

O. The video management system shall offer the possibility to automatically clear alarms when the originating event condition is no longer true.

P. The video management system shall allow alarms to be configured to send PTZ cameras to prepositions or to execute camera Aux commands on occurrence.

Q. The video management system shall be configurable to put any IP-connected camera into alarm recording mode on alarm occurrence.

R. The video management system shall be configurable to send an e-mail or SMS message in response to an alarm.

S. The VMS shall be capable of displaying video on monitors connected to video decoders in response to alarms.

T. The VMS alarm response shall take advantage of the row and column arrangement of monitor groups by associating a row of monitors with each active alarm. Each alarm may display video on multiple monitors, limited by the number of columns in the monitor group.

U. As new alarms are received, alarm rows shall stack in priority order on the monitors.

V The VMS shall support for alarms to display video on multiple monitor groups, with configurable assignment of individual assignment of alarms to monitor groups.

VIII Relays and Digital Inputs

A. The open/close states of inputs and relays from devices connected to the system, including IP cameras and PTZ cameras, video encoders and decoders, matrix switchers, and DVRs shall be indicated on the VMS Operator Client user interface and can be queried via the VMS Software Development Kit (SDK).

B. Relays from devices connected to the system shall be controllable from command scripts, the VMS SDK, and icons on the Operator Client user interface.

C. Input and relay state changes from devices connected to the system shall be recognizable as events in the VMS.

374

IX Logbook

A. The system shall protocol every event and alarm in an SQL database. The alarm entry shall contain the camera titles that have been recorded due to this alarm.

B. The logbook shall be able to store at least 500,000 entries per hour. If the capacity of the logbook is filled up the oldest entries will be deleted to create space.

C. The user shall be able to search the logbook for events and alarms. The user shall be able to export the search results into a comma separated value list (CSV).

D. The system shall include and install a ready-to-use SQL database. The system shall optionally allow the usage of a separately installed SQL database.

X Digital I/O Interface Connection

A. The digital inputs and relay outputs shall provide all of the features and functionality described in the Relays and Digital Inputs section of this document.

B. The I/O devices attached to the network shall be automatically discoverable via a network scan.

XI SNMP

A. The video management system shall be capable of monitoring third-party equipment SNMP protocol.

XII Pre-Programmed Camera sequences

A. The video management system shall support pre-programmed camera sequences. These sequences will allow cameras to be automatically displayed on the computer image panes and/or monitors connected to decoders. The sequences shall support simultaneous display on multiple image panes or monitors. The sequences shall also support camera prepositions for each PTZ camera on each sequence step. The system shall be configurable such that operators can select these sequences from the logical tree or a site map.

B. Pre-programmed camera sequences can be displayed in Operator Client and on Monitor Groups.

XIII Command Scripts

A. The video management system shall provide a command script interface that allows system operations to be programmatically controlled.

375

B. The system shall provide a built-in editor for the creation of the command scripts.

C. The system shall be configurable such that operators can execute the created scripts by double-clicking on representative icons in a logical tree or site map.

D. The system shall be configurable such that the created scripts can be executed automatically in response to a system event. The automatic event-driven execution shall optionally be schedule-dependent.

E. The system shall be configurable to execute a user-group dependent command script on user logon.

F. The system shall be configurable to execute an alarm-dependent command script on user acceptance of the alarm.

XIV Virtual Inputs

A. The video management system shall provide a software interface that allows third-party software to generate events in the video management system. The software shall support any COM programming languages (e.g. Visual Basic and C++), any .Net programming language (e.g. C#) or JavaScript.

B. The VMS shall allow third-party software to include up to 10 data fields and an Alarm ID along with the virtual input event.

C. These fields shall be searchable in the system logbook.

D. The virtual input data shall be optionally displayed in the Operator Client playback mode synchronously with the associated video.

XV Software Development Kit (SDK)

A. The video management system shall provide a documented Software Development Kit (SDK) to allow integration to and integration from third-party software.

B. The SDK shall expose all functionality of the command scripts, including, but not limited to:

• Control of operator workstation image window layout

• Assignment of cameras, documents, URLs, and maps to Operator Client workstation image panes

• Assignment of cameras to monitors connected to encoders.

376

• Dome control

• Alarm generation

• Recording mode control

• Exporting recorded data

• Relay control

C. SDK functionality shall require authentication to the system.

D. The SDK shall be accessible from all .Net programming languages.

XVI OPC Interface

A. The VMS shall provide an OPC Server for integration into third-party software systems, such as building-management systems.

B. The OPC interface shall follow the OPC Alarms and Events standard.

XVII Configuration Changes

A. Configuration changes made in the VMS Configuration Client shall modify a working copy of the configuration, and shall not affect the active operating configuration.

B. It shall be possible to activate the working copy through a user action in the Configuration Client, at which point the working becomes the new active operating configuration.

C. It shall be possible to set a date and time in the future at which the working copy becomes active.

D. It shall be possible to view a list of all configuration activations that have been applied to the system. It shall be possible to select any of the activated configurations, and have the system "roll back" to an earlier configuration.

E. It shall be possible to activate a configuration and leave it to the operator to refresh the configuration locally instantly or at a later point in time. It shall be possible to enforce a configuration activation for every Operator Client connected to the Central Server.

XVIII Operator Client

A. The video management system shall provide an administrator-configured Logical Tree.

377

The logical tree shall be freely configurable with any tree structure, with nodes consisting of folders or maps, and leaves consisting of devices (cameras, inputs, and relays), sequences, documents, URLs, or command scripts. Each user group shall only see items in the logical tree for which the administrator has granted access.

B. The user shall be able to search the logical tree for item names.

C. The video management system shall provide a user-dependent Favorites Tree. The Favorites tree shall allow maps, folders, and devices and complete views (image pane patterns with camera assignments) to be configured by each user in a user-defined structure. The user's favorites tree shall be available irrespective of the computer with which he logs on to the system.

D. The video management system shall provide an Image Window that displays a collection of Image Panes. The layout shall be optimized for standard and widescreen monitors. With standard monitors the number of image panes per image window shall be variable between 1 (a single full-window video) and 25, arranged in a 5x5 grid. A slider shall be available allowing the grid size to be changed from 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, and 5x5. With widescreen monitors the number of image panes per image windows shall be variable between 1 and 30, arranged in grids of 1x1, 3x2, 4x3, 5x4, and 6x5. The VMS shall allow image panes to be enlarged or decreased in size within the grid. E.g., in a 5x5 grid, a single image pane can be enlarged to use 4 of the grid elements, creating a larger image within the grid. Any pattern can be created within the grid structure. An image pane can be resized by clicking and dragging on any corner, dragging the corner to the desired size.

E. The video management shall implement the concept of a selected image pane. The selected image pane shall be highlighted. There shall always be a selected image pane in the Operator Client application. The selected image pane is always used for control commands, e.g. PTZ control, instant playback control, and audio replay.

F. The video management system shall support encoders and IP cameras.

G. The video management system shall support site maps with hot-spot icons for devices (cameras, relays, and inputs), command script initiation, camera sequence initiation, and links to other site maps. The site maps shall be capable of being zoomed. The hot- spot icons shall be configurable to optionally display the device name or link title.

H. The Operator Client shall display live streams from encoders or IP cameras.

I. The video management system shall support automatic sequencing. It shall be possible for users to multiple-select cameras (control-click or shift click), and drag the multiple- selection to an image pane or a graphic representing a monitor connected to a decoder. All of the cameras in the selection shall then sequence in the image pane or monitor at a user-selectable rate. It

378

shall also be possible to drag a folder to an image pane or monitor. In this case, all of the cameras contained within the folder shall sequence.

J. The video management system shall support PTZ control with a dedicated graphical joystick control, supporting Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Iris, Focus and Aux Command operations. It shall also support PTZ control via clicking the mouse in the image panes. For PTZ cameras, the cursor shall change to indicate the Pan/Tilt direction when hovering over the corresponding image pane. The Pan/Tilt speed shall increase as the cursor moves farther from the center of the image pane. An area in the center of the image pane shall be used for zoom-in/zoom-out control. Once zoom is initiated, the zoom speed shall increase as the cursor is moved farther from the center of the image pane.

K. The video management system shall support digital zoom of any image pane. A dedicated graphical control shall be provided in the user interface for this purpose. In addition, the mouse wheel shall control digital zoom when the mouse cursor is hovering over a selected image pane.

L. The video management system shall provide an Instant Playback function that displays recorded images on one or multiple image panes. Recorded images from a single camera may also be played back on multiple panes. Instant playback supports pause, play forward, play reverse, single step forward, single step reverse, fast-forward, and fast-reverse.

M. The video management system shall support a timeline that provides a graphical overview of video stored on the disk. The timeline shall display a timescale that can be adjusted from at least 15-minutes per division to 1 month per division. For each camera displayed in playback mode, the timeline shall provide a line that depicts the video storage for that camera. The line shall be color-coded to show if video is recorded for the displayed time period, and if so, if it is normal recording, motion recording, or alarm recording. The line shall be cross- hatched if the video is protected from deletion. The line shall also indicate if associated audio is recorded during the displayed time period.

N. The video management system shall support simultaneous time-synchronous playback of up to 16 cameras. Playback shall support single-step forward and backwards; play normal speed forward and backwards; play high-speed forward and backwards; and play slow-speed forward and backwards.

O. The video management system shall support search of recorded video for motion in user- specified areas of a camera image. This cell based post-recording motion search will work for cameras recorded by disk array storage.

P. The video management system shall support search of recorded video with at least the following criteria: object size, object color, direction, and speed as well as detecting objects entering or leaving designated areas. This Intelligent Video Analysis (IVA) based post-recording search will work for cameras recorded by VRM and Local Storage.

379

Q. The video management system shall optionally display the information of the video analytics such as cells with detected motion, object masks, and trajectories in live and playback.

R. The video management system shall support searching based on any combination of time/date-rage, event type(s), alarm priority, alarm state, and device(s). It shall be possible to save and recall search parameters.

S. The video management system shall graphically display device states on its icons in the logical tree structure and on sitemaps. For cameras, the states shown shall include: loss of the video signal, network connection loss, video recording, video signal too noisy, video signal too bright, video signal too dark, video de-adjusted, and video includes associated audio. For relays and contact inputs, the open or close state shall be indicated.

T. The video management system shall support switching of cameras to monitors connected to decoders. The cameras shall be selectable via drag and drop from the logical tree or from the sitemaps.

U. The video management system shall support an indication for the Operator Client regarding the connection state to the Central Server. This shall include connected, disconnected, and configuration out-of-sync between Central Server and Operator Client.

V. The video management system shall support a centrally stored user profile to store settings individual for each operator. These settings shall include but are not limited to sequence dwell times, instant playback replay time and image pane ratio settings (16:9 or 4:3) individually per monitor. These settings shall be available independently of the physical workstation to the operator.

XV Audio Intercom Functionality

The video management system shall support bidirectional audio intercom functionality. Audio intercom streams audio data from an operator client Workstation to the audio output of the encoders.

The audio intercom function shall be activated by a button in the operator client Workstation. When the button is pressed the operator shall be able to speak into a microphone on the client computer. The audio shall be transmitted to the audio source which is assigned to the currently selected camera.

CCTV Keyboard Control

The system shall allow system control via the keyboards.

380

The keyboards shall support an Enterprise System, i.e. with a keyboard connected to an Enterprise operator client the desired subsystem’s management server shall be selectable.

Keyboard connections shall be possible to operator client Workstations.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to decoders, it shall be possible to control the analog monitor groups in the system via the CCTV keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to decoders, it shall be possible to control PTZ operation of the selected camera using the keyboard joystick.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to decoders, it shall be possible to control set and call-up PTZ prepositions of the selected camera using the keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to decoders, it shall be possible to execute PTZ and Aux- commands of PTZ Cameras on the selected camera using the keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, it shall be possible to control the current Image Pane selection using the keyboard joystick.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, it shall be possible to control the analog monitor groups in the system or control any Image Pane on the connected operator client Workstation, using the CCTV keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, it shall be possible to control PTZ operation of the selected cameras using the keyboard joystick.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, it shall be possible to control set and call-up PTZ prepositions of the selected camera using the keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, it shall be possible to execute PTZ and Aux-commands of the selected Autodome camera using the keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, it shall be possible to control playback of video, including both Instant Playback and Playback-mode synchronous playback, using the CCTV keyboard.

When CCTV Keyboards are connected to operator client Workstations, playback control should include jog-shuttle emulation using the Keyboard Joystick.

When in Jog-shuttle emulation mode: a) Rotating the Keyboard joystick will control forward and reverse playback, with

playback speed proportional to the amount of joystick rotation. b) Moving the joystick up shall set the video into slow forward playback mode.

Additional upward movements shall incrementally increase forward playback speed c) Moving the joystick down shall set the video into slow backward playback mode.

381

Additional downward movements shall incrementally increase backward playback speed.

d) Moving the joystick right shall set the video into pause mode. Additional rightward movements shall step the video one frame forward.

e) Moving the joystick left shall set the video into pause mode. Additional leftward movements shall step the video one frame backward.

Integration with Intrusion panel

The video management system shall be able to connect to UL-approved intrusion panels and browse the areas and devices configured in the panel in the Configuration Client.

The video management system shall be able to connect to 20 intrusion panels.

The video management system shall be able to map the events of the intrusion panel to events in the video management system in order to use these events in the event and alarm engine of the video management system.

The video management system shall be able to use the events of the intrusion panel to create compound events to trigger actions.

The Operator Client shall indicate the connection and authentication state of the intrusion panels by means of icons.

The video management system shall support the following devices from the intrusion panel: a) Areas b) Doors c) Outputs d) Points

The states of these intrusion devices shall be shown on the icons in the device tree of the operator client as well as on the hot-spot icons of the map. The states that should show are:

The user of an Operator Client shall be able to execute the following operations from the context menu of the intrusion device icons in the device tree as well as from the context menu on the corresponding hot-spot icons on the map:

a) Arm, force arm and disarm areas of an intrusion panels b) Silence areas of the intrusion panel c) Open and close outputs d) Unlock, secure and cycle doors e) Bypass and un-bypass points

All the user actions of the operator with regards to the intrusion devices in the video management system shall be logged

382

The video management system shall provide separate user permissions for the above mentioned operations per user group. A. In the occurrence of an event triggered by the camera due to fire or smoke detection, the

specific alarm shall appear in the Operator Client, indicating, that this alarm is triggered by a fire or smoke detection.

Feature Provision of server based analytics

A. The video management system shall provide an integration with a server based analytics platform which allows to use analytics from many different vendors.

B. On connection with the management server of the video management system, the analytics platform shall retrieve the list of configured cameras into the analytics platform to prevent manual setup of the cameras

C. It shall be possible to configure which video stream (stream 1 or stream 2) provided by the cameras shall be used for the analytics

D. The system should allow the use of a pool of video analytic algorithm on any cameras without limitations. It should be very easy to change an algorithm from a camera to another.

E. The video analytic processing should be able to run on top of a server or to be virtualized using leading virtualization technologies (vmWare, Hyper-V)

F. The video analytic processing should be able to scale seamlessly by adding servers. G. The video analytic processing should be able to be redundant. Server failure should not

impact the functionality of the system, as the analytics on this server failover to another automatically and in a very short time.

H. The system shall offer, at minimum the following video analytic: a. Access Control

i. Iris Recognition ii. NFC+Face Recognition

iii. Palm Veins Recognition iv. Face Recognition

b. Crowd/people management i. Panic

ii. Loitering iii. Tracking People iv. Fall v. Face Recognition

vi. Covered Faces c. Vehicle Management

i. License plate (LPR/ANPR) 1. Being able to cover all countries worldwide

ii. Traffic Management iii. Vehicle Counting iv. Wrong way v. Speed Vehicle

383

vi. Stationary Vehicle d. Freight Management

i. Dangerous Goods ii. Container recognition (ACCR)

iii. Train (LPR/ANPR) iv. Boat (LPR/ANPR)

e. Perimeter, security & safety i. Perimeter and Intrusion

ii. Lost objects iii. Stolen Objects iv. Object Tracking v. Graffiti

vi. Tampering vii. Fire and Smoke

viii. Temperature f. Business Analytics

i. Marketing ii. People Counting

iii. Age and Gender iv. Head Pose v. Expression Recognition

vi. Occupancy Rate vii. Eye Tracking

viii. Queue Management ix. Heat Map x. Bingo Balls

xi. OCR I. It shall be possible to setup several “lists” in the database of the analytics platform. A list

contains License plates or faces and related data. J. The analytics platform shall detect license plates or faces in the live stream provided by

the cameras and shall match them against the license plates and faces stored in data-base of the analytics platform

K. When there is a match an event shall be send to the video management system. Additional data such as the camera and the time of detection shall be included in the event provided to the video management system.

L. When the event provided by the analytics platform triggers an alarm in the Operator Client of the video management system, the following content shall show in a separate Analytics Viewer:

a. The original image of the live camera where the license plate of the face has been detected

b. A cropped extract of the original image just the extracted license plate or face c. The corresponding face or license plate taken from the database of the analytics

platform to allow the operator to compare the captured image with the reference image from data-base

384

d. Additional data related to the face or license plate stored in the data-base of the analytics platform (e.g. name of person etc.)

M. All events and meta-data shall be stored in the logbook of the video management system to allow to search for a license plate or person that triggered an alarm.

Support of video fire detection (Optional)

B. The VMS shall support Video Fire Detection by integrating a Network camera with integrated video-based fire detection and simultaneous intelligent video analysis.

C. Videos shall be processed and analyzed within the camera itself, with no extra hardware required.

D. The video-based fire detection shall offer a fast detection and high false alarm robustness with best picture quality even at challenging light conditions.

E. The video-resolution shall be up to HD with activated video-based fire detection. F. The video-based fire detection shall detect uncovered flames with minimum 1.6% of the

picture width. G. Uncovered uprising smoke shall be detected with minimum 2.3% of the picture width. H. The detection shall detect test fires TF1 to TF8 according to EN54. I. For the detection of flames and smoke a minimum illumination level of 7 Lux shall be

sufficient. J. Results of the video-based fire detection and Intelligent Video Analysis have to be

available as metadata in addition to the video data transmitted for alerting, storage and forensic search.

385

Storage General Characteristics:

The IP Video Storage Appliance shall be a RAID-5 protected, all-in-one recording solution for network surveillance systems of up to 200 channels. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall utilize “enterprise-rated” hard drives in a fault tolerant RAID-5 configuration. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall be a Pre-installed, pre-configured IP storage solution with up to 64 TB storage capacity The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer 576 TB of net capacity storage. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer a bandwidth of 550 Mbit/s. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer a dual port Gigabit Ethernet network interface, 8 GB system memory and an Intel Xeon Processor. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer remote monitoring via a desktop application or a Web browser.

Functions The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer an energy-efficient hot-swap redundant power supply. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer hot-swap SATA-III hard drives providing 64 TB (8X8 TB) of gross storage capacity. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall come pre-installed and pre-configured with all necessary software. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall utilize Microsoft Windows Storage Server 2012 R2. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer Disk on Module (DoM); a solid-state, non-volatile memory module that contains a backup image of all system software needed to a full system recovery.

Management The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer the Microsoft System Center Suite built-in. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall allow operators to use one central tool for configuration and operations management.

Monitoring The IP Video Storage Appliance shall provide SNMP, Remote Desktop and HTTP monitoring support. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer high-availability hardware, embedded design, and system wide monitoring.

Processor The IP Video Storage Appliance shall contain an Intel Xeon Processor E3-1275 V3 (8M Cache, 3.5 GHz). The IP Video Storage Appliance processor shall contain one (1) socket. The IP Video Storage Appliance processor shall feature an 8 MB Intel Smart Cache Memory. The IP Video Storage Appliance processor shall include ECC Unbuffered memory protection.

386

The IP Video Storage Appliance processor shall contain a 1600 MHz maximum front side Bus.

Memory The IP Video Storage Appliance shall have 8 GB, DDR3-1666 ECC UNB (1 x 8 GB) of memory installed.

Storage The IP Video Storage Appliance shall contain 8 GB, DDR3-1666 ECC UNB (1 x 8 GB) storage trays. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall have SATA-3, 7200 RPM 64 M 3.5“RAID-5 configuration hard drives installed. The IP Video Storage Appliance shall offer an 8 ports LSI 3108 SAS3 controller RAID card.

Electrical: A/C input rating: 100 to 240 V / 50 to 60 Hz

Environmental: Operating Temperature: +10°C to +35°C (+50°F to +95°F) Non-operating Temperature: –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F) Operating Relative Humidity: 8 to 90%, non-condensing Non-operating Relative Humidity: 5 to 95%, non-condensing

Certifications and approvals CE & UL

Management Server and Mobile Video Service It is recommended to run the Video Recording Manager and the VMS Management Server on the same computer. Operating System Windows Server 2016 (64-bit) Windows 10 Professional (64bit) CPU Intel Xeon E3-1275 V3 (3.5 GHz, 4-core, 8MB, 84W) RAM 8GB HDD 1 TB and above Free disk space 15GB (+ 15% of the hard-drive after installation) Network 1 Gigabit/s network interface card

Operator Client All-in-One (AiO) Operating System Windows 10 Professional (64bit) CPU Intel Core i7 4770 3.4 GHz (up to 3.9 GHz) RAM 16GB, Keyboard, Mouse HDD 1 TB and above Free disk space Minimum 5GB for Single Site Minimum 10GB for Enterprise Systems Network 1 Gigabit/s network interface card Display resolution 24" LED Monitor Minimum: 1280 x 1024 Maximum: 1920 x 1080

387

Graphic card Nvidia Quadro K620 or P4000 Intel HD Graphics 530

1080P INDOOR IR HD DOME CAMERA:

General Characteristics: • The camera shall be easy to install. • The camera shall offer 1080p resolution at 30 fps. • The camera shall provide direct network connection using H.264 and JPEG

compression and bandwidth throttling to efficiently manage bandwidth and storage requirements while delivering outstanding image quality.

• A user shall be able to view video on a PC using a Web browser • The camera shall have a mechanical IR cut-off filter for true day/night switching. • The camera shall use Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction technology to remove noise

artifacts and reduce the bitrate by up to 50% (giving reduced bandwidth and storage requirements).

• The camera shall utilize Intelligent Defog (iDefog) to effectively remove the haze from the picture and provides a better visibility.

• The camera shall accept power via Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af compliant). • The camera shall offer tamper and intelligent motion detection. • The camera shall offer two-way full duplex audio communication. • The camera shall provide configurable scene modes that give optimized settings for

distinct applications. • The camera shall provide eight independent, fully programmable privacy mask areas. • The camera shall utilize pixel-by-pixel analysis to automatically compensate for bright

areas of a high contrast scene without having to define a window or area. • The camera shall have a CVBS analog video output for hybrid operation. • The camera shall have a built-in active infrared illuminator.

Image processing and compression: • The camera shall use a progressive scan CMOS image sensor. • The camera shall produce a resolution of 1920 x 1080 pixels with a 16:9 aspect ratio. • The camera shall be fitted with a board-mounted fixed varifocal lens. • The camera shall have a wide dynamic range. • The camera shall have a high sensitivity. • The camera shall have an automatic electronic shutter. • The camera shall be capable of capturing and storing images using the following

compression standards: • H.264 MP (Main Profile) • M-JPEG • The camera shall offer a region of interest to zoom into a specific area of the full

image. • The camera shall allow a region of interest to be sent in a separate stream so it is

possible to view both an overview and a detail at the same time.

388

Night Vision (Infrared): • The camera shall have a LED high efficiency IR array for effective night vision. • The camera shall allow adjusting intensity of IR output to fit with the environment.

Audio: • The camera shall offer G.711, AAC and L16 audio compression (live and recording). • The camera shall offer full duplex audio communication, with built-in microphone.

Network Video:

• The camera shall provide direct network connection. • The camera shall allow full camera control and configuration capabilities over the

network. • The camera shall deliver video over a 10/100 Base-T, auto-sensing, half/full duplex,

RJ45 Ethernet connection. • The camera shall comply with the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard. • The camera shall conform to the ONVIF Profile S standard. • The camera shall support AutoMDIX.

Image Posting: • The camera shall offer periodic JPEG image posting to an FTP server or a Dropbox

account.

Access Security: • The camera shall offer three levels of password protection. • The camera shall support 802.1x authentication using a RADIUS (Remote

Authentication Dial In User Service) server. • The camera shall store a SSL certificate for use with HTTPS. • The camera shall be capable of being independently AES encrypted with 128-bit keys.

Recording and Storage Management: • The camera shall support iSCSI devices to allow video stream to be recorded directly

to an iSCSI RAID array. • The camera shall support iSCSI storage targets to enable the camera to function as a

conventional DVR. • The camera shall have a microSD card slot. • The local storage feature shall be capable of storage for Automatic Network

Replenishment (ANR). • Local Recording: Continuous recording, ring recording, alarm/events/schedule

recording.

Alarm Handling Features: • The camera shall provide the capability on alarm to display up to a 31 character,

programmable alarm message. • The camera shall provide email alarm messaging with optional JPEG posting.

389

Embedded Video Content Analysis: • The camera shall be VCA enabled. • The camera shall be capable of processing and analyzing video within the camera

itself, with no extra hardware required. • The camera shall be capable of detecting and sending alarms for abnormal events. • The camera shall allow users to set up to 10 separate profiles and switch profiles

based on a day/night or holiday schedules. • The camera shall offer MOTION+ video motion analysis that uses an algorithm based

on pixel change. • The MOTION+ feature shall include extended tamper detection capabilities.

Surveillance Software: • The camera shall be accessible from a web browser • The camera shall be accessible from the mobile app.

General Characteristics:

The camera shall be easy to install. The camera shall offer 1080p resolution at 30 fps. The camera shall provide direct network connection using H.264 and JPEG compression and bandwidth throttling to efficiently manage bandwidth and storage requirements while delivering outstanding image quality. A user shall be able to view video on a PC using a Web browser The camera shall have a mechanical IR cut-off filter for true day/night switching. The camera shall use Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction technology to remove noise artifacts and reduce the bitrate by up to 50% (giving reduced bandwidth and storage requirements). The camera shall utilize Intelligent Defog (iDefog) to effectively remove the haze from the picture and provides a better visibility. The camera shall accept power via Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af compliant). The camera shall offer tamper and intelligent motion detection.

The camera shall offer two-way full duplex audio communication. The camera shall provide configurable scene modes that give optimized settings for distinct applications. The camera shall provide eight independent, fully programmable privacy mask areas. The camera shall utilize pixel-by-pixel analysis to automatically compensate for bright areas of a high contrast scene without having to define a window or area. The camera shall have a CVBS analog video output for hybrid operation. The camera shall have a built-in active infrared illuminator.

Image processing and compression: The camera shall use a progressive scan CMOS image sensor. The camera shall produce a resolution of 1920 x 1080 pixels with a 16:9 aspect ratio. The camera shall be fitted with a board-mounted fixed varifocal lens. The camera shall have a wide dynamic range.

390

The camera shall have a high sensitivity. The camera shall have an automatic electronic shutter. The camera shall be capable of capturing and storing images using the following compression standards: H.264 MP (Main Profile) M-JPEG The camera shall offer a region of interest to zoom into a specific area of the full image. The camera shall allow a region of interest to be sent in a separate stream so it is possible to view both an overview and a detail at the same time.

Night Vision (Infrared): The camera shall have a LED high efficiency IR array for effective night vision. The camera shall allow adjusting intensity of IR output to fit with the environment.

Audio: The camera shall offer G.711, AAC and L16 audio compression (live and recording). The camera shall offer full duplex audio communication, with built-in microphone.

Network Video: The camera shall provide direct network connection. The camera shall allow full camera control and configuration capabilities over the network. The camera shall deliver video over a 10/100 Base-T, auto-sensing, half/full duplex, RJ45 Ethernet connection. The camera shall comply with the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard. The camera shall conform to the ONVIF Profile S standard. The camera shall support AutoMDIX.

Image Posting: The camera shall offer periodic JPEG image posting to an FTP server or a Dropbox account.

Access Security: The camera shall offer three levels of password protection. The camera shall support 802.1x authentication using a RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) server. The camera shall store a SSL certificate for use with HTTPS. The camera shall be capable of being independently AES encrypted with 128-bit keys.

Recording and Storage Management: The camera shall support iSCSI devices to allow video stream to be recorded directly to an iSCSI RAID array. The camera shall support iSCSI storage targets to enable the camera to function as a conventional DVR. The camera shall have a microSD card slot. The local storage feature shall be capable of storage for Automatic Network Replenishment

391

(ANR). Local Recording: Continuous recording, ring recording, alarm/events/schedule recording.

Alarm Handling Features: The camera shall provide the capability on alarm to display up to a 31 character, programmable alarm message. The camera shall provide email alarm messaging with optional JPEG posting.

Embedded Video Content Analysis: The camera shall be VCA enabled. The camera shall be capable of processing and analyzing video within the camera itself, with no extra hardware required. The camera shall be capable of detecting and sending alarms for abnormal events. The camera shall allow users to set up to 10 separate profiles and switch profiles based on a day/night or holiday schedules. The camera shall offer MOTION+ video motion analysis that uses an algorithm based on pixel change. The MOTION+ feature shall include extended tamper detection capabilities.

Surveillance Software: The camera shall be accessible from a web browser The camera shall be accessible from the mobile app.

Technical Specifications

Power Input voltage +12 VDC or Power-over-Ethernet (48 VDC

nominal) Power consumption 6.3 W max.

PoE IEEE 802.3af (802.3at Type 1) Power level: Class 2

Sensor Sensor type 1/2.7inch CMOS Total sensor pixels 1952 x 1092 (2MP)

Video performance - Sensitivity

Sensitivity – (3200K, reflectivity 89% F1.5, 30IRE) Color 0.24 lx Mono 0.05 lx With IR 0.0 lx

Video performance Dynamic range Dynamic range 76 dB

Video streaming

392

Video compression H.264 (MP); M-JPEG Streaming Multiple configurable streams in H.264 and

M-JPEG, configurable frame rate and bandwidth. Regions of Interest (ROI)

Overall IP Delay Min. 120 ms, Max. 340 ms GOP structure IP, IBP, IBBP Encoding interval 1 to 30 [25] fps Encoder regions Up to 8 areas with encoder quality settings

per area

Video resolution (H x V) 1080p HD 1920 X 1080 720p HD 1280 x 720 D1 4:3 (cropped) 704 x 480 SD upright (cropped) 400 x 720 480p SD Encoding: 704 x 480;

Displayed: 854 x 480 432p SD 768 x 432 288p SD 512 x 288 240p SD Encoding: 352 x 240;

Displayed: 432 x 240 144p SD 256 x 144

Video functions Day/Night Color, Monochrome, Auto Adjustable picture settings Contrast, Saturation, Brightness White Balance 4 automatic modes, manual mode and

measure Shutter Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES);

Fixed shutter (1/25[30] to 1/15000) selectable; Default shutter

Backlight compensation On/off Noise reduction Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction with

separate temporal and spatial adjustments Contrast enhancement On/off Sharpness Sharpness enhancement level selectable Intelligent defog Intelligent Defog automatically adjusts

parameters for best picture in foggy or misty scenes (switchable)

Privacy Masking Eight independent areas, fully programmable

Video Analysis MOTION+

393

Other functions Image mirror, Image flip, Pixel counter, Video watermarking, Display stamping, Scene modes, Location

Night vision

Distance 15 m (50 ft) LED 10 LED high efficiency array, 850 nm IR intensity Adjustable

Optical Lens type Varifocal 3 to 10 mm, DC Iris F1.5 – 360, IR

corrected Lens mount Board mounted Day/Night Switched mechanical IR filter Horizontal field of view 36° - 117° Vertical field of view 20° - 61°

Input/output Analog video out SMB connector, CVBS (PAL/NTSC), 1 Vpp,

75 Ohm Audio line in 0.707 Vrms max, 10 kOhm typical, jack

connector Audio line out 0.707 Vrms at 16 Ohm typical, jack

connector Audio input Built-in microphone (can be permanently

disabled) Alarm input 1 input Alarm input activation Short or DC 5V activation Alarm output 1 output Alarm output voltage 30 VDC, max. load 0.5 A Ethernet RJ45

Audio streaming Standard G.711, 8 kHz sampling rate

L16, 16 kHz sampling rate AAC-LC, 48 kbps at 16 kHz sampling rate AAC-LC, 80 kbps at 16 kHz sampling rate

Signal-to-Noise Ratio >50 dB Audio Streaming Full-duplex / half duplex

Local storage Internal RAM 10 s pre-alarm recording Memory card slot Supports up to 32 GB microSDHC / 2 TB

microSDXC card. (An SD card of Class 6 or

394

higher is recommended for HD recording) Recording Continuous recording, ring recording.

alarm/events/schedule recording

Software Unit Configuration Via web browser or Configuration Manager Firmware update Remotely programmable Software viewer Web browser, Video Security Client, or

third party software

Network Protocols IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS,

RTP/RTCP, IGMP V2/V3, ICMP, ICMPv6, RTSP, FTP, Telnet, ARP, DHCP, NTP (SNTP), SNMP (V1, MIB-II), 802.1x, DNS, DNSv6, DDNS (DynDNS.org, selfHOST.de, no- ip.com), SMTP, iSCSI, UPnP (SSDP), DiffServ (QoS), LLDP, SOAP, Dropbox, CHAP, digest authentication

Encryption TLS 1.0, SSL, DES, 3DES, AES (optional) Ethernet 10/100 Base-T, auto-sensing, half/full

duplex Connectivity Auto-MDIX Interoperability ONVIF Profile S; GB/T 28181

Mechanical 3- axis adjustment (pan/tilt/rotation) 350º / 130º / 330º Dimensions Diameter: 135 mm (5.32 in) Height: 102 mm (4 in) Weight 450 g (0.99 lb) approx. Color RAL 9004, RAL 9010

Environmental Operating temperature -20 ºC to +50 ºC (-4 ºF to +122 ºF) Storage temperature -30 ºC to +70 ºC (-22 ºF to +158 ºF) Humidity 20% to 90% relative humidity (non

condensing)

Certifications: CE, FCC, UL, cUL, RCM, CB, VCCI

HD 1080P IR BULLET CAMERA

Technical Specifications:

395

Power: Input voltage Power-over-Ethernet (48 VDC nominal);

or 24 VAC ±10% / +12 VDC ±10% PoE IEEE standard IEEE 802.3af (802.3at Type 1)

Power level: Class 3 Power consumption 950 mA (12 VDC) 750 mA (24 VAC)

260 mA (PoE) Video: Sensor type 1/2.8‑inch CMOS Total sensor pixels 1937 (H) x 1097 (V); approximately 2.12MP Sensitivity (3200 K, reflectivity 89%, 30IRE, F1.4) Color 0.052 lx

Mono 0.008 lx With IR 0.0 lx

Dynamic range 92 dB WDR Video compression H.265; H.264; M- JPEG Max. frame rate 1 to 25 [30] fps True Day/Night Auto, Color, Monochrome Noise reduction Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction with

separate temporal and spatial adjustments Signal to Noise Ratio >55dB Intelligent defog Intelligent Defog automatically adjusts

parameters for best picture in foggy or misty scenes (switchable)

Shutter speed Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES) Fixed (1/30 [1/25] to 1/15000)

Video resolution 1080p, 720p, 480p, 432p, 288p, 144p IR Distance 60 m (196 ft) IR LED 4 LED high efficiency array, 850 nm Lens type Automatic Varifocal 2.8 to 12 mm, DC Iris

F1.4 – 360, IR corrected Horizontal field of view 33° - 100° Vertical field of view 19° - 52° Lens mount Board mounted

Audio communicationTwo-way, full duplex Unit Configuration Via web browser or Configuration Manager Ethernet 10/100 Base-T, auto-sensing, half/full duplex Ethernet connector RJ45 Interoperability ONVIF Profile S; ONVIF Profile G; GB/T 28181 Other functions Sharpness, Backlight compensation, Contrast

enhancement, Video authentication, Display stamping, Pixel counter

Memory card slot Supports up to 32 GB microSDHC / 2 TB

396

microSDXC card Analysis type Essential Video Analytics Alarm rules Any object

Object in field Line crossing Enter / leave field Loitering Follow route Idle / removed object Counting Occupancy Crowd density estimation Condition change Similarity search

Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP/ RTCP, IGMP V2/V3, ICMP, ICMPv6, RTSP, FTP, Telnet, ARP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto-IP, link local address), NTP (SNTP), SNMP (V1, MIBII), 802.1x, DNS, DNSv6, DDNS (DynDNS.org, selfHOST.de, no-ip.com), SMTP, iSCSI, UPnP (SSDP), DiffServ (QoS), LLDP, SOAP, Dropbox, CHAP, digest authentication

Encryption TLS 1.2, SSL, DES, 3DES

Mechanical: 3-axis adjustment (pan/tilt/rotation) 360º / 90º / 360º

Color RAL 9006 Environmental:

Operating temperature -40 ºC to +60 ºC (-40 ºF to +140 ºF)

Storage temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF) Operating humidity 5% to 93% relative humidity (non condensing) Storage humidity 0% to 93% relative humidity Ingress protection IP67 Impact protection IK10 Certifications: CE, FCC, UL, cUL, C-tick, CB, VCCI, EAC

1080P HD IR 30X PTZ CAMERA:

General Characteristics:

Imaging

397

Sensor: star 1/2.8-in. type progressive scan CMOS sensor. Effective number of pixels 1984 x 1225 (2.43 megapixels) aspect ratio 16:9 Lens Focal length 30x Zoom

4.5 mm-135 mm (F 1.6 - F 5.0) Field of View (FOV) 2.4° - 60.9° Sensitivity @ 30 IRE-SensUp on (1/7.5) Day mode-0.05lx, Night Mode (Black and white)

(monochrome)-0.01lx & With infrared (IR)-0lx Focus Automatic with manual override IRIS Automatic WDR 94dB (DWDR) White Balance mode Standard Auto, Sodium Vapor Auto, Basic Auto,

Manual, Hold, Dominant Color Auto. The mode Sodium Vapor Auto automatically compensates for light from a sodium vapor lamp to restore objects to their true color.

Intelligent defog Automatically adjusts parameters for best picture in foggy or misty scenes (switchable)"

Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) >50 dB Day/night mod Mechanical switchable IR filter (Auto/On/off) and

Monochrome. Backlight Compensation On/Off

PTZ Features The camera shall provide the following modes for variable pan/tilt speeds: Turbo Mode (manual control): Pan: 0.1°/s to 240°/s & Tilt: 0.1°/s to 120°/s Normal Mode: Pan: 0.1°/s to 120°/s & Tilt: 0.1°/s to 120°/s Preposition speed Pan: 0.1°/s to 240°/s & Tilt: 0.1°/s to 160°/s Pan range 360° continuous. Tilt range -90° to 3° Preset Accuracy ± 0.1° typ. Presets 256 Tour modes One (1) preset tour capable of 64 sequential pre-

positions and a configurable dwell time between positions. Two (2) separate tours of an operator's keyboard movements consisting of pan, tilt and zoom activities. The recorded tours can be continuously played back. One (1) 360° AutoPan mode. One (1) AutoPan mode between limits.

Miscellaneous Sectors / Titling 16 independent sectors with 20 characters

per title

398

Privacy Masking 24 individually configurable privacy masks

Illuminator Object Detection: up to 180 m (590 ft).

Electrical Input Voltage: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz (class 2) PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at, class

4)] Power Consumption (typical): 24 VAC: 23 W PoE+: 25 W

Network Video Compression: H.265, H.264, M-JPEG Streaming: Quad streaming Streaming Multiple configurable streams in H.265, H.

264, and M-JPEG; configurable frame rate and bandwidth

Resolution (H x V): 1080p HD: 1920x1080 720p HD: 1280 x 720 D1 4:3 (cropped) SD (432p, 288p)

Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP/RTCP, IGMP V2/V3, ICMP, ICMPv6, RTSP, FTP, Telnet, ARP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto-IP, link local address), NTP(SNTP), SNMP (v1, MIB-II), 802.1x, DNS, DNSv6, DDNS (DynDNS.org, selftHOST.de, no-ip.com), SMTP, iSCSI, UPnP (SSDP), DiffServ (QoS), LLDP, SOAP, Dropbox, CHAP, digest authentication

Ethernet: 10-Base T/100 Base-TX Encryption: TLS 1.0, SSL, DES, 3DES, AES GOP Structure: IP, IBP, IBBP Data Rate: 10/100 Mbps IEE 802.3 complaint Overall IP Delay: 200 ms Audio Standard: G.711, 8 kHz sampling rate L16, 16 kHz sampling

rate AAC, 16 kHz sampling rate Audio Streaming: Bidirectional (full-duplex)

Local Storage Memory Card Slot: MicroSDHC or MicroSDXC memory card (maximum

2 TB) Recording Continuous recording of video and audio,

alarm/events/schedule recording

User Connections: Power: RJ-45 100 Base-TX Ethernet PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at,

399

class 4 standard) 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Video and Control: RJ-45 10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Alarm Inputs (2): 2 supervised / non-supervised; programmable for

“normally open” or “normally closed” Alarm Outputs (1): 1 dry contact relay Audio: Signal Line In: Max. input voltage: 0.9 Vrms

Impedance: 100k ohm Signal Line Out: Max. output voltage: 1Vrms

Impedance: 10k ohm Ingress Protection Rating /Standard (with polycarbonate bubble): IP66

Certifications & Approvals: CE, UL& FCC

IP PANORAMIC 12 MP CAMERA

Power Power Supply Power-over-Ethernet 48 VDC nominal Power Consumption 140 mA 200 mA (IVA version) PoE IEEE 802.3af (802.3at Type 1)

Sensor Type 1/2.3inch CMOS Total sensor pixels 12MP

Video performance – Sensitivity – 360° lens (3100K, reflectivity 89%, F2.8, 30IRE) Color 0.55 lx Mono 0.18 lx

Video performance – Sensitivity – 180° lens (3100K, reflectivity 89%, F2.8, 30IRE) Color 0.46 lx Mono 0.15 lx

Video performance – Dynamic range Dynamic range 92 dB WDR OR BETTER

(92+16 dB with intelligent AE)

Video streaming Video compression H.264 (MP); M- JPEG

400

Streaming Multiple configurable streams in H.264 and M- JPEG, configurable frame rate and bandwidth. Multiple channels with edge dewarping.

Overall IP Delay Min. 120 ms, Max. 340 ms Encoding interval 30 fps or better

Video functions Day/Night Color, Monochrome, Auto (adjustable

switchover points) Adjustable picture settings Contrast, Saturation, Brightness White Balance 2500 t10000K, 4 automatic modes (Basic,

Standard, Sodium vapor, Dominant color), Manual mode and Hold mode

Shutter Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES) Fixed selectable Default shutter

Sharpness Sharpness enhancement level selectable Backlight compensation Off / On / Intelligent Auto Exposure (BLC) Contrast enhancement On/off Noise reduction Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction with

separate temporal and spatial adjustments Intelligent defog Intelligent Defog automatically adjusts

parameters for best picture in foggy or misty scenes (switchable)

Exposure region Multiple selectable regions Privacy Masking Eight independent areas, fully programmable Video Motion Analysis Any object, Object in field, Line crossing, Enter /

leave field, Loitering, Follow route, Idle / removed object, Counting, Occupancy, Crowd density estimation, Condition change, Similarity search, Flow / counter flow

Pre-positions Six independent sectors Display stamping Individual names and stamps for all video

channels Other functions Pixel counter, Video watermarking

Optical Lens (180° version) 2.1 mm fixed-focus lens (IR corrected), F2.8 or

better Lens (360° version) 1.6 mm fixed-focus lens (IR corrected), F2.8 or

better

Lens mount Board mounted Iris control Fixed iris Field of view (180° version) 180°

401

Field of view (360° version) 360° Minimum object distance 0.1 m Day/Night Switched mechanical IR filter

Audio Audio input Integrated microphone (can be

permanently disabled)

Audio streaming Standard G.711, 8 kHz sampling rate

L16, 16 kHz sampling rate AAC-LC, 48 kbps at 16 kHz sampling rate AAC-LC, 80 kbps at 16 kHz sampling rate

Signal-to-Noise Ratio >50 dB Audio Streaming Full-duplex / half duplex

Local storage Internal RAM 10 s pre-alarm recording Memory card slot Supports up to32 GB SDHC/2 TB SDXC

card an SD card of Class 6 or higher is recommended for HD recording

Recording Continuous recording, ring recording. alarm/events/schedule recording

Software Unit Configuration Via web browser or Configuration Manager Firmware update Remotely programmable Software viewer Web browser or third party software

Network Protocols IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP/RTCP,

IGMP V2/V3, ICMP, ICMPv6, RTSP, FTP, Telnet, ARP, DHCP, NTP (SNTP), SNMP (V1, MIB-II), 802.1x, DNS, DNSv6, DDNS (DynDNS.org, selfHOST.de, no-ip.com), SMTP, iSCSI, UPnP (SSDP), DiffServ (QoS), LLDP, SOAP, Dropbox, CHAP, digest authentication

Encryption TLS 1.0, SSL, DES, 3DES, AES (optional) Ethernet 10/100 Base-T, auto-sensing, half/full duplex Connectivity Auto-MDIX Interoperability ONVIF Profile S; GB/T 28181

Mechanical Dimensions 158 x 33 mm (6.22 x 1.30 in)

402

Weight 445 g (0.98 lb)

Environmental Operating Temperature -20°C to +40°C (-4°F to 104°F) Storage Temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F) Operating humidity 20% to 93% RH Storage humidity up to 98% RH Vandal resistance IK06 (Lens: IK04) OR BETTER

Standards Certificates & approvals CE, UL, cULus, EN, FCC, WEEE, RCM and China

RoHS

CHAPTER –X

PERIMETER SCURITY

1 UNDER VEHICLE SCANNING SYSTEM (UVSS)

Supply & installation of Under Vehicle Scanning System, to enable inspection of any vehicle’s underside through a composite image of the vehicle, as per the details given below:-

1. The UVSS must be preferably of Indian origin, with respect to its design & development,

and its original equipment manufacturer (OEM) should preferably be an Indian, ISO-9001 certified company. The quoted UVSS type and make should have at least fifty (50) or more such references anywhere within India. A list of such references must be furnished.

2. The UVSS should be able to capture very high resolution & complete composite COLOR underbody image of any vehicle passing over it using a single high resolution digital progressive Area-scan GigE camera, without the vehicle being required to be stopped.

3. The UVSS should be able to handle vehicles moving at different speeds ranging from 0 to

20 Km/hr, while the composite image so captured by the system should be automatically and dynamically adjusted according to the speed of the vehicle using multiple loop based sensors.

403

4. The Composite imaging camera should be a high quality, COLOR AREA SCAN, GigE type, with minimum XGA resolution of (1280 x 1024) or above. The minimum specification of this Area-scan camera to be :-

5. The UVSS should be capable of producing a clear and undistorted image of the vehicle

underside, even when a vehicle has completely stopped / halted over the UVSS unit, i.e it must still be able to create a seamless and perfect composite image of the underside irrespective of stoppage or non-uniform motion of the vehicle over the scanner.

6. The UVSS should not use either a digital Line-Scan camera based technology or any type of

analog cameras to form composite image.

7. The UVSS must have feature to magnify (zoom) the composite images (current and past), up to 4x, in order to facilitate a closer view of any part of the composite image.

8. The underside illumination must adequate and obtained through any state-of-the-art, long

life, LED lighting modules. Halogen or CFL type lighting elements for illumination of the underside will not be accepted.

9. The UVSS should also provide a feature to capture the image of the driver of all RHS driven vehicles, captured through a suitable driver view camera.

i. Camera Type Gigabit Ethernet progressive Area-scan color camera

ii. Sensor CCD/CMOS XGA resolution (1280 x 1024) or better

iii. Field of View > 135

iv. Format GiGE Vision compliant specifications

v. Composite Image resolution of the underside

3 megapixel or higher

vi. Camera certification CE/FCC

vii. Camera casing ingress protection rating

IP 67 or better, duly certified by an independent certifying agency.

10. The system should have an Automated Number Plate Reading System (ANPRS) tuned to the Indian license plates, i.e. it should be able to automatically read and record a wide range of vehicle registration number plates’ alpha-numeric characters, written in English. Also, the frontal image view of the vehicle to be provided in the GUI, to facilitate manual viewing of the license plate image.

The Number Plate & Driver Image view cameras must have the following minimum specifications: A. Camera Specification

404

i. Effective Range 4 to 5 meters for Frontal camera & 0.5 to 1 meter for Driver camera

ii. Camera Resolution 25fps @ 1 megapixel or higher

iii. Camera gain and shutter

Adjustable 1/100 to 1/10000 sec

iv. Lens 10-40 mm Varifocal

v. Power Consumption <12W

vi. Power Supply 12 V DC

vii. Operating Temperature

0°C to +50°C

B. Software Specification

i. Supported OS Linux/Windows

ii. Type of Plates Recognition for English fonts

iii. Image Input Still Image or Live Video Input

11. The UVSS should give output of all the data simultaneously i.e. the composite image, driver photos, vehicle’s frontal image and its number display – all should be displayed on the monitor almost instantaneously after the vehicle cross the unit. Also, the system should have a facility to view the composite image, off-line also, for all vehicles.

12. The UVSS applications & operating software should preferably be based on open architecture on Linux platform. It must have a user friendly Graphical User Interface (GUI) with provision for multiple users logging of events and search facility.

13. The UVSS system must have a facility to take back-up of all the transactions to storage media.

14. The UVSS should have an option to control all local UVSS operations from the secondary/supervisory central console on high speed LAN, without any distance constraint between the UVSS unit and the location of the control room where the secondary/supervisory console would be placed.

15. The UVSS should have option for open protocol for integration with other security systems.

16. The overall UVSS should be CE Certified. A certificate to this effect, after duly tested, issued by a competent certifying agency, must be attached with the tender.

17. The underground cameras of UVSS should be enclosed in a suitable all-weather-proof

housing of IP 67 equivalent or higher standard. A certificate to this effect, after duly tested, issued by a competent certifying agency, must be attached with the tender.

405

18. The overall installed unit should be properly designed, and its structure should be able to withstand a total vehicle load up to 40-Tons at any point over the structure, more particularly at the Centre of the unit, so as not to suffer any accidental physical damage to the unit and the components under the pit cover.

19. The bidder should be able to show a live working demo of the system in India.

2 RODENT REPELLANT SYSTEM

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.0 The core purpose of the Rodent Repellent system is to eliminate the rodents to enter the facility/ server room / pantry/canteen premises. The Rodent Repellent System would be on a VHFO Model with electronic transmitters of high frequency sound waves (well above the 20 KHz frequency which is the upper limit of human ear.) They should emit intensive sound at high decibel levels (sound pressure) that is audible and painful to Rodents, but is inaudible and harmless to humans.

2.0 Components: VHFO Model should compose of one Master console and accessories that include twelve Transducers, specially coated CT wires & a pair of stand bracket. The Master console will be installed in the main control room / server room and the Transducers in the problematic area i.e. above and below false ceiling and below false flooring.

3.0 FUNCTIONALITY: The powerful sound waves generated by the Transducers of VHFO Model should be within the hearing range of many Rodents and cause them pain and discomfort. There should be a significant reduction in infestation.

4.0 TECHNICAL FEATURES: o Each Transducer should cover an open area of 300 sq.ft. considering the average

height of the ceiling is 10 ft. Transducers installed in the false ceiling or false floorings will cover an approximate area of 150 sq. ft. The whole system (12 nos.) will accordingly cover an open area of 3600 sq. ft. And if installed in false ceiling and false floorings, the area covered will be considerably less.

o Each Transducer should occupy a maximum space of 8 cubic inches and should be

aesthetically designed to match the interior décor.

o The Transducers should be able to be installed in sensitive areas.

o The Transducers should be able to withstand high temperatures in the false ceiling and low temperatures in cold storages and air locks.

o The Transducers should work with any power connection.

The Transducers should be tested with a self-testing facility.

406

o Cable to be used - 2 Core, flexible (14/40) SWG, specially coated CT Wires of 300 yards for connectivity between the Transducers and the master console.

o Accessories for the Mount to be Powder Coated.

5.0 SPECIFICATIONS Configuration : One master console with 12 transducers. Operating frequency : Above 20 KHz (variable) Sound Output : 80dB to 110dB (at 1 meter) Power Output : 800 mW per transducer Power Consumption : 15 W approximately Power Supply : 230V AC 50 Hz Dimensions : 16” X 8” X 4” Weight : 5.5 kgs approximately Mounting : Wall / table mounting

6.0 CONTROLLER Stand alone system that can protect an enclosed area of 300 sq. ft. Stand alone system with two additional transducers. Apart from protecting the main workstation the additional transducers protects the area of false ceiling or flooring in the ATM/Server room/Data centre/Hub room etc. This would be placed in the pantry areas in each of the floors.

7.0 SPECIFICATIONS

Power Supply : 230Volts AC 50HZ

Operating Frequency : Above 20 KHz

Sound Output : 80-110dB

Power Output : 900mW per transducer

Power Consumption : 5 Watts

Dimensions : 225X 65X 115(mm)

Weight : 1250 gms

3. BAGGAGE SCANNER

Tunnel Size, not to exceed: 620mm (24.4”) Wide x 420mm (16.5”) High

Max. object size: not less than 615mm (24.2") Wide x 410mm (16.1") High Maximum conveyor load not less than 165kg (364lbs) Overall dimensions: Not to exceed 2004mm (78.9”) Long x 850mm (33.5”) Wide Weight: Not to exceed 460kg (992 pounds)

407

Design durability: Both the entrance & exit conveyor shall be surrounded by stainless steel. Stainless steel shall be utilized at the top and sides of the tunnel entry as well as at the fenders of the conveyor.

Safety stops: The system must be equipped with a minimum of three (3) emergency stop buttons. One located on each side of the tunnel and a third integrated into the control panel (keyboard). The 2 emergency stop buttons on each side of the tunnel must feature a protective collar to avoid unintentional activation

The system must be equipped with at least 2 independent interlock switches at service relevant locations

The system must be equipped with at least 2 white lamps in 2 corners of the roof sheeting that indicate that the machine is powered. These lamps must be realized utilizing LED technology. Alternatively to white color these lamps must also be optionally available in green color.

The system must be equipped with at least 2 X-ray on indicator lamps on the roof sheeting. These lamps shall also utilize LED technology and must be configurable via a software configuration to either permanent or blinking illumination. There must be two independent circuits that drive the X-ray indicator lamps.

The system must be capable of monitoring the correct function of the X-ray on indicator lamps by observing the lamp current. Activation/deactivation of this function must be configurable via software.

The control panel (keyboard) must be equipped with no less than 2 X-ray inidicator lamps. These lamps shall utilize LED technology.

The system must be equipped with a network socket on the on the unit's housing The system must also be equipped with an external USB socket on the unit's housing. For security purposes this external USB socket must be lockable with a key lock.

All safety or operational relevant labels on the system's housing must be realized either as pictogram or as one label in the four languages: English, French, Spanish and German.

The system must provide a mechanical theft-protection fixing for 2 Kensington locks within the machine.

The operator shall be able to control the unit from either side by simply switching the control panel (keyboard) and monitor direction. This must be accomplished without the need to unscrew or disconnect any component.

Conveyor belt must be one continuous piece and cannot be equipped with zippers or stitched/stapled.

Photo sensors at the entrance and exit of the unit's tunnel shall activate the X-ray generator. The X-ray generator shall not be activated simply by starting the conveyor belt. The system must be designed as a high resolution system. The system shall have at least 1152 humidity protected X-ray detectors. All detectors shall be supported by the system electronics and must be used for the generation of the high resolution image.

408

The external X-ray dose shall be less than 1µSV/h measured in a distance of 5cm from the lead curtains of the tunnel entrance and exit.

IMAGING

Penetration minimum: 35 mm of steel measured at belt speed of 0.2 m/s Resolution: at least 39 AWG measured with pure copper wire at belt speed of 0.2 m/s ASTM F792-08, Test 3 (spatial resolution) minimum 1mm vertical and 1mm horizontal

ASTM F792-08, Test 4 (steel penetration) minimum 30mm

STANDARD FEATURES

Generator: Design must be Hermetically sealed oil-bath equipped with internal bellows expansion module with no oil breathing tube or tank. 160kV operational power

Industrial quality Computer designed into the equipment, not basic tower design Infinite stripping capability, the unit must incorporate the ability to strip layers of density in an infinite manner as opposed to a step method.

Dual-Energy Material Discrimination (Organic/Inorganic Presentation showing Organic=Orange, Inorganic=Blue, Mixed=Green)

Real-time Operation, ALL image enhancement features must be accessible to the operator without having to stop the belt

The machine should have features of Advanced Multi Energy X-ray imaging facility where materials of different atomic number will be displayed in different colours to distinguish between organic and inorganic materials. With this method to distinguish high-density organic materials including explosives. Machine should have variable colour or materials stripping to facilitate the operator to monitor images of organic materials for closer scrutiny. All suspicious items (Explosives, High density, material narcotics) should be displayed in one mode and that should be on line.

The machine should have the feature of selective detection of organic substances with relative atomic number numbers Zeff 7, 8, or 9. By pressing a single key it must be possible to toggle between the atomic numbers 7, 8 or 9. The image becomes a black and white image and only the image parts representing materials with the selected atomic number will be displayed in red.

The machine should have feature of automatically detecting sections of high absorption. The materials which are difficult to penetrate should be improved without deteriorating the image information of other image sections. The System must be able to automatically identify dense areas and apply the High penetration feature to only the dense area of the bag.

The machine should have the feature of warning the operator by stopping of the belt incase of presence of high absorbing material in a baggage.

409

Facility for variable contrast must be incorporated to allow enhancement lighter and darker portion of the image. Three Programmable Function Keys located on the control panel which allow the operator to customize any enhancement or combination of enhancement features. For example; Contrast Enhancement and negative functions to be able to operate simultaneously via one key stroke. Must allow for simple reprogramming through drop down menu without the assistance of factory personnel.

The system must provide a zoom feature allowing enlarging X-ray images stepless up to 256 times. In addition it must also allow to scale the original image down up to 2 times.

Zoom Position Locator Box must appear on monitor during all operations (identifies which area of the bag the operator has selected for zoom function by means of outlined box. As magnification increases, the box must reduce in size correspondingly.

Unit must be equipped with a Panning Zoom Pad to control the zoom feature.

THE USE OF A MOUSE OR TRACKBALL IS UNACCEPTABLE.

Review of last 8 (minimum) items each of 1m length screened through the use of two keys located on the control panel (keyboard). One key shall allow the operator to scroll back in one direction while the other key shall reverse the process.

Three Programmable Function Keys located on the control panel (keyboard) which allow the operator to customize any enhancement or combination of enhancement features. For example; Contrast Enhancement and negative functions to be able to operate simultaneously via one key stroke. Must allow for simple reprogramming through drop down menu without the assistance of factory personnel.

The control panel (keyboard) must allow the end user to re-label keys and reprogram their functions without the need for factory personnel.

The unit's electronics must be equipped with an internal Flash Memory to start the operational part of the software from. An optional hard drive is only allowed to store additional X-ray images. The system must be fully operational (including but not limited to scanning of objects) in case the optional hard drive is defect or not installed.

The system must support Post Script Level 2 printers as standard. The system must be able to automatically identify dense areas and apply the High penetration feature to only the dense area of the bag.

The system must be able to automatically identify dense areas and project a frame around the dense area of the bag to highlight it.

The Unit must be able to be equipped with an zoom optimization feature which automatically magnifies the screened image to utilize the entire available monitor space via one key stroke.

410

The system must be able to provide a function that automatically detects organic substances with relative atomic numbers 7, 8 or 9 one after another. By pressing a single key it must be possible to toggle between the atomic numbers 7, 8 or 9. The image becomes a black and white image and only the image parts representing materials with the selected atomic number will be displayed in red.

The system must provide a feature that allows to adjust the background color of the X-ray image from standard white to at least 3 different grey levels for ergonomic purposes.

After the X-ray is powered up it must carry out a self test for at least the following sub-systems: light barriers, X-ray generator, detector line, calibration status electronic boards and the control panel (keyboard). In case of a malfuncton the system must display the respective warning or error message on the screen.

During operation the system must supervise at least the following sub-systems in real time: light barriers, X-ray generator heater current, X-ray generator anode current, X-ray generator high tension, detector line, calibration status, electronic boards and the control panel (keyboard). In case of a malfuncton the system must display the respective warning or error message on the screen.

The system shall also give a real-time feedback to the operator in case of the following situations: Emergency button pressed, Interlock opened and Motor overheated. The system must not shut down, instead a distinctive error message shall be displayed on the system's screen to allow the operator to bring the X-ray systems quickly and easily back in operation.

The system must have the ability to extend the storage capacity for X-ray images by installing an additional hard drive. The additional hard drive must allow to store at least 500.000 additional X-ray images in it's proprietary images format.

Blinking Backlight Monitor 19" for optimized motion blur. The monitor must allow achieving results of a least level 20 using the test program PixPerAn Test number 4 - readability test on a standard PC or laptop.

the system must provide a Threat Image Projection (TIP) function with at least 1.000 different images of at least 250 different threat objects. The threat images must show the entire object without any cut offs. the system must provide an Operator Traning System software that runs on the X- ray machine. It also shall include at least 1.000 different X-ray images of at least 250 different threat objects. The threat images must show the entire objects without any cut offs. Internationally certified ISO 9001 quality standard shall have been maintained by the manufacturer for a minimum of 5 years. ***

The system must comply to NFC-74-100 standard.

The system must comply to IEEE/ANSI N42.44-2008 standard. All relevant measurements must be proven by reports of an accredited external laboratory.

The system must comply to DIN IEC 61010-2-091 standard. All relevant measurements be proven by reports of an accredited external laboratory.

A fire load calculation by an accredited external laboratoy must be available for the

411

system.

Unit must operate with a Linux based operating system

All supervisory-level programming functions shall be accessible via the unit's primary keyboard without the need to connect a supplemental PC-style keyboard.

* Penetration capabilities must be demonstrated by manufacturer with a stepwedge prior to acceptance

** Review function capability must be demonstrated by manufacturer prior to acceptance *** All certifications must be documented and included with bid proposal

4.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WALK THROUGH METAL DETECTOR

1. Precise detection of magnetic, not- magnetic and mixed alloy weapons

2 Minimum internal dimensions: 2050H X 700W X 600 D mm. The WTMDs shall be designed in order to be assembled and disassembled quickly. The maximum allowed time for the assembling of the complete gate shall be lower than 10 minutes. 3 RS 232C interface to allow connectivity to PC, allowing for full control of portal 4 Alarm for detection of metal masses (automatic or manual reset) sabotage or internal auto- diagnostics

5 Optical signaling: Constant or proportional to mass in transit, 6m visible/ 4000 Lux Optical according to area, vertical light display on detection probe, green and red light signals proportional to mass of object in transit

6 Acoustic: 90 dBA at 1 meter TECHNOLOGY

7 The required Walk-Through Metal Detector (WTMD) shall be latest technology (Enhanced) and it shall have very high threat detection uniformity over the whole transit area and shall have ultra high discrimination of personal metallic effects of people that transit trough the gate in order to ensure an high throughput DSP analysis with numerical filter for signals received

8 Demodulation of signals at high immunity

9 Direct indication of security level and number of transits in both directions Light bar display of location (height) of single or multiple metal masses in transit on TX antenna

10 Chip and card system for direct selection of security level (according to international standards or customers specs). Password for use of chip cards can be assigned. Programming access for all parameters can be protected by password

11 The Metal Detector shall detect the metal test pieces independently of their speed of transit

412

through the archway (range: 0.3 … 15m/s). This requires constant sensitivity for variations in speed.

12 Cable free automatic synchronization between two or more detectors at a minimum distance of 1500 mm from each other

13 Ethernet for collection of statistical data, remote control and control of metal detectors

14 Automatic adjustments to environmental condition

15 The detection capability of the WTMD shall be stable without variation. The WTMD shall not require periodic recalibration.

16 Control of correct installation relating to environment by capturing general noise level “GN” and electrical noise level “EN”

17 Auto set feature to reset operating parameters and should have Anti-tamper on/off switch

18 Functional test and adjustment of threshold values by means of corresponding accessories kit should be included 19 Safe for wearers of pacemakers or other vital support systems, pregnant women and magnetic storage area (floppy discs, audio cassettes, video cassettes and similar) (EN 50364)

20 Confirms to current international security standards for Walk Through Metal Detectors

21 Satisfies EC regulations (Directive 73/23/EEC-93/68 EEC) and international standards relating to Electrical safety and electro-magnetic compatibility (Directive EMC 89/336/EEC)

22 Power Supply : • 100…240V~ -10/+15%, 47…63Hz, 25 VA max Operating temperature: -20°C to +70°C Storage temperature: -37°C to +70°C Relative humidity: 0 to 95% (without condensation)

23 Confirms to all safety standards for airports

24 Corresponds to EC regulation 1862/2006-1.3

25 Manufacturers Warrantee: minimum 1 years

26 On spot installations upon delivery

27 DFMD should conform to IP65 Rating, Water and Weather Proof Model (OPTIONAL as per User Requirement)

413

28 The WTMD shall be equipped with two photocells for an automatic and very high precision bidirectional counting (number of entering and exiting persons) and statistical evaluation of transiting people and alarms.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOOM BARRIER

1 Type Motorized 2 Boom Length 4/5/6 meter 3 Boom Material Aluminum – plastic coated rectangle / round cross section, red

reflective warning tape, centre pole arrangement, with Red reflective strips.

4 Operating time For 3 mtr- 2.3 sec For 4 mtr- 3.2 sec For 5 mtr- 4 sec For 6 mtr- 5.5 sec

5 Housing Aluminium housing guaranty against rust for 10 years. 6 Power fail protection Fail Safe 7 Safety 3 channel Loop Detector in built and iR both can be provided 8 Electronic Logic Control Digital Microprocessor based logic with timer, LED indicators 9 Power Supply 230 VAC (±10%) ,50Hz 10 Working Temperature 0 to 50°C 11 Certification/ Approval CE

Construction Aluminium housing with spare room for devices, rectangular

aluminium barrier pole, buttom edge of barrier rubber padded. Lockable maintenance door and removable cover.

Finish Structured plastic coating.

Housing: RAL 9010 (pure white) Cover: RAL 5003 (sapphire)

Types Basic type:

Barrier pole up to 2.5 m length, opening/closing time approx. 1.4 s Optional types: Barrier pole up to 2,5 m length, opening/closing time approx. 0.9 s

414

Barrier pole up to 3,0 m length, opening/closing time approx. 2.3 s Barrier pole up to 4,0 m length, opening/closing time approx. 3.2s Basic type: Barrier pole up to 5 m length, opening/closing time approx. 4 s Optional types: Barrier pole up to 6 m length, opening/closing time approx. 5.5 s Barrier pole up to 8 m length, opening/closing time approx. 8.5 s Function Electromechanical drive with smooth end-positioning of barrier pole by means of sinuous motion. Electric Micro-controller control unit with supervision of motor running time. Control system integrated in the unit. Power supply 230 VAC 50 Hz

5 FLAP BARRIER

Design: Guiding elements made of tubular AISI 304 stainless steel tubes Ø 60 mm with TSG 10 mm glass panel and AISI 304 hand rail. Two door leaves are made of transparent polycarbonate door leaves, thickness 10 mm, upper edge 900mm with opening/ closing time of 0.3 seconds minimum, which can be adjusted as per client requirement. An array of sensor system is integrated into the respective hand rail (L= 1660 mm / W= 130 mm / H= 45 mm) to avoid unauthorized access. The drive housing is made of AISI 304 stainless steel. In case of multiple installations, the housing unit acts as a guiding element – additional guiding bars are not required. The passage width can be widened to 900 mm when necessary for passage or for passage of people with reduced mobility. To improve personal safety, standards and guidelines relating to points where body parts could get pinched or squashed have been taken into account in the development of the sensor barrier (Machinery Directive 98/37/EC). The unit can also be used in the emergency and escape route (see the emergency and escape

415

route assembly option).

Finish:

Stainless steel semi-gloss smooth finish.

Function:

Aggregate type 2

The sensor barrier is equipped with two servo positioning drives (low energy drives with energy content <1.6 joules) along with tooth holding brake technology and is electrically controlled in both directions thus guaranteeing a particularly high level of personal safety. The passage area is monitored by a basic sensor system with a short design. It monitors the individual passages in both directions. This sensor system also monitors the swinging area and the blocking elements and acts as a protection device. In the event of a power failure, both directions may be freely accessed. Automatic reset upon resumption of power supply - the unit resets to its regular function without manual intervention The access area is secured immediately upon resumption of power supply. The unit can be locked in any position (Tooth Holding Brake Technology) and opens under load (personal safety in case of panic). In basic position, the unit is unlocked to minimize power consumption (standby 17 VA). Parameters can be set for unit behavior and each specific customer (e.g. starting behavior and passage speed).

Available operating modes: Open basic mode: The door leaves close automatically if someone passes through who is not authorized. If an authorized individual passes through, the door leaves stay open. Closed basic mode: The door leaves open automatically if the individual is authorized in the direction of passage and then close again. If passage is authorized, it is not possible for someone without authorization

416

to pass through from the opposite direction. If no one passes through the unit within an adjustable time after the release signal, the release is automatically deleted. In the event of a power failure, the swinging elements can be moved in both directions.

MCBF (mean cycles between failures) is 8 million for 650 mm passage width and 6 million for 900 mm passage width.

Protection: Motor, sensor, locking: IP 43,Power supply leading components for PLC: IP

43

Electrical system:

ETS22 control unit and power supply unit are integrated into the unit. Power supply 110 – 230V AC 50/60 Hz.

Installation:

The sensor barrier is dowelled at finished floor level FFL and is not suitable

for outdoor installation.

Note Description of single

unit.

Construction Interlock Height 945 Interlock Length 1660

Passage Width 650 / 900 (handicap

lane)

Total Width 1070 / 1320 (handicap

lane)

Housing, base columns, guiding elements

Stainless steel tube AISI 304 Ø 60 mm with 10 mm toughened glass panel and stainless-steel bar handle AISI 304 with integrated sensor system.

Barrier Element

Door wings made of 10 mm unbreakable transparent

417

polycarbonate.

Rotation angle monitored by separation sensors.

Finish

Stainless steel satin finish.

Function Type 2 *

Drive

Low energy Servo position drive Integrated in the rotating tube.

Entrance sector monitored by basic sensor system in compact overall

Length (basic level of single passage regulation in both directions).

Sensors can be installed at top hand rail

Operation Mode Open or closed.

Electrical Component

ETS 22, control system and power supply integrated in the unit.

Power supply 110 – 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz.

Standby power consumption 17 VA.

Standard adjustment in case of power failure

Barrier elements can be moved freely.

Installation

Dowelled on finished floor level FFL.

Not suitable for outdoor installation!

6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ADDRESSABLE WATER LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEM

Overview

418

This section of the specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and thereafter maintaining of the Liquid Leak Detection System (LLDS) during the twelve (12) months defect liability period.

Installation of a liquid leak detection system (LLDS) is recommended for continuous protection

from the risk of water leaking within critical areas of the building.

This complete LLDS shall include electronic leakage detection panel, addressable zonal modules,

conductive sensing cable, monitoring leakage at any point along the run and all required auxiliary

accessories (such as jumper cables, connectors, hold down clips and tag/labels) This system shall

detect and locate multiple leaks simultaneously as well as cable break faults for different zones.

The system shall comply with CE, ESD (IEC 61000-4- 5) and EMC (IEC61000-6- 3 &amp; IEC61000-

6- 1).

The LLDS shall be installed at the various rooms as per specified in the tender drawing

CODES AND STANDARDS: Original Equipment Manufacturer Standard

System performance

• General

The liquid leak detection system (LLDS) shall identify any abnormal presence of liquid on any

point of its connected sensing cables, to the nearest meter.

In the event of leak detected, an audible alarm is triggered and dry contact is activated. The

panel’s screen display shows the time and date of the alarm, the type of fault and the

location of the leak to the nearest metre. Dynamic zone maps highlighting faults on the

panel’s screen are available as an optional feature.

• Sensing cable length

The monitoring screen panel shall have the ability to supervise and control up to 10 Zonal

Modules and capable of monitoring up to an accumulated length of 2,000m (6,560 feet) of

sensing cable and accumulated length of 1,000m (3,280 feet) for communication cable.

These cables lengths shall not include the jumper cable connecting between sensing cables

which can be accumulated up to 300m (984 feet).

The panel shall be able to show the total sensing cable length connected for each zone and

the status of each zone under monitoring.

• Multiple faults

Every sense cable of each zone shall be able to detect and locate leaks and cable-break

419

independently and capable of displaying simultaneously.

• Cable break fault

Besides leak, the system shall be capable to detect any damaged sensing cables (cable break).

In the event of a cable break, an audible alarm is triggered and the dry contact is activated.

The dynamic zone maps showing a cable break logo on the panel’s screen is available as an

optional feature.

• Zone type leak sensing cable

A continuous leak detection cable shall be installed to cover small areas or zone within the

building. The cable should be multi-wired design and manufactured from rugged, corrosion

resistant material which resist abrasion to ensure long cable life.

The Cable shall be capable of water detection over it’s entire length and shall provide the

following:

a. Water detection cable shall consist of 4 conductors, 2 water sensitive and 2 for

data

b. The cable shall be restorable and corrosion resistant and shall not require

replacement after being wet

c. Maximum length of linear WLD cable not to exceed 200m per Sensor interface

module

d. Minimum spacing from exterior walls shall be 1 foot

e. Sensing cable shall be installed in the path of a potential water Leak

After leakage, the cable should shed liquids quickly and easily return to normal operating

condition. The cable shall be capable of detecting liquids such as water & slightly corrosive

& conductive liquids. The cable shall be available in different custom length with factory

installed male/female connectors to facilitate the setting up of leak detection circuit without

the need for special tools as well as for future expansion of the system and replacement.

• Zonal Modules

Each Module shall be able to handle up to 200m of accumulated sensing cable and

shall actuate an output relay during a fault that can be connected to any voltage free

enabled system. The Modules used at each site/zone shall be capable of adjusting

420

the leak sensitivity level at site. For a liquid puddle size of about 20mm to 200mm shall

be adjustable.

• Centralized and Distributed Monitoring System

The System shall be capable of configuring into a Centralized and/or Distributed

Monitoring system.

• Centralized Monitoring System means: the System Monitoring panel together with the Modules

are housed in a custom enclosure panel at one location. This configuration shall provide ease of

monitoring and installation of the battery back-up units and power supply source.

• Distributed Monitoring System means: the System Monitoring Panel is housed separately with

the Modules. The Modules are mounted on each individual zone area (localized) as defined by

client. This configuration shall provide a more reliable management of the system remotely and

its independence power supply source.

• Security-The System Monitoring Panel shall provide security to the user or administrator via

password access.

Power-The System shall be powered by 230 +/- 15% VAC, 50/60 Hz single phase. It shall be

provided with the option to be powered by 12 to 24Vdc or Vac source.

Interface-The LCD Supervising Panel output shall have two separate dry contacts which is for

liquid leakage and for cable break. The dry contact relays output shall have a voltage free

contact (N.O./N.C.) for external interfacing.

In addition, the Panel shall be provided as an option for 4-20mA analogue signal or high level

RS-485 (MODBUS) or TCP/IP (MODBUS) serial communication interface with the Building

Management System (BMS)

Failed-Safe Loop Back -The entire system shall be able to connect as a Failed Safe Loop

Back configuration. Thus, during any cable break point (especially at start point of sensor),

the system is still able to perform and activate an alarm for liquid leakage.

• Jumper cable connection and auxiliary equipment

Where leak detection is required, a four-core jumper cable shall be used to connect

sensing cables in between zones, floors or rooms.

Warning labels shall be placed on the sensing cable approximately every Three (03)

meters. Hold-down clips shall be used to fix the sensing cables every one (1) meter or

where deem necessary.

421

• Enclosure-The liquid leak detection panel enclosure shall be constructed of metal / PVC and

dust-tight NEMA 4X rating and capable of surface mounting.

• Installation-The system shall be installed by well-trained staffs, with the procedure

recommended by the manufacturer.

4.0 TESTING: Testing the cable by placing a wet cloth or wire gauge over the cable to simulate a water leak, distance is displayed and the alarm relay operates. Extension of alarm to the BMS system to be verified.

5.0 COMMISSIONING:

S No. Description Visual Test Readi Documentation

1 All cables are tested for continuity & insulation

√

2 System drawing

installation proper as √

3 Carry out visual checks on sensor cables, interface modules etc. to ensure they are clean and free from any mechanical damage

√

4 Check ferruling

for proper termination √

5 Check input A/C supply voltage √

6 Check for proper Sensor ca installation for the floor with n conductive supports & Tagging

√

7 Check for fault indications √

8 Apply wet cloth or metallic wire gauge to sensing cable and check for Leak indication on the panel with leak distance in meters

√

9 Check for extension of alarms in BMS

√

422

7.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

Aspiration system description

An aspirating smoke detector is offered which continuously takes air samples via a pipe network from a monitored room and feeds the samples to one or more smoke detectors. Airflow monitoring ensures that the sensor tube is continuously monitored for pipe breakage and sampling hole soiling.

The detection method should work under extreme ambient conditions conventional point detectors reach their limits. - Difficult to access areas such as false ceilings, false floors, high-rack warehouses. - In listed buildings or in aesthetically demanding indoor spaces where point detectors on the ceiling would disturb the décor. - In areas where very high sensitivity is required, e.g. data centers, server cabinets. - If filters are used, dirty areas can also be monitored.

The aspirating smoke detector should be a new generation active smoke detection system. It does not wait until the smoke rises but rather sucks it in. This means it responds much faster and is more sensitive to incipient fires than conventional solutions. In addition to soiling evaluation and pre-alarming, sensitivity of the detector can also be adjusted user-specifically. The system itself should detects the smallest glowing and smoldering fires and can be used practically anywhere.

The aspirating smoke detector should have two primary parts: 1 or 2 branchable sampling pipes with individual sampling holes and 1 or 2 small detection chambers. These contain 1 or 2 smoke sensors, a ventilator and the electronic evaluation circuit. The ventilator draws ambient air through the sampling points into the detection chamber(s) and feeds it to the smoke sensor. Smoke particles are registered immediately. If the threshold according to EN 54-20 is exceeded, an alarm is triggered.

The display functions include: - Operation - Fault - Pipe breakage - Pipe blockage

423

- Detector dusty/dirty - Smoke sensor 1 - Prealarm 1, 2 and 3 - Alarm smoke sensor 1 - 10-level smoke level indicator - Smoke sensor 2: - Prealarm 1, 2 and 3 - Alarm smoke sensor 2 - 10-level smoke level indicator

The control functions include: - Power ON/OFF - Smoke/airflow sensitivity - State indicator

The aspirating smoke detector continuously takes air samples via two pipe networks from a monitored room/object and feeds the samples to a smoke sensor.

Technical design: - Surface-mounted housing - Two detection chambers, - Integrated display and control panel for two sensors for which the labelling can be rotated 180 degrees if desired - Reset buttons integrated in the display and control panel - Potential-free reset input present as optocoupler - All criteria (operation, alarm, fault) are visually displayed on the housing interface - All criteria (alarm and fault) have a potential-free change-over contact and an optocoupler output - Automatic monitoring of the airflow for sensor pipe breakage and blockage - Five-level adjustable negative pressure production by the radial high pressure fan from 100 - 420 Pascal resulting in a very high airflow rate - Smoke sensors and evaluation/display prints are located in chambers which are structurally separate from each other - Operation noise minimum 32 dB (A) (for lowest fan level); even a medium fan level of 43 dB (A) complies with ISO 11690-1 (directive for low noise machine-equipped workshops) - Protection type according to IEC 529 of IP 54 - 1 USB PC interface for integration with software for commissioning and maintenance of the system - EasyConfig commissioning option without PC

- Sampling pipes / sampling holes: - Maximum possible system limits:

424

Max. length of the sampling pipe tube network per smoke sensor: 400 m (without EN 54-20 conformity) 300 m (with EN 54-20 conformity) Max. number of sampling holes per smoke sensor: 120

- Standards compliant calculation of the pipe topology with the software of the aspiration system suitable for planning asymmetrical pipe topologies

Technical data: Supply voltage: 10.5 to 30 VDC Power consumption: typically 290 mA (for 24 VDC) Operating temperature range: -30°C to +60°C Colour: RAL 2807005 / RAL 3002005 Protection type: IP 54 Dimensions (HxWxD): 397x265x146 mm Weight: 3.85 kg

Compliant with EN 54-20

The system should be having all the necessary interface cards, memory, power supply latest firmware so as to be able to connect to its own commissioning software (other than ease of standalone commissioning) and should include card for seamless integration with the BMS system. The system should be complete in all respect to make it functional and continuous operation in normal mode

8.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

General

The bidder shall supply, install, test and put in operation UL/FM approved FK-5-1-12 gas based fire suppression system. The fire suppression system shall include and not be limited to gas release control panel, UL/FM approved seamless cylinders, discharge valve (with solenoid or pneumatic actuator) as the case may be, discharge pipe, non-return valve and all other accessories required to provide a complete operation system meeting applicable requirements of NFPA 2001 or ISO standards and installed in compliance with all applicable requirements of the local codes and standards.

The system design should be based on the specifications contained herein, NFPA 2001 & in accordance with the requirements specified in the design manual of the agent. The bidder, shall confirm compliance to the above along with their bid.

The system shall be properly filled and supplied by an approved OEM (Original Equipment

425

Manufacturer)

Generally, the key components of the system shall be VdS or FM/UL listed. The FK-5-1-12 gas shall:

Comply with NFPA 2001 or ISO 14520 standard/UL/FM have the approval from US EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) for use as a total flooding fire extinguishant for the protection of occupied space:

Be given Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL/FM, USA) component listing for the FK-5-1-12 gas

Must have zero ozone depletion potential (ODP);

Have a short life span in the atmosphere, with atmospheric life time of less than 5 days

Be efficient, effective and does not require excessive space and high pressure for storage;

Commercially available

*Key components are valves and its accessories, actuators, flexible discharge and connection hoses, check valves, pressure switch, and nozzles

Design Condition

The hazard space volumes shall be protected from a common central or individual supply, the cylinder bank or individual cylinder system, with corresponding pipes and nozzle system. The individual zone/ system shall be dimensioned to give a complete discharge of the agent in less than 10 seconds into the affected zone. The software calculation shall be approved VdS or FM / UL. The discharge time shall not exceed 10 seconds. After end of discharge (10s) a homogeneous FK-5-1-12 gas concentration shall be built-up in the room.

The design concentration shall follow ISO 14520 or at minimum NFPA 2001 for under floor, room and ceiling space. Unless otherwise approved, room temperature for air-conditioned space shall be taken around 20C. For non-air conditioned space, the temperature shall be taken around ambient temperature. The system shall be designed with minimum design concentration of 4.7 % as applicable to Class-A & C fire.

All voids within each hazard shall be discharged simultaneously. Each hazard shall have an independent system, unless otherwise specifically stated.

The system engineering company should carry out the piping Isometric design and validate the same with a hydraulic flow calculation generated by using the agent's design software. Appropriate fill density to be arrived at based on the same.

426

The system shall be so designed that a fire condition in any one protected area shall actuate automatically the total flooding of clean agent in that area independently. The entire system shall incorporate inter-alia detection, audible and visual alarms, actuation and extinguishing.

Clean Agent Supply System

The extinguishing agent shall be UL/FM FK-5-1-12 gas with physical properties conforming to NFPA Standard 2001 or ISO 14520 standard.

Each zone to be protected by the Total Flooding System shall be capable of being flooded independently of the other.

Re-Filling and Maintenance

In case of any leakage or accidental discharge of the agent, it should be possible to re-fill the cylinders in India itself. The contractor should indicate the source of re-filling and the time that will be taken for re-filling and replacement.

Storage of Extinguishing Agent

The agent shall be stored in liquid form at ambient temperature in high-pressure seamless cylinder containers designed for the purpose. The cylinder shall be high pressure, seamless, flat type and concave bottom.

As per the regulations of the Chief Controller of Explosive (CCE) Nagpur, any system which has a working pressure above 19 bar will require the use of seamless cylinders that have been duly approved by the CCE, Nagpur.

Each cylinder shall have its own built-in pressure safety relief valves and shall also be equipped with pressure gauge to indicate the pressure of its content.

The cylinders shall be super-pressurized with dry Nitrogen to 42 Bar. The cylinder shall be capable of withstanding any temperature between -30 Deg C and 70 Deg C.

All cylinders shall be distinctly and permanently marked with the quantity of agent contained, the empty cylinder weight, the pressurization pressure and the zones they are protecting.

All cylinders shall be adequately mounted and supported in a manner to facilitate individual servicing or content weighing.

Cylinders installed shall be of the same size where possible and the manifold shall be provided with non-return or check valves to prevent back flow when any cylinder is being removed for

427

maintenance.

Piping and Fittings

All piping shall be Schedule 40 seamless pipes complying with grade B and all fitting shall be of ASTM A-105.

Discharge Nozzles

Discharge nozzles shall be manufactured in corrosion resistant material and shall be positioned in a manner to effect a uniform concentration at the shortest time after discharge. Each nozzle shall be able to cover a height of 5m effectively.

Detection

The detection part shall consist of the installation of an adequate number of smoke detectors strategically positioned for the early detection of smoke, and/or products of combustion. All detectors shall be ULI, FMRC and/or LPC or Vds approved. The detection of smoke by such detectors shall immediately set of an audible alarm at the control unit and visual indication of the zone where smoke has been detected.

The detectors in each zone protected by Total Flooding System shall be wired on a DUAL RISK CIRCUIT basis. The actuation of one detector in a zone shall not be sufficient to cause the discharge of the agent. The agent shall only be actuated to discharge on activation of another adjacent detector in that zone.

The signal from the second activated detector within the particular zone protected by the Total Flooding System shall after a time delay activate the agent release device of the Total Flooding System. The time-delay circuit shall have a delay period adjustable from zero second to 180 seconds.

Documentation:

The system engineering company should prepare & submit along with the bid documents, the piping Isometric drawing and support the same with a hydraulic flow calculation generated by using the agent's design software. The calculations shall validate the fill density assumed by the bidder.

The bidder shall submit copies of the datasheets of the hardware used in the system. The bidder shall also submit copy of CCE approval letter for the cylinder proposed to be used.

The bidder shall also submit calculations to evidence the qty of agent considered for the system.

428

The successful vendor must submit, along with the supply invoice, a certificate of authenticity, for the agent from the system engineering company duly checked and verified by distributor.

The system engineering company should provide, as part of the handing over, the As-built drawings and operation & maintenance manual.

System: FK-5-1-12 gas based Fire Suppression system

• Design & execution need to be complied with NFPA & local safety standards. Company to mention the listing or approval for overall system & equipment’s.

• Company to submit all type of certificates for design, equipment’s & accessories. • Company to submit the OEM cylinder ref & gas filling certificates. • Company to submit the necessary certificates for Cylinders, accessories. • Company to deploy trained & skilled personnel for the execution of job. • Company to highlight any system limitations, Pre requirements from Client. Company to

submit solution write up etc., along with quote. • Company to submit system schematic with operation philosophy considering future

build. • Company to confirm the pressure at nozzle while release of Gas. • Pressure gauges & pressure switches at individual cylinders • Low Pressure alarm of cylinder bank / cylinders to be integrated in FAS / BMS • The Manual operation (Release / Abort), alert indications with signage’s on the door of

protected rooms will be provided & controlled by Company's control panel. • In FSS Control Panel- Complete with Gas Release Module, Timer 0-120 sec delay config,

Gas Release Indication, Abort Switch, Manual Release Switch, Auto - Manual Selector Switch with Stand-by Battery & Battery Charger, additional I/O’s for integration & controls of warning sign, hooters etc.

• The Manual release & Abort switches to install in red color powder coated MS make enclosure, front with glass, hammer, key lock etc

• Company to clean the internal piping through pressurized nitrogen gas before final testing of system. Also need to carried out Pipe & Manifold test leak & strengthening test.

• Room Integrity Test for all the protected rooms, same need to be considered in quote • The Fire suppression solution/ system life requires min 10 years. Company to provide

support/maintenance for entire system min 10 years post commissioning. • In warranty & AMC period Company to follow SEBI SLA for response & resolution time. • Refilling of fire suppression gas shall be cover under contract for Top ups. • If the gas is released because of manual error by Company the refilling will be done by

Company (total cost), any gas release due to fire/incident the refilling will be done at extra cost on PO confirmation. Cylinder refilling include transportation (if needed) & Company to make system operational within max 10 days working

• Before handover the system to Operations, OEM visit is must to verify the execution quality of overall system.

429

• Training to Operations team preferred from OEM or his representative

CHAPTER –XI

AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEM 1. AUDIO/VIDEO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BOARD ROOM

1. System Description Advanced video wall displays featuring deeper visual impact and thinner bezel to bezel width of 1.7mm, should be Extreme-narrow bezel (B-to-B 1.7mm) anything above this will not be acceptable, UHD resolution for virtually seamless, life-like viewing experience should be Daisy Chainable through use of DisplayPort (DP) 1.2 or HDMI port, eliminating the need for graphic cards

Highly reliable displays designed for 24/7 operation, with simple, easy-to-use special wall mount

1 Approved Make/Model No

Samsung UM55H-E

Approved alternate Makes Samsung

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 2x2 videowall display with supporting wall mount bracket

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

430

Yes/No/Bett er

1

Display Size - Diagonal (inches)

55"

2 Resolution 1920x1080

3 Aspect Ratio 16:09

4

Viewing Angle in degrees (Horizontal/Vertic al)

178/178

5 Panel Technology PVA

6

Native Contrast Ratio (Typ.)

4000:1 or Higher

7

Response Time (G to G)

8ms or less

8

Brightness (Typ.) in Nits

Minimum 500nits or better

9

Bezel Width (Bezel-Bezel)

Minimum 1.7mm or better

10 Haze Minimum 25% or Better

11 Display Colour Minimum 16.7 M

12

Input Ports Analog D-SUB 15 Pin X1 , DVI-D(HDMI Common) X 1,DP 1.2 X 1 HDMI(2.0) X 2 no.s, Component (CVBS Common)

13 Output Ports DP1.2 (Loop In-Out)

14 External Control RS232C(in) thru stereo jack, RJ45(LAN)

15

Power Consumption (Typical)

130W or lesser

16

Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)

Less than 0.5W

17 Operation Hour 24 X 7

18 Energy Saving Off/Low/Medium/High 19 Eco Sensor OFF/ON

20

Temperature Sensor

Yes

21

Communication port

RS232C(in) thru stereo jack, RJ45(LAN)

22

Power Supply Requirement

AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz

431

23

Features

ACM Support (Advanced Color Management), Auto Source Switching & Recovery, Temperature Sensor, RS232C/RJ45, Plug and Play (DDC2B), Video Wall(15x15(OSD), Video Wall Daisy Chain(10x10), Image Rotation, Button Lock, DP 1.2 Digital Daisy Chain(Supporting UHD Resolution, HDCP support),

24

EMC

FCC (USA) FCC Part 15, Subpart B class A CE (Europe) EN55022, EN55024 VCCI (Japan) V-3 (CISPR22) KCC (Korea) :KN22, KN24 BSMI (Taiwan) : CNS13438 (CISPR22) C-Tick (Australia) : AS/NZS3548 (CISPR22) CCC(China) :GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2012

25

Environmental Energy Star 6.0 or better, should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 80%

26

Wall mount bracket

MS black powder coated, wall mount bracket with mechanism to adjust the Video wall display alignment.

27

Certifications

CB (Europe); BIS(India); UL(USA); TUV (Germany) FCC (USA); CE (Europe)

3 Model No

TG 550

Approved Makes Beyerdynamic / AKG / Brahler

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Wireless handheld microphone with Diversity receiver (UHF).

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Channels Should have 12 Channel Preset or better

2 Display Should have Display on Transmitter and Receiver

3 RF Power output 30mW or Better

4 Polar Pattern Cardiod/Supercardioid or better

5

Carrier frequency range

500Mhz to 865Mhz

6

Frequency response

20Hz to 20Khz or better

7 Mute option Mute Button on Transmitter

8 Operation hours Battery Operation time Minimum 8hr

9 Battery charging Should have Charging Contact in Transmitter

10

switching bandwidth

Minimum 40Mhz Or better

432

4

Model No

TG 558

Approved Makes Beyerdynamic / AKG / Brahler

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Wireless Lapel microphone with Diversity receiver (UHF).

Sr.n o

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Complianc e

Yes/No/Be tter

1 Channels Should have 12 Channel Preset or better

2 Display Should have Display on Transmitter and Receiver

3 RF Power output 30mW or Better

4 Polar Pattern Cardioid/Omnidirectional or better

5

Carrier frequency range

500Mhz to 865Mhz

6

Frequency response

20Hz to 20Khz or better

7 Mute option Mute Button on Transmitter

8 Operation hours Battery Operation time Minimum 8hr

9 Battery charging Should have Charging Contact in Transmitter

10 switching bandwidth

Minimum 40Mhz Or better

6 Model No GS728TX

Approved Makes Netgear, HP, Cisco

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 24-port 1000base-T Gigabit Smart Switch with 4x 10G Uplinks

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Physical Specifications

24 # 10/100/1000 Base-T auto-sensing ports

02 # 100/1000/10GBASE-T RJ45 Ports

02 # 1000/10GBASE-X SFP+ ports

1 USB Storage (image, config,log files)

2 CPU/Memory CPU: 800 MHz

RAM: 512 MB

Packet buffer memory: 32 MB

Flash: 128 MB

3 Performance Specification

Stack height: 6 switches

433

Bandwidth: 128 Gbps non-blocking

Throughput: 95.2 Mpps

Acoustic noise (ANSI-S10.12): 40dBA

MTBF 278,559 hours

8 Priority queues

Priority queuing: Weighted Round Robin (WRR)

MAC Address database size: 16,000 media access control (MAC) addresses

VLAN: 256, 4K VLAN ID

1,024 Multicast Groups

32 Static Routes

15 Routed VLANs

512 ARP Cache entries

8K DHCP snooping bindings

100 shared for MAC, IP and IPv6 ACLs

Jumbo frame: 9K

4 Network Security and Traffic

IEEE 802.3ad - LAGs

# of LAGs / # of members in each LAG: 26 LAGs with max 8 members in each LAG

Stacking Interface: 10G SFP+ or 10GBASE-T copper (both at 10G speeds only)

Max. number of switches within a stack: up to 6

Stacking bandwidth: 40G bi-directional

IPv6 management

Web-based graphical user interface (GUI)

Dual Software (firmware) image & Configuration File

SNMP v3 with multiple IP addresses

Operating Temperature: 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Altitude: 10,000 ft (3,000 m) maximum

Storage Temperature: – 4° to 158°F (–20° to 70°C)

Humidity: 95% maximum relative humidity, non-condensing

5 Certification CE mark, commercial; FCC Part 15 Class A, VCCI Class A, Class A EN 55022 (CISPR 22) Class A

CCC CSA certified (CSA 22.2 #950)

UL listed (UL 1950)/cUL IEC 950/EN 60950

6 Warranty Lifetime Hardware Warranty

Replacement with New products. No repair & refurbish products

Lifetime Chat support for technical assistance.

10 Approved Make/Model No

Crestron AM-200 + AM-USB-WIFI-I

434

Approved Makes Crestron / Barco / WolfVision

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of surface mounted wireless Presentation system, should support secure wired and wireless presentation from laptops, smartphones, and tablet devices using the existing Wi-Fi® wireless network for BYOD connectivity.

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1

HDMI Input

Should have 1xHDMI input or more, supporting resolution up to 1920x1080@60Hz (HD 1080p60), 4:4:4, 36bit color depth

2

HDMI Output

Should have 1xHDMI output supporting single HD or 1920x1080@60Hz (HD 1080p60), 4:4:4, 36bit color depth

3 Audio Should support 2 channel LPCM,

4 Bit Rate 1.4 Mbps typical

5

Ethernet

Should support 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, DHCP, SSL, TLS, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol), IEEE 802.1x, Active Directory authentication, HTTPS web browser setup and, 802.3af and 802.3at Type 1 compliant

6

USB Host

Should have USB 2.0 to enable integration with wireless lighting keypad and occupancy sensor via optional integration kit

7

Control Port

Should have 1xBidirectional RS232, 1xIR/one-way Serial port for controlling the connected display

8

Compatibility

Should be compatible with Apple iOS, Android, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, macOS, Chrome OS

9

Mirroring

Should support Miracast and Airplay, or a suitable external unit to be provided.

10

Software

Should not need any software to be installed for laptops having windows 10 or above,

11

Room Scheduling

Should have built-in native integration with Microsoft® Office 365® and Outlook® calendaring applications via Microsoft Exchange, for Displaying space availability, meeting details, and other messaging on the connected room display, or a suitable external room scheduling system should be provided.

12

Digital Signage

Should have native integration with content management application for digital signage which allows the wireless presentation unit to show content on a connected display when a space is not in use, or a suitable external digital signage unit should be provided.

13

Whiteboard Integration

Should have integration with Whiteboard Capture System, which allows whiteboard capture to be a part of the available sources for a user to interact with allowing for in-room and remote collaboration.

14

Environmental

Should be able to withstand temperature up to 40° C and Humidity 90% RH (non-condensing),

435

15 Power Should support Power over Ethernet,

16

Enclosure

Should be Metal, black finish, with (2) integral mounting flanges, vented sides

11

Model No

SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH

Approved Makes Crestron / BOSE / Revel

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 2way surface mounted speaker, should have quick ball mounting system to orient and aim the speaker in virtually any position.

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1

Woofer & Tweeter

8" polypropylene woofer with damped cloth surround for tight, controlled bass and clear midrange, Horn-loaded titanium dome tweeter for crisp, clear high end and enhanced pattern control

2

Crossover Frequency

2Khz

3 Impedance 8 Ohms

4

Transformer Tap

3.75W/7.5W/15W/30W/60W at 70V; 7.5W/15W/30W/60W at 100V

5

Frequency Response

80 Hz to 16 kHz (±3 dB)

6 Frequency Range 60 Hz to 18 kHz (-10 dB)

7 Power Handling 200 Watts Program (8 Ohms)

8 Sensitivity 91.5 dB @ 1W/1m

9

Environmental

Should be able to withstand temperature from -19° to 49° C and Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

10

Weatherproof

Should be IPx4 rated per IEC 60529; withstand water splashing from any direction

11

Positioning

Yaw (horizontal) ±30°, Pitch (vertical) ±30°, Roll (rotation) 360°

12 Color White Textured

13

Construction

Should be ABS Plastic, white Textured finish, should have powder coated Aluminum grille, and should be paintable

436

12

Model No

SAROS IC6T-W-T-EACH

Approved Makes Crestron / BOSE / Revel

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 2way in-ceiling speaker, White Textured

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

Woofer & Tweeter

8" polypropylene woofer with damped cloth surround for tight, controlled bass and clear midrange, Horn-loaded titanium dome tweeter for crisp, clear high end and enhanced pattern control

Crossover Frequency

2.5Khz

Impedance 8 Ohms

Transformer Tap

3.75W/7.5W/15W/30W/60W at 70V; 7.5W/15W/30W/60W at 100V

Frequency Response

50 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB)

Frequency Range 40 Hz to 20 kHz (-10 dB)

Power Handling 125Watt program (8 Ohms)

Sensitivity 88.5 dB @ 1W/1m

Coverage 100° conical (nominal)

Bezel

"Zero-bezel" frameless grille for a clean, contemporary appearance

Environmental

Should be able to withstand temperature from -19° to 49° C and Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Color White Textured

Construction

Should be Zinc-plated steel, plenum-rated, Glass fiber reinforced ABS plastic baffle, UL 94V-0 flame rated, magnetically held zero-bezel frameless grille and should be paintable

13 Model No AMPI-8150

Approved Makes Crestron / PowerSoft / Labgruppen

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of multi-channel Class D technology Amplifier

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, SSL, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol)

2

Connectors

Input: (8) 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks; Balanced line-level audio inputs; Maximum Input Level: 12.3 Vrms, +24 dBu; Input Impedance: 20k Ohms balanced

437

SPEAKER OUTPUTS 1 – 8 - (8) 2-pin 7.62 mm reversed gender 20A detachable terminal blocks; Power amplifier outputs;

Wire Size: Terminal should accept up to 12 AWG (3.31 mm²)

3

Operating mode

Mono: Each channel should be configurable to operate independently from all other channels;

Stereo: Adjacent channels (1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8) should be configurable to operate as a stereo pair with linked control settings;

Bridged: Adjacent channels (1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8) should be configurable to operate as an 8 Ohm bridged mono output;

4/8Ω Mode: Each channel should be configurable for 4/8 Ohm “Lo-Z” output;

100V Mode : Each channel should be configurable for 100 Volt “Hi-Z” output

4 Output Power 150 Watts per channel @ 4-8 Ohms or 70 Volts nominal;

300 Watts per bridged pair of channels @ 8 Ohms

5 Frequency Response

20 Hz to 20 kHz ±0.5 dB at 1 Watt, 4-8 Ohms;

200 Hz to 20 kHz ±0.5 dB at 1 Watt, 70/100 Volts

6 THD+N <0.1% @ 1 kHz at 3 dB below clipping

7 S/N Ratio >103 dBA, 20 Hz to 20 kHz

8

Fault Protection

Over Current: Protects each channel individually against an excessive speaker load or shorted speaker line;

DC Offset: Protects each channel and speaker line against DC voltages sensed at each output;

Over Temperature: Protects the amplifier power supply and each channel against overheating due to poor ventilation or excessive temperature;

Under Voltage: Protects the amplifier if the internal power supply voltage is below tolerance due to excessive output levels or insufficient line voltage;

Note: All faults should report to the control system and indicate on the front panel and in the software tool.

9 Output Relay Disconnects the speaker line at each output under fault conditions, and during startup and shutdown

10 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 5° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

11 Power 2 Amps @ 220-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz

12

Chassis Metal, variable-speed fan-cooled, vented sides, should be Freestanding or 1 RU 19-inch rack-mountable with front rack ears and rear support brackets provided

438

14 Model No DSP-1283

Approved Makes Crestron / Biamp / Bose

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of digital signal processor,

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto- discovery, full/half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, SSL, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol)

2

AEC Performance

Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz;

THD+N: 0.001%, +4 dBu input;

Convergence Rate: 100 dB/s; Tail Length: 300 ms

3

Mic/line Inputs

12x 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks;

Balanced microphone/line-level audio inputs;

Input Level: +24 dBu maximum;

Gain Range: 66 dB; Input Impedance: 10k Ohms balanced;

Phantom Power: +48 Volts DC, 12 mA, software enabled/disabled per channel

4

Output

(8) 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks;

Balanced/unbalanced line-level audio outputs;

Output Level: +24 dBu maximum;

Output Impedance: 150 Ohms balanced

5 USB 1xUSB Type B female; USB 2.0 device port for USB Audio

2 channels in & out or 8 channels in & out, 16 or 24-bit, 48 kHz

6

DANTE, (Pri and Sec)

2x8-pin RJ45 female; 1000Base-T Primary and secondary Dante network port

32 channels in, 32 channels out, at up to 24-bit 48 kHz

7 VOIP 1x8-pin RJ45 female; 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet SIP VoIP network port

8 Phone 1xRJ11 female; POTS analog telephone port

9 Frequency Response

20 Hz to 20 kHz ±0.5 dB

10 Dynamic Range 110 dB, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, 0 dB gain

11 Crosstalk -85 dB, 1 kHz, +4 dBu input, channel to channel;

-75 dB, 1 kHz, -50 dBu input, channel to channel

12 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 5° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

13 Power 1.8 Amps @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz

14 Chassis Metal, fan-cooled, vented sides, should be Freestanding or 1

439

RU 19-inch rack-mountable with rack ears provided

15 Model No DM-TX-4K-302-C

Approved Makes Crestron / Extron / AMX

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of low-profile surface mounted 4K twisted pair HDBaseT Transmitter

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Video switcher 3x1 auto-switching, auto-detecting multi-format digital/analog inputs; (2xHDMI and 1xVGA with audio)

2

Video Input Type HDMI w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible); VGA/RGB (RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB); component (YPbPr); S-Video (Y/C); composite (NTSC, PAL)

3

Video Output

Twisted pair & HDBaseT w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K; HDMI w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K (1xtwisted pair HDBaseT and 1xHDMI monitor out for connecting local display

4 Audio Switcher 3x1 with auto-detecting digital/analog inputs and analog audio breakaway

5 Audio Input Type HDMI (Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible), analog stereo

6 Audio output Twisted pair & HDBaseT, HDMI

7

Audio formats

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby® TrueHD, Dolby Atmos®, DTS®, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio™, LPCM up to 8 channels, and Stereo 2-channel

8 Controls device control via CEC, IR, RS-232, and Ethernet

9 HDMI HDCP 2.2, EDID, CEC

10 Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP

11 Cable Length Supports cable lengths up to 330 ft (100 m) for all resolutions up to UHD and 4K using certified cable

12

Feature

Should Detect and report detailed video and audio input information Should Perform automatic AV signal format management via EDID Should support USB HID signal extension for a local keyboard/mouse or computer

13 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

14

Power Should have power adapter supplied and should be capable of being powered by an HDBaseT PoE+ PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment)

440

15

Chassis Metal, black finish, with (2) integral mounting flanges; vented top, front, and bottom, Freestanding, surface mount, or attach to a single rack rail

16 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

16 Model No DM-TX-4K-100-C-1G-B-T + FP-G1-B-T

Approved Makes Crestron / Extron / AMX

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Wall plate 4K twisted pair HDBaseT Transmitter with black textured wallplate

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Video Input Type Min 1x HDMI w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible)

2 Video Output 1x Twisted pair & HDBaseT w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K

3 Audio Switcher Min 3x1 with auto-detecting digital/analog inputs and analog audio breakaway

4 Audio Input Type HDMI (Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible)

5 Audio output Twisted pair & HDBaseT, HDMI

6

Audio formats Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby® TrueHD, Dolby Atmos®, DTS®, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio™, LPCM up to 8 channels

7 Controls device control via CEC, 1xIR, 1x bidirectional RS-232

8 HDMI HDCP 2.2, EDID, CEC

9 Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto- discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP

10 Cable Length Supports cable lengths up to 330 ft (100 m) for all resolutions up to UHD and 4K using certified cable

11

Feature

Should Detect and report detailed video and audio input information Should Perform automatic AV signal format management via EDID Should support USB HID signal extension for a local keyboard/mouse or computer

12 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

13

Power Should have power adapter supplied and should be capable of being powered by an HDBaseT PoE PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment)

14 Chassis Metal, Black finish with white polycarbonate label overlay,

441

Mounts in a 1-gang 3-1/2" deep electrical box

15 Faceplate Should have matching faceplate provided along with the wall plate.

16 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

17 Model No FT2-1400-MECH-B

Approved Makes Crestron / Extron / AMX

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Table mount, Modular, Multi-signal type solution box,

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Feature

One-Touch Mechanical button disengages the corresponding closed lid to actuate retraction. All connections should be clearly visible, organized, and accessible at the surface Should have choice of pass-through cables, gravity cable retractors, keystone connector plates, and international AC power outlets

2 Module Slots 18 (2 rows of 9, each row oriented toward opposing sides)

3 Cable pass- Through Should accommodate up to 18 cable pass-through plate modules or 18 keystone plate modules

4 Cable Retractors Should accommodates up to 8 gravity cable retractors

5

Utility Shelves

Should accommodate up to 2 under-table utility shelves attached to the left and/or right side, or to the front and/or rear side, beneath the table.

6

Chassis

Metal, black finish, with two mechanically retracting lids, magnetically attached bezel, Flush tabletop mount, fastened by four swiveling dogs, 1-3/4 in (44 mm) maximum surface thickness, 6-3/4 in (171 mm) deep x 10 in (254 mm) wide cutout

7

Accessories

Should have gravity cable retractors 1x 4K 18Gbps HDMI to HDMI; 1x VGA,1xAudio, 1x USB A-B, 1xUSBC to HDMI, and 2xUniversal 220Vpower socket, 2x USB charger,

8 Note The retractors should be gravity based; spring or any other mechanism will not be accepted.

18 Model No CBL-HD-6

442

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 06ft Male to Male high-speed Category 2 HDMI® patchcable

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Length 06 feet

2 Connector type Male to Male HDMI

3 Signal support Supports 4K60 4:4:4 video, 18 Gbps bandwidth

4 Construction 24k gold-plated 19-pin Type A connectors, High-flex CL3- rated jacket, RoHS compliant

19 Model No CBL-HD-DVI-6

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 06ft Male to Male high-speed Category 2 HDMI® to DVI Interface patchcable.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Length 06 feet

2 Connector type Male to Male HDMI to DVI

3 Feature Converts HDMI to DVI, or DVI to HDMI

4 Signal support Supports Full HD 1080p, 2K, and 4K video

5 Construction 24k gold-plated HDMI Type A and DVI-D connectors, High- flex CL3-rated jacket, RoHS compliant

20 Model No USB-EXT-DM-LOCAL

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of surface mounted USB over Ethernet transmitter with Routing, should be capable of communicating over an ethernet network or point-to point over Cat5e.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 USB Device supported

USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible including isochronous devices

2

Link Speed Up to 480 Mbps, dependent upon network speed and quality, over 100Base-T or 1000Base-T, Layer 2 network swtich

3 Signal support Supports 4K60 4:4:4 video, 18 Gbps bandwidth

4 Connectors 1x USB Type B female with cable provided; 1x 8-pin RJ45

443

female to Connect to an Ethernet network or directly to a receiver.

5

Features

Provides reliable, high-speed USB signal extension for any USB 1.1 or 2.0 device across an Ethernet network or point- to-point over CAT5e, Should support length up to 330ft in point to point mode. Transmitter and receiver should be able to pair and unpair via the central control system. Should be capable of connecting to the USB host computer, media server, game console, annotator, codec, etc.

6 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 50°C, Humidity 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)

7 Power USB powered via the USB host interface

8 Construction Black anodized aluminum, Freestanding or surface mount should be supplied with mounting bracket

21 Model No USB-EXT-DM-REMOTE

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of surface mounted USB over Ethernet receiver with Routing, should be capable of communicating over an ethernet network or point-to point over Cat5e.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 USB Device supported

USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible including isochronous devices

2

Link Speed

Up to 480 Mbps, dependent upon network speed and quality, over 100Base-T or 1000Base-T, Layer 2 network switch

3 Signal support Supports 4K60 4:4:4 video, 18 Gbps bandwidth

4

Connectors 4x USB Type A female; 1x 8-pin RJ45 female to Connect to an Ethernet network or directly to a Transmitter. Should support Power: 500 mA @ 5 Volts DC per USB port

5

Features

Provides reliable, high-speed USB signal extension for any USB 1.1 or 2.0 device across an Ethernet network or point- to-point over CAT5e, Should support length upto 330ft in point to point mode. Transmitter and receiver should be able to pair and unpair via the central control system. Should be capable of connecting to USB mice, keyboards, whiteboards, game controllers, cameras, mobile devices, printers, flash drives, hard drives, hubs, etc.

444

6 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 50°C, Humidity 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)

7 Power 0.75 Amps @ 24 Volts DC; 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz power pack, power supply should be included

8 Construction Black anodized aluminum, Freestanding or surface mount should be supplied with mounting bracket

22 Model No HD-CONV-USB-100

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of HD video to USB 3.0 converter, should convert DVI or HDMI video to USB 3.0

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Input signal type DVI, HDMI, supported interface cable to be provided.

2 Output signal type USB 3.0

3 Input/output Resolutions

1280x720@30/60Hz (720p), 1920x1080@30/60Hz (1080p)

4

input/ Output Connectors

1x DVI-I female; Single-link DVI input; Supports HDMI via a interface cable. 1x USB Type B female; USB 3.0 device port; 3 ft cable included

5

Feature

Should be capable of converting HD video to USB 3.0 Should captures uncompressed 720p or 1080p HD video at up to 60 frames per second and convert it pixel-for-pixel to USB 3.0

6 Power USB powered

7 Construction Black anodized aluminum, Freestanding or surface mount

should be supplied with mounting bracket

23 Model No DM-MD16X16-CPU3-RPS

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable card based 16x16 matrix Switcher chassis with redundant power supply.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Video switcher 16x16 digital matrix, modular input/output cards

2

Video Input Type Configurable via modular plug-in cards supporting HDMI® (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible), DVI, 3G-SDI,

445

RGB/VGA, component, S-Video, composite (NTSC & PAL), Twistted pair & HDBaseT®, Fiber, & H.264 streaming, All input cards should include HDMI pass-through outputs

3

Video Output Configurable via modular plug-in cards supporting HDMI (DVI compatible), Twistted pair & HDBaseT, Fiber & H.264 streaming.

4

Audio Switcher 16x16 digital multichannel audio-follow-video matrix switching, plus independent 16x16 stereo matrix for audio breakaway

5

Audio Input Type

Configurable via modular plug-in cards supporting HDMI (Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible), 3G-SDI, analog (stereo 2-channel), SPDIF, Twistted Pair & HDBaseT, Fiber & H.264 streaming

6

Audio output

Configurable via modular plug-in cards supporting HDMI, analog (stereo 2-channel), Twistted pair & HDBaseT, Fiber & H.264 streaming

7 Backplane Ultra-high min 12.5 Gbps backplane data rate

8 HDCP HDCP 2.2 compliant via compatible 4K input and output cards

9

Ethernet

100/1000 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto- discovery, full/half duplex, industry-standard TCP/IP stack, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, SSL, TLS, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol), FIPS 140-2 compliant encryption, IEEE 802.1X, SNMP, IPv4 or IPv6, Active Directory authentication, IIS v.6.0 Web Server, SMTP e-mail client, Private Network Mode

10

Cable Length

Distributes Full HD 1080p, Ultra HD, and 4K signals over CAT type twisted pair cable at distances up to 330 ft (100 m) via Twistted pair ® and HDBaseT Distributes 1080p and WUXGA signals over multimode fiber at distances up to 1000 ft (300 m) via certified Fiber cable Distributes 1080p and WUXGA signals over single-mode fiber at distances up to 7.5 miles (12 km) via SM Fiber cable Allows streaming of 1080p signals over an IP network with no distance limitations

11

Feature

Should Detect and report detailed video and audio input information Should Perform automatic AV signal format management via EDID Should support USB HID signal extension for a local keyboard/mouse or computer

Private Network Mode — requires just one IP address for the complete matrix switching system

446

Chassis should support 4K60 4:4:4 cards.

12 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

13 Power 6-2.5 Amps @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, 440 Watts typical

14

Chassis Metal with black finish, with polycarbonate label overlay, vented sides, fan-cooled, Freestanding or 7 RU 19-inch rack- mountable rack ears should be supplied.

15 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

24 Model No DM-PSU-16-PLUS

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 16port PoDM+ power supply for 16x16 Matrix Switcher, should provide centralized power source for up to sixteen PoDM, PoDM+, HDBaseT® PoE, or HDBaseT PoE+ powered devices.

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance

Yes/No/Bett er

1

Connectors

16x 8-pin RJ45 connectors, female; PoDM+ PSE ports (HDBaseT PoE+ compatible); Each port supplies up to 30 Watts to power a single PoDM, PoDM+, HDBaseT PoE, or HDBaseT PoE+ PD (Powered Device)

2

Feature

Provides a centralized power source for up to 16 HDBaseT® PoE+, PoDM+, PoDM and HDBaseT PoE powered devices. Each port should support upto 30watts of power to connected device

3 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

4 Power 6.6-2.7 Amps @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz

5

Construction

Metal, black finish, fan-cooled, vented sides, Metal, black finish with polycarbonate label overlay, Freestanding or 1 RU 19-inch rack-mountable (adhesive feet and rack ears included)

25 Model No DMC-4KZ-C

447

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable input card for 16x16 matrix Switcher chassis, should provide a single 4K Twistted pair input or more.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Input signal type Twistted pair & HDBaseT w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support

2 Output Signal Types HDMI w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support (DVI compatible)

3 Copy Protection HDCP 2.2

4 Max Resolutions supported

UHD and 4K video resolutions up to 4K60 4:4:4

5 Audio Input Type Twistted pair & HDBaseT

6 Audio output HDMI (multichannel pass-through from input), analog stereo (2-channel pass-through from input)

7

Audio Formats supported

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS®, DTS ES, DTS 96/24, DTS HD High Res, DTS HD Master Audio, DTS:X, LPCM up to 8 channels, Stereo 2-channel

8

Connector

1x HDMI Type A with HDMI digital video/audio output 1x 8-pin RJ45 connector female, shielded; Twistted pair input, HDBaseT compliant; 1x 8-pin RJ45 connectors, female; PoE/Power over Twistted pair input; Connects to an IEEE 802.3af or 802.3at compliant power over Twisted pair or PoE PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment) to enable Power overTwistted pair or HDBaseT PoE power sourcing 2x RCA connectors, female; Unbalanced stereo line-level audio output;

9 Cable Length 4096x2160 DCI 4K @ 330ft via specialized Twistted pair cable.

10

Feature

Should be HDBaseT® compatible — Enables direct connection to other HDBaseT certified equipment Should have an HDMI® output for pass-through of the input signal Should allow de-embedding of stereo 2-channel audio signals Should enable device control via CEC Should support power over Twistted pair and HDBaseT PoE

11 Power Powered via the 16x16 chassis

12 Chassis Plug-in card, occupies 1x switcher input card slot, includes metal faceplate w/black finish

13 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter

448

and receiver should be from the same OEM.

26 Model No DMC-4KZ-HD

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable input card for 16x16 matrix Switcher chassis, should provide a single 4K HDMI® input or more.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Input signal type HDMI w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible)

2 Output Signal Types HDMI w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support (DVI compatible)

3 Copy Protection HDCP 2.2

4 Max Resolutions supported

UHD and 4K video resolutions up to 4K60 4:4:4

5 Audio Input Type HDMI (Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible)

6 Audio output HDMI (multichannel pass-through from input), analog stereo (2-channel pass-through from input)

7

Audio Formats supported

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS®, DTS ES, DTS 96/24, DTS HD High Res, DTS HD Master Audio, DTS:X, LPCM up to 8 channels, Stereo 2-channel

8

Connector

1x HDMI Type A with HDMI digital video/audio output 1x HDMI Type A connector, female; HDMI digital video/audio input (DVI and Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible) 1x USB Type B connector, female; USB device port for connection to the USB host interface of a computer or other USB HID-compliant host 2x RCA connectors, female; Unbalanced stereo line-level audio output;

9

Feature

Should have an HDMI® output for pass-through of the input signal Should allow de-embedding of stereo 2-channel audio signals Should enable device control via CEC

10 Power Powered via the 16x16 chassis

11 Chassis Plug-in card, occupies 1x switcher input card slot, includes metal faceplate w/black finish

12 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

449

27 Model No DMC-4KZ-HDO

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable output card for 16x16 matrix Switcher chassis, Should Provide two or more independent 4K HDMI® outputs.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Scalers

2x 4K60 4:4:4 video scalers with motion-adaptive deinterlacer, intelligent frame rate conversion, Deep Color support, HDR10 support, content-adaptive noise reduction, widescreen format selection (zoom, stretch, maintain aspect ratio, or 1:1), video wall processing up to 8 wide x 8 high using multiple cards

2 Output Signal Types HDMI with HDR10, Deep Color, and 4K60 4:4:4 support

3 Copy Protection HDCP 2.2

4 Max Resolutions supported

UHD and 4K video resolutions up to 4K60 4:4:4

5 Audio output HDMI, analog stereo

6

Audio Formats supported

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS®, DTS ES, DTS 96/24, DTS HD High Res, DTS HD Master Audio, DTS:X, LPCM up to 8 channels, Stereo 2-channel

7

Connector

2x 19-pin Type A connectors, female; HDMI digital video/audio outputs (DVI compatible) 2x 5-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks; Balanced/unbalanced stereo line-level audio outputs;

8

Feature

Should support video wall configurations of up to 8 x 8 Should Provide an analog stereo audio output for each HDMI output Should de-embed stereo 2-channel audio signal Should enable device control via CEC

9 Scan Should allow adjustable overscan or underscan up to 7.5%

10 3D -2D conversion Should Provide automatic 3D to 2D signal conversion

11 Power Powered via the 16x16 chassis

12 Chassis Plug-in card, occupies 1x switcher output card slot, includes metal faceplate w/black finish

13 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

450

28 Model No DMC-4KZ-CO-HD

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable output card for 16x16 matrix switcher chassis, should Provide two or more independent 4K Twistted pair outputs

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Output Signal Types Twistted pair & HDBaseT w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support; HDMI w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support (DVI compatible)

2 Copy Protection HDCP 2.2

3 Max Resolutions supported

UHD and 4K video resolutions up to 4K60 4:4:4

4 Audio output Twistted pair, HDBaseT, HDMI

5 Audio Formats supported

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS®, DTS ES, DTS 96/24, DTS HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X, LPCM up to 8 channels

6

Connector

2x 8-pin RJ45 connectors, female, shielded; Twistted pair outputs, HDBaseT compliant 2x 8pin RJ 45 connector for power supply port (HDBaseT PoE compatible) for remote powering of the receiver. 1x HDMI Type A connector, female; HDMI digital video/audio output (DVI compatible) mirror output of one of the Twistted pair outpur port

7 Cable Length 4096x2160 DCI 4K @ 330ft via specialized twistted pair cable.

8

Feature

Should be HDBaseT® compatible — Enables direct connection to other HDBaseT certified equipment Should have an HDMI® mirror output of one of the Twistted pair output port

Should enable HDMI and HDBaseT device control via CEC Shoud support power over twistted pair and HDBaseT PoE

9 Power Powered via the 16x16 chassis

10 Chassis Plug-in card, occupies 1x switcher output card slot, includes metal faceplate w/black finish

11 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter

and receiver should be from the same OEM.

29 Model No DMC-STRO

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable output card for 16x16 matrix switcher chassis, should Provide single or more streaming output.

451

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Streaming Video format

H.264 (MPEG-4 part 10 AVC)

2 streaming Protocols RTP, RTSP, SDP

3 Streaming Resolutions

360p60, 480p30, 480p60, 720p10, 720p15, 720p30, 720p60, 1080p10, 1080p15, 1080p30

4 Streaming Audio Formats

AAC stereo

5 Communication Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps, auto-switching, auto- negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP

6

Connector

1x 8-pin RJ45 female; 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet port; Provides a dedicated LAN connection for streaming only, used in lieu of streaming via the switcher's main LAN port

7

Feature

Should support streaming at resolutions up to 1080p30 and bitrates up to 25 Mbps Should have Built-in scaler to ensure fast, trouble-free switching between disparate sources Should support PIP windowing, audio mixing, and single- frame switching between any two inputs

Should allow streaming via the switchers LAN or a dedicated Content LAN

8 Power Powered via the 16x16 chassis

9 Chassis Plug-in card, occupies 1x switcher output card slot, includes metal faceplate w/black finish

10 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

30 Model No DM-RMC-4KZ-SCALER-C

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of low-profile surface mounted Twisted pair HDBaseT receiver with Scaler

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Scaler

4K60 4:4:4 video scaler with motion-adaptive deinterlacer, intelligent frame rate conversion, Deep Color support, HDR10 support, content-adaptive noise reduction, widescreen format selection (zoom, stretch, maintain aspect ratio, or 1:1), video wall processing up to 8 wide x 8 high

452

2 Video Input signal Type

Twistted pair, HDBaseT, and HDMI with HDR10, Deep Color, and 4K60 4:4:4 support

3 Video Output signal Type

HDMI with HDR10, Deep Color, and 4K60 4:4:4 support

4 Video Resolutions UHD and 4K video resolutions up to 4K60 4:4:4, HDR (High Dynamic Range) video (HDR10) and Deep Color

5 Copy Protection HDCP 2.2

6 Audio Input signal Type

Twistted pair, HDBaseT, HDMI

7 Audio Output signal Type

HDMI, analog stereo

8

Audio Formats supported

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby® TrueHD, Dolby Atmos®, DTS®, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio™, LPCM up to 8 channels, Stereo 2-channel

9 Ethernet Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps, auto-switching, auto- negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP

10

RS-232 2-way device control and monitoring up to 115.2k baud with hardware and software handshaking (via control system)

11 IR/Serial 1-way device control via infrared up to 1.1 MHz or serial TTL/RS-232 (0-5 Volts) up to 19.2k baud (via control system)

12

Connector

1x 5-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; Bidirectional RS-232 port 1x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; Comprises 2x IR/Serial ports 1x 5-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; Balanced/unbalanced stereo line-level audio output 1x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; 2x normally open, isolated relays 1x 8-pin RJ45 female, shielded; Twistted pair input, HDBaseT standard compliant; PoE+ compatible 1x 19-pin Type A connector, female; HDMI digital video/audio input (DVI and Dual-Mode DisplayPort™ compatible) 1x 19-pin Type A connector, female; HDMI digital video/audio output (DVI compatible) 1x 8-pin RJ-45 female, shielded; 100Base-TX Ethernet port

13 Cable Length support all resolutions up to UHD and 4K usings pecialized twistted pair cable.

453

14

Feature

Should have one local HDMI® input should allow de-embedding of stereo 2-channel audio signals Should support video wall configurations of up to 8 x 8 Should Provide a 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN connection Should enable device control via CEC, IR, RS-232, and Ethernet Should automatically pass 3D video without scaling to 3D capable displays

15 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

16 Power Powered via the central Twistted pair power supply unit.

17

Chassis Metal, black finish, with (2) integral mounting flanges, vented top and sides, Freestanding, surface mount, or attachment to a single rack rail

18 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

31 Model No PRO3

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of rack mountable Automation control Processor

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Control Engine

Crestron 3-Series; real-time, preemptive multi- threaded/multitasking kernel; Transaction-Safe Extended FAT file system; supports up to 10 simultaneously running programs

2

Communication

Control Processor shall support direct communication with the following devices: 1) Connected Ethernet devices. 2) Devices connected to built-in control ports. 3) Proprietary control network devices. 4) BACnet IP devices. 5) Control processors of same type.

3

BACnet/IP

Should support BACnet/IP and a license for 50 BACnet object should be provided with the control system. Further the contro system should be upgradeable to support a maximum of 2000 BACnet IP objects, or an external BACnet over IP gateway should be provided.

4 RAM 1GB

5 Flash Built in- 4 GB, USB or MMC slot - up to 32 GB

454

6 External Storage 1 TB supported

7

Ethernet

Two built-in 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet ports. 1) Primary LAN port: Isolated WAN connection 2) Control Subnet Port: The control processor shall automatically discover and assign IP addresses to compatible devices. Subnet port shall support Isolation Mode

8

Connectors

8x IR/1way serial output port, 2-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks 2x bidirectional RS-422 or RS 485, 5-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks 4x bidirectional RS-232, 3-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks. 8x I/O port, 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block. 8x Relay port, 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block. 1x 4wire Twistted pair communication network, 4-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block

9 Memory Slot Should support MMC capacity of 32 GB Maximum

10

Feature

Should support C#, symbol based, and drag-and-drop programming environments Should support Hardware level security using 802.1X authentication Should be IPv6 ready Should have IEC 61000-4-5 Installation Class 4 surge immunity on COM, Versiport, and network connections Should have Front panel color LCD display for setup and diagnostics Should have Native BACnet™/IP support with license for 50 BACnet objects Should have Programmable event scheduling with astronomical time clock

11 Control expansion slots

Should have built-in 3-Series control card expansion slots

12 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 5° to 45° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

13 Power 2.4 Amps @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz

14

Chassis

Metal, black finish, vented top and sides, Extruded metal, black finish, polycarbonate label overlay, Freestanding or 2 RU 19-inch rack-mountable (adhesive feet and rack ears included)

455

32 Model No C3IO-16

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Modular field configurable 16 Versiports for expansion of control system ports

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Connectors 2x 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising (16) “Versiport” digital input/output or analog input ports (referenced to GND);

2 Feature Each I/O port can function as a 0-10V analog input, a digital logic sensing input, or a digital logic output.

3 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 5° to 45° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

4 Power Powered via the control system chassis

5 Construction Occupies one control card expansion slot of a Control System® or Card Interface

33 Model No TS-1542-TILT-B-S

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 15" Touch panel with Tabletop mounting kit.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Touch Panel Display TFT active Matrix color LCD, 15.6-inch diagonal, Aspect Ratio 16:9 Full HD, projected capacitive, 10-point multi-touch capable

2 Resolution 1920 x 1080 pixels

3 Brightness 400 nits (cd/m²)

4 Contrast 800:1 typical

5

Graphic Engine

Smart Graphics, local and remote annotation, multi-language web browser, multi-language on-screen keyboard, screensaver, fully scalable dual streaming video windowing, setup and diagnostics via web browser or onscreen UI

6 RAM 2 GB DDR3-SDRAM

7 Flash 4 GB

8

Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto- discovery, full/half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, SSL, TLS, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol), IEEE 802.1X,

456

SNMP, IPv4 or IPv6, Active Directory authentication, HTTPS web browser setup, IEEE 802.3 at Type 2 compliant

9 Streaming Decoder Video format

H.264 (MPEG-4 part 10 AVC), MJPEG

10 Streaming Decoder Audio Formats

AAC stereo

11 Streaming Decoder bitrate and Resolution

Bitrate Up to 25 Mbps, Resolution Up to 1080p60

12 Viewing Angle ±80° horizontal, +80°/−65° vertical

13

Feature

Should have On-Screen Keyboard Should have Voice Recognition Should have Web Browser should have Built-in microphone and speakers Should support Rava SIP Intercom Should support Audio feedback Should Dual-window HD streaming video display

14 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 45° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

15

Power

Input: 1.3 Amps @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, Output: ≥1 Amp @ 24 Volts DC Power supply included. Or can be powered via IEEE 802.3 at Type 2 Class 4 (25.5 W) PoE+ Powered Device

16 Tabletop Mounting Should include tabletop base with 23° to 45° adjustable tilt

17

Chassis

Aluminum housing with dark gray or black finish (custom colors and graphics also available), edge-to-edge glass with black or white surround, Mounts to a flat wall surface over a 2-gang electrical box, horizontally-oriented 1-gang electrical box, 1-gang UK electrical box (BS 4662), 1-gang European electrical box (DIN 49073), or rough cut-out up to 2 in. H x 3 in. W (50 mm H x 75 mm W) using wall mount kit provided; VESA 100 x 100 mm mountable with wall mount kit removed

18 Standards & Certification

UL Listed for US & Canada, IC, CE, FCC Part 15 Class B digital device

19 Note The Touch panel and the Control system should be of the

same OEM

34 Model No DIN-DALI-2

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

457

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Din-Rail mountable DALI interface

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 DALI Control Interfaces with 2 independent DALI® loops,

2 Max number of Ballasts

Controls up to 128 DALI ballasts

3

Feature

Should have override input Should have integrated DALI power supply Should have two DALI Channel

4

Connector

1x 4wire Twistted pair network communication port, 2x 2-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; for override mode 1x 8-wire RJ45 with 2 LED indicators; 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet port; 802.3af Power over Ethernet compliant; 2x 2-pin 5mm terminal blocks; Each set of (+) and (-) is paralleled with the adjacent like ports on the same channel; Each channel controls a single DALI loop (up to 64 ballasts);

5 Wire Gauge supported

28 AWG to 12 AWG

6

Power

IEEE 802.3af (802.3at Type 1) Class 0 PoE Powered Device; 9 watts (0.375 Amps @ 24 Volts DC), DALI POWER switch set to "INT" 2 Watts (0.08 Amps @ 24 Volts DC), DALI POWER switch set to "EXT"

7 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

8

Construction

Light gray polycarbonate housing with polycarbonate label overlay, UL94 V-0 rated, 35mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount, DIN 43880 form factor for enclosures with 45mm front panel cutout, occupies 9 DIN module spaces (162mm)

9 Standards & Certification

UL Listed, CE, CEC Title 24 2013 Compliant

35 Model No DIN-8SW8-I

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of DIN Rail mountable, High Voltage Relay array,

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

458

Yes/No/Better

1 Switch Array 8 channels

2

Max per channel 10 Amps incandescent, 5 Amps fluorescent, 0.5 HP at 120 to 240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz; 5 Amps at 30 Volts DC; 16 Amps Resistive

3 Max per Module 80 Amps incandescent, 40 Amps fluorescent at 120 to 240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz

4 Load Types Incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low- voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent, motor

5

Connector

8x Sets of (2) captive screw terminals; Isolated Class 1 SPST relay switch circuits 1 – 8; 9x 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks (inputs 1-8, common); Rated for 12-24 Volts DC; 2x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; for Twistted pair communication port 2x 2-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; Sensing input for external low-voltage contact closure; to activate override mode.

6 Wire Gauge supported

Maximum Wire Size: 12 AWG (2.5 mm²)

7

Feature

Should have 8 channels of power switching with separate input power for each channel Should have 8 voltage-driven isolated digital input should support for 120 to 240 Volt 50/60 Hz lighting and motor loads should have Override input Should be Programmable via central control system.

8 Power 5.4 Watts (0.23 Amps at 24 Volts DC) via 4 wire Twistted pair communication port.

9 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

10

Construction

Light gray polycarbonate housing with polycarbonate label overlay, UL94 V-0 rated, 35 mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount, DIN 43880 form factor for enclosures with 45 mm front panel cutout, occupies 9 DIN module spaces (162 mm)

36 Model No DIN-PWS60

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of DIN Rail Mountable 4wire network power supply module

459

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Power Output Rating 60 Watts (2.5 Amps) at 24 Volts DC, regulated, limited power source

2 Ripple/ Noise <1%

3 Efficiency 85%

4

Connector

1x Set of (3) captive screw terminals; Line power input and ground; 6x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; 4wire Twistted pair power output ports with data pass- through;

5 Wire Gauge supported

14 AWG (1.5 mm²)

6

Feature

Should provide 60-Watt output power Should have six 4wire Twistted pair detachable terminal blocks for power ports Should pass data unaffected

7 Power 200 VA (2 Amps maximum) at 100-277 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, 70 Watts at full rated output

8 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

9

Construction

Light gray polycarbonate housing with polycarbonate label overlay, UL 94 V-0 rated, 35 mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount, DIN 43880 form factor for enclosures with 45 mm front panel cutout, occupies 6 DIN module spaces (108 mm)

37 Model No HZ-KPCN-B

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

Supplying, installation, testing and commissioning of keypad, should be single gang

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Keypad Buttons Five configurable button positions arranged in one column

2

Backlight/Feedback

One RGB LED backlight per each of five button positions, which illuminates behind the button engraving; adjustable brightness and RGB color mixing allows any color or pure white across the full range of CCT values, with separate settings for button feedback and day/night modes; adjustable blink feedback

3 Light Sensor Photosensor with adjustable sensitivity, detects the

460

ambient light level to activate day or night mode

4

Connector

1x 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; Comprises (2) digital/analog input ports (referenced to GND) 2x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks (paralleled); slave port with hardwire parallel pass-through

5 Wire Gauge supported

6

Feature

Should support custom backlit laser-etched engraving Should support Multicolor RGB LED backlighting Should support Auto-dimming day/night backlight modes Should support Button feedback via backlight brightness or color change Should be gang able up to four across. Should be Fully programmable via a central control system Should be able to support external sensor

7 Power 2 Watts (83 mA @ 24 Volts DC) via 4wire Twistted pair communication port

8 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 45° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

9 Construction Plastic; textured black buttons, should include faceplate;

10 Standards & Certification

IC, FCC Part 15 Class B digital device

38 Model No GLS-ODT-C-CN

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of ceiling mounted Dual-Technology Occupancy Sensor with 360-degree coverage pattern

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Sensor Technology Passive infrared and ultrasonic (40 kHz)

2 Ambient Light Recognition

Built-in photosensor (0-1000 lux)

3 Coverage Area 2,000 sq. ft

4 Coverage Pattern 360 degrees

5

Feature

Should have walk thru mode Should have grace occupancy Feature Should have Built-in ambient light recognition Should have External photosensor input

6 Power 1 Watt via 4 wire twistted pair communication port.

7 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

461

8

Construction

Plastic, white, Mounts to a 4” (102 mm) octagon box or ~3- 1/2” (88 mm) diameter hole created by provided cutout template; Includes mounting screws and integral toggle clamps

9 Standards & Certification

UL60730-1, FCC, CE, C-Tick, IC, Plenum Rated, California Title 24 Code

39 Model No DM-CBL-ULTRA-NP-SP1000

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Ultra high-bandwidth Cat7a shielded twisted pair, Non- plenum cable

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Mutual Capacitance ≤5.6 nF / 100 m @ 1 kHz

2 Delay Skew ≤25 ns / 100 m

3

Pair to Ground Capacitance Unbalance

≤1200 pF / km

4 Shielded Twisted Pairs Conductors

22 AWG solid bare copper

5 Shield (per pair) AL foil

6 spool length 1000ft

7

Feature

Should be Ultra high-bandwidth CAT7a shield twisted pair (S/FTP) cable Should enable lossless distribution of 4K and Ultra HD video signals at distances of 330 ft via Twistted pair or HDBaseT® should exceed HDMI® specifications requiring less than one pixel error per billion should be Qualified for use with 10-Gigabit Ethernet data networks Should be Type CMR rated for riser and other non-plenum installation

8 Overall Shield Tinned copper braid (>50% coverage)

9 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from -20° to 60° C

10 Construction S/FTP with four individually shielded twisted pairs, overall shield, and overall jacket

11 Standards & Certification

Type CMR, NEC Article 800, UL Subject 444, cUL, IEC 61156-5, ISO/IEC 11801, Category 7a

462

40 Model No DM-8G-CONN-WG-100

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of High bandwidth, shielded RJ45 connector with plastic boot

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better 1 Connector Pack 100 units

2 Connector Type shielded RJ45 connector with plastic boot

3

Feature

Should be High bandwidth, shielded RJ45 connector Should have “Wire guide” design for fast, easy termination Should have strain relief to facilitate termination of the shield and assures a rugged overall construction

4 Construction Plastic with metal shielding

5 Standards & Certification

RoHS and UL compliant

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONFERENCE ROOM

3 Model No FT2-700-ELEC-B

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Table mount, Modular, Multi-signal type solution box,

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

463

Yes/No/Better

1

Feature

One-Touch Mechanical button disengages the corresponding closed lid to actuate retraction. All connections should be clearly visible, organized, and accessible at the surface Should have choice of pass-through cables, gravity cable retractors, keystone connector plates, and international AC power outlets

2 Module Slots 12 (2 rows of 6)

3 Cable pass- Through Should accommodate up to 12 cable pass-through plate modules or 12 keystone plate modules

4 Cable Retractors Should accommodates up to 6 gravity cable retractors

5

Utility Shelves Should accommodate up to 2 under-table utility shelves attached to the left and/or right side, or to the front and/or rear side, beneath the table.

6

Chassis

Metal, black finish, Metal, black or alloy finish, mechanically retracting lid, magnetically attached bezel, Flush tabletop mount, fastened by four swiveling dogs, 1- 3/4 in (44 mm) maximum surface thickness, 5-3/4 in (146 mm) deep x 7-1/8 in (181 mm)

7

Accessories

Should have gravity cable retractors 1x 4K 18Gbps HDMI to HDMI; 1x VGA,1xAudio, 1xUSBC to HDMI, and 2xUniversal 220Vpower socket, 2x USB charger,

8 Note The retractors should be gravity based; spring or any other mechanism will not be accepted.

4 Model No CCS-UC-1-AV-PLUS + AM-USB-WIFI-I

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Tabletop open platform UC Video Conference System w/Professional Camera, with built-in speaker and microphone and Wireless presntation gateway, with room scheduling, and Digital signage.

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Touch Screen 7 inch (178 mm) diagonal capacitive multi-touch TFT active matrix color LCD, 1280 x 800 pixels

2

Speaker Full range speaker, 11 Watts amplifier power, 95 dB SPL at 0.5 m maximum output, 90 Hz to 22 kHz frequency response

3 Microphone 360° quad mic array, 20 ft (6 m) typical pickup range, should support two optional mic pods

4 Camera Resolution HD 1080p @ 30 fps

464

5 Camera Field of View

150° diagonal, 120° horizontal, 90° vertical

6 Content Input Resolution

Up to 1920x1080@60Hz (1080p60)

7

Display Output Resolutions

280x720@50Hz (720p50), 1280x720@60Hz (720p60), 1920x1080@50Hz (1080p50), 1920x1080@60Hz (1080p60)

8

Ethernet

2x 10/100 Mbps; enterprise grade security and management including IEEE 802.1X, Active Directory authentication, LDAP, Kerberos, SSL, TLS, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol), SRTP, digest access authentication, password login, HTTPS secure provisioning, primary port is IEEE 802.3at Type 2 PoE+ compliant

9

SIP VoIP

Open SIP, SDP, IETF SIP (RFC 3261 & companion RFCs), DTMF tone generation (RFC 2833 & in-band), low-delay audio packet transmission, adaptive jitter buffers, packet loss concealment

10

Connectors

1x 3.5 mm TRS mini phone jack, supports 2-way display device control and monitoring 1x 3.5 mm TS mini phone jack, supports 1-way display device control via infrared 1xHDMI Type A input port for content source; supports HDCP 1.4, EDID, CEC 1x HDMI Type A output port for display device; supports HDCP 1.4, EDID, CEC 1x USB 2.0 micro Type B device port; supports UAC, UVC, and HID for plug & play compatible audio/speakerphone interface and camera video output to a USB host computer running web conferencing or other software 2x USB 2.0 Type A host port, supports UVC for camera video input

11

Feature

Should have built-in Wireless presentation gate with Miracast Should be able to pair with mobile phone over Bluetooth and transfer live call. Should natively support Skype for Business VoIP Should have Room scheduling feature with Microsoft® Exchange Should have built-in Digital signage app All these features should be natively available or a suitable external system to be provided.

12 Power PoE+: IEEE 802.3at Type 2, Class 4 (25.5 W) PoE+ Powered Device;

465

24VDC: 24 Volts DC via external 100-240V AC, 50/60 Hz power pack, power pack should be included

5 Model No CBL-HD-6

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 06ft Male to Male high-speed Category 2 HDMI® patchcable

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Length 06 feet

2 Connector type Male to Male HDMI

3 Signal support Supports 4K60 4:4:4 video, 18 Gbps bandwidth

4 Construction 24k gold-plated 19-pin Type A connectors, High-flex CL3- rated jacket, RoHS compliant

6 Model No CBL-HD-20

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 20ft Male to Male high-speed Category 2 HDMI® patchcable

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Length 20 feet

2 Connector type Male to Male HDMI

3 Signal support Supports 4K60 4:4:4 video, 18 Gbps bandwidth

4 Construction 24k gold-plated 19-pin Type A connectors, High-flex CL3- rated jacket, RoHS compliant

7 Model No HD-TX-301-C-E

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of low-profile surface mounted 4K twisted pair Transmitter

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Video switcher 3x1 manual or auto-switching, audio-follow-video (2xHDMI and 1xVGA with audio)

2

Video Input Type HDMI w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible), VGA/RGB (RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB), component (YPbPr)

466

3 Audio Input Type HDMI (Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible), analog stereo

4

Audio formats

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby® TrueHD, Dolby Atmos®, DTS®, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio™, LPCM up to 8 channels, and Stereo 2-channel

5 Controls should Pass CEC and EDID signals

6 Copy Protection HDCP 1.4

7 Cable Length Supports 4K and UHD at up to 130 ft (40 m) using certified cable

8

Feature

Should Handle 3D video and Deep Color Should Pass CEC and EDID signals Should allow control system integration when paired with a compatible switcher receiver

9 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

10 Power Input: 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz; Output: 1.25 Amps @ 24 Volts DC; Should have power adapter supplied

11

Chassis

Metal, black finish, with (2) integral mounting flanges; vented sides, Freestanding, surface mount, or attach to a single rack rail

12 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

8 Model No HD-RX-4K-510-C-E

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of low-profile surface mounted 4K Multiformat 5x1 AV Switch and Receiver

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Video switcher 5x1 auto-switching or manual, audio-follows-video

2 Video Input Type 3x Twistted Pair Input, 2x HDMI Input

3 Video Output Type 1x HDMI Output

4

Scaler

4K video scaler with motion-adaptive deinterlacing, intelligent frame rate conversion, Deep Color support, content-adaptive noise reduction, 3:2/2:2 pull-down detection and recovery

5 Audio Mixer 6x2 audio mixer

6

Audio Inputs

2x stereo 2-channel LINE inputs, 2x mono 1-channel MIC inputs, 1x mono 1-channel AUX input, 1x stereo 2-channel LPCM audio extracted from the selected HDMI or DM Lite input source

467

7 Audio outputs 1x mirrored AUX 1, SPEAKER, and HDMI mixer output, stereo 2-channel, 1x AUX 2 output, stereo 2-channel

8 Phantom power Phantom power +48 VDC, 12 mA, enable or disable per channel

9 Amplifier Output power

2x 25 W RMS per channel @ 8 ohms, 4 ohms tolerant

10 Copy Protection HDCP 2.2

11

Connector

L/R, LINE INPUT ----- 2x 5-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks MIC INPUT ---- 2x 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks AUX INPUT ----- 2x 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block HDMI INPUT ------ x HDMI Type A connectors, female; HDMI digital video/audio inputs; DVI and Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible Twistted pair INPUT ---- 3x 8-pin RJ-45 connectors, female, shielded; L/R, AUX OUT ----- 2x 5-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks HDMI OUTPUT ----- 1x HDMI Type A connector, female; HDMI digital video/audio output; DVI compatible Ethernet ----- 1x 8-pin RJ-45 connector, female; 100BASE- TX/1000BASE-T Ethernet port SPEAKER OUTPUT-----2x 2-pin 7.62 mm reversed gender 20 A detachable terminal blocks I/O ports ---- 2x 2-pin detachable terminal blocks RLY ---- 2x 2-pin detachable terminal blocks IR ---- 1x 2-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block COM ----- 1x 5-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; Bidirectional RS-232 port; Supports RS-232 up to 115.2k baud with hardware and software handshaking via a control system.

12 Cable Length Supports 4K and UHD at up to 130 ft (40 m) using certified cable

13

Feature

Should have Automatic switching of inputs Should have EDID management Should have HDCP management including HDCP 2.2 support Should have Built-in web interface for easy configuration and monitoring Should have Built-in amplifier with 2x 25 W per channel for 4- or 8-ohm stereo speakers

14 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40°C, Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

15 Power 100-240V - 2.0A 50/60 Hz, IEC 60320 C14 mains power inlet,

468

Mates with removable power cord

16 Chassis Metal, black finish, vented sides, 2 mounting flanges attached

17 Note The matrix switcher, Input and Output cards, Transmitter and receiver should be from the same OEM.

9 Model No HD-DA2-4KZ-E

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 1:2 HDMI® Distribution Amplifier w/4K60 4:4:4 & HDR Support

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Input Signal Type HDMI w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 support (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible)

2 Output Signal Type HDMI w/HDR10, Deep Color, 3D, & 4K60 4:4:4 (DVI compatible)

3 Copy Protection Selectable for HDCP 2.2, HDCP 1.4, or HDCP disabled

4 Audio Input HDMI (Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible)

5 Audio Output HDMI

6

Audio Formats

Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS®, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS HD High Res, DTS HD Master Audio, DTS:X, LPCM up to 8 channels

7

Feature

Should Splits one HDMI® source to two outputs Should be Fully compatible with HD 1080p, UHD 4K, and DCI 4K sources and displays Should be able to Handle 3D video and Deep Color Should have Selectable handling of HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 1.4 Should have Input and output video presence indication

8

Connector

Input ------ 1xHDMI Type A connector, female; HDMI digital video/audio input; (DVI & Dual-Mode DisplayPort compatible) Output ------- x HDMI Type A connectors, female; HDMI digital video/audio outputs; (DVI compatible)

9 Power Input: 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz; Output: 0.75 Amps @ 24 Volts DC; power pack should be included

10 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

11 Construction Metal, black finish, with 2x integral mounting flanges, Freestanding, surface mount, or attach to a single rack rail

12 Standards & Certification

CE, IC, FCC part 15 Class B digital device

469

10 Model No RMC3

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of low-profile surface mounted Automation control Processor with PoE power adapter

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1

Control Engine

Crestron 3-Series; real-time, preemptive multi- threaded/multitasking kernel; Transaction-Safe Extended FAT file system; upgradable to support up to 10 simultaneously running programs

2

Communication

Control Processor shall support direct communication with the following devices: 1) Connected Ethernet devices. 2) Devices connected to built-in control ports. 3) Proprietary control network devices. 4) BACnet IP devices. 5) Control processors of same type.

3

BACnet/IP

Should support BACnet/IP and a license for 50 BACnet object should be provided with the control system. Further the control system should be upgradeable to support a maximum of 500 BACnet IP objects, or an external BACnet over IP gateway should be provided.

4 DDR3 SDRAM 256 MB

5 Flash Built in- 4 GB

6 External Storage supports USB mass storage devices

7

Ethernet

10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto- discovery, full/half duplex, industry-standard TCP/IP stack, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, SSL, TLS, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol), FIPS 140-2 compliant encryption, IEEE 802.1X, SNMP, BACnet/IP, IPv4 or IPv6, Active Directory authentication, web server, SMTP e-mail client, IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at Type 1 compliant

8

Connectors

2x IR/1way serial output port, 2-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks 1x bidirectional RS-422 or RS 485, 5-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks 2x I/O port, 2-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block. 2x Relay port, 4-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block. 1x 3wire Twistted pair communication network, 3-pin

470

3.5mm detachable terminal block

9 Memory Slot Should support MMC capacity of 32 GB Maximum

10

Feature

Should support C#, symbol based, and drag-and-drop programming environments Should support Hardware level security using 802.1X authentication Should be IPv6 ready Should have Native BACnet™/IP support with license for 50 BACnet objects Should have Programmable event scheduling with astronomical time clock

11 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

12

Power IEEE 802.3at Type 1 (802.3af compatible) Class 0 (12.95W) PoE Powered Device, should be supplied with PoE power supply unit.

13

Chassis

IFE micro form factor, black and blue plastic, Freestanding, stackable, surface mount, or 35 mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount; occupies 8 DIN module spaces (144 mm); surface/DIN rail mounting bracket included,

11 Model No TSW-1060-NC-B-S

Approved Makes

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 10 inch. Touch Screen, with tabletop mounting kit

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Touch Panel Display 10.1 in. (257 mm) diagonal, TFT active matrix color LCD

2 Resolution 1280 x 800 pixels

3 Brightness 400 nits (cd/m²)

4 Contrast contrast 950:1

5 RAM 2 GB DDR3L

6

Ethernet

100 Mbps, auto switching, auto negotiating, auto discovery, full/half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, SSL, TLS, SSH, SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol), IEEE 802.1X, SNMP, IPv4 or IPv6, Active Directory® service authentication, HTTPS web browser setup, IEEE 802.3at compliant

471

7

Graphics Engine

Crestron Smart Graphics® software technology, multilanguage web browser, multilanguage on-screen keyboard, screensaver, single scalable streaming video window, native Sonos® app1, native room scheduling applications, native Zoom Rooms™ app, setup and diagnostics via web browser or onscreen UI

8 Streaming Decoder Video format

H.264 (MPEG-4 part 10 AVC), MJPEG

9 Streaming Decoder Audio Formats

AAC stereo

10 Streaming Decoder bitrate and Resolution

Up to 25 Mbps (20 Mbps maximum recommended), Up to 1920x1080@30fps

11 Viewing Angle ±80° horizontal, ±80° vertical

12

Feature

Should have On-Screen Keyboard Should have Web Browser Should support H.264 or MJPEG streaming video display Should support Native apps for Sonos® home sound control, Zoom Rooms™ conferencing control, Microsoft

Teams® online meeting solution, and various room

scheduling services

13 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 45° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

14 Power IEEE 802.3at Type 2 compliant PoE+ PD (Powered Device) should be supplied with PoE power supply unit.

15 Tabletop Mounting Should Provide a 38° fixed operating angle, Tabletop mounting kit to be supplied together with the touch panel

16

Chassis

Plastic, smooth black or white finish, edge-to-edge glass with black or white surround, Surface mount over a 2 or 3- gang US electrical box, 2-gang European (DIN 49073) electrical box, or 2-gang UK (BS 4662) electrical box; Lectern mount over a 2-1/5 in. H x 3-3/4 in. W (56 mm H x 96 mm W) cutout;1-3/8 in. (35 mm) minimum mounting depth;

17 Standards & Certification

UL® Listed for US & Canada, IC, CE, FCC Part 15 Class B digital device

18 Note The Touch panel and the Control system should be of the same OEM

12 Model No DIN-4DIMFLV4

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

472

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of DIN Rail mountable 0-10V Dimmer Module.

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Dimmer array 4 channels

2 Max per channel 5 Amps @ 120 to 240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz; 1150 Watts @ 230 Volts AC; 16 Amps Resistive

3 Max per Module 20 Amps @ 120 to 240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz; 4600 Watts @ 230 Volts AC;

4

Load Types

0-10 Volt fluorescent ballast or LED driver (4-wire); Maximum of 30 dimmable ballasts/drivers, Incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent, motors

5

Connector

Output -- 2x 4-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising 4x isolated dimming control outputs; Communicatin port -- 2x 4-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled;

6 Wire Guage supported

Maximum Wire Size: 12 AWG (2.5 mm²)

7

Feature

Should Provide 4 channels of 0-10 Volt dimming control Should support 120 and 220 to 240 Volt, 50/60 Hz applications Should allows switching of lighting and exhaust fans Should Include an override input Should be DIN RAIL Mountable

8 Power 4.2 Watts (0.18 Amps) @ 24 Volts DC via 4 wire twistted pair communication port.

9 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

10

Construction

Light gray polycarbonate housing with polycarbonate label overlay, UL94 V-0 rated, 35mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount, DIN 43880 form factor for enclosures with 45mm front panel cutout, occupies 9 DIN module spaces (162mm)

11 Standards & Certification

UL Listed, CE, CEC Title 24 2013 Compliant

13 Model No DIN-8SW8-I

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of DIN Rail mountable, High Voltage Relay array,

473

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Switch Array 8 channels

2

Max per channel 10 Amps incandescent, 5 Amps fluorescent, 0.5 HP at 120 to 240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz; 5 Amps at 30 Volts DC; 16 Amps Resistive

3 Max per Module 80 Amps incandescent, 40 Amps fluorescent at 120 to 240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz

4 Load Types Incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low- voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent, motor

5

Connector

8x Sets of (2) captive screw terminals; Isolated Class 1 SPST relay switch circuits 1 – 8; 9x 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks (inputs 1-8, common); Rated for 12-24 Volts DC; 2x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; for Twistted pair communication port 2x 2-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; Sensing input for external low-voltage contact closure; to activate override mode.

6 Wire Gauge supported

Maximum Wire Size: 12 AWG (2.5 mm²)

7

Feature

Should have 8 channels of power switching with separate input power for each channel Should have 8 voltage-driven isolated digital input should support for 120 to 240 Volt 50/60 Hz lighting and motor loads should have Override input Should be Programmable via central control system.

8 Power 5.4 Watts (0.23 Amps at 24 Volts DC) via 4 wire Twistted pair communication port.

9 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

10

Construction

Light gray polycarbonate housing with polycarbonate label overlay, UL94 V-0 rated, 35 mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount, DIN 43880 form factor for enclosures with 45 mm front panel cutout, occupies 9 DIN module spaces (162 mm)

14 Model No DIN-PWS60

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

474

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of DIN Rail Mountable 4wire network power supply module

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Power Output Rating 60 Watts (2.5 Amps) at 24 Volts DC, regulated, limited power source

2 Ripple/ Noise <1%

3 Efficiency 85%

4

Connector

1x Set of (3) captive screw terminals; Line power input and ground; 6x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks, paralleled; 4wire Twistted pair power output ports with data pass- through;

5 Wire Gauge supported

14 AWG (1.5 mm²)

6

Feature

Should provide 60-Watt output power Should have six 4wire Twistted pair detachable terminal blocks for power ports Should pass data unaffected

7 Power 200 VA (2 Amps maximum) at 100-277 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, 70 Watts at full rated output

8 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

9

Construction

Light gray polycarbonate housing with polycarbonate label overlay, UL 94 V-0 rated, 35 mm DIN EN 60715 rail mount, DIN 43880 form factor for enclosures with 45 mm front panel cutout, occupies 6 DIN module spaces (108 mm)

15 Model No HZ-KPCN-B

Approved Makes Crestron, B&W, Tannoy

Supplying, installation, testing and commissioning of keypad, should be single gang

Sr.no

Specification

Minimum Specification Required

Compliance Yes/No/Better

1 Keypad Buttons Five configurable button positions arranged in one column

2

Backlight/Feedback

One RGB LED backlight per each of five button positions, which illuminates behind the button engraving; adjustable brightness and RGB color mixing allows any color or pure white across the full range of CCT values, with separate settings for button feedback and day/night modes;

475

adjustable blink feedback

3 Light Sensor Photosensor with adjustable sensitivity, detects the ambient light level to activate day or night mode

4

Connector

1x 3-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal block; Comprises (2) digital/analog input ports (referenced to GND) 2x 4-pin 3.5 mm detachable terminal blocks (paralleled); slave port with hardwire parallel pass-through

5 Wire Gauge supported

6

Feature

Should support custom backlit laser-etched engraving Should support Multicolor RGB LED backlighting Should support Auto-dimming day/night backlight modes Should support Button feedback via backlight brightness or color change Should be gang able up to four across. Should be Fully programmable via a central control system Should be able to support external sensor

7 Power 2 Watts (83 mA @ 24 Volts DC) via 4wire Twistted pair communication port

8 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 45° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

9 Construction Plastic; textured black buttons, should include faceplate;

10 Standards & Certification

IC, FCC Part 15 Class B digital device

16 Model No GLS-ODT-C-CN

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of ceiling mounted Dual-Technology Occupancy Sensor with 360-degree coverage pattern

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Sensor Technology Passive infrared and ultrasonic (40 kHz)

2 Ambient Light Recognition

Built-in photosensor (0-1000 lux)

3 Coverage Area 2,000 sq. ft

4 Coverage Pattern 360 degrees

476

5

Feature

Should have walk thru mode Should have grace occupancy Feature Should have Built-in ambient light recognition Should have External photosensor input

6 Power 1 Watt via 4 wire twistted pair communication port.

7 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from 0° to 40° C and Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

8

Construction

Plastic, white, Mounts to a 4” (102 mm) octagon box or ~3- 1/2” (88 mm) diameter hole created by provided cutout template; Includes mounting screws and integral toggle clamps

9 Standards & Certification

UL60730-1, FCC, CE, C-Tick, IC, Plenum Rated, California Title 24 Code

17 Model No DM-CBL-ULTRA-PC-50

Approved Makes Crestron, Belden, Extron

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Ultra high-bandwidth Cat6a shielded twisted pair, factory crimped Patch cable

Sr.no Specification Minimum Specification Required Compliance

Yes/No/Better

1 Input to Output Resistance

200 mΩ

2 Shielded Twisted Pairs Conductors

26 AWG (0.14 mm²) 7x32 stranded tinned copper

3 Shield (per pair) AL foil

4 Length 50ft

5

Feature

Should be Fully shielded CAT6a patch cable Should have 360-degree shield coverage

Should have Low-profile, snag-resistant boot design

6 Overall Shield Tinned copper braid (>50% coverage)

7 Environmental Should be able to withstand temperature from -10° to 60° C

8 Construction S/FTP with overall shield, and overall jacket

9

Standards & Certification

ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, ISO/IEC 11801 Ed 2.2, IEEE 802.3an, IEEE 802.3af, IEEE 802.3at, ANSI/TIA 1096-A, IEC 60603-7-51, UL 1863 and CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90, IEC 60332-1, IEC 60754, IEC 61034, Anatel Resolution No.242,2000

477